Division 16 Electrical IBS

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC Division (16) Electrical work

16010
Section
Division 14 - Conveying Systems

Section 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
WORK
Part 1:
General
1 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1 02
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special

Conditions and Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B.
General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, applies to work of this
section.
C.
Its the Contractor responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of the
requirements of the above.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General Conditions

and special Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work of this
division.
B.
In case of conflict between these requirements and the general requirements of

Division 1, refer the issue to engineer for direction.
C.
Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract

requirements to the best available standards at the scale required.
D.
Light and power and system riser diagrams and schematic diagrams generally
indicate equipment connections to be used for various systems. Provide system
raceway and wiring as required for actual systems installed on this project.
Provide all work shown on diagrams whether or not it is duplicated on the plans.
E.
Specifications include incomplete sentences. Words or phrases such as "the

contractor shall," "shall be," "furnish," "provide," "a," "an," "the," and "all" have
been omitted for brevity.
F.
Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, the indication

and/or description of any item, in the Drawings of Specification or both, carries
with it the instruction to furnish and install the item complete with all
appurtenances or accessories necessary to complete any required system,
regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the
indication or description.
G. Specifications and Drawings are complimentary and are to be taken together for
a complete interpretation of the work.
H.
Drawings of necessity utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate

various items of work. Neither of these have any dimensional significance nor
do they delineate every item required for the intended installation.
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
Install the work in accordance with the diagrammatic intent expressed on the
electrical and mechanical drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions
indicated on final architectural and structural working drawings and on
equipment shop drawings.
1 03
1 04
I.
Certain details appear on the drawings, which are specific with regard to the
dimensioning and positioning of the work. These details are intended only for
the purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do not obviate field
coordination for the indicated work.
J.
Derive information as to the general construction from structural and

architectural drawings and specifications.
K.
Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and / or between drawings

and other parts of the Contractor Documents or where the interpretation of either
is in doubt, the Contractor shall obtain written clarification from the Owner's
authorized representative on such matters before commencing the Work.
PREPARATION OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

A.
The contractor's drawings shall be prepared by staff experienced in such work

and the Contractor shall submit for consultant review and approval evidence of
the suitability and number of his staff who will undertake these tasks.
B.
The construction Drawings indicate the approximate position of equipment, etc.,

and the Contractor shall allow for any minor modifications to location that may
be necessary.
COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE TESTING

A.
Should the Contractor propose that the commissioning and performance testing
be carried out by a specialist firm, full details of the capability and experience of
such firm shall be submitted to the consultant for review and approval
1 05 CONDITIONS RELATING TO SUPPLIERS
1 06
A.
Submit a detailed list of manufacturers' names and addresses for materials and
equipment proposed for the Work.
B.
Once accepted by the Consultant materials and equipment shall not be

purchased from other sources without the prior written agreement of the
consultant .
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE CONTRACT

The Contractor shall submit a supplementary proposal for an annual system
Maintenance
Contract under which the Contractor would undertake, is addition to his
obligations under this contract, to fully maintain the system in efficient working
order, including routing checks, adjustments, lubrication and replacement of
consumable spares, etc.,
The proposal shall set out the terms of the offer, the work to be carried out, the
guarantees of performance, the inclusive price for the twelve months following
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
practical Completion, and terms under which annual maintenance may be

carried out thereafter.
PART 2 - DEFINITIONS
2 01
GENERAL DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A.
The following initials, words and phrases shall have the following meanings:
EEA - Egyptian Electricity Authority.

ARENTO - Arabic Republic of Egypt National Telecommunication
Organization.
IEC
- International Electrotechnical Commission.
DIN
- German Standard Institute.
VDE
- Association of German Electrical Engineers.
BS
- British Standards.
EN
- European Standards.
NFPA
- National Fire Protection Association.
NEC
- National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
IEEE
- Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
NEMA
- National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
ICEA
- Insulated Cable Engineers Association.
INETA
- International Electrical Testing Association.
NESC
- National Electrical Safety Code.
UL
- Underwriters Laboratories.
FM
- Factory Mutual.
FIA
- Factory Insurance Association.
ANSI
- American National Standard Institute.
NECA
- National Electrical Contractors Association Standard of
Installation
OSHA
- Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
"The work"
That part of the project dependent upon or

subsequent to the statement.
The works referred to in the Specification and
which are fully shown and described in the
Contract Documents.
Directed by the Owner's authorized representative
Inspected by consultant.
Submitted to or submit to the Owner's authorized
representative
"The works"
"Directed"
"Inspected"
Submitted
or
submit
"Specificatio
n"
The description of performance requirements,

materials and workmanship contained in the
Contract Documentation.
The Wiring Regulations for Electrical Installations
within Buildings as issued by the IEE 16th
edition.
"IEE
Regula
tions"
2 02
DEFINITION OF
"APPROVAL"
"AGREEMENT",
ACCEPTANCE"
AND
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
"Agreement" Acceptance" and "Approval" shall have the following meanings:

"Agreed" or - Agreed by or agreement of the consultant in writing
"Agreement"
"Accepted" or
"Acceptance"
- Accepted or acceptance by the consultant in writing
"Approved" or
"Approval"
- Approved by or approval of the consultant in writing
"Agreement", "Acceptance" or "Approval" by or of the consultant shall have the

following limitation:
1.
when given in respect to samples of materials, workmanship or methods of

construction submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents shall not be construed as denoting any degree of satisfaction with
the materials used in, or the execution of the Works.
2.
when given in respect of drawings, documents or schemes called for by the

contract Documents or proposed by the Contractor, is only for conformance with
the design intent and information given in the Contract Documents or contained
in subsequent Instructions.
3.
when given in respect to the methods of keeping records shall mean those
methods are satisfactory.
2 03 DEFINITIONS OF TECHNICAL WORDS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A.
The definitions for words and phrased commonly associated with the design,
manufacture and site work for public health, mechanical and electrical
installations shall be those of the IEE Regulations, the IOP, plumbing Services
Design Guide, CIBSE Guides, BS, CP and associated Statutory Acts.
B.
The terminology related to the voltages stated in the Contract Documents shall
be that used in the IEE Regulations unless specifically identified by values or
descriptions are not covered by such terminology.
C.
L.V. shall be taken as meaning "Low voltage", and H.V. shall be taken as
meaning "high voltage" under the IEE Regulations.
D.
Any reference to H.V. shall be for voltages in excess of 1000V a.c. or 1500V d.c.
between conductors, or 600V a.c. or 900V, d.c. between any conductor and
earth.
E. "Systems"
Includes all necessary equipment, accessories, controls,
racks, suspension members, sheet metal supports, miscellaneous steel
members, etc.
F. "Fixing only" or Includes the unloading, getting in, unpacking, returning
fix only"
empty cases, wrappings, etc., carriage paid, stacking, safely
storing, protecting, taking from store, handling, hoisting lowering, fitting, placing
in position, fixing and connecting.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
G. "Allow"
- Means that the cost of the item will be at the sole risk and
expense of the Contractor who is given the opportunity of inserting such prices
in the Bill of Quantities as he considers relevant including overheads, profit and
establishment charges, as no subsequent claim for such items will be accepted.
H. "As Necessary" Means that the work referred to shall be carried out to the
extent and by a method consistent with good practice
I.
Words in the documents importing the singular only, also include the
plural, and vice versa where the context requires.
J.
Where any possible doubt exists as to the meaning of words or terms used in
the Contract Documents the matter shall be referred by the Contractor to the
Owner's authorized representative for clarification.
2 04 CURRENCY OF DOCUMENTS
A.
All publications referred to shall be the latest edition thereof together with any
amendments current ten days before the date of issue of contract documents.
2 05 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
A.
The Contract Documents shall be deemed to include, whether or not specifically

mentioned or shown, any materials, accessories or works as may be necessary
for the satisfactory completion of the contract Works in accordance with
accepted current practice or procedure.
B.
Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and/or between drawings and
other parts of the Contract Documents or where the interpretation of either is in
doubt, the Contractor shall obtain written clarification from the Owner's
authorized representative on such matters before commencing the work.
2 06 SYMBOLS
A.
The symbol notation for all drawings to be produced by the Contractor shall be in
accordance with applicable standards and regulations and shall be agreed by
the consultant and shown on a separate drawing.
PART 3 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS

3 01
TENDER DRAWINGS
A.
3 02
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A.
3 03
Shall mean the drawings prepared in such detail as may be necessary to

enable those tendering to interpret the design for the Works and to submit
competitive Tenders for the execution of the Works.
Shall mean the drawings contained in or forming part of the numbered

documents which constitute the Contract Documents.
TAKING DIMENSIONS FROM DRAWINGS

5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
A.
3 04
Section
The Contractor shall verify the accuracy of all dimensions abstracted from the
consultant's drawings, including verifying the accuracy by taking dimensions on
site, in the preparation of any drawings by the Contractor and before the
relevant work proceeds.
DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DRAWINGS

A.
Should any differences exist between the drawings or should there be any
discrepancy in the figures, scale or the respects, the Contractor shall refer the
same to the Owner's authorized representative for clarification before
proceeding with the work.
PART 4 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

4 01
INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A.
Shall mean the drawings, based on the Contract Drawings showing details of
the Contractor's proposals for the execution of the Works. The drawings shall
be to such scales, in such detail and with all necessary dimensions as to
enable the Work to be installed and shall indicate all pipe layouts, bends, tees
flanges, valves, connections etc., necessary for installation and also particular
installation methods to be applied in certain instances, e.g. where connecting
to existing services. These drawings shall also relate to builder's work drawings
confirming relationships to valve pits, cable intakes .. etc.
B.
In respect of drainage drawings, shall take account of the exact location and
type of sanitary ware scheduled by the consultant , and all manholes and
access points shall be shown and dimensioned to take account of walls, paving
and other adjacent permanent work.
C.
In respect of fire protection services shall include layouts of sprinkler

installations and details and location of sprinkler heads showing dimensional
co-ordination with false ceiling systems.
D.
In respect of gas installations there shall be in addition a "line diagram"

indicating the positions of all gas installation pipes, meters, meter controls,
valves or cocks, pressure test points and electrical bonding, all in accordance
with the "Gas Safety regulations" and gas authority requirements.
E.
In respect of electrical installations shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
1.
Site distribution and cable routes.
2.
General layout drawings of all plant and equipment included in the Contract.
3.
Schematics for main and sub-main distribution.
4.
Cabling and wiring connections showing cable types, sizes and loads.
5.
Trunking and cable tray routes with details of sizes, fixings, cables carried and
terminations.
6.
Conduit routes with conduit sizes, methods of installation and details of cables,
loads and terminations, and all junction and pull-in boxes
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
7.
Power distribution for lifts.
8.
Lighting layouts for normal and emergency purposes, detailing positions and
types of luminaries, switch positions and wiring connections.
9.
Fire detector and alarm positions and wiring routes with type details and
functions.
10. Earthing system with precise details of routing, conductor sizes, capacity and
connection.
11. Lightning protection system with precise details of position, routing, conductor
sizes and terminations.
12. Communication systems wiring, terminal equipment types and functions, wiring,
terminal equipment types and functions, wiring routes and details.
13. Standby generator distribution system, other power supply systems and
changeover arrangements including schematic and detailed wiring with
identification of those sections of the normal system operated from the standby
source.
4 02
BUILDER'S WORK INFORMATION DRAWINGS

A.
Shall mean the drawings and Schedules prepared to show requirements for
architectural or structural provisions necessary to facilitate the execution of the
Works and allow their integration into the project.
B.
Such drawings should include requirements for foundations, bases, lifting and
supporting structures for plant or equipment, all holes in walls, floors and ceiling
elements, provision of services requirements within voids above false ceilings or
below false floors, the integration of the services installations into the false
ceiling system and trenches, depressions, ducts, etc., in or through building and
site elements.
C.
General arrangements and floor plan

requirements shall be to a scale of 1:50.
D.
Builder's work drawings for plant rooms shall be to a scale of 1:20.
E.
In cases where preliminary builder's work and structural information has already
been given by the consultant such information shall be confirmed and amplified
as required above by the contractor (including confirmation of weights of items of
equipment, sizes of access ways, etc.,) and incorporated in his drawings.
drawings
giving
builder's
work
4 03 SHOP/FABRICATION DRAWINGS
A.
Shall mean the drawings produced for the purpose of explaining how the
components of the designed works are to be fabricated and assembled.
B.
In respect of ductwork, shall be to a scale of not less than 1:50 and shall indicate
the length of each duct section, the internal dimensions of the bare sheet steel,
dimensions of bends and fittings, location of stiffeners and supports, and shall
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
dimensionally locate the ducts in relation to the supporting or any adjacent

structure.
In addition, the location and size of all equipment, grilles, diffusers, access panels,
dampers, fire dampers, test points, penetrations and associated fittings for
automatic controls and instrumentation, etc., shall be shown.
C.
4 04
In respect of pre-fabricated piping, shall be to a scale of not less than 1:50 and
shall indicate tube sizes, pipe length between fittings, location and size of valves
and fittings, anchors, guides, supports and brackets, cleaning eyes and drain
points, etc. Drawings shall relate the location of the pipe to the supporting and
adjacent building structure.
MANUFACTURERS' AND EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS

A.
Shall mean the drawings of any item of plant or equipment produced by a

manufacturer or equipment supplier indicating principle dimensions, fixings,
connections and all other relevant details.
B.
Where manufactures' original drawings are used they shall be specific to the
relevant Works and all references to optional features, other machines of a
range, etc., shall be deleted or the original drawings redrawn to comply with this
clause.
C.
Each drawing shall be stamped CERTIFIED by the Manufacturer which shall

mean that:
1.
The drawing represents accurately the item concerned with correct dimensions
and all connections precisely located;
2.
The item conforms to the specific description given in the Documents, quoting
the reference numbers from the Contract Document;
3.
The item is shown complete and entire as it will be supplied for the works and no
extraneous or alternative parts are indicated;
D.
Individual and layout drawings from electrical component manufacturers shall

include wiring internal and external to panels and controls.
E.
All wiring diagrams shall indicate clearly that wiring which forms part of or is
connected to the equipment as delivered and shall include the following
minimum information to enable the site connections and wiring to be completed:
1.
maximum electrical loading for each power cable
2.
cable termination facilities
3.
cable identification and all terminal numbers
4.
inter-connections between different items.
4 05 CONTROLS DRAWINGS
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
A.
Shall mean the drawings and schematics of plant and equipment showing the
control layout with each item uniquely identified, and including a brief description
of the controls operation and any associated interlocking.
B.
In respect of electric controls shall mean logic sequence and wiring diagrams
showing the connections of all items of electric control equipment and
interlocking on the plant control schematics.
4 06 SWITCHGEAR, STARTER AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION

PANEL DRAWINGS
A.
4 07
Shall mean the drawings showing the general arrangement, the construction, the
external and internal layout of panels, and wiring diagrams comprising internal
wiring, schematics of interlocking and external wiring diagrams, for the complete
systems in the panels. The drawings shall also indicate all pipe work and
capillary connections from the panels to external equipment.
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Before commencing work, provide complete set of black and white prints of
Contract Drawings.
B.
Maintain prints in field office and permanently record, in colored pencil, on such
prints, at time of occurrence, deviations from Contract Drawings.
C.
Dimension underground utilities from permanent identifiable structural points.
D.
Make drawings available for the Architects periodic inspection and submit for
review with As-Built Drawings.
4 08 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A.
Before commencing work, provide complete set of lithotracings of Contract

Drawings on 4 mill mylar or transparencies and upon completion of works
contractor shall submit 2 sets on CD, computer reproducible as built drawings of
electrical works and prints.
B.
Neatly revise to conform with Record Drawings.
C.
Conspicuously indicate major deviations by specific reference to shop drawings

and provide an accurate and complete record of the work as installed.
D.
Upon completion of work, submit signed and certified lithotracings as As-Built

and referenced Shop Drawings, along with marked up prints of Record
Drawings, to the Architect of acceptance.
PART 5 - DRAWINGS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR

5 01 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Prepare and submit before the relevant work proceeds, all drawings necessary
to install the Works. Drawings shall be based on the Contract Drawings and
must be fully coordinated with the architectural works and other disciplines and
shall take into account any modifications either to the building or the installation
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
which may have taken place, incorporating details of the actual items of plant
and equipment to be installed.
B.
Prepare and submit all necessary Schedules of Equipment and devices with the
relevant drawings.
C.
Prepare and submit schedule of light fittings and luminaires.
D.
The effect of any authorize variation or site instruction shall be carried through
and shown on all applicable drawings by the Contractor. The cost of so doing
shall be reimbursed to the Contractor as part of the cost of the variation of the
instruction.
5 02 SIGNATURE ON CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

A.
Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be signed by the Contractor to

confirm that:
1.
The work shown thereon has been coordinated both in sequence of installation
and in physical relationship to the work of others.
2.
The drawing does not contain any variations other than those authorized by the
Owner's authorized representative instruction.
3.
On re-submittal, all alterations made since initial submission have been clearly
annotated on the drawing and listed separately down the right hand side of the
drawing.
PART 6 - INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR

6 01 GENERAL
A.
Submit to the Owner's authorized representative to a program agreed with the

Owner's authorized representative comprehensively detailed drawings showing
all builders work required for the Works.
B.
Provide the Owner's authorized representative with such information as the

Owner's authorized representative may require on any matter related to or
affecting the Works.
6 02 INFORMATION LISTED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A.
Submit to the Owner's authorized representative all items of information required

by the Contract Documents at the proper time so as not to impede the progress
of the works.
6 03 INFORMATION FOR MANUALS

A.
Where the Contractor sublets the preparation of the Operation and Maintenance
Manual to a specialist firm, the Contractor shall provide or obtain all necessary
information in respect thereof.
6 04 MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL LITERATURE

10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
A.
Section
Manufacturers' technical literature submitted for examination or for inclusion in

the Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be prepared and assembled
specifically for the project and shall exclude any irrelevant matter. Each item
shall be clearly identified on the record Drawings and cross-referenced to the
contract Documents.
6 05 MANUFACTURERS' GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES

A.
All manufacturers' guarantees and warranties on plant, equipment, etc., shall be

valid at least up to the end of the Defects Liability Period, or for at least twelve
months after Practical Completion of the total project, whichever is the longer
period.
B.
All equipment normally guaranteed by the manufacturers for a period of time

which goes beyond the period defined above shall be held to remain under
guarantee for the maximum period.
C.
Provide two copies of all such guarantees, one of which shall be included in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
6 06 PLANT ROOM SCHEDULES AND SCHEMATICS

A.
In addition to the provision of Record Drawings, provide the following at a size to

be easily readable and frame under glass and hang in each plant room and
other appropriate location as directed by the Owner's authorized representative:
1.
Circuit diagrams consisting of schematic drawings of circuit layouts showing

identification and duties of equipment, numbers and locations, control and
circuits.
2.
Valve schedules in the form of typewritten sheets showing the number, type,
location, application, service and symbol, and normal operating position of each
valve installed.
3.
Control schematics.
4.
Mechanical and electrical plant items:
5.
First aid instructions for treatment of persons after electric shock.
6.
All other items required under Statutory or other regulations.
7.
Location of main incoming gas valve serving gas meter.
8.
Location of sprinkler fire main control valve.
9.
Emergency operating procedures and telephone numbers for emergency callout service applicable to any system or item of plant.
6 07 RELAY COORDINATION
A.
Submit to the Engineer a relay and C.B. coordination study.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
The Current-time characteristics must be plotted on a log-log papers showing that the
choice of the C.B. settings are correct for coordination.
6 08 SHORT CIRCUIT AND VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATION

A.
Submit a comprehensive short circuit study as well as voltage drop calculation

based on the actual impedance values of the electrical components such as
supply short circuit level at the 22KV (shall not be less than 500 MVA),
transformer per unit impedance, bus bars and cables impedances ...etc.
PART 7 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A.
Provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals (which shall incorporate

Instruction Manuals on detailed requirements) covering and including the
information detailed below:
7 01 SCOPE OF SYSTEMS
A.
A full technical description of each of the systems installed, written to ensure that
the Owner's staff fully understand the scope and facilities provided.
B.
A technical description of the mode of operation of all systems.
7 02 INSTALLATION RECORD
A.
A photo reduction of all Record Drawings to A1 size together with an index.
B.
Diagrammatic drawings of each system

equipment, valves, etc.
C.
Legend for all color-coded services.
D.
Schedules of plant, equipment, valves, etc., by system, stating their locations

within the building, duties and performance figures, together with anticipated life
expectancies.
E.
A unique code for each item of plant, equipment, valves, etc., installed number
cross-referenced to the record and diagrammatic drawings and Schedules. The
name, address and telephone number of the manufacturer of every item of
equipment and plant shall be listed together with catalogue list numbers.
F.
Manufacturers' literature including detailed drawings, electrical circuit details,

and printed operating and maintenance instructions for all items of plant and
equipment supplied under this contract.
indicating principal items of plant,
G. A copy of all test certificates including those for all plant, equipment, valves, etc.,
used in the installations, including (but not limited to) electrical circuit tests,
corrosion testes, type testes, works tests, start-up and commissioning tests,
including those for air and water balancing.
H. A copy of all manufacturers' guarantees.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
7 03 SYSTEM OPERATION
A.
Starting up, operating and shutting down instructions for all equipment and
systems installed.
B.
Control sequences for all systems installed.
C.
Scheduled details of all equipment settings, and actual values maintained in

controlled variables during commissioning.
D.
Procedures for seasonal changeovers.
7 04 MAINTENANCE
A.
Detailed recommendations as to the preventive maintenance frequency and

procedures, including related health and safety procedures, which should be
adopted by the Owner to ensure the most efficient operation of the systems.
Specific details of maintenance procedures to prevent any hazard arising to
health and safety e.g. Legionnaires Disease, shall be included.
B.
Lubrication Schedules for all lubricated items of plant and equipment.
C.
A list of normal consumable items.
D.
A list of recommended "running spares" required, being those items subject to

wear or deterioration and which may involve the Owner in extended deliveries
when replacements are required at some future date.
E.
Procedures for full diagnosis.
F.
Emergency procedures.
7 05 NUMBER OF COPIES REQUIRED

A.
Provide the Owner's authorized representative with one original and three copies
of the final Operation and Maintenance Manual.
7 06 PREPARATION OF MANUALS
A.
The manuals shall be contained in A4 size, plastic-covered, lose leaf, four ring
binders with stiff covers, each indexed, divided and appropriately cover-titled.
Drawings larger than A4 shall be folded and accommodated in the binder so that they
may be unfolded without being in any detached from the rings.
B.
Prepare the Operation and Maintenance Manuals in draft as soon as the

Installation Drawings are in hand.
C.
Make two sets of temporary manuals (with provisional Record Drawings and
preliminary performance data) available at commencement of commissioning to
enable Owner's staff to familiarize themselves with the installation.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
These should be of the same format as the final manuals with temporary insertions
for items which cannot be finalized until the works are commissioned and
performance tested.
7 07 OBLIGATIONS
LITERATURE
A.
OF
MANUFACTURERS
TO
PROVIDE
The requirements and obligations of manufacturers to provide literature as part

of the installation record shall form part of plant and equipment orders and such
orders shall be considered unfulfilled until literature requirements have been
met.
PART 8 - INSPECTION, TEST AND APPROVAL CERTIFICATES

8 01 GENERAL
A.
Submit Inspection, Test and Approval Certificates as required by the contract

Documents.
PART 9 - PROVISION OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS

9 01 DRAWING PRODUCTION
A.
Prepare and submit a master plan for drawing production covering the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
List of drawings to be produced

Drawing/Schedule titles and numbers
Symbols/notation/scales to be used
Cross-references to other drawings
Identification of drawings required for record purposes.
9 02 CHECKING PRIOR TO SUBMISSION

A.
All drawings, Schedules and other information provided by manufacturers,

suppliers, or approved sub-contractors shall be checked by the contractor who
shall ensure that all requirements of the Contractor who shall ensure that all
requirements of the Contract documents have been incorporated prior to
submission.
9 03 PREPARATION OF RECORD DRAWINGS

A.
The preparation of the Record Drawings shall proceed during the installation of
the Works as each section is completed. The Owner's authorized representative
and the consultant shall be allowed to inspect these drawings on request during
their preparation and each drawing shall be submitted to the Owner's authorized
representative prior to Practical Completion.
9 04 SUBMISSION OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A.
The final draft of the Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be submitted in
due time, and in any case not less than four weeks prior to Practical Completion,
so that at least one copy of the complete final version is in the possession of the
Owner at Practical Completion.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
B.
the Operation and Maintenance Manual is an essential part of the works. The
works will not be accepted as complete and payment will be withheld until the
required number of copies of the complete final document have been received
by the Owner's Authorized representative.
C.
If partial possession is required by the Owner then the documentation shall also
be phased accordingly and so arranged to finally form one comprehensive
document.
D.
It shall be the contractor's responsibility, whenever a successive phase of the

works is handed over, to amend and update the previously issued version of the
Operation and Maintenance Manual, bring it to the appropriate stage of
completion and submit same to the Owner's Authorized representative in due
time.
9 05 FAILURE TO PRODUCE RECORD DRAWINGS AND MANUALS

A.
If the contractor fails to produce and submit the record drawings as required
during the progress of the works, or other information for the operation and
Maintenance Manual by the due dates. then the Owner's Authorized
representative may instruct a third party to provide any or all of these documents
and the total cost of preparing such documents shall be borne by the contractor.
PART 10 - STATUTORY UNDERTAKINGS AND OTHER AUTHORITIES

10 01 GENERAL
A.
The contractor will be responsible for programming, coordinating and

progressing the involvement of the Statutory Undertakings and other Authorities
in the works.
B.
Provide all necessary information so required by the Owner's Authorized

representative in respect of the Statuary Undertakings and other Authorities
related to the works.
C.
In addition, the contractor shall execute the following in connection with the
applicable statutory Undertaken and other Authorities.
10 02 COMPLETION OF NEGOTIATIONS
A.
Take responsibility for and complete negotiations commenced by the Owner's

Authorized Representative or the Owner in respect of the provision or diversion
of utility services.
10 03 APPLICATIONS BY OWNER
A.
Take responsibility for and complete any application made by the Owner in
respect of any matter related to the works.
10 04 SAMPLES
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
A.
Section
Provide and submit prior to placing orders samples of workmanship for testing
by the applicable statutory undertaking or other authority.
10 05 CONNECTIONS OF NEW WORKS

A.
Make arrangements to allow connection of the new works to the supply networks
including providing details of the proposed works and obtaining approval as
necessary.
10 06 BY-LAWS AND REGULATIONS

A.
Examine and check the contract Documents for compliance with the Statutory
Requirements so that written notice of any divergence the contractor may find
between the contract Documents and the Statuary Requirements, can be issued
to the Owner's Authorized representative by the contractor in due time so as not
to delay the progress of the works, Where Statutory Undertakings and other
Authorities require to witness tests, the contractor shall give all necessary notice,
carry out such tests, provide attendance and facilities and copy any documents,
etc., as required.
10 07 NOTICES AND FEES

A.
Give all notices in accordance with BY-Laws and regulations and pay all fees
and charges legally demandable. Provisional Sums are included in the Bill of
Quantities for fees and charges payable to Statutory Undertakings and other
Authorities.
10 08 BUILDERS WORK IN CONNECTION

A.
Obtain details of any builders work required, and provide the Owner's Authorized
representative with all necessary details of same.
10 09 AMENDMENTS
A.
Details of any amendments to the works deemed necessary by a Statutory

Undertaking or other Authority shall be submitted to the Owner's Authorized
representative prior to work being executed.
10 010 FORMALITIES
A.
Comply with all formalities in connection with test notices, agreements,

application for supply forms, etc., and forward all such documents requiring the
Owner's signature to the Owner's Authorized representative in ample time.
B.
Prepare installation Drawings for sprinkler systems, fire mains, pumps, alarms,
fire prevention systems and the like, together with related calculations and
technical information in a suitable form and submit same to the local Authorities
and Fire Insurers as required by the Owner's Authorized representative.
10 011 CORRESPONDENCE, ETC.

16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
A.
Section
Provide copies of all correspondence, test certificates, notices, etc.
10 012 COST OF RE-CONNECTIONS, ETC.

A.
The contractor shall be responsible for any cost changes for re-connections, revisits, re-testing, etc., except for such charges arising from any direction of the
Owner's Authorized representative arising from any direction in respect of
defective work.
10 013 GENERAL FACILITIES

A.
Arrange for facilities to be provided for the purpose of laying new mains and
services and adjusting existing equipment.
B.
Notify the owner's Authorized representative that the work of the

Statutory Undertakings and other Authorities is complete in order
that the owner's Authorized representative can issue directions in
respect of covering up of the permanent works by other
contractors.
PART 11 - CONTROL OF QUALITY

11 01 SPECIFIED MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
Unless otherwise specified all materials, plant and equipment, and the use and
installation thereof, shall comply with the material, test and other requirements of
the relevant . IEE wiring regulations 16th edition, IEC standards and BS
standard.
B.
Materials or substances which are generally known at the time of use to be

deleterious shall not be used other than as allowed by standards or statutory
regulation current at the time of use
C.
Workmanship shall be of the best quality, and shall be produced by skilled and
responsible craftsmen fully experience and in their respective trades.
D.
Allow for proper packing and safe delivery of all equipment and materials and for
returning re-usable packaging to the suppliers as appropriate
E.
Include for obtaining materials from any source whatsoever to complete the
works within the contract period and no claim will be allowed for materials exstock or from any other source in the event of difficulty of supply.
F.
Identical parts of similar equipment shall be interchangeable and any items,

fittings or accessories, which are used in quantity, shall in each case be the
produce of one manufacturer.
11 02 GUARANTEE AVAILABILITY OF SPARES

A.
Guarantee or provide manufacturers' written guarantees that spares will be

available for a minimum period of ten years from the date of practical completion
both to the Owner and to any other future building Owner, occupier or contractor
having responsibility for the maintenance of the works.
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
11 03 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO

FIXING
A.
All installation materials, component parts or complete items of equipment shall

be delivered and stored on site in properly labeled boxes, crates or containers,
suitably designed and constructed to give protection against transportation and
handling damage and deterioration during storage.
The packing shall be
weatherproof.
B.
Store all materials on raised boarded platforms under weatherproofs covers and
store pipes, conduits, Trunking and the like on racking.
C.
Equipment or component parts of equipment specifically designed to operate in

normal room conditions, shall be delivered to and stored on site with suitable
waterproof protection.
D.
Take particular care to protect component parts specifically designed to act as

heat transfer surfaces. These surfaces shall have purpose-designed packing to
protect them whilst in transit and storage on site.
E.
Completely cover valve ports and ends of pipes or plug to prevent the ingress of
foreign matter, and additionally protect flanges against damage to the flange
surface.
F.
Examine all materials and equipment supplied under this contract on delivery to
site and immediately prior to installation. Any material or equipment, which is
damaged or faulty, shall be replaced.
11 04 SETTING OUT
11 05
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the
works and for the correctness of position, levels, dimensions and alignment for
all parts of the works and for the provision of all necessary instruments,
appliances and labor in connection therewith. If any error shall appear or arise in
the position, levels, dimensions or alignment of any part of the works the setting
out for which the contractor was responsible, the contractor shall at his own
expense rectify such error.
B.
The checking of any setting out or of any line or level by the Owner's authorized
representative shall not in any way relieve the contractor of his responsibility for
the correctness thereof. The contractor shall carefully protection preserve all
bench-marks, sight rails, pegs and other things used in setting out the works.
C.
Take all necessary dimensions on site, check runs and levels and mark out for
builder's work.
D.
Any unnecessary work carried out by the Owner's authorized representative or

other contractor due to inaccuracy of the contractor's drawings, dimensions, or
marking out shall be paid for by the contractor.
PROTECTION OF NEW WORK

18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
11 06
11 07
A.
The contractor shall be entirely responsible for ensuring that all his work is
adequately protected. Protection shall be by the contractor at the completion of
each day and during periods of inclement weather, and all work exposed to
view on completion in the works shall be protected from spillage, stains and
other damage. All systems shall be kept in a fully drained condition prior to
commissioning.
B.
Test water shall be disposed of so as not to damage any part of the temporary
or permanent works, or any adjoining land or property.
INSPECTION AND TESTING GENERALLY

A.
Agree procedures for notices, witnessing, reporting and recording tests with all
parties involved including local authorities and statutory undertakings, prior to
the commencement of the works.
B.
Submit copies of the formal test certificates signed by the contractor's

representative not later than seven days after completion of successful tests.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
11 08
11 09
Section
Re-test or carry out at no extra cost any additional tests required to establish
acceptability of the works following failure of any part thereof or any item therein
to meet the required standard or functional performance.
INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT FOR TESTING

A.
Supply, check, re-calibrates whenever necessary and maintain in good working

order all instruments and equipment for setting out, measurements, gauging,
inspection, commissioning and performance testing whether they are specifically
called for or implied by the contract documents.
B.
All such instruments and equipment shall be adequate for the purpose and shall
satisfy the purposes and accuracys required by the contract documents.
C.
All instruments and equipment shall remain the property of the contractor.
PROVISION OF STAFF
A.
Provide all necessary staff with the relevant skills and competence for all
inspection, testing, commissioning and performance testing.
11 010 ACCEPTABLE HARMONIC LEVELS

The acceptable limits of harmonics voltages and currents shall be as per the
engineering recommendation G 5/3 (1976) of the united kingdom.
These recommendations are as follows :

The following table permitted harmonic currents for any one consumer at point of
common coupling
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
Harmonic number and current (A r.m.s.)
S
18
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
4
1
The following table permitted Harmonic voltage distortion limits at any point on the
system (including background levels)
Supply
syste
m
voltage
(KV)
at
point
of
com
mon
coupling
Total
har
mo
nic
volt
age
dist
orti
on,
VT
(%)
0.4
11
5
4
Individual
harmonic
voltage
distortion
(%)
___________
_______
_______
_______
_______
__
Odd
E
4
3
2
1.75
The contractor must include harmonic filters with appropriate size to be connected in
the network and/or at places where source of harmonics exists (such as elevator
panels, UPS...etc.) in order not to exceed the above mentioned figures.
PART 12 - INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT FOR TESTING

12 01 GENERAL
A.
Provide assistance and make available to the consultant and Owner's authorized
representative any instruments or other equipment he may require from time to
time for examining the accuracy, quality and performance of the contract works.
PART 13 - INSPECTION AND TESTING CERTIFICATES

13 01
PROCEDURES
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
A.
Section
Schedule and submit an integrated program in respect of those elements of the

works for which inspections and tests shall be carried out and for which
inspection and test records shall be maintained.
These elements shall include in particular those which will be covered up during
construction, and other matters described under certificates for materials and
equipment.
B.
13 02
13 03
CERTIFICATES FOR MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A.
All materials shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the

appropriate British Standard or as described. Should the contractor propose an
alternative item without the appropriate certification, independent testing shall be
carried out at the contractor's expense to determine compliance with the contract
documents.
B.
Where appropriate all materials delivered to the site shall bear the
manufacturer's name, brand name and any other data that may be required to
verify their exact nature and relate it to the requirements of the contract
documents.
WORKS TESTS CERTIFICATES

A.
13 04
Testing of individual items of plant and equipment at manufacturers' works shall

be witnessed and approved by Owner's consultant. On site, and final testing of
completed installations or parts of installations shall all be in accordance with the
contract documents.
Works tests certificates shall include, whenever applicable, full information to

enable the item tested to be identified, such as project title, contractor's name,
manufacturer's nameplate or serial numbers, the location in the works and the
delivery or batch which the sample represents.
INSPECTION, AND TESTING RECORDS

A.
Maintain records of all inspections, and testing performed to substantiate

conformity with the contract documents including those carried out by the
contractor and/or third party testing agencies, together with manufacturers' or
suppliers' certificates of test.
B.
All records shall be retained on site and made available to the Owner's
authorized representative on request. On completion of the works all records
shall be handed over to the Owner's authorized representative unless otherwise
directed.
C.
These records shall include, as appropriate, but not be limited to, project title,
contractor's name, the identification of the element, item, batch or lot, the nature
and number of the observations and tests, the dates of testing, the name and
signature of the person responsible for the testing, the number and type of
deficiencies found, and details of any corrective action taken.
D.
Any record, which indicates that any part of the works inspected or tested, does
not comply with the contract documents shall be submitted without delay in order
that the contractor's proposals for rectification may be assessed.
22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
13 05
Section
MATERIALS AND SAMPLES

A.
Each manufacturer must be willing to admit the Owner's authorized

representative and the consultant to his premises during normal working hours
for the purpose of examining and witnessing the testing of materials and
equipment proposed for the works.
B.
All materials and equipment shall be new.
C.
Obtain and implement manufacturers' instructions on the assembly and

installation of materials and equipment.
D.
Submit all samples required by the contract documents.
E.
The procedure for submission of samples shall be agreed prior to

commencement of the works.
F.
Samples of materials, workmanship, components and equipment accepted as

complying with the contract documents will be retained by the consultant and all
related items included in the works shall be at least equal in all respects to these
samples.
Provide safe storage of accepted samples on site including racks for display,
reference and inspection.
13 06
REJECTION OF MATERIALS OR WORKS NOT TO STANDARD

OF SAMPLES
A.
13 07
13 08
Any material or work which is inferior to an accepted sample or is different from

parts of the works already constructed or which is stained or damaged after
installation will be treated as defective work.
DEFECTIVE WORK
A.
Defective work, and the opening up of the works to ascertain same, shall be
dealt with strictly in accordance with the requirements detailed elsewhere in the
contract document.
B.
Replace defective work with materials, goods or work in accordance with the
contract documents. Alternatively submit proposals for any treatment or making
good that is considered will bring the defective work to the standard required by
the contract documents. Such proposals shall not relieve the contractor of his
responsibility to execute the works to the full intent of the contract documents.
C.
The costs as defined in the contract conditions shall include the cost of any
related delay or disruption in the progress of the works, or any other
consequential cost.
DAMAGE BY INCLEMENT WEATHER

A.
The contractor shall not execute any work when it is likely to be adversely
affected by inclement weather and he shall make good any damage so caused
at his own expense.
23
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
PART 14 - COMMISSIONING THE WORKS

A.
14 01
All pre-commissioning checks, setting to work, commissioning and performance

testing shall be carried out as detailed elsewhere in the contract documents.
ATTENDANCE AND CO-OPERATION

A.
give at least seven days' notice to the Owner's authorized representative of

requirements for the attendance and co-operation by the Owner's authorized
representative and by other contractors.
14 02 NOTICE TO CONSULTANT
A.
14 03
UNSUCCESSFUL TESTS
A.
14 04
Give at least seven days' notice to the Owner's authorized representative of any
commissioning or testing to be carried out to enable the consultant to witness all
or any of such tests, etc.
The contractor shall pay any costs incurred by the Owner, Owner's authorized
representative or the consultant in connection with unsuccessful tests, including
costs incurred due to the inability of the contractor to make or complete a test,
having given the notice required above.
CHECKING AND COMMISSIONING

A.
Commissioning includes the setting to work and regulation of the installation.
B.
Check all installations and commission in accordance with the contract

documents including but not limited to the following :
1.
Co-operation with the Owner's authorized representative to produce a

coordinated program for the testing and commissioning of the complete works.
2.
Provision of all consumable materials.
3.
Provision of such temporary communication apparatus as is necessary to enable

members of the commissioning team who are unable to be in visual or aural
contact with each other to carry out their tasks safely and effectively. Such
apparatus shall not cause interference with equipment owned or operated by
any other parties.
4.
Provision of proper and permanent records of relevant readings of all quantities

taken during the checking, pre-commissioning and commissioning procedures.
The form of the records shall be agreed with the Owner's authorized representative in
advance of commissioning and the record for each complete commissioning
procedure shall be dated and signed by the person whom the contractor has
appointed to be formally in charge of commissioning.
14 05
PERFORMANCE TESTS
A.
When the Contractor has completed the commissioning of the whole of works he
shall give to the Owner's authorized representative written certification of this
24
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
fact. The certificate shall be signed by the director or manager responsible for
the contract.
14 06
B.
Only when this written certification has been received by the Owner's authorized
representative will performance tests be allowed to commence. Unless
otherwise agreed by the Owner's authorized representative in writing, where
engineering systems involve the works of more than one works contractor,
performance tests will only be allowed to commence when written certification
from all the relevant works contractors has been received.
C.
Carry out during this period full tests on the complete works to demonstrate that
the works meet the requirements of the contract documents.
D.
The Owner's authorized representative may at his discretion waive any part of
the full test procedure if he considers it has been satisfactorily demonstrated,
recorded and properly certified at any earlier time but the contractor shall
however allow in his costs for carrying out all of the provisions in this clause.
RECORDS OF WEATHER CONDITIONS

A.
14 07
SUMMER AND WINTER PERFORMANCE TESTS

A.
14 08
14 09
Keep a daily record throughout the contract period of the maximum, minimum
and average outside shade temperature, humidity and wind speed.
Test the performance of the whole of the works in both summer and winter
design conditions and allow for any special visits to site and provide any
necessary attendance during the defects liability period to set up, monitor and
remove test and recording equipment.
SYSTEMS USED BEFORE PRACTICAL COMPLETION

A.
No part of the permanent services installations shall be used by the contractor

for his own benefit without the written agreement of the Owner's authorized
representative.
B.
Should any part of the works be operated during the period of the contract for
the benefit of the contractor and/or the Owner's authorized representative, all
consumable spares, including light bulbs and tubes which have been so put to
use shall be replaced by new not more than seven days prior to practical
completion.
DEFECTS LIABILITY
A.
Defects, shrinkages or other faults appearing at any time during the defects
liability period which have led, or, in the opinion of the Engineer, are likely to
lead to failure or malfunction of any part of the works shall be made good
immediately upon receipt of any instruction or direction of the Owner's
authorized representative.
B.
Prepare and submit a record of any failure or malfunction of any part of the
works, the remedial action taken, subsequent re-testing and the results thereof.
25
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
C.
Notify the Owner's authorized representative of any malfunction in, or damage

to, the works which the contractor can demonstrate had been caused by
incorrect operation of the system, vandalism or action of a third party.
D.
Inform the Owner's authorized representative in writing when all defects are
finally rectified so that an inspection may be carried out prior to the issue of the
final certificate.
PART 15 - PREVENTION OF NUISANCE AND DANGER TO PERSONS

15 01
15 02
15 03
SITE SAFETY GENERALLY

A.
The contractor before commencing work shall inform the, Owner's authorized
representative of the person who will be on site during working hours and who
will have the authority to take action on and be responsible for all aspects of
safety, health and welfare in connection with the contract works.
B.
Take all the necessary precautions to ensure the safety of all site personnel, and
the general public, and in respect of the contract works provide for the safety,
health and welfare of work-people employed on the site to comply with the
requirements of the following and of all other relevant statutes, statutory
instruments, statutory regulations or industrial agreements.
FIRE PRECAUTIONS
A.
Take all reasonable precautions to avoid the outbreak of fire, particularly in work
involving the use of naked flames and impress on workmen the dangers
involved in the careless disposal of matches and cigarettes, etc., and the
accumulation of rubbish on site.
Where considered necessary due to the
nature of the works or as directed by the Owner's authorized representative,
institute a "No smoking" regime.
B.
The use of naked lights shall be prohibited except in cases of absolute

necessity, and extreme care taken in the use of all equipment likely to cause
fire damage.
NOISE AND NUISANCE CONTROL

A.
Conduct operations in such a manner that nuisance shall not be caused to the
general public, adjoining residents and users of adjacent buildings.
If such nuisance is being caused the contractor shall immediately make such
arrangements as will prevent a recurrence of the same and indemnify the Owner
against any claims arising therefrom.
B.
Attention is also drawn to the necessity to comply with BS 5225 Code or

Practice for noise control on construction and demolition sites.
15 0 4 POLLUTION CONTROL
A.
Comply with local regulations and satisfy the requirements of the environmental
health office under whose authority the works are being executed.
15.5 RADIO AND TV INTERFERENCE

26
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
A.
All apparatus where the normal operation is such that interruption of low
frequency or direct electrical currents occur shall be fitted with means of
suppressing the radio and TV interference so caused.
B.
The equipment and methods to be used in determining the level of radio

interference shall be as specified in BS 727 and the limits of interference shall in
all cases be those specified in BS 800.
C.
Reference shall be made to CP 1006 for guidance on the provision and

installation of equipment to meet the above standards.
D.
C.B. radio shall not be used except with the written consent of the Owner's
15 06 USE OF LASER EQUIPMENT

A.
The following safety precautions shall be observed in addition to the

recommendations of BS 4803.
1.
At least one warning notice at each laser location.
2.
The laser should be turned off or shuttered when not in use or unattended.
3.
The laser should be set well above or below the heads of employees when
possible.
4.
Employees should never stare directly into the laser beam or point the laser at
another person.
5.
all laser equipment must bear a label indicating the maximum beam output,
which must not exceed 5 milli watts.
6.
Only qualified employees shall be assigned to install, adjust and operate the
laser equipment.
B.
In addition, the maximum period of exposure (MPE) to laser light should be

determined and monitored in accordance with BS 4803
PART 16 - EXISTING SITE SERVICES

A.
Co-ordinate and co-operate with the Owner's authorized representative in the

location, protection and any necessary temporary diversion of existing site
services.
B.
Make a dimensioned sketch describing the exposed service and locating it in

plan and section to permanent and accessible reference points date and sign
the sketch and submit same to the Owner's authorized representative.
C.
Any service so exposed shall only be covered up by permanent works with the
written consent of the Owner's authorized representative.
27
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
PART 17 - EXISTING TREES AND PLANTS

A.
Carefully protect and maintain all trees, hedges, shrubs, etc., in proximity to the
works and which are to be retained in the permanent works.
PART 18 - INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S STAFF IN OPERATION OF

SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO PRACTICAL
COMPLETION
A.
Prior to practical completion of the installation, the Owner will be appointing

maintenance staff or maintenance contractor to undertake the operation and
maintenance of the building services installation.
The contractor shall include for providing assistance to the Owner's staff during
the course of the installation to explain the purpose and function of the works.
B.
Include for a minimum period of 25 plant operating days prior to practical

completion, to instruct the Owner's maintenance staff or maintenance contractor
in the day to day running of the plant and systems. The location and function of
all items listed on the record schedules shall be explained and the procedures
given in the operating and maintenance manuals for starting up, shutting down,
isolating sections, emergency procedures, etc., shall be comprehensively
explained and demonstrated to the Owner's satisfaction.
PART 19 - SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS

19 01
19 02
ADDITIONAL SPARE PARTS

A.
Six weeks prior to practical completion, submit a schedule of the additional

spare parts that the contractor recommends should be supplied over and above
those consumable spares required up to practical completion and for routine
maintenance.
B.
Each item on the schedule shall have the manufacturer's current price inserted,
which shall also include for packaging and delivery to site.
C.
These additional spare parts may or may not be ordered during the currency of
the contract and therefore the cost thereof shall only be included in the contract
sum when the subject of an instruction by the Owner's authorized
representative.
D.
Spare parts shall be completely interchangeable and suitable for use in place of
the corresponding part supplied with the plant. They shall be greased and/or
painted before packing to prevent deterioration during delivery and storage.
E.
Where spare parts are supplied by the contractor, each package shall be clearly
marked and numbered for identification in accordance with the schedule of
spare parts and referenced to the equipment list in the operation and
maintenance manual.
F.
Spare parts shall be handed over to the appointed representative of the Owner.
TOOLS
28
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
A.
Section
At practical completion, provide two complete sets of tools and portable

indicating instruments for the operation and maintenance of all plant and
equipment together with suitable means of identifying, storing and securing
same.
PART 20 - FUEL AND POWER FOR COMMISSIONING

A.
Fuel and power for commissioning and performance testing the works including
payment of statutory undertakings for same.
B.
Fuel, water and power for running the contract heating system to dry out the
building including payment of statutory undertakings for same.
PART 21 - ATTENDANCE UPON OTHERS

A.
Attendance upon and co-ordination of other contractors as necessary for the

commissioning and performance testing of the contract work.
PART 22 - TEMPORARY WORKS

A.
All temporary works required for the proper and safe construction of the
permanent works and for the protection of personnel on site.
C.
Advise the Owner's authorized representative and the consultant of all

temporary works required to be carried out together with all details of work
required to uphold existing services and intended temporary connections
thereto.
PART 23 - CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SERVICES

A.
All necessary notifications and authorizations in respect of connection of

temporary or permanent connection to existing services or investigator opening
up thereof.
B.
No temporary or permanent connection to existing services or investigator

opening up thereof shall be carried out without prior notification to the Owner's
authorized representative and any necessary authorization obtained from the
Owner's authorized representative.
PART 24 - SAFETY EQUIPMENT

A.
The contractor shall provide and maintain in full working order all necessary
safety equipment for access and inspection purposes for use by the contractor
and for use by other personnel on site as instructed by the Owner's authorized
representative. Such equipment shall include, but not be limited to, protective
clothing, safety harness, gas detection and emergency breathing apparatus for
inspection of confined spaces.
PART 25 - SCOPE OF WORKS

25 01 THE CONTRACT WORKS
29
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
A.
Section
The works covered by this contract are the design, selection, manufacturing,
works testing, supplying and delivery to site, erecting, connecting up, testing,
commissioning, performance testing and handing over in working order the
complete engineering services installations described in the contract document.
25 02 SYSTEMS INCLUDED
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
High voltage switchgear and transformers.

Low voltage switchgear and distribution
Standby generation
Lighting installation
Emergency and exit lighting fixtures
Multiplexes/Addressable fire alarm life safety system
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system
Telephone system
Television and Satellite reception system
Earthing system
Automatic reactive power compensation
Lightning Protection system
PART 26 - RELATED WORK

There will be other Contract Works associated with and related to this Contract.
The Contractor shall make himself fully aware of the interfaces between the
requirements of his Works and the works of other. The Contractor's Works
related to the Works of others shall include but not be limited to the be following.
A.
Associated Contract Works

1.
Substructure and under slab drainage
2.
Lifts
B.
Associated Local Supply Company Works

1.
Gas company
2.
Water Company
3.
Electricity Company
4.
Telephone company
5.
Sewerage company
C.
Associated Works in Other Divisions of this Contract

Division 14
Elevator Systems
Division 15
Mechanical
The Contractor shall, before commencement his contract work, make himself
fully aware of the special setting-out and installation requirements of other
contract Works that affect the Works of this Section.
PART 27 - TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A.
The contractor shall be required to demonstrate that the equipment and systems
under this Contract function and operate in full accordance with the Specification
30
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16010
Section
and the testing and commissioning procedures described elsewhere in this

Specification.
B.
Once the Contractor has demonstrated the operation of the Works to the
satisfaction of the Owner's Authorized Representative the complete integration
of the Contractors Works with the Works of others will be the responsibility of
others.
C.
Not withstanding this, the Contractor's Works will not be deemed complete until
the works are fully integrated and demonstrated in function and operation as
being fully integrated with the associated works by others.
D.
The Contractor shall allow for full attendance to the Owner's Authorized
Representative and others in order that the whole of the Works under this
contract can be successfully demonstrated to be functioning and operating with
all other associated works to the satisfaction of the Owner's Authorized
Representative.
E.
This shall not relieve the contractor in any way of his responsibilities under the
Contract.
END OF SECTION 16010
31
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6110
Section
Division 16 Electrical Works

Section 16110 Boxes and Fittings
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and
Division-1 (General Requirements) apply to work of this section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, applies to work of this section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to raceways specified elsewhere in this specification.
1 02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work includes providing completely coordinated grounded raceway systems complete with
boxes, fittings, supports, anchors, sleeves, hangers, clamps, straps, seals, flexible connections
to vibrating equipment and accessories, as specified and as required for a complete system.
Conduit or tubing sizes referred to in the specifications and on the Drawings are nominal
internal diameters. Raceway is required for all wiring unless specifically indicated or specified
otherwise.
1 03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems, boxes and

fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, VDE/DIN, IEC, BS,
NEC, UL and NEMA Standards pertaining to raceways, boxes and fittings. Provide raceways,
boxes and components which have been UL listed and labeled.
1 04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications and
installation instructions, for each type of raceway system and box required. Include data
substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B. Samples: Submit 15 cm length of exposed type surface raceways with required finish, in
accordance with requirements of Division 1.
C. Shop Drawings : submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural backgrounds of raceways,
boxes and fitting including, but not limited to size of raceways, boxes and fittings elevations,
type and reference no.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6110
Section
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01
RACEWAYS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC): Full weight steel pipe hot dipped galvanized inside and outside,
threaded, minimum 20 mm, unless otherwise noted; minimum 15 mm for switch legs.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid intermediate grade, hot dipped galvanized outside,
threaded, minimum 20 mm, unless otherwise noted; minimum 15 mm for switch legs.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Thin wall steel, galvanized, inside and outside .
D. Flexible Steel Conduit: Continuous length of specially wound interlocked, galvanized strip steel,
minimum 20 mm.
E. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Continuous length of flexible interlocked, galvanized inside
and outside steel tubing, with a continuous copper bonding conductor wound specially between
the convolution, coated with a liquid tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum
20 mm.
F.Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit
1. Self-extinguishing and heavy gauge conduits and conduit fittings.
2. For concrete encasement, Schedule 40.
3. For direct burial, Schedule 80 conduit.
4. Minimum 20 mm diameter for lighting and power wiring minimum 16 mm diameter for
telephone installation.
G. Wireways: Steel, minimum 1.5 mm thickness, with baked enamel finish, screw-on covers,
raceway knockout, elbow fittings, hangers, wire retainers, and cabinet adapter; size as noted or
required.
2 02
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. GENERAL
1. Accessories as required including, but not limited to, bushings, knockout closures,
locknuts, mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and
plasterboard expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes being
utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situation.
2. Die-cast fittings not permitted.
3. Earthing (grounding) Bushings: With lug suitable for the size and type of earthing
(grounding) conductor to be terminated.
B. RIGID STEEL AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS

1. Steel or malleable iron, standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows.
2. Conductive type thread compounds to insure low resistance ground continuity through
conduit. Watertight couplings and connections in concrete.
3. Locknuts of the bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of the
enclosure.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6110
Section
4. Bushings of the metallic insulating type, consisting of an insulating insert molded or locked
into the metallic body of the fitting.
5. Corrosion resistant metallic conduit fittings.
6. Sealing fittings of the threaded cast iron type. Where sealing fittings are used to prevent
passage of water vapor, utilize the continuous drain type.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing Fittings: Steel or malleable iron concrete tight couplings and
connectors of the gland and ring compression type; set screw type connectors are permitted for
interior dry locations only, indent type connectors are not permitted.
D. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Steel or malleable iron, insulated throat angle wedge type.
E. Surface Metal Raceway Fittings:
raceway system.
As recommended by manufacturer to match integrity of
F.Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit Fittings: As recommended by the manufacturer to match integrity of

each type of raceway system.
G. EXPANSION AND DEFLECTION COUPLINGS
1. Comply with approved applicable standards.
2. Accommodate 1.9 cm deflection, expansion and contraction in any direction.
3. Allow 30 degree angular deflection.
4. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit ground continuity and fault
currents.
5. Watertight, seismically qualified corrosion resistant threaded and compatible with associated
conduit.
6. Jacket: Flexible, corrosion resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded rubber
material with stainless steel jacket clamps.
H. SUPPORTS
1. Zinc coated or equivalent.
2. Conduit hangers, designed for the purpose and have pre-assembled closure bolt and nut
and provision for receiving hanger rod.
3. Multiple conduit (trapeze) hangers not less than 38 cm x 38 cm, 2.7 mm thickness steel,
cold formed, dipped clamps. Hanger rods not less than 0.95 cm diameter steel.
4. Anchors of types, sizes and materials designed for the purpose.
2 03
OUTLET BOXES
A. OUTLET BOXES
1. PVC heavy gauge for concealed work, and galvanized cast iron or aluminum with threaded
hubs for exposed work; boxes of shapes, cubic inch capacity, and sizes as required,
suitable for installation at respective location.
2. With mounting holes and with cable and conduit size knockout openings.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6110
Section
3. With threaded screw holes, with corrosion resistant ridged cover and grounding screws for
fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment grounding.
4. For concealed work, utilize 10 cm square or octagon outlet boxes, except as otherwise
required by construction devices or wiring and as follows:
a. Above ceiling: 3.8 cm deep.
b. In ceiling or slab: 7.6 cm deep.
c.
In wall for fixtures: 7 cm deep.
d. In wall for receptacles and switches: 3.8 cm deep.

e. With raised covers and fixture studs where required.
f.
Back-to-back boxes type not permitted.
g. Gangable type boxes are not permitted.

h. For installation of more than two devices in a common outlet box, utilize boxes and
device rings manufactured specifically for this purpose.
i.
Outlet box device rings used to be of sufficient depth so as to make the use of
extension boxes and rings unnecessary.
5. For exposed work utilize 10 cm round x 5 cm deep for mounting on ceilings and 10 cm
square x 5 cm deep for mounting on walls, except as otherwise required by construction,
devices, or wiring.
6. Provide blank covers for outlet boxes without devices. Covers to match adjacent plates.
2 04
WIRING , JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Heavy gauge PV, galvanized sheet steel with screw-on covers for interior work, and galvanized
cast iron and/or 2.7 mm thickness stainless steel with threaded hubs and gaskets for outdoors
and damp locations; boxes of shapes, cubic cm capacity, and sizes as required, suitable for
installation at respectable location.
B. Insulated cable supports.
2 05
FLOOR BOXES
2
A. Material: Cast iron with a gray polyester corrosion-resistant finish with a 15 cm long 2.5 mm
earthing (grounding) pigtail prewired to the ground screw, with threaded conduit entrance and
suitable to accept conduit and devices as indicated.
B. Covers: Brass or aluminum as selected by Architect, and suitable for indicated devices and
mounting.
C. Flanges: (brass or aluminum) (clear polycarbonate) as selected by Architect, and suitable for
floor box.
2 06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6110
Section
Refer to the attached manufacturers' list.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which raceways, boxes, accessories, and fittings are to be installed
and substrate which will support raceways. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental
to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3 02 INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
1.
Install raceways, boxes, accessories, and fittings as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturers' written installation instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and
in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with
requirements and serves intended function.
2.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways, boxes, and

components with other work. Run raceways concealed, except as noted.
3.
Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and raceways for conductors to
form continuous electrical conductor. Connect to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to
provide electrical continuity and firm mechanical assembly.
Maintain grounding
continuity of interrupted metallic raceways with ground conductor.
4.
Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis.

Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound
before assembling.
5.
Support raceways by means of ceiling trapeze, strap hangers, wall brackets with back
spacer, structural steel angles or channels. Support riser raceways at each floor.
Secure raceways to supports with pipe straps or U-bolts. Space supports as per
applicable electrical code and per manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise
indicated.
6.
Mount supports to structure with toggle bolts on hollow masonry, expansion shields or
inserts on concrete and brick, machine screws on metal, wood screws on wood. Nails,
rawl plugs, wood, and/or plastic plugs are not permitted.
7.
Keep raceways clear of motor foundations and boilers. Also, do not obstruct headroom,
doorways, or walkways, with raceway.
8.
Do not install conduit in terrazzo floors.
9.
Install miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions, split
couplings, and plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their
particular application.
10.
Use roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated equipment furnished by equipment

supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to equipment only after receiving
dimensioned drawings from equipment installer and after checking location with other
trades.
11.
Test conduits required to be installed, but left empty, with ball mandrel.
conduit which rejects ball mandrel.
Clear any
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6110
Section
12.
Provide long radius bends for empty raceway systems where required to satisfy the
system cabling requirements.
13.
Install complete raceway runs before pulling in wire or cable. Install raceways so that
required conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain to raceway or
cable. Where raceway size is not indicated, follow applicable code.
14.
Keep end of raceways plugged or capped during construction.
15.
For empty raceways over 3 m long, provide fish or pull wire. For 3.8 cm and larger pull
wire to consist of steel core nylon rope and terminal ball.
16.
Remove damaged or deformed raceways.
17.
Do not support branch circuit conduits by the suspended ceiling or its supporting
members, lighting fixtures, mechanical piping, or air conditioning ducts.
18.
Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings. Avoid present and
future openings in floor, wall or ceiling construction, when so indicated on drawings.
19.
Keep conduits a minimum distance of 45 cm from parallel runs of flues or boiler

breaching and 15 cm from hot water pipes or other sources of heat. Wherever possible,
install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. Provide thermal insulation
where these separations cannot be maintained.
20.
Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers.
21.
Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited. Where required,
use 3-piece union or split coupling.
22.
Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been
removed.
23.
Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed
electrical wiring.
24.
Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 150 mm separation.
25.
Do not install aluminum products in concrete. Plug and seal conduit interconnections.
26.
Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness.
27.
Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which
attached or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.
28.
Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and damage.
29.
Set boxes square and true with the building finish. Secure boxes to the building structure
and adequately support all boxes during construction to prevent movement.
30.
Verify outlet locations in finished spaces with Architectural Drawings or Interior Design
drawings, details and finishes. Take caution in locating outlet to allow for overhead
pipes, ducts, and variations in arrangement, thickness in finish, window trim and other
Architectural Construction Details.
31.
Correct any inaccuracy in locating outlets without additional expense to the Owner. Refer
to Architect any condition that would place an outlet box in an unsuitable location, such
as a molding, break glass in wall finish, or behind a heating enclosure.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6110
Section
32.
Mount outlet boxes for similar equipment at uniform height within same or similar areas.
Where mounting height or location of outlets is not shown or specified, mount outlet as
best suited for equipment connected thereto, or as directed.
33.
Provide barriers between switches connected to different phases.
34.
Except where special outlets are required, provide 10 cm square wall outlets with single
gang raised cover and bushed plate for signaling systems.
35.
36.
In cold rooms, walk-in refrigeration boxes, etc., weatherproof raceway installations and
use sealing fittings and compounds as entries.
For conduit or cable tray runs exposed inside the building, mark (stencil 3 M on centers,
including in hung ceiling, with the notation, "Danger, Volts," indicating the actual voltage
(i.e. "Danger 22,000 Volts," "Danger 380 Volts").
37.
Install conduits located underground beyond the building as follows:

a. With a minimum of 60 cm top cover, above the conduits, and sloped away from the
building.
b. Placed over well tamped trench bottom and on concrete block 1.5 M on center. Anchor
conduits to prevent their movement. Stagger conduit joints a minimum of 15 cm
apart. Make all joints watertight.
c.
38.
With a minimum clear separation between the electric and telephone conduits of 30
cm of tamped earth or 15 cm of concrete.
For and direct burial cable entering the building and for the manholes preceding the
conduits entry to the building, perform the following:
a. Plug all empty raceways.
b. Enter through floor or wall entrance fittings. For the entrance fittings utilize a gland
assembly cable of providing a seal around the conduit or cable to withstand 15 M
head of water without leakage.
c.
Slope away from building.
d. In lieu of wall entrance fittings through floor or wall, 2.5 mm metal plates may be
utilized subject to the following:
1) Plate extends a minimum of 100 mm from raceway in every direction.
2) Plate is welded to raceways forming a watertight seal.
3) Raceways are not damaged.
39.
Work with extreme care near existing ducts, conduits, cables and other utilities to avoid
damaging them.
40.
Provide weather-tight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or
moisture.
41.
Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. Coordinate trim with type of
finish, i.e., tile, carpet, etc.
B. For all vibrating equipment adjacent or above acoustically treated areas, i.e., ballrooms,
meeting rooms, restaurants, guest rooms, etc., provide the following:
1. Flexible conduit at the entries, exits, and outlets.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6110
Section
2. Sealing fittings with compound at the entries and exits.

3. Supports of rubber-in-shear ceiling hangers.
4. Expansion fittings at isolating slab joints.
5. Rubber gasketed recessed outlets.
6. Back plaster recessed outlets.
7. Free-standing equipment with vibration isolators.
C. RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
1. Use rigid steel conduit for underground installation, in wet or damp locations, for exposed
runs on the exterior of the building, in concrete slabs, for all feeder conduits, in
mechanical equipment spaces, and as noted.
2. Where conduit is directly buried, provide two coats of polyurethane.
between coats and before backfilling.
Dry thoroughly
3. Where located under the building, encase conduit for all runs above 5 cm with concrete
envelope with walls not less than 8 cm thick.
D. INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT
1. Use intermediate metal conduit in lieu of rigid steel conduit where permitted by applicable
electrical codes.
2. Where located under the building, encase conduit for all runs above 5 cm with concrete
envelope not less than 8 cm thick.
E. ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
1. Use electrical metallic tubing for branch circuits only, in dry locations (hung ceilings, hollow
block walls and furred spaces) and for fire alarm, smoke and fire detection system where
in accordance with all applicable codes, authorities, etc.
2. EMT is not permitted to be used in mechanical equipment spaces and where subject to
moisture, dampness, i.e. plenums, condensate spillage, etc.
F.FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT
1. Use flexible steel conduit with an internal earth (ground) connection for short connections
where rigid conduit or tubing is impracticable and for final connections to vibrating
equipment.
2. Provide a minimum length of 46 cm with slack. Connect the earth (ground) conductor to
the enclosure or raceway at each end.
G. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
1. For damp and wet conditions and in all plenums.
2. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connections to motor terminal boxes,
transformers and other vibrating equipment.
3. Provide a minimum length of 45 cm with slack. Connect the ground conductor to the
enclosure or raceway at each end.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6110
Section
H. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT (PVC)

1. Use in or below slabs for service entrance conductors for lighting system and telephone
service for lightning protection down conductors and only as otherwise indicated.
Provide separate earthing (ground) wire.
2. Cut ends square, ream smooth, wipe clean, apply approved solvent cement and quarter
turn as drawing up tight in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer.
3. Convert to steel conduit using adapters when entering the building from underground
locations.
4. Maintain a 1M minimum clearance of PVC conduits from hot water and steam lines.
5. Where located under building, parking lot, and roadways, concrete encase conduit for all
runs above 50 mm.
6. Conduit, fittings and accessories shall be of the same manufacture to provide a consistent
system with compatible appearance. The use of alternative designs and different
manufacturer's products will not be permitted.
7. All conduit joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacture's installation
recommendations using a solvent adhesive recommended by the maker of the conduit.
All such joints shall be watertight.
The same conditions shall apply to joints between conduit, fittings and accessories. The
dipping of conduit or fittings into solvent adhesives is expressly forbidden. Before joints
are made, conduit ends shall be cut square and all burrs and sharp edges shall be
removed.
Care should be taken to remove all damp, grease, cement dust and oil from all faces of
conduits and accessories prior to jointing.
Conduits shall be entered fully into box
spouts and butted into couplers, other than expansion couplers, for jointing purposes.
8. Screwed PVC conduit shall not be used unless specifically called for on the drawings or
when the PVC conduit is to be connected to metal equipment, conduit and fittings with
screwed entries. Where such entries are not available, non-screwed male bushes and
couplers shall be used.
9. Where conduit crosses building expansion joints or where there are changes of
temperature in excess of 25 C, flexibility of the conduit to cope with the associated
movement shall be achieved by a method approved by the manufacturer of the conduit.
10.
All bends shall be made using the correct size spring. Conduit sizes of 25 mm and
below may be set cold but all larger sizes shall be set hot. A pipe vice shall not be used
during this or any other operation. The radius of any conduit bend shall not be less than
4 time the outside diameter of the conduit. Naked flames shall not be used directly to
heat conduit for bending purposes. The use of conduit bends having factures and
conduits with any wrinkles on formed bends is not permitted.
11.
Concealed conduit and accessories shall be securely fixed before any operations
involving casting, concrete pouring, screed laying and plastering. Fixing shall be by
means purpose made clips which shall not cause deformation of the conduit. Fixings
shall be used at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5 meters and the distance of clips on
each side of bends or accessories shall not exceed 150 mm.
2
A protective conductor of not less than 2.5 mm with green and yellow insulation shall be
installed throughout, sufficiently long to allow looping in and of fittings and accessories.
12.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6110
Section
Where expansion couplers are used allowance shall be made in the length of the
protective conductor to accommodate any expansion.
13.
Where luminaries are to be connected to a ceiling conduit system, metal conduit boxes
shall be used. Fittings may not be hung from the PVC conduit system and full details of
the means of support shall be shown on the Co-ordination and Builders Work Drawings.
14.
Where a number of conduits converge, large adaptable PVC boxes shall be employed to
avoid the conduits crossing. Conduits shall be connected to the boxes by means of
male bushes and couplers.
15.
Different colours shall be applied for conduits of different systems.
I.
Provide expansion-deflection fittings at expansion joints and on length of runs in accordance

with manufacturer's recommendations. Utilize expansion - deflection fittings of size as required
complete with bonding jumper.
J.
For Hazardous Locations

1. Utilize rigid steel only, unless otherwise noted.
2. Install approved sealing fittings to prevent passage of explosive vapors as required by the
applicable electrical codes.
K. For Wet, Damp, or Moist Locations

1. Provide sealing fittings to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass from warm to
cold locations, such as refrigerated spaces, air conditioned spaces, or similar spaces.
3 03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, perform continuity tests by testing the resistance
of all feeder conduits from the service to the point of their final distribution using 1 conductor
return. Limit the maximum resistance to 25 ohms. When possible, field-correct malfunctioning
equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be
satisfactorily corrected, at no additional cost to the Owner.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16114
Section

Section 16114 Cable Trays
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions
and Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B.
General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, applies to work of this Section.
1 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests
necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all cable trays in
accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
1 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of cable trays of the types
and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 5 years.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, DIN/VDE,

IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards pertaining to cable trays. Provide
cable trays products and components which have been listed and labeled.
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for cable trays.
B.
Samples:- Submit 30 cm length of each size of cable tray complete with its accessories
and fittings.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layout drawings on architectural backgrounds of

cable trays including, but not limited to, offsets and connections. Show accurately scaled
cable trays with locations of supports and fittings, including fire stops and weather seals.
Indicate relationship of cable trays to other associated equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 CABLE TRAY
A.
GENERAL
1.
A complete cable support system with all required straight sections, fittings,
connectors and accessories.
2.
All trays and system components as defined by and in conformance with

approved Standards or latest applicable revisions.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16114
Section
3.
Cable Support System: Ladder type; width as required or as shown on the

drawings; radius of fittings, 60 cm or as shown on the drawings.
4.
Fittings such as elbows, tees, crosses, etc., with a tangent, or straight section
beyond the curvature to accept one type of universal splice plate to simplify field
erections.
5.
Usable Minimum Clear Loading Depth: 8 cm.
6.
Straight Sections: 3.7 - 4 meters in length.
7.
Cable Support System: Aluminum: 6063T6 alloy for extruded parts and 5052
alloy for parts fabricated from sheet.
8.
Cable trays shall be perforated and manufactured from mild steel and to be
galvanized after fabrication the galvanization must be hot dip galvanized
9.
Minimum thickness of cable trays shall be 1.5 mm thickness for cable tray 30 cm
width and below and shall be 2mm thickness for 40 cm width and above .
10.
Cable trays shall be manufactured with plain return flanges
11.
Adequate supports shall be provided to prevent stress on cables where they

enter or leave the tray. Where cable trays extend transversely through partitions
and walls additional protection in the form of fire-proof non-combustible barriers
shall be provided.
12.
All cables shall be fastened securely by purpose made straps or saddles to the
cable trays.
13.
Cable trays shall be connected by means of flexible tinned straps to the nearest
bare earthing conductors and at maximum of 30 meters spacing.
14.
Cable trays must be specially reinforced to have high load bearing capabilities
across wide spans, maximum deflection should not exceed 0.5% in the longest
span. Also it shall be mechanically designed to give high torsional rigidity and
good resistance against lateral loading.
15.
Where the supported cables run in either a vertical or horizontal direction,

manufactured bends or sets shall be provided in order that a continuous cable
tray be provided throughout the length or run.
16.
Bends in either vertical or horizontal directions should be dimensioned such that

cables may not be curved less than 15 times its diameter.
17.
Perforate-type cable tray shall be used above the suspended ceiling. It shall be
manufactured from mild steel 1.5 mm or 2 mm thick, finished hot-dip galvanized
with a 20 mm return flange on both edges. Edge height 80mm.
18.
Ladder-type cable tray shall be used to support heavy cabling as indicated on

the drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The tray shall be designed ladderlike, offering free circulation of air around cable and minimum moisture and dustgathering surfaces. Rungs shall be welded to the ladder profiles. Rung width
shall not be less than 30 mm, and center distance between rungs shall not
exceed 250 mm.
Cables are to be prevented from falling down the ladder system by 50 mm height
edges along the whole length of the ladder.
19.
All components and accessories shall be hot-dip galvanized steel after

manufacture to give resistance to corrosion.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16114
B.
Section
20.
Same typical details of trays, ladder and perforated type are shown in the
drawings.
21.
Cable tray width shall be chosen according to the number and diameter of cables
laid on the tray. Main feeders shall be laid such that their outer radius are spaced
a distance equal to the diameter of the largest cable.
22.
All Cable trays shall be covered with cover.
SAFETY FACTOR
1.
Cable Tray at 2.5 meters Span: Capable of sustaining a working (allowable)

load of 68 kg per linear 30 cm with a safety factor of 2, when tested as a simple
beam and in accordance with approved load test method; test specimen to be a
single section of cable tray.
2.
In addition to and concurrent with the above working load, a 90kg concentrated
load applied at mid span to result in no permanent deformation of the tray.
3.
Design to be such that all like parts are interchangeable and that trays may be
readily assembled and joined without the use of special tools.
C.
Fittings: at least the same thickness and cross sectional area of side members and
(rungs, bottom) as straight sections.
D.
Connectors: High pressure rigid plate type connected by ribbed-neck or square-neck

plated steel bolts and free-spinning lock type nuts not requiring a washer; ribbed-neck or
square-neck portion of bolt to grip the tray side member and connector plate metal to
prevent bolt from rotating during tightening of nut.
E.
Where necessary, provide expansion guides and connectors per manufacturer's thermal
contraction and expansion table; install fixed hold down clamps approximately midway
between expansion connectors; install expansion guides at all other support locations to
allow thermally induced movement of the tray.
F.
Resistance of the connection between adjacent sections of cable trays: not more than
0.00033 ohms; use bonding jumpers of suitable ampacity at all expansion connections
and at all adjustable points.
G.
LADDER TYPE TRAY SECTIONS
H.
1.
Construct with rungs (transverse members) at least 2.5 cm wide, spaced 30 cm

on centers.
2.
Bearing Surface of Transverse Members: Minimum of 1.9 cm .
3.
Rungs (transverse members) assembled to the side rails by welding to insure

integrity of fault ground path for the life of the system and maximum structural
capability; non-welded joining of rungs to side rails are not acceptable.
LIGHT DUTY TRAYS

1.
Aluminum with a maximum overall depth of 10 cm and a minimum usable loading

depth of 8 cm.
2.
Capable of sustaining working (allowable) load of 36 kg per 30 cm on a 2.5

meter simple span.
3.
Safety factor of 1.5 mid-span deflection not to exceed 1.25 cm.
4.
Trough Type Trays:
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16114
I.
Section
a.
Three piece construction consisting of two longitudinal members (side rails)

with a corrugated bottom welded to the side rails.
b.
Peaks of the corrugated bottom with a minimum flat cable bearing surface of
7 cm and spaced 15 cm on center.
c.
To provide ventilation in the tray, the valleys of the corrugated bottom to

have 6 cm x 10 cm rectangular holes punched along the width of the bottom.
All cable trays shall be heavy duty type unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A.
Examine conditions under which cable trays are to be installed. Notify Architect in writing
of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install cable trays and accessories as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, requirements of applicable standards and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and
serves intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of cable trays work with other work.
C.
Install integral fire stops where cable trays penetrates fire-rated walls and floors. Seal
between cable trays and opening and around opening with fire-rated sealant not less
than wall, or floor, fire ratings.
D.
At floor openings provide concrete curb, 10 cm wide and 10 cm high, around cable trays
and seal with non-combustible material.
E.
Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing (grounding) connections for cable
trays. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified by manufacturers
to assure permanent and effective connections and grounds.
F.
Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors, or ceilings, to ensure enclosures are
permanently and mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper
mounting.
G.
Route cable trays as required and make final field measurements before ordering cable
tray.
H.
Where there is insufficient elevation or lateral change in direction to accommodate fittings

directly connected, adjustable vertical connectors or adjustable horizontal connectors
with straight section in between may be used. Avoid slopes that would cause cable to
bend on smaller radii; than that allowed by cable manufacturer.
I.
Provide hangers, rods, straps, special brackets, and other means of supporting cable
tray as required.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
16114
Section
3 03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Prior to installing cables in cable trays, test for electrical continuity of bonding, and
earthing connections, and to demonstrate compliance with earthing requirements.
B.
Electrically energize cable tray systems and demonstrate functioning in accordance with
requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to
demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (16) Electrical Work
ODAC
Section 16120 LV Wires and Cables

PART 1 - GENERAL
1 02 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Project General and
Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division (16) Electrical Specification Sections apply to
this section:
1. Basic Electrical Requirements.
2. Electrical Testing And Commissioning.
1 03 SUMMARY:
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations
required for installation of L.V. wire and cable and related work as indicated
on the drawings and specified herein.
B. This section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting,
signal, control and related systems rated 600 volts and less.
C. Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by drawings and
schedules.
D. Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this section
include the following:
1. Single core copper conductor/cables
2. Multicore copper conductor/cables
3. Fixtures wires.
4. Control and signal cables.
E. Applications of electrical L.V. wires, cables, and connectors required for
project are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
For power distribution circuits.

For lighting circuits.
For appliance and equipment circuits.
For motor-branch circuits.
For signal and control circuits where not specifically required otherwise under
other sections of the specification.
F. Related Sections: the following sections contain requirements that relate to

this section:
1.
Division (16) Section Electrical Cabinets, Boxes and Fittings for connectors for
Terminating Cables in boxes and other electrical enclosures.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2.
Division (16) Section MV Cables for medium voltage distribution.
3.
Division (16) Section Fire Alarm System Specifications (to be released later):
for fire alarm cables.
1 04 SUBMITTALS:
A.
Product Data: submit manufacturers data (latest published literature) on electrical

wires, cables and connectors.
B.
Field Test Reports: indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with
performance requirements of testing standards.
C.
Technical Data: submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
constructional details, standards to which cables comply, current carrying
capacities, derating factors for grouping and temperature.
2. manufacturers catalogue cuts.
3. dimensional and electrical characteristics.
4. samples of each cable and wire and, if requested by the Engineer, other
accessories.
1.
D.
Certificate of Origin: for each lot of cable supplied, provide a certificate of origin
issued by manufacturer stating origin, date of manufacture, composition, standards
to which it complies and test certificates.
E.
Shop and Construction Drawings: submit drawings for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
1.
Exact routing layouts, sections and profiles of bus-ducts, trays, feeder, subfeeder cables and branch circuits, with indication of any equipment to show and
verify coordination between various trades.
2. Details of supports and fixings for buses, trays and cables.
3. Details of connections to transformers, switchboards, panelboards etc.
4. Details of terminations, splices and tapings where permitted, glands and
bushings at enclosures.
5. Number and size of conductors in conduit for all branch circuits in accordance with
final conduit routing.
1 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference
specifications spcified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction.
A.
Regulatory Requirements: comply with provisions of the statutory laws having

jurisdiction and local codes of practice applicable to the job site/host country.
B.
Design Criteria: Current carrying capacities of conductors have been determined in

accordance with the Regulations for specified type of insulation and expected
conditions of installation. No change will be accepted in specified type of insulation
unless warranted by special conditions and approved by the Engineer. The
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
contractor shall check various loads and current carrying capacities and report any
discrepancies or insufficiency of sizes indicated to the Engineer.
C.
Standards: wires and cables are to comply with IEC, BS or other equally approved
standards and are to bear the mark of identification of the Standards to which they
are manufactured. Wires and cables not having this identification will be rejected .
Acopy of the relevant standards in the English language shall be submitted.
D.
Conform to applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion

products of insulating materials.
E.
Manufacturers: firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire and cable

products of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than 5 years.
1 06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A.
Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory-fabricated type containers,

wound on factory reels.
B.
Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect products from
weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic.
C.
Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrasing, puncturing and tearing wire and
cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of
wires/cables is maintained.
PART 2 PRODUCTS MATERIALS

2 01 MANUFACTURERS:
2 02 WIRES AND CABLES:

Provide wire and cable for the temperature, conditions and locations where installed
General: unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, cables and other feeders
are to have copper conductors. Cable conductors are to be stranded for sections 2.5 mm2
and above, based on IEC 228 Class 2. Signal and control cables are to have solid
conductors unless otherwise specified. Flexible cords are to have finely stranded
conductors. Conductors of single and multi-core cables 25 mm and above are to be
compacted. Multi-core cables 35 mm and above are to be sectoral shape.
l. Conductor Sizes: are to be metric and as shown on the Drawings. Conductors with
cross-sectional area smaller than specified will not be accepted.
2. Colour codes and Identifications (Building wires): in the absence of a national
code/regulation, insulation is to be colour coded or otherwise identified as follows:
a.
Neutral is to be black
b.
Protective earth is to be green or green/yellow striped
c.
Phase colours are to be selected in accordance with local
regulations and IEC standards, where not in contradiction with the local
regulations.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
d.
Control cables shall be identified by numbering system engraved

on insulation.
e.
Telephone, data and communication shall be colour coded as
manufactures standards and regulations.
3. All cables and wires must be of low Smoke zero Halogin LSOH type.
LV Wires:
1. Single Core PVC Insulated unarmored cables (Building Wires): unless
otherwise specified, single conductor wires for wiring in conduit are to have
annealed copper conductors, generally with concentric strands and insulated
with flame retardant, moisture and heat resistant PVC/E to IEC 227 BS
6746(type 5), suitable for wet locations and for conductor temperature of 70
deg. C. Wires are to be 450/750 V grade.
LV Cables:
1.
Multi Core PVC Insulated PVC sheathed Un armoured, LSOH, Cables PVC /
PVC :
Voltage grade
:
600 / 1000 V .
Conductor
:
high conductivity stranded copper .
Insulation
:
color coded to IEE regulations PVC insulate
Standards
:
BS 6346 IEC 502 .
The bedding shall consist of an extruded PVC over which a black
extruded PVC sheath shall be provided.
2. Multi core PVC insulated , Single wire Armoured, LSOH, PVC sheathed Cables
. 0.6/1 KV voltage grade :
Conductor
: Stranded annealed copper .
Insulation
: PVC .
Bedding
: Extruded PVC
Armour
: Single wire galvanized steel .
Sheath
: Black PVC sheath
Standard
: BS 6346 IEC 502 .
Conductor maximum temperature : 70deg. C.
3. Single Core XLPE Insulated, LSOH, Cables (0.6/1KV) :
Conductor
: annealed stranded copper
Insulation
: cross link polyethelene XLPE.
Over sheath
: PVC black .
Conductor Temperature
: 90 deg.C. max .
Standards
: IEC 502 .
Armoured cables are to have taped bedding with single wire
aluminium armour .
4. Multi Core XLPE Insulated, LSOH, (0.6/1KV) Cable
Conductor
:
Annealed
stranded
copper
conductor .
Insulation
: Cross -linked polyethelene XLPE
to IEC 502 .
Conductor temperature
: Up to 90deg. C .
Laying up
: The cores are laid up with right

hand lay , where necessary,
synthetic fillers are used to
maintain circularity .
: extruded PVC layer .
: extruded layer of PVC with PVC , black
color.
: IEC 502 and BS 5467 .
Bedding
Over sheath
Standards
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Armoured cables are to have single layer of galvanized steel wire and
over sheath
5. Flexible, LSOH, Cable for Connection to Appliances, Window Fans, Pendants
etc.: are to be 300/500 V grade to BS 6500, three or four core, with tinned finely
stranded copper wires, EPR - insulated, twisted and sheathed with
chlorosulphonated polyethylene (CSP compound) and with strengthening cord.
6. High Temperature Cable: solid or stranded plain annealed copper conductors to
BS 6360 (in sizes up to 4 mm2), extruded silicon rubber insulation to BS 6889
(0.6 mm radial thickness), aluminum/PVC laminate and PVC composite sheath
with tinned earth continuity conductor/drain wire. Cable is to be rated 300/500 V,
capable of accepting voltage surges up to 5 kV, to operate continuously at 150
deg. C. and for short durations at 200 deg. C. It is to be certified to have passed
IEC 331 and IEC 332 flame resistance and fire retardant tests.
7. High Temperature Cable: plain copper stranded circular conductor complying
with BS 6360, Mica/Glass Fire resistant tape covered by extruded cross-linked
insulation comply with BS 7655 operating temperature 90C, cables is to be
rated 600/1000 V. It is to be certified to have passed IEC 331, BS 6387
categories CWZ, and IEC 332-1 flame resistance and fire retardant test. Cables
are to be used to feed the fire pumps, and other similar loads as shown on the
drawings.
8. Mineral Insulated Cables:
Shall be used where indicated or shown on the drawings . The contractor may
propose such cables for approval for certain applications and areas i.e.
mechanical rooms
The cables shall comply with the followings :-/
Compliance to BS 6207 part 1 , rated 600/1000 V. Cable shall comprise of a
pressure packed magnesium oxide insulation contained within a continuous soft
ductile copper sheath and copper conductors embedded in the dielectric in
standard formation .
Conductor shall be of solid , high electrical conductivity copper .
Each conductor shall be identified with regard to phase by means of sleeving
placed over the neoprene insulation .
Cables shall be shipped with ends sealed against moisture ingress .
Cable shall be 2 hours fire resistive rating and shall be suitable for installation in
hazardous location classes I,II,III and General Requirements and Site Work
and for fire pumping wiring cables embedded in concrete shall have an overall
PVC jacket.
Termination fastenings and supports, stripping and crimping tools , threaded
glands , end seals and sealing compound shall be provided.
A.
Control and Signal Cables

1.
2.
Multicore PVC Insulated Control Cables: 0.6/1 kV rating, solid 1.5 mm, 2.5 mm
or stranded 4 mm plain circular copper conductors, with heat resistive PVC/E to
IEC 227 (PVC type 5 to BS 6717), rated for 85 deg. C, of 7, 12, 19, 24, 30 or 37
cores. Cores are to be laid up together and filled with non-hygroscopic material,
PVC over sheathed, to form compact and circular cable for use in switchgear,
control gear and generally for control of power and lighting systems. Armored
cable is to have extruded PVC bedding which may be an integral part of the
filling, galvanized steel wire armouring, and over sheath of PVC type ST2 to IEC
502, colour black. Core identification is to be white printed numbers 1, 2, 3 etc.
over black insulation.
PE Insulated Control and Signal Cables: for use on instrumentation or data
systems, are to be generally 300 V rating, polyethylene insulated, colour coded,
tinned copper conductors (0.6 mm diameter), twisted together into pairs. Multipair core assembly is to be covered with binder tape, spirally wound 0.075 mm
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
bare copper shielding tape and provided with drain wire and overall PVC
sheath.
3.
B.
Control and signal cables, enclosed in conduit and raceways with power cables,
are to be insulated for same voltage grade. Cables used for controlling
equipment related to the life safety are to be of the fire resistance type.
Connectors for conductors (LV Power)

1.
Provide factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ambacity

ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated
to BS standards or equal. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or
greater than those of the wires upon which used. Connectors shall be two hole
type to prevent swiveling.
2.
Wire and Cable Connectors - Indent or Twist On: (Conductor-type A-1)

Pressure indent type for conductors and splices 10 sq.mm. and smaller,
manufactured from pressed non-ferrous material applied to conductor by
mechanical crimping pressure and covered with an insulating cover, or electrical
spring connector rated 600 volt twist-on type with metal spring, steel shell and
color-coded long skirted, polyvinyl chloride insulator. Connectors shall be rated
600 volts, 105 degrees C ambient.
3.
Wire and Cable Connector - Twist-On: (Conductor-type B-1) Electrical spring

connector for connecting 10 sq.mm.cable and smaller, rated 600 volts, 105
degrees C ambient, consisting of metal spring, steel shell and color coded, long
skirted polyvinyl chloride insulator.
4.
Wire and Cable Connector - Bolted: (Conductor-type A-2) Bolted pressure type
for conductors 16sq.mm and larger, manufactured from non-ferrous copper
alloy material, applied to the conductor by clamping with a minimum of two
bolts, and provided with a phenolic insulating cover rated 600 volts.
5.
Wire and Cable Connector - Compression: Compression conductors for

conductors 16 sq.mm. and larger, manufactured from non-ferrous copper alloy
applied to conductor by mechanical crimping pressure and insulated for 600
volts.
6.
Wire and Cable Tags - Manholes: Sheet lead or zinc to accommodate lettering
as indicated on drawings. Secure tags with a tinned copper wire to cables in
manholes, identifying cables with building and/or equipment served.
7.
Wire and Cable Tags - Self-Adhering: Waterproof tape, fungus resistant, high
adhesion and tensile strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of
job site conditions.
3 02 PREPARATION
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
A.
ODAC
B.
Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the

completeness of the work required under this Section.
Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the
coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related
trades, so as not to delay job progress.
C.
Provide templates as required to related trade for location of items.
3 03 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES:

A.
General: install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors as indicated, in

compliance with applicable requirements of the Regulations/codes applicable, and
IEC, BS and in accordance with recognized industry practices. Building wires and
cables are to be installed in conduit, trunking or ducts indoors and in conduit and
ducts outdoors, unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
B.
Co-ordinate: wire/cable installation work including electrical raceway and equipment

installation work, as necessary to properly interface installation of wires/cables with
other work.
C.
Run d.c. wiring in separate conduits than a.c. wiring.
D.
Run: emergency lighting and power circuits in separate conduits from normal wiring.
E.
Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound or lubricant used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation and must be approved by the Engineer.
F.
Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable
grips, sheaves, winches, ductentrance tunnels which will not damage cables or
raceway. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable.
G.
Maintain colour coding throughout installation. Phase- conductors for which outer
jacket is not colour coded are to have engraved alphanumeric mark (Ll, L2, L3) or
colour coded heat-shrinkable sleeves.
H.
Buried Cables: cables buried directly in the ground are to be armoured type, unless
otherwise indicated in particular Sections of the Specification or on the Drawings.
I.
Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces, or exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours, where possible.
J.
Keep conductor splices to minimum and obtain the Engineer approval prior to
splicing. In case of splices, these are to be inside splice boxes, pull or junction
boxes.
K.
Install splices and tapes connectors which possess equivalent-or-better mechanical

strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. Where feeder
conductors are connected in parallel, taps shall be connected to conductors
corresponding to phases, neutrals and grounds.
L.
Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.
M.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturers published torque tightening values. Where
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
manufacturers torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and

terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in recognized standards.
N.
Pull cables simultaneously where more than one cable is being installed in the same
raceway.
O.
Branch circuit work originating from light and power panelboards is to be arranged as
shown on the Drawings. Loads on various phases of panelboards are to be
balanced.
P.
Control cables may be fixed to racks, installed directly on cable trays or pulled in
conduit and trunking indoors, and in underground ducts or in conduit outdoors.
Q.
Bunching of wires in raceways is to be in accordance with raceway filling factors

permitted by the Regulations.
R.
Before pulling wires in conduits check that inside of conduit (and raceway in general)
is free of burrs and is dry and clean.
S.
Support: cables and wires pulled inside very high conduit risers are to be supported
at upper end of risers and at intermediate points by split rubber grommets to relieve
any stresses on conductors, where required.
T.
Extra Length: at every branch circuit outlet and pull-box, every cable passing through
is to be left slack to allow inspection and for connections to be made. Cables
terminating in outlet boxes are to be left with at least 250 mm extra length for
terminations.
U.
Joints or taps in wires and cables, if permitted, are to be permanently accessible or

made only in boxes or cabinet gutters.
V.
1. Connectors for terminating or making T-taps and splices are to be Type A-1 on
conductors 10 mm2 or smaller, Type A- 2 for conductors 16 mm2 and larger, and
Type B-1 for branch circuit and fixture wiring.
2. Provide approved connectors to BS/IEC specifically for armoured cables.
W. Insulating covers are to be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections.

X.
Switch legs for local wall switches are to have distinctive colour, selected as
complementary to cable colour coding used in the project.
Y.
Terminations: conductors of wires and cables up to 16 mm2 are to be tightly twisted

and where possible doubled back before being clamped with set screws. Where two
or more wires are looped into same terminal these conductors are to be tightly
twisted together before inserting into terminals. In no case is bare conductor to be
allowed to project beyond any insulated shrouding or mounting of a line terminal.
Cables sizes 16 mm2 and larger are to terminate in tunnel lugs with set-screw, or by
using bolted or sweated compression connectors.
Z.
Tagging: tag main and feeder cables in pull-boxes, wireways and wiring gutters of
panelboards or distribution cabinets. With wire and cable tages, self-adhering to
identify cable or circuit number and conductor size in accordance with the
Schedules.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1.
ODAC
Tagging: where two or more circuits are run to or through a control device,
outlet box or ceiling junction box, each circuit is to be tagged as a guide in
making connections.
3 04 FEEDER AND SUB-FEEDER CABLE INSTALLATION

A.
Cables generally are to be run through duct-banks, shafts or special recesses,

clamped to steel racks or cable trays. Cables run through ventilation shafts are to be
installed in steel conduits.
B.
Fixing: single cables above suspended ceilings or in concealed spaces are to be

fixed directly to walls or ceilings but must be accessible. Where two or more cables
are run in parallel, they are to be fixed on galvanized steel perforated trays or on
other approved special cable supporting and protecting arrangement.
C.
Clamps: where cables are fixed to steel trays or supporting structures, approved
galvanized cast steel clamps (or moulded plastic or die cast Aluminum clamps for
single core cables) are to be used at distances not exceeding 20 diameters. Cables
shall be laid parallel in one plane, with the exception of single core cables in trefoil
formation, with a spacing between cables equal to the larger of the two adjacent
cables.
D.
Joints or splices will not be accepted on main and sub- feeders. Cables are to be
supplied in lengths sufficient for straight-through unjointed termination to termination
pull.
E.
Cables laid direct in the ground shall be at a minimum depth of 800 mm below
finished level. A 100 mm tamped bedding and 100 mm tamped covering of sifted soil
or sand is to be provided with a tile cover all along the route of the cables for
protection. Surface cable markers shall be provided on every change of direction and
at 50 m intervals when in a straight line. A tape marker shall be embedded at 300
mm below ground level, all along the cable trench.
F.
Where cables are installed in underground ducts the ducts shall be laid with a
minimum covering of 700 mm to finished level. The ends of the ducts shall be sealed
immediately after any cable installation. The ends of any unused ducts shall be
plugged and sealed.
1.
Draw wires are to be left in all unused ducts.
2.
Just before pulling cables in, ducts shall be cleared with a mandrel 13 mm (1/2
inch) smaller than the internal diameter of the duct and followed by a circular
wire brush 13 mm (1/2 inch) larger in diameter than the duct.
G.
Directly buried cables crossing under roads, pipe banks or other services, are to be
drawn in heavy duty PVC duct banks. In no case are cables to be directly buried in
concrete, in masonry or in floor finishing.
H.
Buried cables liable to mechanical damage are to be drawn through PVC conduit or
asbestos cement pipe. If steel conduit is a used, all three-phase conductor, neutral
and protective earth circuits are to be in the same conduit.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
I.
Where multiple runs occur the cables shall be installed such that crossovers are
avoided wherever practicable; if unavoidable, suitable separators for at least 1 m
each side from the cross-point must be provided according to approved details.
J.
Where cables are run on ladder rack and cable tray, the size and routes of the rack
and tray shall be carefully selected taking into account other services. In addition to
these routes the Contractor shall include for any vertical drops of cable tray and
supporting brackets where cables drop from the main runs to switchgear and
equipment.
K.
In situations where individual cables pass through walls, the cables shall be sleeved
and suitably sealed. Fire barriers are to be provided as necessary by the Safety
Code applicable.
L.
Cables rising from ground level up walls or stanchions shall be protected by a

substantial steel frame to a height of 1.5 meters. Such framework shall be approved
by the Engineer prior to the commencement of work.
M.
Exposure to Heat: route wires and cables to prevent exposure to excessive heat or
to corrosive agents. If such condition is unavoidable, cables are to be type designed
for particular condition.
Insulating covers are to be applied to prevent exposure of bare cable connections.
Insulating cover is to be purpose made and is to provide minimum insulation level
equal to that of conductor insulation.
N.
O.
Glands and cable boxes for various single-core and Multicore cables are to be
purpose made and suitable for rigid mounting to equipment enclosure.
P.
Cables shall be identified at regular intervals and terminations with approved cable
markers.
Q.
Arc Proofing of Cables: Arc-proof cables within enclosures, switchgear and

substation cubicles, pull boxes and manholes. Clean cables of dirt an other foreign
matter. Starting 12 mm from the entering conduits or ducts (to prevent interference
with inherent cable expansion and afford cable inspection) wrap arc and fireproofing
tape over cable with a minimum of 7 mm overlap. Apply a second layer of the same
tape overlapped 7 mm with joints occurring midway between the joints of the first
layer. Secure arc and fireproofing tapes in place by random wrapping with glass
cloth electrical tape.
A.A Cable Glands :

1. All cables shall be fitted with cable glands to BS 6121. Glanding of cables
shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions
and the correct sizes of metric cable glands and adapters (if required ) shall be
used on each cable end .
2.
PCP (polychloroprene ) shrouds shall be supplied and installed on cable glands

.
A.B All cables shall be adequately supported and clipped to within 200mm of the cable
glands at both ends .
A.C Where cables are run on tray/rack , cable ties and cleats/clamps shall be used at
intervals as follows:-
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Maximum spacing of clip/cleats/tie - wraps

Overall
Diameter of
Cable
Mm
<9
>9<15
>15<20
>20<40
>40
R.
NON-armoured
cable
Horizontal
mm
250
300
350
400
800
Armoured
cable
Vertical
mm
400
400
450
550
800
Horizontal
mm
--350
400
450
800
Vertical
mm
--450
550
600
800
Mineral Insulated Cable Installation:

Install cable in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions and the following:
1.
Storage and Handling

a. Store cables in a dry location.
b. When cables are cut in the field, the ends shall be immediately sealed
using approved sealing compound and PVC tape.
c. Cable shall be uncoiled by rolling or by means of a supply reel rather than
pulling from the periphery or the center of the coil to prevent snarling and
kinking.
d. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the cable from blows
with sharp instruments and pulling over sharp objects.
3 05 FEEDER CABLE JOINTING AND TERMINATING:

A.
Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturers
lengths are available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes,
handholds or manholes.
B.
Joints in flexible cables and cords are not permitted
C.
Recommendations: through joints and terminations are to be carried out strictly in

accordance with cable manufacturers recommendations, and made with correct
specified materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or mixtures, glands and bonds as
applicable.
D.
Where Joints are unavoidable:

1.
Jointing: skilled operatives are to be employed for jointing of cables.

Qualifications of operatives are to be submitted to the Engineer prior to work
commencing on site. Joints are to be filled with epoxy resin after taping unless
contrary to cable manufacturers recommendations. Sample site constructed
cable terminations and through-joints are to be submitted to the Engineer prior
to commencing work on site. All samples are to be constructed in the presence
of the Engineer and are to be available to the Engineer for test and inspection in
accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
2.
For PVC/PVC & XLPE cables , cast resin moulded type joints shall be used.The
jointed cores shall be insulated by means of several wrappings of tapes as
recommended by the manufacturer . The cable armouring shall be made
continuous within the joint by means of bonding tape and clamps .
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
3.
Complete joints and termination in the shortest time to the Engineer Approval .
4.
Fill joints with compound filling in stages to allow the material to flow .
5.
Joints shall be made by means of tinned copper connectors compression type

or equal approved .
6.
Ensure sealing compounds are poured at the correct temperature .
E.
Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent
damage to insulation in general, and to cable sheathing..
F.
Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of sponge and white spirit.
3 06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A.
Cable tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the
Regulations and Standards. Cables shall be tested on the cable drums prior to
removal to the work site.
B.
Test Equipment: provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable, and HV

test equipment as necessary for testing MV installations. Use 500 V megger on
installations with nominal voltage up to 500 V, 1000 V megger on installations with
nominal voltage over 500V up to 1000V.
C.
Insulation resistance tests for LV power and lighting installations is to be measured

in accordance with IEE Regulations 613-5 through 613-8 and 713-04.
D.
Insulation resistance for control and signal cables is to be minimum 10000 Megohmkm for PE insulated cables and 100 Megohm-km for PVC insulated cables, all
measured core-core and core-earth, in accordance with the Regulations.
E.
Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohm
meter to determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
F.
Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for shortcircuits.
G.
Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate

functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct
malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.
END OF SECTION (16120)
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division (16) Electrical work
ODAC
Section 16124

Section 16124 Medium Voltage Cable
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Requirements of the following Division (16) Electrical Specification Sections apply
to this section:
1 02 SUMMARY:
A.
Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required
for installation of Medium Voltage Cables and related work as indicated on the
drawings or specified herein.
B.
This section includes single and multiple conductor cables and splices, terminations,
and accessories for cables above 1000V rating.
C.
Related Sections: the following Division (16) Electrical Specification Sections

contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Raceways for conduits and ducts for cable.

Cable Trays for cable tray type installations.
Supporting Devices for cable and termination supports.
Distribution Transformers for cable termination provisions.
Medium Voltage Switchgear for cable termination provisions.
1 03 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division
(1) General Requirements Sections:
1. Product data on cables and cable accessories including descriptions and detailed
specifications(latest published literature).
2. Shop drawings of splices and terminations.
3. Product certificate signed by manufacturer that its products comply with the
specified requirements.
4. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer of cable splicing and terminating
products that Installers comply with training requirements specified under Quality
Assurance.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16124
5. Installer certificates signed by Contractor that Installers of cable splices and

terminations meet the experience qualifications specified under Quality
Assurance.
6. Product Test Reports: certified reports of manufacturers factory production and
final tests indicating compliance of cable and accessories with referenced
standards.
7. Report of Field Tests: certified copies of field test records.
8. Samples: 300 mm long of each type of cable specified.
9. Maintenance data for cables and accessories for inclusion in Operation and
Maintenance manual specified in Division (1) General Requirements and in
Division (16) Electrical Specification, Section Basic Electrical Requirements. In
addition to the requirements specified there, include:
a.
Manufacturers written instructions for periodic tests of cables in service.
A. Installer Qualifications: engage an experienced Installer of medium-voltage electrical
cable to perform the installation specified in this section. In addition, for the specific
work of cable splicing and terminating, engage Installers who are experienced in
cable splices for the specific types of cable and cable accessories specified in this
Section.
B. Field Testing Organization Qualifications: to qualify for acceptance, an independent
testing organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organizationsubmitted criteria, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily
the testing indicated in accordance with the Standards.
C. Standards Compliance: cables and components shall be marked, listed and labeled
by Manufacturer in accordance with the approved standards of manufacture (IEC,
BS etc.).
D. IEC Compliance: components and installation shall comply with the relevant IEC
Standards and the local Authority specification having jurisdiction.
1 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver medium-voltage cable on factory reels conforming to Standard applicable or
as otherwise specified.
B. Store cables on reels on elevated platforms in a clean, dry location.
1 06 WARRANTY:
A.
Special Project Warranty: submit a written warranty, mutually executed by

manufacturer and the principal Installer, agreeing to repair or replace mediumvoltage cables, splices, and terminations that fail in materials or workmanship within
the special project warranty period specified below. This warranty shall be in addition
to, and not a limitation of, other rights and remedies the Employer may have against
the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Project Warranty Period: 2 years beginning on the date of Substantial

Completion.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16124
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 01 MANUFACTURERS:
2 02 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLE-GENERAL:
A.
General: cable shall be single or multi conductor types, with types and sizes as
indicated, and conforming to IEC Standard 502 Extruded Solid Dielectric Insulated
Power Cables for rated voltages from 1 kV to 30 kV or other specification of equal
or higher standards and as specified in particulars below.
2 03 MV CABLE:
A.
Single Core MV Cable 11/20 (17.5)KV, XLPE insulated, for use on systems with
voltage 11 kV, is it to comply with IEC 502, and have the following characteristics:
conductor :
Aluminum, circular, stranded and compacted.
conductor screen : extruded semi-conducting layer
insulation
:
extruded cross-linked
polyethylene (XLPE),
minimum
4.5 mm
thick.
Insulation Screen :
extruded semi-conducting layer,
Alluminum Screen: Layer of alluminum wires or Alluminum tape.
oversheath
: extruded PVC type ST2 to IEC 502
short-circuit rating: 13 kA (minimum) for one second for 95 mm2 cables
B.
Three Core MV Cable 11/20 KV, XLPE insulated, for use on systems with voltage 11
kV, is to comply with IEC 502, and have the following characteristics:
conductor : Aluminum, circular, stranded and compacted.

conductor screen : extruded semi-conducting layer
insulation
: extruded cross-linked polyethlene (XLPE), minimum 4.5mm
thick
Insulation screen: non-metallic directly applied extruded semi-conducting
Part
material, readily strippable
metallic part
:
Layer of aluminum tape applied with 15% overlap
filling and bedding : Polypropelene extruded over laid up cores to form
compactcircular bedding
armour
: double layer of galvanized steel tape
outer sheath
: extruded PVC type ST2 to IEC 502
short-circuit
: 34 KA (minimum) for one second rating for 240 mm2 cables
Armoured cable, where required or shown on the drawings, is to have single layer of
aluminum wire or two layers of aluminum tape between bedding and over sheath.
Cable joints: to be as recommended by manufacturer, to render joints equal to cable in
characteristics in terms of insulation, stress distribution and water- tightness. Materials and
methods of jointing are to be approved before confirmation of order.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16124
2 04 SPLICING AND TERMINATING PRODUCTS:

A.
Types: compatible with the cable materials and equipment terminations specified
under respective equipment sections of this specification. Approval by the Engineer
for each particular type is required before ordering materials.
B.
Connectors: compression type as recommended by cable or splicing kit

manufacturer for the application.
C.
Splicing and Terminating Kits: as recommended by the manufacturer in writing for

the specific sizes, ratings, and configurations of cable conductor, splices, and
terminations specified. Kits shall contain all components required for a complete
splice or termination including detailed instructions and shall be the product of a
single manufacturer. Completed splices and terminations shall provide insulation
equivalent to the insulation class of the cable it connects, as well as protection.
D.
Multiconductor Cable Sheath Seals: designed to seal the end of multiconductor cable
against moisture where the sheath ends at a cable terminations. Seal shall be of the
type recommended by the seal manufacturer for the specific type of cable and
installation and conditions of use, including orientation of the device (upright,
horizontal, or inverted) where this affects selection. Seal fittings for armoured cable
shall include provision for earthing the metal cable armor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
30 1 EXAMINATION:
A.
Examine raceways, cable trays, pull boxes, manholes, junction boxes, and other
cable installation locations for cleanliness of raceways, minimum bending radii of
cables, and conditions affecting performance of cable. Pull a mandrel through
raceways to check for suitable conditions. Do not proceed with cable installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 INSTALLATION. GENERAL:
A.
General: install cable accessory items in accordance with manufacturers written

instructions and as indicated.
3 03 INSTALLATION OF CABLES:
A.
Refer to Section LV Wires and Cables for feeder and sub-feeder cable installation
requirements applicable to this Section.
B.
Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one cable is indicated in same
raceway. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where
necessary. Do not exceed manufacturers recommended maximum pulling tensions
and sidewall pressure values.
C.
Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable
grips that will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling
attachment to cable.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16124
D.
Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural

members and follow surface contours where possible.
E.
In trenches, pull boxes and cable vaults, train cables around walls by the longest
route from entry to exit and support cables at intervals adequate to prevent sag.
3 04 INSTALLATION OF SPLICES:
A.
Install splices at pull points and elsewhere as indicated using standard kit. Conform
to kit manufacturers written instructions.
3 05 JOINTING AND TERMINATIONS:

A.
Install though joints and terminations at ends of conductors and seal multi conductor
cable ends with standard kits. Conform to manufacturers written instructions.
Comply with classes of terminations indicated.
B.
Through joints will not be allowed in feeder cables where adequate manufacturers
lengths are available. Where a joint is necessary, it has to be made inside boxes,
handholes or manholes.
C.
Recommendations: through joints and terminations are to be carried out strictly in

accordance with cable manufacturers recommendations, and made with correct
specified materials, boxes, tapes, compounds or mixtures, stress cones, glands and
bonds as applicable.
D.
Samples: samples of joints and terminations are to be constructed and are to be

available for testing and inspection in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations in the presence of the Engineer.
E.
Cutting tools for jointing and terminating cables are to be purpose made, to prevent
damage to insulation in general, and to cable shielding of cables.
F.
Cleaning of lacquer on conductors is to be by use of sponge and white spirit.
G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturers

published torque tightening values. Where manufacturers torquing requirements are
not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques
specified in applicable standards of manufacture.
3 06 EARTHING:
A.
Earth shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated

connectors. Earth metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated
connector fittings, and hardware in accordance with manufacturers written
instructions.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16124
3 07 IDENTIFICATION:
A.
Identify cable in accordance with Division (16) Electrical Specification Section

Electrical Identification.

A.
General: comply with applicable standards of reputable international electrical testing

organization.
B.
Preparation: perform the following preparations in advance of independent tests:

1. Test cables insulation resistance.
2. Test circuits continuity.
3. Furnish a set of Contract Documents and manufacturers
recommendations to test organization.
4. Make power available at test locations.
C.
Schedule tests and notify Engineer at least one week in advance of schedule for test
commencement.
D.
Test procedure shall conform to the following:

l. Independent Testing Organization: arrange and pay for the services of an
independent electrical testing organization in accordance with the requirements of
Division (1) General Requirements Section Quality Requirements to perform
tests on medium-voltage cable.
2. Test Objectives: to assure cable installation is operational within industry and
manufacturers tolerances, is installed in accordance with Contract Documents,
and is suitable for energizing.
3. Procedures: comply with the testing organization standards and upon satisfactory
completion of tests, attach a label to tested components.
E.
Tests shall include high-potential test of cable and accessories and such tests and
examinations required achieving specified objectives. Where new cables are spliced
to existing cables, the high-potential test shall be performed on the new cable prior to
splicing. After test results for new cables are approved and splice is made, an
insulation resistance test and continuity test are to be done on the length of cable
including the splice and existing cables being tested to the nearest disconnect point.
F.
MV Cable Testing: provide cable test-set with d.c. output voltage and ampere range
sufficient to test MV cables. Cables are to be laid in position (trench or duct bank),
jointed where applicable, but left uncovered, with ends free of equipment and clear of
ground.
1. D.C. test voltage is to be applied between core under test and the screen in
steps, pausing one minute or more each step (first step being the a.c. rms rated
voltage of the cable, followed by two equal steps) up to maximum test voltage. At
each step, and for the last 5 15 minutes duration at maximum test voltage, the
ammeter (normally a micro-ammeter) is to be closely watched and recorded. If,
except as voltage is increased, the current starts to increase, test is to be stopped
and the installation inspected and tested for the fault.
2. Each cable/core is to be tested indendantly. Maximum d.c. test voltage for
grounded neutral system is to be 3 times rated a.c. rms voltage of cable.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16124
G. MV Cable Testing: alternative test is to apply a.c. rms voltage up to 1.5 times a.c.
rms rating of cable (8.7 kV for 15 kV cable), applied for 15 minutes, by an approved
a.c. test set. Readings are to be within same range and in accordance with IEC 502.
H.
Reports: the testing organization shall maintain a written record of observations and
tests, report defective materials and workmanship, and retest corrected defective
items. Testing organization shall submit written reports to the Engineer and
Contractor.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16135

Section 16135 Electriacl Cabinets, Boxes & Fittings
PART 1 - GENERAL
to this section.
1.Basic Electrical Requirements.
1 02 SUMMARY:
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required
for installation of electrical boxes and fittings and related work as indicated on the
drawings and specified herein.
B. This section includes cabinets, boxes, and fittings for electrical installations and
certain types of electrical fittings not covered in other sections. Types of products
specified in this Section include:
1. Outlet and device boxes.
2. Pull and junction boxes.
3. Cabinets.
4. Hinged door enclosures.
5. Floor boxes
C. Related Sections: following Electrical Specification Sections contain requirements
that related to this section.
1. Division (16)-BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Division (16)-RACEWAYS.
3. Division (16)-WIRING DEVICES.
4. Division
(15)MECHANICAL
WORKS
section
ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORKS.
5. Division (16)-EARTHING
1 03 DEFINITIONS:
A. Cabinets: an enclosure designed either for surface or for flush mounting and having
a frame, or trim in which a door or doors may be mounted.
B. Device Box: an outlet box designed to house a receptacle device or a wiring box
designed to house a switch.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16135
C. Enclosure: a box, case, cabinet, or housing for electrical wiring or components.

D. Hinged Door Enclosure: an enclosure designed for surface mounting and having
swinging doors or covers secured directly to and telescoping with the walls of the
box.
E. Outlet Box: a wiring enclosure where current is taken from a wiring system to supply
utilization equipment.
F. Wiring Box: an enclosure designed to provide access to wiring systems or for the
mounting of indicating devices or of switches for controlling electrical circuits.
1 04 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and
Specification Sections:
1. Product data: Submit manufactures data for cabinets and enclosures and boxes
of various types:2. Shop drawings: for special boxes enclosures and cabinets that are to be shop
fabricated (nonstick items). For shop fabricated junction and pull boxes, show
accurately scaled views and spatial relationships to adjacent equipment. Show
box types, dimensions, and finishes. Show mounting methods, indoor, outdoor or
other.
1 05 QUALITY ASSURANCE;
A. Manufacturers: firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical cabinets,
enclosures, boxes and fittings, of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.
B. Standards: IEC439, IEC536, IEC144 and 79, NEC 63-410, BS4662, BS5486.1, NEC
15-100, C13-100, C12-100 or approved equal for system of wiring selected.
C. Listing and labeling: items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by
International standards where applicable and approved for the project.
D. Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference
specifications specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Code Compliance: Comply with electrical codes as applicable to construction
and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings.
2. Electrical boxes shall be in accordance with latest editions of IEC/BS
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 MANUFACTURERS:
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16135
2 02 CABINETS, BOXES AND FITTINGS, GENERAL:

A.
Electrical Cabinets, Boxes, and Fittings: have indicated types, sizes, and protection
classes. Where not indicated, provide units of types, sizes, and classes appropriate
for the use and location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories
required for the intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations.
2 03 MATERIALS AND FINISHES:

A.
B.
C.
Sheet Steel: flat-rolled, code-gage, galvanized steel to applicable standards.

Fasteners for General Use: corrosion resistant screws and hardware including
cadmium and zinc plated items.
Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: stainless steel screws and hardware.
D.
Cast Metal for Boxes, Enclosures, and Covers; copper-free aluminum except as
otherwise specified.
E.
Exterior Finish: baked enamel, (gray or beige as selected by the Architect/Engineer),

for items exposed in finished locations except as otherwise indicated.
Painted Interior Finish: where not indicated, white baked enamel.
F.
G.
Fittings for Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures: malleable iron or zinc plated steel for
conduit hubs, bushings and box connectors, conferment with respective standards
applicable (conduit standards applicable or approved, in host country for use with
appropriate device outlets).
2 04 METAL OUTLET, DEVICE AND SMALL WIRING BOXES:

A. General: electrical metallic outlet boxes and fittings shall be of type, shape, size, and
depth compatible with location and application. Refer to Section Wiring Devices of
Division (16)Electrical Specifications.
B. Steel Boxes: boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded hubs,
covers and accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and
straps, cable clamps, exterior rings and fixture studs, conforming with the approved
standards of this project.
2 05 NONMETALLIC OUTLET, DEVICE AND SMALL WIRlNG

BOXES:
A. General: conform to approved standard for Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device
Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports and Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush Device
Boxes and Covers. Boxes shall be moulded PVC units of type, shape, size, and
depth to suit location and application. Refer to Section Wiring Devices of Division
(16) Electrical Specification.
B. Boxes for Concealed Work: mounting provisions and wiring entrances to suit
installation conditions and wiring method used.
C. Boxes for Exposed Work: ultra-violet stabilized, nonconductive, high impactresistant boxes with integrally moulded raceway entrance hubs and removable
mounting flanges. Boxes shall be equipped with threaded metallic inserts for device
and cover plate-mounting screws. Each box shall have a moulded cover of matching
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16135
PVC material suitable for the application. Provide gasket of PVC or neoprene for
outdoor or wet locations.
2 06 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:

A. General: comply with applicable project Standards, and Code of Practice, for boxes
over 1500 CU.cm volume. Boxes shall have screwed or bolted-on covers of material
same as box and shall be of size and shape to suit application.
B. Hot-Dipped Galvanized Steel Boxes: sheet steel with welded seams. Where
necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural steel bracing.
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Cover shall be gasketed.
C. Cast Nonmetallic Boxes: ultra-violet stabilized, nonconductive, high impactresistant
PVC boxes with gasketed cover and integral mounting flanges.
2 07 CABINETS:
A.
Comply with approved applicable standards for this project.
B.
Construction: sheet steel IP30 to IEC 144 except as otherwise indicated. Cabinet
shall consist of a box and a front consisting of a one-piece frame and a hinged door.
Arrange door to close against a rabbet placed all around the inside edge of the
frame, with a uniformly close fit between door and frame. Provide concealed
fasteners, not over 600 mm (24-inches) apart, to hold fronts to cabinet boxes and
provide for adjustment. Provide flush or concealed door hinges not over 600 mm (24inches) apart and not over 150 mm (6-inches) from top and bottom of door. For flush
cabinets, make the front approximately 19 mm (3/4 inch) larger than the box all
around. For surface mounted cabinets make front same height and width as box.
C.
Doors: double doors for cabinets wider than 600 mm (24-inches). Telephone
cabinets wider than 1200 mm (48-inches) may have double flap or sliding doors.
Removable doors will only be accepted if approved.
D.
Locks: combination spring catch and key lock, with all locks for cabinets of the same
system keyed alike. Locks maybe omitted on signal, power, and lighting cabinets
located within electrical closets and mechanical-electrical rooms. Locks shall be of a
type to permit doors to latch closed without locking.
2 08 STEEL ENCLOSURES WITH HINGED DOORS:

A.
Comply with IEC 439.
B.
Construction: sheet steel, 1.5 mm (16 gage), minimum, with

continuous welded seams. Protection class as indicated; arranged for
surface mounting.
C.
Doors: hinged directly to cabinet and removable, with approximately

19 mm (3/4-inch) flange around all edges, shaped to cover edge of
box. Provide handle operated, key locking latch. Individual door width
shall be no greater than 24-inches. Provide multiple doors where
required.
D.
Mounting Panel: provide painted removable internal mounting panel

for component installation.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
E.
ODAC
Section 16135
Enclosure: IP41 to IEC 144 as otherwise indicated. Where door

gasketing is required, provide neoprene gasket attached with oilresistant adhesive, and held in place with steel retaining strips. For all
enclosures of class higher than NEMA 1A, use hubbed raceway
entrances.
2 09 CAST METAL ENCLOSURES WITH HINGED DOORS:

A.
Copper free aluminum with bolted, hinged doors. Where used at hazardous
(classified) locations, enclosures shall conform to applicable standard and shall be
listed and labeled for the classification of hazard involved.
2 010 MOULDED NONMETALLIC ENCLOSURES WITH HINGED

DOOR:
A.
2 011
General: molded, glass fiber reinforced high impact strength polyester with bolt or
screw secured doors and solid neoprene gaskets.
FLOOR BOXES:
A.
Floor Boxes: cast-iron raintight adjustable floor boxes as indicated, with

threaded-conduit-entrance ends, and vertical adjusting rings, gaskets, floor plates
with flush screw-on covers with ground flange and cover screws.
B.
Floor Box Accessories

1. Provide devices and outlets recessed in box with screw cover and split bell nozzle
to protect wiring.
2. Provide devices and outlets recessed in box with flap cover.
3. Provide service fittings on top of box and connected
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 EXAMINATION:
A.
Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of
job site conditions.
3 02 PREPARATION:
A.
Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the

completeness of the work required under this Section.
B.
Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the
coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related
trades, so as not to delay job progress.
C.
Provide templates as required to related trade for location of items.

5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16135
3 03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A. Locations: install items where indicated and where required to suit code
requirements, installation conditions and in accordance with manufacturers
written instructions.
B. Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused
conduit hubs.
C. Support and fasten items securely in accordance with Electrical Specification
SectionSupporting Devices.
D. Sizes shall be adequate to meet Code or Regulation requirements, but in no case
smaller than sizes indicated.
E. Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel.
3 04 APPLICATIONS:
A. Cabinets, Indoors, Flush mounted: IP30 to IEC 144 or except as otherwise
indicated.
B. Hinged Door Enclosures, Indoors: IP51 to IEC 144 or enclosure except as
otherwise indicated.
C. Hinged Door Enclosures Outdoors: IP54 to IEC 144 or with drip hood, factory
tailored to individual units.
D. Outlet Boxes and Fittings: install outlet and device boxes and associated covers
and fittings of materials and types suitable for each location and in conformance
with the following requirements:
1. Interior Dry Locations: IP30 to IEC 144 or NEMA type 1, sheet steel or
nonmetallic as specified and/or permitted by local code.
2. Wet Locations: IP54 to IEC 144 or NEMA types 4 enclosures.
E. Pull and Junction Boxes: install pull and junction boxes of materials and IEC
types suitable for each location except as otherwise indicated.
3 05 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES:

A. Outlets at Windows and Doors: locate close to window trim. For outlets indicated
above doors use 2100 mm mounting height above finished floor and center
outlets above the door opening except as otherwise indicated.
B. Locations in Special Finish Materials: for outlet boxes for receptacles and
switches mounted in desks or furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block,
marble, brick, stone or wood walls, use rectangular shaped boxes with square
corners and straight sides. Install such boxes without plaster rings. Saw cut all
recesses for outlet boxes in exposed masonry walls.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16135
C. Gasketed Boxes: at the following locations use cast metal, threaded hub type
boxes with gasketed weatherproof covers:
1. Exterior locations.
2. Where surface mounted on unfinished walls, columns or pilasters. (Cover
gaskets may be omitted in dry locations).
3. Where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere.
4. Where indicated.
D. Mounting: mount outlet boxes for switches with the long axis vertical or as
indicated. Mount boxes for receptacles either vertically or horizontally but
consistently either way. Three or more gang boxes shall be mounted with the
long axis horizontal. Locate box covers or device plates so they will not span
different types of building finishes either vertically or horizontally. Locate boxes
for switches near doors on the side opposite the hinges and close to door trim,
even though electrical floor plans may show them on hinge side.
E. Ceiling Outlets: for fixtures, where wiring is concealed, use PVC outlet boxes 100
mm (4-inches) square by 37.5 mm (I-I/2-inches) deep, minimum. For exposed
installations above suspended ceilings which is not used as a plenum, use PVC
outlet boxes. For exposed installations above false ceilings which is used as a
plenum, use steel boxes.
F. For data transmission, telephone pull boxes use metallic steel boxes.
G. Cover Plates for Surface Boxes: use plates sized to box front without overlap and
provide blank plates on outlet boxes in which no device is installed.
H. Protect outlet boxes to prevent entrance of plaster, and debris. Thoroughly clean
foreign material from boxes before conductors are installed.
I.
Concrete Boxes: use extra deep boxes to permit side conduit entrance without
interfering with reinforcing, but do not use such boxes with over 150 mm (6-inch)
depth.
J.
Floor Boxes: install in concrete floor slabs so they are completely enveloped in
concrete except for the top. Where normal slab thickness will not develop box as
specified above, provide increased thickness of the slab. Provide accessories in
the floor boxes with earthing terminal, consisting of a washer in head machine
screw, screwed into a tapped hole in the box. Adjust floor boxes flush with
finished floor. Cover finish is to match floor finish. Details are subject to the
Engineers approval.
3 06 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:

A.
B.
C.
Box Selection: for boxes in main feeder conduit runs, use sizes not smaller than 200
mm square by 100 mm deep. Do not exceed 6 entering and 6 leaving raceways in a
single box. Quantities of conductors (including equipment grounding conductors) in
pull or junction box shall be in accordance with the applicable codes and regulations.
Cable supports: install clamps, grids, or devices to which cables may be secured.
Arrange cables so they may be readily identified. Support cables at least every 75
cm (30-inches) inside boxes.
Mount pull boxes in inaccessible ceilings with the covers flush with the finished
ceiling.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
D.
E.
Size: provide pull and junction boxes for telephone, signal, and other systems at
least 50 percent larger than would be required by Standard or Regulation, or as
indicated. Locate boxes strategically and provide shapes to permit easy pulling of
future wires or cables of types normal for such systems.
Provide pull and/or splice boxes where indicated on the drawings or required
facilitating pulling of wires and cables.
3 07 INSTALLATION
ENCLOSURES:
A.
B.
C.
ODAC
Section 16135
OF
CABINETS
AND
HINGED
DOOR
Mount with fronts straight and plumb.

Install with tops 1950 mm above floor.
Set cabinets in finished spaces flush with walls.
3 08 EARTHING:
A.
Electrically earth metallic cabinets, boxes, and enclosures. Where wiring to item
includes a grounding conductor, provide a grounding terminal in the interior of the
cabinet, box or enclosure.
3 09 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR:

A.
Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt, and

construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions
and weld marks.
B.
Galvanized Finish: repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the

manufacturer.
C.
Painted Finish: repair damage using matching corrosion inhibiting touch-up coating.
D.
Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cables, wiring

devices, and racway installation work.
E.
Avoid installing boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 150 mm
separation.
F.
Do not install aluminum products in concrete.
G. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been
removed.

8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16143

Section 16143 Wiring Devices
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Requirements of the following Division (16) Section apply to this section:
1- Basic Electrical Requirements
2- "Electrical Testing And Commissioning.
1 02
SUMMARY:
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of wiring devices and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified
herein.
B. This section includes (but not limites) the following:
1- Outlet boxes and plates
2- Lighting switches
3- Socket outlets (Receptacles).
4- Dimmer Panels (if applicable)
5- Time controlled switches
6- Lighting contactors
7- Photoelectric cells
8- Floor service outlets (if applicable).
9- Wall plates.
10Ground fault circuit interrupter Receptacles.
11Power Post
C. Related Sections: the following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1- Division (16) Section Circuit and Motor Disconnects for devices other than snap
(lighting) switches and plug/receptacle sets used as disconnects for motors.
2- Division (16) Section Electrical Identification for requirements and legends to be
engraved on wall plates.
3- Division (16) SectionsTelephone Systems and Date Cabling And Equipment Antenna
TV Systems Specifications for wiring devices required.
4- Division (16) SectionsSound Systems Specifications for volume control & wiring
devices required.
1 03
SUBMITTALS:
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16143
A. Product Data: submit manufacturers data on each electrical wiring device specified for
approval by the Engineer.
B. Submit samples of those products indicated for sample submission in Engineers
comments on product data submittal. Include colour and finish samples of device plates
and other items per Engineers request.
1 04
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Regulatory Requirements: comply with provisions of the local regulations, codes and
standards applicable in the project/host country. Components shall be standard
approved manufacturers products, uniform and modular.
B. Standards Compliance: provide wiring devices, which are listed and comply with the
latest edition of applicable standards for the various applications indicated in the
specification. Equipment of NEC/VDE standards are acceptable In case of descripary
the specification should prevail.
1 05
SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING:

A. Schedule installation of finish plates after the surface upon which they are to be installed
has received final finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 01
MANUFACTURERS:
A. General: as a guide to the product, manufacturer and catalogue reference is given for
each item specified. Equal products of other manufacturers may be approved if
conforming to requirements.
B. Manufacturers:
2 02
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:

A. Provide wiring devices, in types , characteristics , grades, colors, and electrical ratings
for applications indicated which are in compliance with BS standards unless otherwise
indicated . Verify color selection and final material finish with Architect and interior
design. All cover plates, and devices should subject to the Engineer Approval. Detailed
specifications and configuration as shown on the drawings.
B. Outlet boxes and plates-generally:
1. Surface or Recessed Boxes: provide compatible type with conduit or cable system and
of shapes and sizes compatible with standards applicable to switches, socket outlets and
lighting fixtures approved.
2. Unused Openings: close with knock-out closers manufactured for the purpose.
3. Blank Plates: provide blank plates on outlet boxes installed in the tenant space or on
which no apparatus is installed or where apparatus installed does not have suitable
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16143
cover for box. Blank plates for wall outlets are to be attached by a bridge with slots for
horizontal and vertical adjustment.
4. Non metallic boxes are to be used for recessed outlets in ceiling or wall.
C. Metallic outlet boxes
1. Manufacturers: obtain metallic outlet boxes from same manufacturer of conduit system or
equally approved compatible with wiring device specified, and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
2. Recessed and Concealed Boxes: galvanized pressed steel, with knock-outs for easy
field installation. Special boxes are to be punched as required on Site.
3. Exposed Surface Mounted Boxes: galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs.
4. Outdoor Surface or Recessed Boxes: galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs and
neoprene gaskets to ensure water tightness and with stainless steel or non- ferrous,
corrosion resistant screws.
D. Moulded plastic outlet boxes.

1. Type: heavy gauge pressure moulded plastic, minimum 2 mm thick, self extinguishing,
with softening point not less than 85 deg. C. Boxes are to have provision for securely
terminating conduits and are to be manufacturers standard for required application.
2. Fittings: provide brass inset threads to receive cover screws and for mounting devices or
accessories, push-fit brass earth terminals, and steel insert clips to provide additional
support for pendants or for heat conduction. Provide Neoprene gaskets for weatherproof
installations.
E. Plates and Cord-Outlet
1. Wall Plates: single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as
indicated. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached.
Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match
finish of plates. Provide wall plate color to match wiring devices except as otherwise
indicated. Provide wall plates with engraved legend where indicated. Conform to
requirements of Section Electrical Identification. Provide plates possessing the following
additional construction features:
2. Cord Extension Plates: are to have threaded cord grip bushings of same material and
finish as plates.
3. Stainless Steel Plates: heavy gauge, pressed stainless steel, satin finish, minimum 1 mm
thick, for use in service areas and corridors, stores, electrical and mechanical rooms and
the like, except where otherwise indicated.
4. White Plates: heavy gauge, for indoor use in apartments, offices, control rooms, operator
rooms, BMS, security, public corridors, lobbies, entrances and toilets and the like, except
where otherwise indicated.
5. Cable/cord outlet is to be used for up to 45 A, 250 V rating for connection of power/control
cable of fixed appliances. Plate is to have threaded cord grip to anchor cable securely to
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16143
cover. Box is to include fixed terminal block and cable clamp for termination of cable/cord
within.
F. Switch and socket finishes in Building.
1. The colour of switches, sockets and cover plates are to be subject to the Engineer
approval
2. Securing screws shall match the colour of the face-plate.
3. Sockets and switches are to be German Standard type.

4. Guest room units are to be sta-kleen phenolic and public and service areas are to be
metal decora wall plate design, and approved by special building tower.
5. Exterior weatherproof switches and receptacles are to be stainless steel type.

G. Lighting switches
1. General: quick-make, quick-break quiet type with silver alloy contacts in arc resisting
moulded base, with toggle, rocker or push-button as specified, for inductive or resistive
loads up to full rated capacity, and arranged for side and/or back connection.
2. Types: single, two-way or intermediate, single pole or double pole, as shown on the
Drawings.
3. General Lighting Switch: 10 A 250 V a.c., rocker operated, grid-switch with stainless steel
plate, for indoor installations in general, unless otherwise indicated.
4. General Lighting Switch: similar to item (3) mention above but with white plate, two
module mechanism.
5. Remote Lighting Control Panel For Contactor Control: multiple two way momentary on/off
push switch assembly, with an on pilot light for each circuit controlled (remote
contactor). Panel and box are to be sheet steel construction, with see-through steel
framed acrylic door and trim, handle and lock. Enclosure protection IP 42 to IEC 144 for
indoor installation and IP 55 for outdoor installation.
6. Weatherproof Switch: 10 A, 250 V, for installation in outdoor and wet areas, with
weatherproof plate, synthetic gasket, weatherproof outlet box, on/off indication, IP 55
enclosure.
7. Manual Motor Switch: 2 pole, for fractional single phase motors and appliances, to
interrupt motor and induction loads, rated 30 A at 240 V a.c., and 20 A at 600 V a.c.,
toggle operated, with positive indication of on/off position of contacts.
8. Explosion Proof Switch: 10A, 250 V, made of cast iron or aluminum alloy, flame proof (Ex
d) to IEC for installation in hazardous explosive areas.
H. Socket outlets
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16143
1. General: provide injection moulded plastic base socket outlets with self- adjusting, nonexpanding contacts to prevent permanent distortion, arranged for side and/or back
connection and with screw terminals accepting at least three parallel branch-circuit wires.
2. Types: provide socket outlets conforming with German standard DIN practice, unless
3. Duplex Sockets: provide two socket outlets mounted in parallel under one common plate
with break-off feature for two circuit connection.
4. Weatherproof socket outlets provide types indicated, enclosed in surface or recessed
mounted cast metal box and with spring-retained gasketted hinged flap. Enclosure is to
be pre-designed box and cover for type of socket outlet specified.
5. Weatherproof Socket Outlet - (220 V Service): 16 A, 250 V, 2 pole plus earth, German
Standard, enclosed in recessed mounted cast-metal box and with cover comprising
spring- retained gasketted hinged flap.
6. Standard German Socket -: single phase, two wire, for plug with 3 mm round pins at 19
mm centres, and with side earthing in accordance with German standard practice and
rated 16 A, 250 V a.c.
7. Standard German Socket : similar to item (6) mention above but with white plate, rated
16A and shatter type.
8. Power Socket -: single outlet, single phase, three wire, 16 A, 250 V, polarized with earth
contact, splash proof moulded cast metal plate and matching plug, IP44, to IEC309-1 &
2.
9. Power Socket : similar to item (8) mention above but rated at 32A, suitable for outdoor
use.
10.
Power Socket -: single outlet, 3 P+N+E, 3 phase, polarized, rated 16A, 380V, to
IEC 309, with splash proof cast metal box and hunged spring return plate, and with
matching plug.
11.
Power Socket Outlet -: single outlet, 3P+N+E, 3 phase, polarized, rated 32 A,
380V, to IEC 309, with splash proof cast metal box and hinged spring-return plate, and
with matching plug 3P+E.
12.
Floor Socket Outlet: single phase, 16A, 250V Standard German, suitable for
installation in heavy duty, water tight floor box with cover to match floor finish, subject to
the Engineers approval Refer to section Electrical Cabinets, Boxes and Fittings of the
specification for floor box requirements.
13.
Explosion Proof Socket Outlet: 16 or 20 A, 250 V, made of cast iron or aluminum
alloy, flame proof (Ex d) to IEC, for installation in hazardous explosive areas.
I. Plugs
1. Type: compatible with type of socket outlet specified, break resistant, of impact resistant
moulded insulating material (separable construction), with solid brass pins and cord grip
and of shape providing easy hand-grip for removal. Special purpose type plugs are to be
approved by the Engineer.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16143
2. Quantity: supply number equal to 25% of total number of each type of socket outlet
supplied.
3. Cord and Plug Sets: match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to
requirements of the equipment being connected.
a) Cord: rubber-insulated, stranded copper conductors, with silicon rubber jacket.
Grounding conductor has green insulation. Ampacity is equipment rating plus 30 percent
minimum.
b) Plug: male configuration with nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match to cord
and to receptacle type intended for connection.
4. Pendant Cord/Connector Devices: Matching, locking type, plug and plug receptacle body
connector, NEMA L5-20P and L5-20R heavy duty type.
J. Dimmers for incandescent or fluorescentlamps (if applicable).
1. Generally: dimming control is to be suitable and rated for type and number of lamps
indicated on the Drawings, and is to be electronic with thyristor control of the start of
each alternating current flow.
All lighting control equipment dimming panels, switching panels, dimming ballasts,
control panel and controls are to be manufactured by single manufacturer.
2. Dimmer panel: Dimmer panel is to be wall or ceiling mounted, constructed of sheet steel
plates, contractor shall reinforce wall as required for wall mounted panels.
a) Panels shall be completely prewired by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall be
required to provide input feed wiring, load wiring and control wiring.
b) Panels are to be cooled via free convection, unaided by fans, and capable of continuous
operation to all of these section specification within an ambient temperature range of 0
deg. C. to 50 deg. C.
c) Panels fed from emergency supply: are to include electronics to bring all emergency
circuits to a full on condition upon the loss of normal power supply and the subsequent
presence of emergency power. All control wires required for the above operation are to
be coordinated between the dimmer and emergency panel manufacturers.
d) Under full-load conditions in 50 deg. C. environment all silicon thyristors shall operate at
a minimum 20 deg. C.safety margin below the component temperature rating.
e) The maximum allowable asymmetry in the load warform are to be
+/- 1VDC.
f) Each dimmer shall incorporate an electronic Soft-Start default at initial Turn-on that
smoothly ramps the lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.
g) Dimmer output voltage shall be minimum 95% of input voltage at maximum intensity
setting.
3. Florescent Dimming: control systems are to be coordinated design, electronic, used with
electronic ballasts specified for dimming, whether for standard type preheat 38 mm
conventional fluorescent tubes or 26 mm tri- phosphor tubes.
4. Variation of Luminous Intensity: to be smooth over continuous dimming range from 1%
for incandescent lamps, and from 5% for fluorescent lamps, up to 100% intensity or full
normal brightness.
5. Control: preset dimming control shall provide power failure memory. Should power be
interrupted and subsequently returned, the lights will come back on to the same levels
set prior to the power interruption.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16143
a) Wall station control is to have 4 button scene plus one button for raise/lower zones.
b) Wall station face plate colour is to be selected by the interior decorator.
c) Wiring from dimming panel to preset dimming control and accessory control are to be low
voltage type Class 2.
K. Time controlled switches (if applicable):
1. Time Controlled Switches: provide electrically operated time controlled switches with 24hour dials capable of periodically and automatically switching indoor and outdoor lamps
both ON and OFF selectively. Select switches, which permit selection of from 1 to 12
ON- OFF operations each day and allows timing durations of 1 to 23 hours; with ratings
(220V) (50 Hz) and with SPST switch of 40-amperes per pole. Provide indoor/outdoor
mount steel enclosure, of suitable protection, with side hinged door and lock, mounting
holes and conduit hubs. Provide timing switch with manual circuit by-pass switch and
separate grounding terminal. Finish enclosure with manufacturers standard colour finish
and/or as approved by the Engineer. Unit is to maintain operation for at least 12 hrs in
case of a power failure.
L. Lighting Contactors
1. Type: double pole for single phase and neutral circuits, and triple pole for three phase
circuits, mechanically held, electrically operated, rated 600 V, of current ratings shown on
the Drawings, and complying with IEC 947-4 category AC 5a for discharge lamps and
category AC 5b for incandescent lamps.
2. Contacts: copper alloy, with silver cadmium alloy double break contacts designed for
switching inductive ballast loads and switching of tungsten lamp loads.
3. Auxiliary Contacts: as required to provide specified interlocks and signals as shown on
the Drawings, or required by the Specification, with one N.O. and one N.C. spare
contacts.
4. Enclosure: unless forming part of system housed in sheet steel panel, contactor is to be
provided with IP 42 enclosure for indoor use or IP 65 enclosure for outdoor use.
5. Local Control: each contactor whether part of a system or separately enclosed is to have
on/off pilot lights and set of on/off push buttons mounted on cover.
6. Central Control: provide interfacing elements to match with control system, BACS
system, and remote control wiring terminals as necessary and as shown on drawings.
M. Photoelectric cells (if applicable)
1. Photoelectric Cells: omnidirectional cadmium sulphide, hermetically sealed, with 2:1
on/off adjustment possible by moving light level selector, set to operate at illuminant
levels shown on the Drawings. Unit is to include timer giving 3 minute delay to prevent
false switching. Unit must be capable of accurate operation in a temperature range of 10 deg. C to +80 deg. C.
2. Safety: control is to be designed such that in case of failure, unit fails in the on position.
3. Contacts are to close or open as illumination level increases to set level with respect to
requirements shown on the Drawings.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16143
4. Outdoor Sealed Units: heavy duty cast metal, with translucent dome of Lexan and
approved product, to protect against high ultra violet rays, and be provided with 180 deg.
swivel base and 16 mm threaded conduit mounting. Enclosure is to be weatherproof and
protected against high winds and storms.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01
EXAMINATION:
A. Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to insure
proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site
conditions.
3 02
PREPARATION
A. Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of
the work required under this Section.
B. Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to
delay job progress.
C. Provide templates as required to related trade for location of items.
3 03
INSTALLATION
ACCESSORIES:
OF
WIRING
DEVICES
AND
A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with applicable

requirements, Local Electrical Code or Regulations and in accordance with recognized
industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations,
as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work.
C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from building
materials, dirt, and debris.
D. Install galvanized steel wall plates in unfinished spaces.
E. Locate switches at strike sides of doors, whether shown on the Drawings or not. In
locating outlets allow for overhead pipes, ducts, variations in arrangement, thickness of
finishing, window trim, paneling and other architectural features. Electrical Design
Drawings: generally show approximate locations of outlets and equipment. Exact
locations are to be determined from interior finishing and detail drawings. Any condition
that would place an outlet in an unsuitable location is to be referred to the Engineer.
F. Unless otherwise shown or instructed, mount lighting switches and socket outlets
generally at 1250 mm and 450 mm from finished floor level respectively. Mount switches
with long dimension vertical and operating handle, if of the toggle type, up when switch is
in the on position.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16143
G. Connect switches in the phase wire. Do not run neutral wire through switch boxes
switches having neutral shunt or bridge.
H. Provide additional outlets to those shown on the Drawings as required by equipment
manufacturers for control or other wiring.
I. Securely Exposed Outlet Boxes: securely fasten to wall with machine screws to
permanent inserts or lead anchors.
J. Provide neat openings for recessed boxes, allowing for thickness of finishing, and use
extension rings if required. Repair damaged finishing to original condition before
installation of fittings or plates.
K. Install exposed boxes and plates plumb, square and parallel to finished wall surface.
Exposed plates covering recessed boxes are to rest neatly on wall surface without gaps,
and fully covering the box.
L. Arrange grouped outlets uniformly and neatly so that use of devices is convenient and
clear.
M. Follow manufacturers instructions for installation of waterproof and explosion proof
fittings and connection to conduit system to fully achieve required degree of protection.
N. Connection of Appliances:
1. where appliance is designed to adapt directly to outlet box, extend electrical wiring to
incoming terminals inside appliance
2. where appliance is not designed to adapt to outlet box, install connecting wiring in
flexible conduit or special flexible cable, mechanically protected, firmly fixed to outlet box
cover plate and to terminal box on appliance, with suitable accessories.
O. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.
P. Install wall plates after painting work is completed.
Q. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturers published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where
manufacturers torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals
comply with tightening torques specified in UL standard 486A. Use properly scaled
torque indicating hand tool
3 04
PROTECTION:
A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final
acceptance.
3 05

A. Carry out visual inspection of fittings and equipment for fixing and workmanship.
B. Testing: prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for shortcircuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing,
test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each
operable device at least six times.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16143
C. Test ground fault interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations in
accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16150

Section 16150 Miscellaneous Control Equipment
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
B.
A.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all miscellaneous
control equipment in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of miscellaneous control

equipment of the types and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide miscellaneous
control equipment produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in
this section.
B.

IEC, EN, NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards pertaining to miscellaneous
control equipment. Provide miscellaneous control equipment which have been listed and
labeled.
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for miscellaneous control equipment,

including sizes and types of enclosures, finishes, and electrical ratings and
characteristics.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 CONTACTORS AND REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES
A.
GENERAL
1.
Mechanically or magnetically held with contacts normally open or normally

closed and/or combination as indicated on drawings or required.
2.
Rated for continuous operation with capacities and voltage at 50 Hz, as indicated
on drawings or required.
Spring loaded contacts to maintain contact pressure in closed position, readily
replaceable, self-aligning type.
3.
4.
Suitable for inductive or non-inductive loads, unless otherwise noted.
5.
With arc shields and magnetic blow coils if interrupting duty exceeds 300
ampere.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
B.
C.
Section 16150
6.
Interrupting capability not less than six times rated full load current.
7.
Operating coils voltage: 220 volts, unless otherwise noted.
8.
Enclosure:
mounting.
Dead front, NEMA type, soundproof, with vibration isolation
MECHANICALLY HELD CONTACTORS

1.
Single and/or dual coil operation.
2.
Positive locking type without the use of latching hooks or magnets.
3.
With a manual operator for hand operation giving positive indication of contactor
position.
4.
Control Circuit: For 3-wire operation with momentary contact open/close stations
as indicated.
MAGNETICALLY HELD CONTACTORS

1.
Spring assisted gravity open on normally open contacts and spring loaded
magnetically open in normally closed contacts.
2.
Control Circuit: For 2-wire operation with maintained contact open/closed

stations as indicated or required.
2 02 MULTIPLE POLE RELAYS

A.
Electrically operated, mechanically held type, with 10 amperes minimum rated contacts.
B.
Open and close coils rated 220 volts or 380 volts, 50 Hz, unless otherwise indicated or
required.
C.
Number of poles as indicated on drawings or schedules.
D.
Enclosure: Industry Standards.
2 03 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS

A.
Rated as required for voltage, momentary volt-ampere load, continuous volt-ampere load
and suitable for the intended application.
B.
With primary and secondary over current protection with fused switches in accordance
with the codes governing.
2 04 PHOTOCELLS
A.
Single pole, 10 amperes, 220 VAC for control of lighting as indicated.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16150
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A.
Examine conditions under which miscellaneous control equipment are to be installed.

Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do
not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
3 02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install miscellaneous control equipment and accessories as indicated in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards in accordance
with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements
and serves intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of miscellaneous control equipment

work with other work.
C.
Protect miscellaneous control equipment systems from dirt, moisture and construction
debris subsequent to and during installation until project is accepted by Owner.
D.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors.
E.
Mount all equipment in cabinets suitable for installation with all necessary bus bars and
terminal strips. Separate low and high voltage sections with barriers.
F.
Provide all wiring, conduit and accessories including but not limited to terminal strips,
rectifiers, switches, and fuses for systems to perform intended function.
G.
Provide emergency shut-down facilities at mechanical equipment rooms and other

locations indicated on drawings and as required.

A.
Prior to energization of installed miscellaneous control equipment, test for electrical

continuity of circuitry and for possible short circuits.
B.
Electrically energize miscellaneous control equipment systems and demonstrate

functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning
units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be
satisfactorily corrected.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16170

Section 16170 Safety and Motor Isolator (Disconnects)
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
The requirements of this section apply to safety and motor disconnects specified
elsewhere in the specification
A.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all safety and
disconnect switches (fused and un-fused) in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of safety and motor disconnect

switches of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than 3 years. Provide safety and motor disconnects
produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
B.

IEC, EN, NEC, UL and NEMA Standards pertaining to safety and motor disconnects.
Provide disconnect switches which have been listed and labeled.
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature,
installation, instructions, and catalog cuts for each type of safety and motor disconnect
switches.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 SAFETY AND MOTOR DISCONNECT
A.
SWITCH INTERIOR
1.
Switchblades fully visible in the OFF position when the door is open.
2.
Removable arc suppressor where necessary to permit easy access to line side
lugs.
3.
Industry listed lugs for aluminum and/or copper cable and front removable.
4.
Plate all current carrying parts.
5.
Provision for field installed fuse pullers.
6.
Solid neutral where required
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
7.
B.
C.
Section 16170
Industry approved fuse clips.
SWITCH MECHANISM
1.
Heavy duty load break type 4 poles.
2.
Rating: Voltage, poles, amperes, horsepower, and maximum available fault

current as required or shown on drawings.
3.
Quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism integral with the
box, not the cover.
4.
Defeatable dual cover interlock to prevent inadvertent opening of the switch door
in the ON position or closing of the switch mechanism with the door open.
5.
Handle position to indicate if switch is ON or OFF.
6.
Provision for padlocking handle.
ENCLOSURE
1.
Industry Standard except as otherwise noted or required, with multiple knockouts

on all sides and back.
2.
Hinged door and cover.
3.
Industry Standard for exterior installation.
4.
Industry Standard type most suitable for the environmental condition of the area.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A.
Examine conditions under which safety and motor disconnects are to be installed. Notify
Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install safety and motor disconnect switches as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with
requirements and serves intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of safety and motor disconnects with

other work.
C.
Protect disconnect switches from dirt, moisture and construction debris, subsequent and
during installation until project is accepted by Owner.
D.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws bolts and equipment grounding
connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening
values for equipment connectors.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16170
E.
Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances and motors and controllers
within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Provide box with spare set of each size fuse used on project. Provide nameplate on
switch, indicating equipment served.
G.
Install fuses in fused switches.
H.
Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and

effective ground, for electrical disconnect switches.

A.
Upon completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches and after circuitry has
been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Close all
switches to check for proper energization of all loads. Where possible, correct
malfunctioning units then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and
replace with new units and retest.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16195

Section 16195 Electrical Identification
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
The requirements of this section apply to electrical identification specified elsewhere in

these specification.
A.
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, and services to complete
and make ready for the Owner, the identification of all electrical equipment as required by
this section and other sections of the specifications. This includes, but is not limited to
buried cable warning, power, control and communication conductors, operational
instruction and warnings; danger signs, and equipment system identification signs.
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical identification

products of types required whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
B.

IES, NEC, UL, and NEMA standards pertaining to electrical identification.
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
products.
B.
Samples, complete with nomenclature for the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Submit manufacturer's data on electrical identification materials and
Engraved lamacoid plates of each size of lettering.

Wraparound labels.
Metal tags.
Enameled sheet metal signage.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16195
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 LAMACOID NAMEPLATES
A.
Identification for power centers, switchboards and panel-boards: Engraved lamacoid

nameplates with 6 mm high white lettering on black background fastened to the outside
face of the front.
B.
Identification for distribution switches or circuit breakers of the following:

1.
For Individually Enclosed Units: Engraved lamacoid nameplates with 3 mm high

white lettering on a black background fastened to outside front face of enclosure.
2.
For Panel-boards Without Doors: Same as for individually enclosed.
3.
For Panel-boards With Doors:

Typewritten directories mounted behind
transparent plastic cover, in metal frames fastened on inside face of doors;
directories to indicate circuit number, designation of room and number and item
being served in directories.
2 02 WRAPAROUND LABELS AND METAL TAGS

A.
Identify the wires and cables of feeders by means of fiber or non-ferrous metal tags
fastened with non-ferrous metal wires or bands throughout; fastenings for metal tags of
the same metal as the tag.
2 03 ENGRAVED LETTERING
A.
Engrave device plates for local toggle switches, toggle switch-type motor starters, pilot
lights, and the like, whose function is not readily apparent with 3mm high letter suitably
describing the equipment controlled or indicated.
2 04 STAMPED LETTERING
A.
Stamp phase identification letters into the metal of the bus bars of each phase of the
main busses of each power center switchboard and panelboard; make letters visible
without having to disassemble any current carrying or supporting elements.
2 05 IDENTIFIABLE MARKINGS
A.
Identify each outlet box, junction box and cabinet used in conjunction with empty
raceway for wires of a future system by means of identifiable markings on the inside
denoting the system.
2 06 ENAMELED SHEET METAL SIGNAGE

A.
Equip all electric switchboard rooms, electric closets, metal screened spaces assigned to
electric equipment and the like, with enameled sheet metal "red on white" signs reading
"Electric Equipment Room - No Storage Permitted"; mount signs at clearly visible
locations within the rooms.
2 07 PORCELAIN ENAMEL RED ON WHITE

A.
Mark all outdoor substations with porcelain enamel red on white reading "Danger - High
Voltage" and in accordance with Utility Company requirements.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16195
2 08 ENGRAVE
A.
B.
Device plate for receptacles other than 220 volt 10 and 16 amperes receptacles with 3
mm high black letters and designating the following:
1.
Voltage
2.
Number of phases
3.
Current rating.
Device plates for receptacles on emergency, engraved "EMERGENCY" as described in

Section 16143.
2 09 MARK
A.
Cabinets housing emergency lighting and receptacle panel-boards with the word
"EMERGENCY" stenciled in 5 cm high red letters on the outside of the cabinet, in
addition to other lettering and nameplates required above.
2 010 NOMENCLATURE
A.
The nomenclature used to identify power centers, dimmer boards, switchboards and
panel-boards to match the nomenclature used on the drawings.
B.
The nomenclature used to identify switched or circuit breakers to:
C.
1.
Designate where they disconnect mains or service together with suitable

differentiating nomenclature where more than one service or main is involved.
2.
Designate the feeder number and the name of the load supplied where they
control feeders.
3.
Designate the name of the space and the load supplied where they control
lighting and appliance branch circuitry.
The nomenclature used to identify feeder wires and cables to designate the feeder
number.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A.
Examine conditions under which electrical identification products are to be installed.

Notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical identification products with

other work.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16195
C.
Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authority for identification
of electrical work.
D.
Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of
electrical systems and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems
and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized
personnel, install signs or similar equivalent identifications, instruction or warnings on
switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where
detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly
written messages adequate for intended purposes.
E.
Install signs at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with
operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except
use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate substrate.
F.
Securely fasten signage and nameplates.
G.
Identify each wire or cable in a feeder at its terminal points of connection and in each
hand-hole, pull box, junction box and panel gutter through which it passes.
H.
Label all conductors in wire-ways and pull and junction boxes with panel-board
designations and circuit number.
I.
Identify Individually:
1.
Switchboards
2.
Main and feeder devices in switchboard
3.
Distribution and circuit breaker panel-board
4.
Automatic transfer switches
5.
Transformers
6.
Strip cabinets
7.
Safety switches
8.
Audio-visual equipment cabinets
9.
Boxes for fire alarm system
10.
Cabinets, junction and pull boxes of all systems installed, i.e., fire alarm (life
safety) system, telephone, television, security, etc.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16320

Section 16320 Distribution Transformer
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings
and
general
provisions of Contract,
Supplementary Conditions and apply to work of this section.
including
General
and
1 02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation,all wiring devices in accordance with drawings and
Specifications.
1 03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of transformers of the types, and
capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, IEC Standards,
pertaining to 10.5 KV and 0.4 KV Distribution transformers.
1 04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's data including, size enclosures, and electrical ratings and
characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings : submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of
primary switchgear transformer, single-line diagram, and outline drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01
A.
GENERAL
GENERAL DESCRIPTION:
This work shall consist of
transformers for indoor service.
furnishing
and
installing
complete
distribution
Basic Rating shall be as Follows :

Capacity
as mentioned on the designe drawings.
-
Frequency
Phases
50Hz.
3
Primary
10.5 KV, delta, Radial feed.
Secondary Voltage 400/230 volt, star with solid system rounded neutral.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16320
The single diagram shown, outlines the scope of work and shows the intended
arrangement of the major equipement and devices.
2 02
TRANSFORMERS SPECIFICATION:
1.
Transformers shall be of the indoor dry type OR Liquied filled transformers

(insulation oil transfermer) low losses type. compliance with the requirements of IEC
recommendation.
The transformer's core shall be built up from grain oriented stress relieved cold-rolled silicon
sheet steel lamination insulated on both sides. The windings are to be of copper
conductors insulated with high dielectric strength-tapes,having very good temperature
stability. the windings shall be firmly braced to avoid loosening due to short circuit.
The HV and LV terminals together with the neutral shall be brought outside the transformer's
body through proper bushings arranged according to specifications.
The no-load tap changer shall be mounted on the body cover and the different position are
to be identified.
It shall be so rigid to withstand the mechanical stresses expected during transportation.
Step-Down Transformer Data:
Rating
Primary Voitage
as mentioned on the design drawings

[ 10.5+(2x2.5%) / 0.4KV ]
-(4x2.5%)
400/230 volts at no-load.
3
50 Hz.
Secondary Voltage
No. of phases
Frequency
Ambiet temperature
(Average)
45 C
Impedance at principal
tapping.
6%
Terminal arrangements : H.V. cable bushings for XLPE insulated, armoured, 3-core
ALUMINUM cable, 3x240 sq.mm.area.
L.V. suitable connection for low voltage cables
Audible Sound level 60 db max. measured at 3000 mm.
Transormers shall be cooled by natural ventilation.
The tansformer's shall be provided with noise reduction support blocks in order to reduce
the noise level.
The HV and LV terminals together with the neutral shall be of brought outside the
transformer's body through proper bushings arranged according to specifications.
The transformers described in this specification shall be of continuous duty at the specified
ratings under the specified site conditions, for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
The transformers shall be equipped with all accessories deemed necessary for proper
operation.
Nameplates shall be of stainless steel and must be attached permanently to the
transformer.
Nameplates shall include the following informations:
-
kind of transformer.
Applicable specifications.
Manufacturer's name.
Serial number.
Year of manufacture.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16320
Number of phases.
Rated power.
Rated voltages.
Rated currents.
Connection symbol/vector group.
Impedance voltage at rated current.
Total weight.
The following routine testes shall be performed on each transformer according to IEC prior
to dispatch.
-
Measurements of winding resistance.

Measurements of voltage ratio and phase relationship.
Measurements of impedance voltage.
Measurements of load losses.
Measurements of no-load loss and current.
Power frequency withstand voltage test.
Induced overvoltage withstand test.
Test reports of these tests shall be made available at no extra cost.
2. 03
EQUIPMENT DATA/SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop/construction drawings for installations covered under this sub-section shall include
but not be limited to the following:
B. Construction and installation details for the tranformers.
C. Floor plan and top views showing locations of power and control conduit, ground cable
entries and size, location and arrangement of cables
D. Details of connection of cables to transformers and to main distribtion boards.
E. Wiring and schematic diagrams of power, control, relay, metering and similar circuits.
F. Handing, installation and assembly drawings.

G. Dimensioned outline drawings and sectional views.
H. Complete techical data on data operating characteristics, Compliance with standards,
dimensions and weights, detailed descripition, operating mechanism ....etc.
Complete technical data on the constrution of the manufacturer's catalogues.
2 04
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Refer to the attached manufacturers' list .
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16390

Section 16390 Sub-station Earthing
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
B.
General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, applies to work of this section.
C.
Requirements of this section apply to electrical earthing work specified elsewhere in

these specifications.
A.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation, all substation earthing work in
accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as required for a complete system.
A.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of earthing

products, of types, and ratings required, and ancillary materials, including stranded cable,
copper braid and bus and bonding jumpers whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B.

IEC, NEC, UL and IEEE Standards pertaining to electrical earthing circuitry and
equipment. Provide earthing products which are labeled for their intended usage.
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on earthing products and associated

accessories.
B.
Samples : Submit sample of earthing cables and earthing accessories.
C.
Shop drawings : Submit dimensional layouts on architectural background drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 ELECTRODES
A.
Earth rods shall be of circular cross-section copper bond type Sections shall be jointed
with purpose made couplings and a suitable driving cap and tip shall be fitted to the rod
extremities. Couplings shall not exceed the diameter of the rod.
B.
Rod section couplings, driving cap and tip shall be bronze or other material which
exhibits mechanical strength, electrical continuity between sections and does not give
rise to electrolytic or corrosive action. All coupling units shall be the same length of
threaded length of the rod.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16390
C.
Earth rods shall be a minimum length of 3 meters and shall be driven into the ground
using a suitable mechanical hammer. The tops of the rods shall be driven below ground
level to suit the inspection pit.
D.
The top of each rod electrode shall be housed in a purpose made concrete pit to facilitate
inspection. The pit shall be provided with a lid and the assembly shall be flush with
ground level.
E.
Earth pits shall be provided with a waterproof seal.
F.
All copper cables or strip shall be connected 95 mm from the top of the earth rod with a
purpose made non ferrous clamp.
G.
Parallel connected earth rods shall be spaced at a horizontal distance equal to their
buried length. They shall be connected with bare 95 mm stranded copper cable unless
otherwise shown on the drawings, buried not less than 800 mm below ground level
unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
H.
Copper strip or stranded cable may be installed in the same trenches as HV/LV cables
but shall be separated from all other cables and services by a distance not less than 300
mm.
I.
The resistance to earth of the electrode system shall not exceed two ohm. Site testes
shall be made to ascertain that the electrode system resistance meets this requirement.
If the resistance exceeds this figure the contractor shall submit his proposals to reduce
the system resistance to the specified level.
2 02 EARTHING CONDUCTORS
A.
Earthing conductors connecting the main earthing terminal or bar and electrode system
shall be green/yellow PVC insulated, stranded copper cable. A minimum of two earthing
conductors shall be installed and separately connected to the main earth bar with bolted
test links of copper and having a cross section equal to the main earth bar.
2 03 MAIN EARTHING TERMINAL

A.
The main earthing terminal shall consist of hard drawn copper to IEC, DIN/VDE
Standards BS 1432 formed into a bar having minimum dimensions as detailed in the
earthing schematic.
B.
Each earthing bar shall be mounted not less than 450 mm above the finished floor level
and spaced by means of insulators not less than 50 mm from the fixing surface.
C.
The diameter of fixing holes shall not exceed one third of earthing bar width. Where this
is not possible then the connection shall be made to a copper flag welded to the earthing
bar.
D.
Each connection to the main earthing terminal shall be identified with an appropriately
worded label made of durable material.
2 04 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
A.
Protective conductors between equipment earthing terminals or bars and the main
earthing terminal or bar shall be made with 95 mm stranded copper insulated cables
unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Cables shall be connected to remote ends of
the equipment earthing terminals or bar and separately connected to the main earthing
terminal or bar.
B.
Where a number of protective conductors follow the same route these shall be
green/yellow PVC covered and installed on a galvanized cable tray and fixed with
purpose made cleats.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16390
C.
Connections between main earthing terminal or bars, equipment earthing terminals, etc,
and stranded copper cables shall be made with appropriate compression type lug, bolt,
nut and lock washers. Contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and tinned.
D.
Sockets lugs, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, rivets, clamps, cleats or other items which
come into direct contact with copper protective conductors bars, strips, cables etc, shall
be non-ferrous and manufactured from brass, bronze or other suitable conducting
material which will not cause electrolytic or other corrosion. Where connections occur
between copper and galvanized structures, contact surfaces shall, additionally, be tinned
and after completion compounded to exclude moisture. Protective conductors, cables,
strip, bars, lugs, etc, shall be installed in visible and serviceable positions.
The ojoints shall be made using zinc free brazing material with a melting point of at least
600 C. The amount of overlap between the two strips to be jointed shall not be less than
the width of the larger conductor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions under which electrical earthing connections are to be made and
notify in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install electrical earthing system as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with recognized
industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves
intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of electrical earthing system work with

other work.
C.
Earth the electrical installation including, but not limited to, the following: Underground
distribution, substation service equipment, electrical service system neutral switchgear
housings, cabinets, housings and neutrals of transformers lighting protection system,
emergency distribution systems, busway enclosures, motor control centers, individual
starters and other non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment.
D.
Wherever flexible metal conduit or cable are used for part of a raceway run, provide an
earthing conductor in the raceway or cable and connect to earthing bushings at each end
of run.
E.
Where pull boxes contain barriers, provide an earth lug in each section.
F.
Install earthing conductors in all wiring where non-metallic conduit is used.
G.
Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment earthing conductors with
earthing lug, bus, or bushing.
H.
Route earthing connections and conductors to earth and protective devices in shortest
and straightest paths as possible to minimize transient voltage rises.
I.
Install clamp-on connectors on clean metal contact surfaces, to ensureeconductivity and

circuit integrity.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16390
J.
Bond all conductive piping system in the building to the electrical system earth. Make
bonding connections as close as practical to the water pipe or service equipment
earthing bar.
K.
Where expansion fittings occur, provide internal code size earth conductor terminating in
adjacent pulling points with earthing bushings.
3 03 EARTH TESTS
After installation of the individual earthing systems in accordance with the above for the various
parts of the works and after the whole installation has been connected up, resistance tests shall
be carried out at each sub-station and for each earth source independently and the readings
obtained officially and recorded. Three readings shall be obtained for each sub-station relating to
the two earth paths connected individually and in parallel.
An Evershed and Vignoles or similar earth tester shall be used and all results tabulated and
handed to the Engineer.

A.
Upon completion of installation of electrical earthing, test ground resistance with ground
resistance tester.
B.
Weld earthing conductors to underground earthing electrodes.
C.
Earth electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to earthing

electrodes.
D.
Earthing each separately-derived system neutral to:

1.
Effectively earthed metallic water pipe.
2.
Effectively earthed structural steel member.
3.
Separate earthing electrode.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16420

Section 16420 Primary Meduim Voltage Ring main Units
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions,
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division.
The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this
section unless specified to the contrary.
C.
C.
Specification Section 15547: Mounting and Isolation of Mechanical and Electrical

Systems and related contract drawings apply to this section of the work.
A.
necessary to complete, make ready and set to work for operation by the Owner, primary
switchgear and ring main units in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A.
B.
Acceptable manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of primary

switchgear of the types and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years as approved by Architect.
IEC, BS, EN, NEC, NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE Standards, pertaining to primary medium
voltage and ring main units. Provide primary medium voltage ring main units products
and components which conform to one or more of the foregoing codes and standards.
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for primary medium voltage ring main units,
including, size, enclosures, and electrical ratings and characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of

primary medium voltage ring mian units , single-line diagram, and outline drawings.
C.
After Architect's approval and prior to fabrication, submit foregoing including approved
transformer shop drawings to Utility Co. for approvals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Refer ro the attached manufacturers' list.
2 02 RING MAIN UNITS

1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
A.
Section 16420
Each main unit comprises two three-pole load break switches rated 630 Amps for the
incoming ring main feeders cables, one three-pole breaker 630 A for the outgoing cable
connected to the transfomer as per E.E.A. requirments.
The unit must comprise measuring compartment including three current
transformers and voltage transformers protected with H.R.C. fuses to effect metering the
input electric power by the electricity authority.
B.
Cable termination boxes shall be provided for the incoming and outgoing.
C.
Switch disconnectors shall be manufactured to IEC 298, 294 and 262 category B VDE-67
part 3 and 6 or BS 5227 or any approved equal.
D.
They shall be air insulated or SF 6 gas insulated compact ring main unit of IP 65, and of
3 pole gang operated type capable of interrupting safely, their nominal full load current.
E.
The switch disconnector shall have the following rating :

1. Nominal voltage
10.5 KV.
2. Maximum operating voltage
12 KV.
3. Rated current
400 A.
4. BIL 1.2/50 us
a. Between phase and earth
b. Over open blades
125 KV.
145 KV.
5. Power frequency test voltage

a. To earth
b. Over open blades
55 KV rms.
75 KV rms.
6. Load breaking capacity

At power factor 0.7 and Un
630 A.
7. Closed loop breaking capcity

At power factor 0.3 and 0.25 Un
630 A.
8. Cable charging breaking

Capacity
63 A.
9. Rated short time current for 1 second

a. Line blades
b. Earth blades
10.
Peak with stand current

a.
b.
F.
25 KA rms.
12.5 KA rms.
Line blades
Earth blades
50 KA.
25 KA.
The outgoing feeder panel breaker type shall have and equipped with the following
components :
1)
Auxiliary relay.
2)
One motor operated, vacuum type or SF6 circuit breaker related 630 A, with 500
MVA short circuit breaking capacity.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
3)
Section 16420
Three current transformers with separated secondaries for metering and

protection.
Accuracy class
Ratio
0.5 for metering.

1.0 for protection, n>/10
:
200-400/5/5/5A
4)
Three ammeters with scale 0-400 A and accuracy 1.5.
5)
One three phase non-directional over current relay with instantaneous short
circuit and definite time characteristic.
6)
Three potential transformers, each protected by H.R.C. fuse, for metering and
protection.
Ratio
11000
3
110
3
110
3
7)
One voltmeter, scale 0-24 KV, class of accuracy 1.5, with selector switch.
8)
One three phase directional over current relay with instantaneous short circuit
element and definite time characteristic. Relay characteristic must be coordinated
with and approved by EEA (Egyptian Electricity Authority).
9)
Earthing switch.
10)
Earth fault relay.
11)
Kwh-meter, For 3-phase, 3-wire unbalanced loads, class 0.5, rating 110 V/5A to
operate from the secondaries of voltage and current transformers.
12)
Ditto but KVARH-meter.
13)
Power factor meter.
14)
Auxiliary relay.
15)
A capacitor trip device shall be provided with the circuit breaker shunt trip to
ensure that energy will be available for tripping during fault conditions. A control
power transformer is required on the source side of the circuit breaker. This
control power transformer shall have sufficient capacity to supply other AC
auxiliary power requirements for the ring main unit.
G.
The ring main unit shall be of SF6 type.
H.
The load break switches shall be operated by hand-operated handles through levers. A
protective barriers must be provided to safeguard the personnel from unintential contact
with the live parts during switching operations.
Marking labels shall be fitted to indicate the ON/OFF positions of the switches and the
hand-operated handles shall be provided with locks.
Insulating barriers shall be inserted between the open contacts when working on cables.
I.
Earthing switches are to be provided on the feeders side to enable earthing the cable
feeders when working on the cables.
J.
Mechanical interlocking between the load break switches and their relevant earth
switches such that no load break switch can be switched on as long as his mate earth
switch is in the ON position and vice versa.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
K.
Section 16420
Ring main unit must be equipped with earth fault indicator of the type and accoriding to
the Electricity Authority.
EQUIPMENT DATA
Equipment data for materials covered under this section shall include but not be limited
to the following :
Construction and installation details for the 11KV ring main unit equipement.
Floor plan and top views showing outline dimensions and arrangement of
cubicles.
Details of connection of high voltage cables to the cubicles.
Handling, installation and assembly drawings.
Key interlocking scheme showing key numbers and operations performed.
The equipment data to be provided prior to ordering any material covered by this section
shall include but not be limited to the following :
Complete technical data on the 10.5 KV ring main unit other equipment including data on
operating characteristics, compliance with standards, dimensions and weights, detailed
description, operating mechanism etc.
Complete technical data on instruments protective and auxiliary relays,
measuring
instruments
including
manufacturer's
catalogues,
operating
characteristics, operating curves, detailed description etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A.
Examine conditions under which ring main unit and medium voltage switchgear is to be
installed. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the
work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install ring main unit as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction,
requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with Utility Co. requirements to
ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of ring main unit with other work.
C.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance
with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors.
D.
E.
Provide 6.35mm minimum thick x 60cm wide insulation mat in front of ring main units
and rear of freestanding equipment.
Provide protective covering during construction.
F.
Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces to match original finish.
G.
Provide fuses for potential transformers and control, with five spare fuses for each rating.
H.
Coordinate with and obtain approval of Utility Company for equipment requirements
including all metering prior to fabrication and installation.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16420

A.
Upon completion of installation of equipment and after circuitry has been energized, test
equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct
malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and
replace with new equipment and retest at no additional cost to Owner.
B.
Prior to energization of medium voltage ring main unit
C.
1.
Perform insulation resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-toearth for one (1) minute. Minimum test voltage to be 2,500 volts D.C. with a
minimum resistance of 5,000 megohms.
2.
Check primary medium voltage ring main units for continuity, and for short
circuits.
3.
Notify Architect of any abnormalities.
Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize equipment and demonstrate in

accordance with requirements.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16425

Section 16425 Low Voltage Switchgear Assemblies Main
Distribution Board
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
Air circuit breakers section 16476.
D.
Moulded case circuit breakers section 16478.
A.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation, all switchgears in accordance with
drawings and specifications.
1. 03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of switchgears of the types,

for not less than 5 years.
B.

IEC, NEC, UL, and NEMA, Standards pertaining to switchgear.
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for switchgears, including size, enclosures,
and electrical ratings and characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings : submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings.
C.
Relay Coordination
D.
Short circuit and Voltage Drop Calculation

Submit a comprehensive short circuit study as well as voltage drop calculation based on
the actual impedance values of the electrical components such as supply short circuit
level at the 10.5 KV (shall not be less than 500 MVA), transformer per unit impedance,
bus bars and cable impedances ... etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16425
2 01 GENERAL
A.
The switchgears shall be 660 V class 3PH, 50HZ completely wired and type tested at the
factory, ready for installation on the site. Sectionalizing shall be accomplished and
bracing provided for access of the equipment into the building.
B.
Switchgears shall be designed and manufactured to comply with IEC - 439, VDE 660
Part 500, UTE 63 - 410 .
C.
The Electrical installation has been designed to give load balance across the phases as
far as possible but it is the contractor's responsibility to maintain or improve the balance
when making connections to bars etc.
When the final commissioning is to be completed the contractor shall allow in his tender
for checking loads and altering connections in order to achieve as even a balance over
the phases as possible.
2 02 CONSTRUCTION
A.
The switchgears shall be of the totally enclosed, front and rear. accessible, indoor type,
of size, rating and arrangement as indicated on the Drawings. The complete assembly
shall be floor mounted, free standing, with matching cases, to form a continuous integral
structure.
B.
Switchgears shall consist of the required number of compartmented formed and welded
sheet enclosures required to mount circuit- breakers and other specified equipment or as
shown on the Drawings.
C.
Switchgears shall be completely enclosed with hinged front covers and removable steel
plates of not less than 2 mm gauge on sides, top and rear.
D.
All fastenings between structural members shall be bolted, not welded, to provide
flexibility during installation.
E.
The arrangement shall permit the busbars and/or cables to enter from the top or bottom
of the enclosures as shown on the Drawings and connect at their respective terminals
without interference.
A modular arrangement shall be used to permit interchanging differently sized device

cover plates without additional drilling of structure.
G.
Structures and busses shall be arranged to permit future sections to be added. A suitable
cover plate shall be provided for temporary protection.
H.
Switchgears shall be dust, vermin and rodent proof IP43 according to IEC 529.
All compartments shall be suitably ventilated where required.
The switchboard busses shall be braced for a short-circuit duty as indicated on the
drawings.
J.
All bolted and plug-in connections shall be Electro-silver plated to a minimum thickness
of 0.0125 mm.
K.
A spare position shall be fully equipped cell ready to receive a circuit-breaker.
L.
Suitable arrangement and equipment shall be provided for extracting and unloading the
circuit-breakers from their cells.
M.
A special trolley shall be supplied together with the switchgear for removal or installation
of the air-circuit breakers from their compartment for maintenance or repair.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16425
N.
An earth bus extending the entire length of the assembly shall be provided. The bus shall
be sized in accordance with the Regulations.
O.
The switchgear shall be sanded and rust inhibited after fabrication, Electro - static
painted on both inside and outside surfaces. Color shall be Grey.
P.
The Switchgear shall be provided with inlet air filtration .
Q.
The switchgear shall be protected in enclosures IP43 in accordance with

recommendation No. 529.
of IEC
2 03 BUS BARS
A.
All copper bus bars, switching devices and connections shall

o be of sufficient sizes and
silver plated at contact
o
to limit the temperature rise to 25 C over an average ambient
temperature of 45 C outside the enclosure.
B.
The bus bars rating shall be as indicated on the drawings.

All bus bars and connections shall be accessible for inspection and maintenance
purposes.
C.
Bus bars are to be of high conductivity copper and rigidly supported to withstand the
mechanical stress of a rated short- time withstand current of 85KA (rms) in accordance
with IEC recommendation No. 439-1
D.
Main bus shall be of continuous construction. Main bus joints and all top connections
shall be silver plated and tightly bolted to insure maximum conductivity.
E.
Bus bars shall be clearly marked with their respective phase colors and shall be
furnished for future extensions.
F.
Clearance to earth and to other live metal are to be in accordance with the standards.
G.
The main set of bus bars shall be housed in segregated chamber at the top. Bus bar top
covers shall be capable of supporting a man weight without deflection.
H.
Incoming and outgoing supplies to switchgears shall be either busways or cables as

indicated on drawings.
I.
A full length ground copper bus shall be provided. The ground bus shall be bounded to
the metal enclosure of each compartment and to metering and relaying, transformers
secondary windings. Lugs shall be provided one at each end of the ground bus and one
in each cubicle for the user's copper ground cables.
J.
The cross sectional area of neutral bus bars shall not be less than that of the associated
phase bars.
K.
Access to bus bars and bus bar connections shall be possible only after the removal of
covers secured by bolts or studs. Such covers shall be identified externally by engraved
laminated labels bearing the inscription "BUSBARS DANGER 380 VOLTS" in 30mm high
black lettering on a yellow background.
L.
Connections from main and dropper busbars to the supply side of functional units shall
be by means of dedicated conductors. Conductors installed on a loop in principle shall
not be acceptable.
M.
All neutral supply/load connections shall be made via the enclosure containing the
associated functional unit. Common neutral terminals shall not be acceptable.
N.
Where specified in the schedules, or shown on the drawings, switched neutrals shall be
provided. Otherwise bolted neutrals shall be provided. The bolted section shall be
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16425
mounted in the compartment containing the associated functional unit or as a separate

functional unit and be safe and easy to access.
O.
No diversity shall be used in busbar dropper sizing.
2 04 MAIN CIRCUITS
A.
Main circuit wiring shall be PVC insulated to IEC, DIN/VDE standards and, where
appropriate, sized for Type 2 protection coordination to IEC 947, but with a minimum size
of 2.5mm. Connections to and from functional units shall be segregated from control and
adequately supported to withstand the forces due to short-circuit faults. The sizes of
wires shall be calculated in accordance with the IEE Wiring Regulations.
B.
All cable connections shall be made at fixed terminals with no intermediate joints.
C.
Insulated conductors shall not rest against bare live parts or exposed sharp edges.
2 05 AUXILIARY WIRING
A.
All non-screened auxiliary wiring, except that which is required to be screened, shall be
carried out on 600/1000V grade insulated, multi-stranded flexible conductors complying
with IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
B.
The minimum conductor size shall be 1.5mm.
C.
All auxiliary wiring shall be identified at both ends with numbered and resistor color
coded ferrules. These numbers shall be shown on the control schematic wiring diagram.
D.
All auxiliary wiring shall be contained within cabling trunking and totally segregated from
power wiring as far as practicable. Wiring of circuits at different voltage categories, e.g.
L.V. and ELV, shall be segregated. Joints will not be permitted on wiring between
devices.
E.
Cable trunking shall be of the ventilated type with clip-on covers and purpose made
junctions and accessories. Cables shall not occupy more than 25% of the trunking crosssectional area.
F.
Wiring not contained within trunking shall be strapped in looms with removable straps
and held in place by suitable cleats. Looms shall not exceed more than 25 wires. Selfadhesive straps shall not be acceptable.
G.
All wiring connections from trunking and looms to devices shall be run in straight lines,
horizontally and vertically, and be neatly dressed.
H.
Wiring to door mounted devices shall be flexible and provided with a large enough loop
to clear the edge of the opening. Protection against abrasion shall be provided by means
of flexible conduit or spiral wrapping securely fixed at each end.
I.
Where wiring passes through partitions it shall be protected against abrasion by

thermoplastic grommets and spiral wrapping.
J.
Interconnections between functional units shall be contained within a separate cabling

chamber or trunking. All cables shall terminate on the functional unit terminals within the
cubicle.
2 06 LABELS
A.
All enclosures containing functional units shall be clearly labeled with a circuit, unit
reference and current rating.
B.
All labels shall be of the engraved type made from suitable multi-layer laminate and shall
be fixed with zinc plated cheese head instrument screws. No other type of label will be
acceptable.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16425
C.
Every functional unit shall be labeled separately from all others. External labels shall
have letters not less than 5mm in height and internal labels not less than 3mm. The
letters shall be black in color on a white background.
D.
All covers/doors not fitted with interlocked switched disconnectors enclosing unshrouded
live equipment shall be fitted with warning labels inscribed "DANGER 400V ISOLATE
BEFORE OPENING".
E.
Warning labels shall have black letters on a bright yellow background. Wherever
possible, letters shall be not less than 30mm in height. On small covers and doors letters
of 20mm or 10mm in height shall be used.
F.
Cable boxed shall be clearly labeled both externally and internally with the circuit and
functional device number.
G.
All terminal blocks shall be labeled relative to the respective functional unit.
H.
Every control and metering device, selector switch, pushbutton and indicator light shall
be clearly labeled to indicate its purpose.
I.
Main identification labels shall be provided on the assembly together with a rating plate.
J.
Fixed and with drawable portions of equipment including fixed and plug-in devices shall
be labeled with with drawable portions cross-referenced to their fixed part.
K.
Proposed engraving details shall be submitted for comment prior to engraving.
2 07 EARTHING
A.
Each assembly shall be provided with a continuous copper earth bar running the whole
length sized in accordance with DIN/VDE standards for the prospective short-circuit
current.
B.
Discrete terminals shall be provided for connection to all the protective conductors. Each
individual section of the assembly shall be separately bonded to the main earth bar.
2 08 COMPONENTS
A.
B.
All components shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of their

manufacturers. This requirement does not negate the requirement for type and routine
testing as specified elsewhere in this Specification.
Adjusting and resetting devices shall be easily accessible.
C.
All actuators for emergency switching devices shall be mounted between 0.8m and 1.6m
above the base of the assembly.
D.
All components shall be installed and wired such that their function is not impaired by
interaction such as heat, arcs, vibration, and fields of energy present in normal operation.
E.
Barriers for manual switching devices shall be designed such that arcs caused by
switching under normal operation or the interruption or making of a fault current shall not
present a danger to the operator.
F.
All removable and withdrawable components shall be installed and designed such that
they can be safely disconnected or connected to supply circuits while the associated
conductors are live.
G.
All spare contacts on relays, contractors, and the like shall be wired to easily accessible
terminal blocks, suitably positioned for future external wiring.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16425
H.
Assemblies shall be provided with a spare set of fuses mounted on polyethylene coated
spring clips adjacent to the fuse chart on the doors of a separate cubicle. A total of 20%
of each size of fuse shall be provided with a minimum 4 of each size. When
commissioning is complete the panel shall be handed over with this complete set of
spare fused. A fully detailed fuse chart shall be provided in the same cubicle as the
fuses.
I.
Where moulded case circuit-breakers are installed they shall be fitted with rotary action
handles. The handles shall be lockable in the "ON" and "OFF" positions.
2 09 SELECTOR SWITCHES/PUSH-BUTTONS/INDICATOR LAMPS

A.
The manufacturer's range shall include fully interchangeable contact blocks and lamp
holder blocks which can be fitted to all actuators including switches and push-buttons.
B.
Selector switches shall be of the rotary type, with lever or key operated actuators as
specified in the schedules or shown on the drawings.
C.
Pushbuttons shall be of the flush type. Colors shall be as specified in the schedules and
to IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
D.
Pushbuttons used for emergency stop purposes shall be of the mushroom head type,
with a twist to release action or key reset as specified in the schedule.
E.
Contact blocks shall have double break silver plated contacts, in 'NO' or "NC'
configuration rated at not less than 5A resistive at 220V 50HZ.
F.
Indicating lamps shall be of the flush type 22mm diameter with removable colored
lenses, allowing lamps to be changed from the front and shall be provided with a push to
test facility.
Colors shall be as specified in the schedules and IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
Indicating lamps on control circuits shall be equipped with completely sealed dual wound
safety isolating transformers and in-built test relay.
G.
H.
Fuse failure lamps shall be of the neon type with current limiting device
2 010 WIRING TERMINALS

A.
Cable terminations and space for terminations shall be suitable for the sizes of cable
called for in the design, refer to Cable Schedules.
B.
Terminal blocks shall be made of thermosetting melamine or polyamide material with a

lowo tracking index and good flame resistance, tested to withstand a temperature rise of
90 C above ambient temperature. Provision shall be made for permanent labels to be
applied to each terminal for identification purposes.
C.
All terminals shall be marked in accordance with DIN/VDE standards.
D.
All terminals for control wiring shall have provision for plug-in test spills and in addition be
fitted with isolating links. Current carrying parts shall be made of tinned brass or copper.
E.
Completely shrouded terminals of the tunnel type shall be used for cup to 10mm. The
screw clamp connection shall be vibration proof, self-locking and suitable for clamping
two condo.
F.
Stranded cables up to 10mm shall be terminated in copper or copper alloy ferrule shall
retain all strands of the cable.
G.
Terminals for cables in excess of 10mm shall be of the double connection type with
bolted studs for the connection of cable lugs. The terminal and stud size shall be
adequate for the current carried and the size of cable. Suitable insulating partitions and
protective covers shall be provided.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16425
H.
All auxiliary wiring except screened cables shall be connected to incoming/outgoing

cables Via insulated terminal blocks, screw/screw type, clipped onto DIN rails. There
shall be sufficient space on the DIN rail for future terminal blocks of not less than 10% or
5 No. whichever is the greater.
I.
Wires shall enter terminals singly.
J.
Plugs and fixed sockets for the application shall be provided for the termination of
screened cables.
K.
All terminations shall be mounted at least 0.2m above the base of floor mounted
assemblies .
L.
All load terminals shall be suitable for the types and sizes of cables as specified in the
schedules and drawings.
2 011 WORKS TESTS

A.
All assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of DIN/VDE

standards Part 1, plus requirements of associated standards.
B.
TYPE TESTED ASSEMBLIES

Where TTAs are specified, certification shall be provided for all type and routine tests to
DIN/VDE standards.
C.
PARTIALLY TYPE TESTED ASSEMBLIES

Where PTTAs are specified, compliance with the test requirements of BS 5486, shall be
either by type testing or by extrapolation from type tested assemblies or individual parts
of similar, representative construction. Verification of the Type Testing Certification or the
appropriate extrapolation calculations shall be provided. Certificates shall also be
provided for routine tests in compliance with DIN/VDE standards.
D.
Calculation from first principles for temperature rise and short-circuit strength will not be
acceptable.
E.
Verification of the short-circuit withstand strength is not required for assemblies having a
rated PSSC not exceeding 10KA or those protected by current limiting devices with a cutoff current not exceeding 15KA.
F.
Verification of the short-circuit withstand strength is not required for auxiliary circuits
connected to transformers whose:
1) rated power dose not exceed 10KVA for a rated secondary voltage of not less than
110V.
or
2) rated power does not exceed 1.6KVA with a rated secondary voltage of less than
110V, and whose relative short-circuit voltage is not less than 4%.
G.
Works tests shall include inspection of all wiring and a complete electrical functioning
test.
H.
Protection relays shall be tested by primary current injection with currents equal to
overload, short-circuit and earth fault conditions.
I.
Works tests shall be done in the presence of Owner consultant.
2 012 FIELD TESTING

7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
A.
Section 16425
ASSEMBLIES
All assemblies shall be subjected to the routine tests as defined in IEC, DIN/VDE
standards. after installation on site. Test Certificates shall be provided.
B.
FUNCTIONAL UNITS
All functional units shall be checked for correct mechanical operation.
C.
PROTECTION CIRCUITS
All protection circuits in with relays used shall be tested for correct operation by
secondary injection of test currents. This shall be carried out at currents equivalent to
D.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Where specified in the schedules, protection circuits using current transformer (CT)
operated relays shall be tested by primary injection of current to prove the transformer
ratio.
2 013
COMMISSIONING
A.
Following the satisfactory conclusion of inspections and tests on completed sections of

the Works, each switchgear assembly shall be duly commissioned and left in full working
order. The term "Commissioning" shall be deemed to include:
1) The energizing of functional device circuits and equipment which have
previously been inspected, tested, found to be satisfactory and capable of being
energized with compete safety.
2) The starting up of all electrically powered plant and equipment, including that
supplied and installed under other contracts, and as specified in the schedules.
3) The verification of the performance of each switchgear assembly relative to all
such plant and equipment by the carrying out, where required, of further tests
and the making of all necessary adjustments so as to obtain optimum
performance.
4) The proving of all interlock operations in all possible combinations and the
operation of all control systems, metering and indications to meet the
performance requirements specified.
2 014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A.
Examine conditions under which switchgears are to be installed, and notify in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until
3 02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install switchgears as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,

requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16425
practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended
function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of switchgears with other work.
C.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts and equipment grounding
connections, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening
D.
Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are
permanently and mechanically anchored. Provide all angle units and accessories for
proper mounting.
E.
Provide properly wired electrical connections for switchgears within enclosures.
F.
Double lugging is not permitted.
G.
Fill out switchgears circuit directory card upon completion of installation work.
H.
Provide equipment earthing connections sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and

effective ground for panelboards.

A.
Upon completion of installation of switchgear and after circuiting has been energized,
demonstrate capability and compliance of switchgear with requirements. Where possible,
correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise,
remove and replace with new units and retest.
B.
Prior to energization of switchgears circuitry, check all accessible connections to

manufacturer's tightening torque specifications.
C.
Prior to energization of switchgears, check with earthing resistance tester

phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements
are fulfilled.
D.
Prior to energization, check switchgears for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short
circuits.
E.
Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
F.
After energization, check phase balancing and adjust accordingly.
G.
Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.
3 04 INTER CONNECTION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS

The system supplier is responsible to provide all required switches, auxiliary contacts, relays,
wiring, terminal blocks transducers to provide signaling and metering information for the central
control system and to accept START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
Relevant signals are listed under controls, BMS and motor control panels drawings and data
schedules.
All signals to the BMS system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @
220 volt.
In any device will need more than 20 VA. at any operating condition the supplier should add
interposing relays.
All analog measures coming or going to the BMS should be coordinated with the BMS supplier
(either 4-20 MA or 1-5 volt or -10 volt).
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16425
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16430

Section 16430 Instruments and Metering
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to instruments and metering specified elsewhere in
1 02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
complete and make ready for operation instrument and metering as shown in accordance with
Drawings and Specifications.
1 03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of instrument and metering of the
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 5 years. Provide instruments and metering produced by a manufacturer listed
as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, DIN/VDE, IEC,
EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to instrument and metering.
1 04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for instrument and metering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All electrical indicating instruments shall comply with IEC 51, DIN/VDE standards and shall be
digital type.
2 02
INSTRUMENTS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
All electrical indicating instruments shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
All ammeters and voltmeters shall be digital type.
All instruments shall be flush mounted.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16430
B. COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
1. STANDARD IEC 51
2. ADMISSIBLE OVER LOADS
a) Voltage : 1.2 rated voltage continuously 2 rated voltage for 2 seconds.
b) Current : - 2 In continuously.
- 10 In for 10 seconds.
- 40 In for 2 seconds.
3. DIELECTRIC STRENGTH : 2 KV. r.m.s. for 1 min.
o
o
4. OPERATING TEMPERATURE : - 10 C to + 60 C
5. RESPONSE TIME : < 15.
6. DIGITAL PANEL METERS
Consists of :
a) 3 1/2 DIGIT SERIES Display for Ammeters and 3 1/2 DIGIT for Ammeters and
Frequency meters.
b) ANALOG SECTION :
The conversion between the magnitude to be measured and the input to the digital
section made from high accuracy components.
c) DIGITAL SECTION :
An analog/digital converter is used with dual slope integration
o
and automatic zero
correction and shall have thermal stability from 0 to 60 C and Linearity error is under
0.05%.
d) DIMENSIONS
For all shall be (96 x 48 mm).
C. AMMETER AND VOLTMETER SWITCHES
On 3-phase, 4-wire system, ammeter switches shall have four operating positions, marked 'R',
'Y', 'B' and 'N', and an 'OFF' position, and shall enable the single ammeter to read, in
sequence, the currents in each of the three phases and the neutral wire, On 3-wire systems
ammeter switches shall have three operating positions marked 'R', 'Y' and 'B' and an 'OFF'
position. Ammeter switches shall be connected so that the associated current transformers are
short-circuited when they are not connected to the ammeter.
On 3-phase, 4-wire systems, voltmeter switches shall have six operating positions, marked 'RY', 'Y-B', 'B-R', 'R-N', 'Y-N' 'B-N', and an 'OFF' position, and shall enable the single voltmeter to
read, in sequence, each of the three line voltages and each of the three phase-to-neutral
voltages. On 3-wire systems, voltmeter switches shall have three operating positions marked
'R-Y', 'Y-B' and 'B-R' and an 'OFF' position.
Voltmeter switches shall have 'break-before-make- contacts.
2 03
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTS)
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16430
All CTs shall comply with all relevant requirements of IEC, DIN/VDE standards and shall have
an Accuracy Class Designation according to the following table:
Tariff metering
Accuracy Class Designation 0.5
Non-tariff metering
Switchgear indicating instruments Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Motor starter ammeters
Protection (overcurrent, UEF)
Accuracy Class Designation 10p
Protection ( UEF)
Accuracy Class Designation x
Unless otherwise specified in the schedules or drawings, the CTs are required for use under
service conditions not more onerous than those set out in IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
CTS shall be designed either for measurement or for protection and shall not be used in a dualpurpose role serving both instruments and protective gear.
Unless otherwise specified, all CTs shall have 5A secondary windings.
So far as it is practicable, all CTs shall be of the ring type. Wound primary CTs will only be
accepted when the rated primary current is so low as to make the ring type impracticable.
One side of the secondary of each CT shall be connected to earth at one point via a bolted
removable link.
For mattering circuits, either, a proprietary front of panel CT test block or special "shorting"
terminals within the panel shall be provided for test purposes.
All CTs whether of the ring type or the wound primary type, for use at voltages exceeding 1000
V shall be epoxy resin encapsulated.
Where dual-ratio CTs are specified, they shall be provided with two separate secondary
windings capable of being connected in series or in parallel to give the required ratio.
All CTs shall be provided with a rating plate bearing the information as stated in IEC, DIN/VDE
standards. All CTs shall be installed in accessible location. The secondary connections shall be
brought out by means of insulated leads, and made off on a suitable terminal block-mounted in
a readily accessible position.
Magnetization curves and/or type Test Certificates shall be provided for all CTs associated with
protection devices.
Every CT shall have a rated burden at least 50% greater than the total burden of the
instruments, relays, and/or other apparatus which it is to serve.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 04
Section 16430
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Voltage transformers shall be of the type, rating, and voltage ratio specified in the schedules or
drawings.
All voltage transformers shall comply with all relevant requirements of BS 3941 and shall have
an Accuracy Class Designation according to the following table:
Metering
Switchgear indicating instruments Accuracy Class Designation 1.0
Motor starter voltmeters
Protection
Accuracy Class Designation 3p
Unless other specified in the schedules or drawings, the voltage transformers are required for
use under service conditions not more than those set out in IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
Voltage transformers designed for a primary voltage not exceeding 4000 V shall be the air
insulated type, with the windings encapsulated in epoxy resin or other suitable synthetic
material.
Unless otherwise specified, all voltage transformers shall be designed for a secondary output
voltage of 110 V.
Each voltage transformer shall have a rated burden at least 50% greater than the total burden
of the apparatus or instruments which it is to serve.
The insulation resistance of each voltage transformer shall be indelibly marked on the
shipping/dispatch label.
2 05
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01
INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which instrument and metering are to be installed and notify in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work
3 02
INSTALLATION
A. Install instrument and metering as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
practto ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves infunction.
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of instrument and metering.
3 03
A. Prior to energization of instrument and metering devices test devices for intended function
Replace malfunctioning units with new units, and then demonstrate compliance with
requirements.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16430
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16452

Section 16452 Earthing
PART 1 - GENERAL
Supplementary Conditions and Division (1) Specification Sections, apply to work of
this section.
to this Section:
2. Electrical Testing And Commissioning
1 02 SUMMARY:
A.
Provide labor, materials, equipment and services and perform operations required
for installation of Earthing System and related work as indicated on the drawings or
specified herein.
B.
Description of Work: this section includes complete installations to earth every

source of energy and to provide protective earthing and equipotential bonding, based
on the TN-S system arrangement, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Transformer neutral earthing

Main earthing terminals or bars
Exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment
Extraneous conductive parts
Standby generator neutral earthing.
Un-interruptible power supply system.
Electronic and light current systems.
Related Sections: the following sections contain special requirements that relate to
this section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Division (16) Special Construction for Light Current Systems earthing

Division (14) Conveying Systems
Division (15) Mechanical Work for Mechanical Equipment & Installation
Division (16) Electrical Work for L.V Wires and Cables for earthing system.
Division (16) Electrical Work for Lightning Protection System.
1 03 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS :
A.
Grounding or Ground used in other sections or divisions of the specification are

interchangeably used as Earthing or Earth.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16452
B.
Earth: conductive mass of the Earth whose electric potential at any point is
conventionally taken as zero
C.
Earth Electrode: conductor or group of conductors in initial contact with, and

providing electrical connection to, Earth
D.
Exposed Conductive Part: any part which can be readily touched and which is not a
live part, but which may become live under fault conditions
E.
Extraneous Conductive Part: any conductive part not forming part of the electrical
installation such as structural metalwork of a building, metallic gas pipes, water
pipes, heating tubes etc. and non-electrical apparatus electrically connected to them
i.e. radiators, cooking ranges, metal sinks etc. and non- insulating floors and walls
F.
Protective Conductor: conductor used for some measure of protection against

electric shock and intended for connecting together any of the following parts:
exposed conductive parts
extraneous conductive parts
earth electrode(s)
main earthing terminal or bar(s)
earthed point of the source(s)
G.
Electrically Independent Earth Electrodes: earth electrodes located at such distance

from one another that maximum current likely to flow through one of them does not
significantly affect the potential of the other(s)
H.
Main Earthing Terminal or Bar: the terminal or bar provided for the connection of
protective conductors, including equipotential bonding and functional earthing
conductors if any to the means of earthing
I.
Equipotential Bonding: electrical connection to put exposed and extraneous

conductive parts at a substantially equal potential
J.
Earthing Conductor: protective conductor connecting main earthing terminal or bar of

an installation to earth electrode or to other means of earthing.
1 04 SUBMITTALS:
A.
General: submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract General

Requirements and Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data: for earth rods, connectors and connection materials, and earthing
fittings.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16452
C.
Equipment Data: prior to ordering materials, submit data for approval including, but
not limited to, manufacturers catalogues for earth rods, connecting clamps, earthing
conductors, protective conductors, bonding conductors, connectors and other
accessories, exothermic welding kits and tools etc., and samples of conductors as
requested.
D.
Shop and Construction Drawings: submit drawings for approval including, but not
1.
2.
3.
4.
exact location of earth pits, rods and details of installation and connections
exact routing of buried earthing conductors with indication of cross- section,
depth of laying and covering
cross sectional area of all earthing, protective and bonding conductors
layout and details of earthing provisions at substations, generator rooms,
switchgear, distribution panelboards etc., indicating fittings used, insulation,
plates and marking, passage and routing of earthing conductors, conduit,
sleeves, grooves, niches etc., giving sizes and dimensions of component parts.
E.
Field Testing Organization Certificate: signed by the Contractor, certifying that the
organization performing field tests complies with the requirements specified in
Quality Assurance below.
F.
Report of field tests and observations certified by the testing organization.
G.
Report of field tests and observations certified by the Engineer. All tests shall be
carried out in the presence of and be certified by the Engineer.
A.
Regulations and Standards: carry out work in accordance with the following:
1. IEC publications 364-3 and 364-4-41, Electrical Installations in Buildings
2. BS7671:1992 Requirements for Electrical Installations. (IEE Wiring Regulations).
3. BS 7430 Earthing
4. IEEE 80, 1986,IEEE90
B.
Field- Testing Organization Qualifications: to qualify for acceptance, the independent

testing organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organizationsubmitted criteria, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily
the testing indicated.
C.
In case of deviation of the applicable standards the most stringent shall be applied.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 01 MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Available Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering grounding and bonding products which may be incorporated in the work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16452
Furse
(England)
Wallis
(England)
Or other equal and approved manufactuer of 15 years minimum experience.
2 02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Component parts of earthing system are to include the following:

1. earth electrode (rods, tapes etc.)
2. main earthing terminals or bars
3. earthing conductors
4. protective conductors
5. equipotential bonding conductors
6. electrically independent earth electrodes for special systems
7. accessories and termination fittings, bonding, welding kits and other materials.
B.
Earth Electrode: consisting of earthing pits for each system as shown on the
drawings, which is buried around the perimeter of the building at 1 m (min.) below
the finish grade level and 0.6 m away from the building. Scope of work starts from
the main earth conductors connecting between the earth electrodes and the earth
busbars and is to include all earthing and bonding installation of the project as
specified and shown on the drawings.
C.
Overall resistance to earth of the earth electrode is not to exceed 2 ohms (for power
applications) measured in summer. Additional earth rods connecting with the earth
electrodes are to be provided, if needed, to bring down earth electrodes resistance
to the specified value.
D.
Alternative Earth Electrode: provide other types of earth electrode that may be used,
after approval, including:
1. cast iron pipes with special surround material
2. copper plate (s)
3. tape mats (strips).
E.
Main earthing bar provide at point of service entrance and at each main distribution
MV or LV room, electrical substation, and as described in the Specification or shown
on the Drawings, to which all earthing conductors, protective conductors and bonding
conductors are to be connected. Two insulated main earthing conductors are to be
provided, one at each end of the bar, connected via testing joints to the earth
electrode at two separate earth pits. Main earthing bars and conductors are to be
bonded to the building steel rebars as shown on the Drawings
F.
Testing joints (Test Links) are to be provided, in an accessible position, on each

main earthing conductor, between earthing terminal or bar and earth electrode.
G. Protective conductors are to be separate for each circuit. Where protective conductor
is common to several circuits, cross-sectional area of protective conductor is to be
the largest of the conductor sizes. Selection of sizes is to be in accordance with
Table 54G of IEE Regulations.
H.
Protective conductors are not to be formed by conduit, trunking, ducting or the like.
Where armoured cable is specified and armour is steel, it may be used as a
protective conductor, if approved and if not otherwise shown on the Drawings.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16452
I.
Continuity of Protective Conductors: series connection of protective conductor from

one piece of equipment to another is not permitted. Extraneous and exposed
conductive parts of equipment are not to be used as protective conductors, but are to
be connected by bolted clamp type connectors and/or brazing to continuous
protective conductors which are to be insulated by moulded materials.
J.
Earth Fault Loop Impedance: for final circuits supplying socket outlets, earth fault
impedance at every socket outlet is to be such that disconnection of protective
device on over-current occurs within 0.4 seconds, and for final circuits supplying only
fixed equipment, earth fault loop impedance at every point of utilization is to be such
that disconnection occurs within 1 seconds. Use appropriate tables and present
same for approval by the Engineer .
K.
Supplementary Equipotential Bonding: all extraneous conductive parts of the building

such as metallic water pipes, drain pipes, other service pipes and ducting, metallic
conduit and raceways, cable trays and cable armour are to be connected to nearest
earthing terminals by equipotential bonding conductors. Cross-section of protective
bonding conductor is not to be less than half that of the protective conductor
connected to respective earthing terminal, and minimum 6 mm2.
L.
Main Equipotential Bonding: main incoming and outgoing water pipes and any other
metallic service pipes are to be connected by main equipotential bonding conductors
to main earth terminal or bar. Bonding connections are to be as short as practicable
between point of entry/exit of services and main earthing bar. Where meters are
installed, bonding is to be made on the premises side of the meter. Cross-sections of
conductors are not to be less than half that of the earthing conductor connected
thereto, and minimum 16 mm2.
M. Identification: connection of every earthing conductor to earthing electrode and every

bonding conductor to extraneous conducting parts is to be labeled in accordance
with the Regulations, as follows:
SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DO NOT REMOVE.
N.
Identification: protective and earthing conductors are to be identified by combination

of green-and-yellow colours of insulation or by painting bar conductors with these
colours, as approved.
O. Identification: source earthing conductor (or neutral earthing conductor) is to be

identified along its entire length by continuous black insulation labelled neutral
earthing.
2 03 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:

A.
Earth Rod: copper clad steel, 19 mm diameter, 2400 mm length, extendible as

necessary to obtain required earth resistance. Earth rod is to be complete with
couplings, driving stud, head and bolted connector of sufficient size, and number of
bolted clamps to connect all cables terminated thereto.
B.
Earth Pit: precast, square or circular section concrete handhole, with cover to metal
surroundings, and extending to about 150 mm below top of earth rod. Earth pit is to
be provided for each earth rod where connected to an earthing conductor. Cover is
to have inset brass plate with inscription Earth Pit - Do Not Remove.
C.
Main Earthing Conductors from Earth Electrode to Main Earthing Bars: annealed
tinned copper bars, 60X4mm2 as shown on the Drawings.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16452
D.
Earthing Conductors: insulated or bare copper conductor as described in the

Specification for the particular application or shown on the drawings
E.
Testing Joints (Test Links): copper or copper alloy, with bolted end connections,
disconnectable by use of a tool, and suitably sized for earthing conductors or earth
bar connection. Links are to be fixed to porcelain or other approved insulating
supports. Contact surfaces are to be tinned.
F.
Protective Conductors: single core stranded annealed copper, PVC insulated cables,
having rated insulation grade compatible with circuit protected, or to be a conductor
forming part of a multi-core cable, colour coded.
G. Protective Bonding Conductors: bare copper strip conductor, annealed stranded

copper cable or flexible strap (flexible braid) of cross-sectional area as described in
relevant subsections or articles of this section or other sections of the Specification.
H.
Earthing Accessories: copper or copper alloy, purpose made, of approved design,

compatible with points of connection, and of adequate cross-section and current
carrying capacity. Connectors and clamps are to be bolted type. Bolts, nuts and
washers are to be high quality phosphor bronze or copper silicon alloys.
I.
Equipotential/Signal Reference Earthing Bar: hard drawn copper, tinned copper bars
60 x 4 mm, drilled for connection of conductor every 50 mm and to be supplied with
copper alloy bolts, nuts, washers and wall mounting insulators for installation in
mechanical rooms and low current rooms. Equipotential earthing bar for small
mechanical rooms is to be 25 x 3 mm hard drawn copper.
J.
Bonding of main and signal reference earthing bars and earthing conductors to the
building structure rebars is to be through 70 mm2 copper conductors connected to
the rebars via exothermic welding as shown on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 TRANSFORMER SUBSTATION EARTHING
A.
MV Switchgear: internal earth bar of the switchgear is to be connected to the rooms

main earthing bar by two insulated earthing conductors, one at each end of bar, via
testing joints. Earthing conductor is to be minimum 150 mm2.
B.
LV Switchgear (main distribution board): internal earth bar of the switchgear is to be

connected to the rooms main earthing bar at two extreme ends by two insulated
earthing conductors through testing joints. Earthing conductor size is to be minimum
240 mm2.
C.
Transformer earthing terminal is to be connected to the rooms main earthing bar by

insulated copper earthing conductor not less than 150
D.
Transformer neutral (Star Point) is to be connected by insulated earthing conductor

(colour black) to the rooms main earthing bar. Neutral earthing conductor is to be
sized for maximum earth fault current for 5 seconds with final conductor temperature
not exceeding 250 deg. C, but not less than 240 mm2
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16452
3.02 EARTHING OF DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, PANELBOARDS,

LIGHT-ING
INSTALLATIONS AND WIRING ACCESSORIES
A.
Distribution, lighting and power panelboards are to be connected by protective

conductors run together with incoming feeder cable, connecting earth terminals in
panelboards with respective main distribution board earthing bar.
B.
Socket outlets are to be earthed by protective conductor looped around with the
branch circuit and connected to earth terminal within socket outlet box and to which
socket outlet terminal is to be connected.
C.
Lighting fixtures and other exposed conductive parts of electrical installations, such
as switches, heaters, air conditioning units etc. are to be connected by protective
earth conductors to earthing terminals of respective panelboards.
3 03 GENERATOR PLANT EARTHING:

A.
Generator neutral (Star Point) is to be connected by insulated earthing conductor

through the neutral earthing link or device to main earthing bar. Neutral earthing
conductor is to be suitably sized to carry maximum earth fault current for time it takes
the system protection to operate with final conductor temperature not exceeding 250
deg. C, but not less than 240 mm2
B.
Generator earthing terminal is to be connected to main earthing bar by insulated

copper conductor of cross section not less than 120 mm2
C.
Switchgear and Control Gear: earthing terminals or bars of switchgear and control
gear are to be connected by separate protective conductors to respective normal and
emergency main distribution board earth bars.
D.
Extraneous conductive parts including steel frames, battery racks, day-tank, pumps
and piping are to be connected by bare copper earthing conductors to main earth bar
in compliance with bonding regulations.
3 04 MECHANICAL PLANT ROOMS AND FIXED MACHINERY

A.
Equipotential earthing bar is to be conveniently located in mechanical rooms, and

connected to exposed conductive parts of motors, switches and other electrical
equipment etc. and to all extraneous non-electrical metallic structures within each
room, using copper conductors. Conductors are to be securely fixed, recessed in
floor grooves or niches, or fixed to walls by appropriate staples. Earth bar is to be
securely fixed to building wall with copper or brass saddles.
B.
Earthing bar is to be connected to the internal earth bar of the motor control
center/panel or power panel and to the respective main earthing bar (or building steel
reinforcing bar at the nearest column within the room), directly through two test joints
by insulated earthing conductors as shown on the drawings.
C.
Motor and other equipment earth terminals are to be connected also by protective
earth conductors of each branch circuit to earth terminal/bar at motor control centre,
panel or distribution unit.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16452
3 05 ELECTRONIC AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOMS:

A.
Separate earth bar is to be provided in each electronic and communication

equipment room for signal reference earthing of equipment as shown on the
drawings.
B.
Signal reference earth bar is to be connected to the earth electrodes of

communications and bonded to the building steel rebars as shown on the drawings.
C.
Overall resistance to earth of the earth electrode is not to exceed 0.5 ohms (for light
current applications) measured in summer. Additional earth rods connecting with the
earth loops are to be provided, if needed, to bring down earth electrodes resistance
to the specified value.
3 06 INSTALLATION:
A.
Continuity: ensure that complete earthing system is electrically

continuous and mechanically secure.
B.
Earth Rods: while siting earth rods, ensure that resistance areas
associated with individual rods do not overlap. Earth rods are to be
located at a distance greater than 600 mm from foundations of
buildings. Where rock is encountered, a hole of sufficient size is to be
drilled before lowering the rod. Conductive filler such as Marconite or
Bentonite or equal filler that will not corrode, is to be provided around
the rod. `
C.
Buried earthing conductors are to be laid at a depth not less than 0.8 m from ground
surface.
D.
Earthing conductors are to follow shortest path between earth rods and main
earthing terminals or bars, and are to run in PVC conduit (duct) fastened to building
structure by approved supports and extending 0.2 m above level, and are to be
protected against mechanical damage and corrosion.
E.
Protective Conductors: separate protective conductors, which are not part of a cable,
are to be fixed on same support or drawn into same conduit as circuit conductors.
F.
Protective Bonding: remove any non-conductive paint, enamel or similar coating at

threads, contact points and surfaces and ensure that bonding is made by fittings
designed to make secure bonds.
G. Protection Against Corrosion: protect bolted connections against corrosion either by

filling with Vaseline or coating with a special anti-corrosion compound and proper
capping.
H.
Connections: earth connections are to be readily accessible. If inaccessible earth

connection is permitted, approved exothermic welding or brazing technique is to be
employed.
I.
Connections: where earth connections between dissimilar metals must be made, use
bimetallic fittings and protect by coating with moisture resisting bituminous paint or
compound, or by wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16452
J.
All non Electrical Metal in the plant rooms shall be earthed by copper wire, bare type
35 mm2.
K.
Earthing Conductor of transformers, Generators, Motors and mechanical plant room

equipments (chillers, A,H.V,.).etc are to be connected to the protective earth
system through 150 mm2 insulated copper conductor in two diagonal points on the
equipment frame.
3 07 TESTS ON SITE AND RECORDS:

A.
Combined resistance of earth electrodes is to be measured during dry season and

checked against specified resistance.
B.
Electrical continuity of all earthing and protective conductors including main and
supplementary equipotential bonding conductors is to be checked.
C.
Earth fault loop impedance of all circuits is to be measured and checked against
calculated impedance figures.
D.
Operation of residual current protective devices is to be checked.
E.
Records: submit the following:

1. scaled drawings, as-installed, showing actual layout and specification of all
components of earthing system
2. nature of soil and any special earth arrangements etc.
3. date and particulars of soil conditioning method and agents if used
4. test conditions and results obtained.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16466

SECTION 16466 - BUSWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Requirements of the following Division (16) Electrical Specification Sections
apply to this section:
1 02 SUMMARY:
A.
Provide labor, materials, equipment and service and Perform operations required
for installation of Busways and related work as indicated on the drawings or
specified herein.
B.
This section includes plug-in and feeder busways, 600 V and under.
C.

contain requirements that relate to this section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
LV Wires and Cables for bus drop cables.

Main L.V Distribution Boards for busway termination provisions.
Distribution Transformers for busway termination provisions.
Supporting Devices for busway support provisions to building structure.
L.V. Circuit Breakers. For Circuit Breaker plugs.
Panelboards
1 03 SUBMITTALS:
A.
General: submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and

Division (1) General Requirements Specification Sections:
1.
2.
Product data: Manufacture catalogues and data for bussway products

accessories (latest published literature).
Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings: layout floor plans and
elevations showing busway system. Designate components and
accessories including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, bus plugs, tap boxes,
expansion joints, straight lengths, fittings, firepots, and weather seals. Show
accurately scaled components and spatial relationships to adjacent
equipment and building features. Show busway types, dimensions, and
finishes.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16466
A.
Codes and standards

1.
2.
IEC439-2 (BS 5486 Part 2) Particular Requirements for Busbar Trunking

Systems and Busways.
UL 857 Busways and associated fittings
B.
Single-Source Responsibility: provide busway and its all

components (tap of units, circuit breakers, etc.) from a single
manufacturer.
C.
Coordination Drawings : Include busways systems in coordination

drawings.
1 05 DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A.
Store busways in clean dry space having a uniform temperature and constant air
circulation. If uniform temperature space is not available, provide temporary heat
to keep storage space 5 deg C minimum above temperature of surrounding
spaces.
B.
Handle busways carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosures,

and finishes. Avoid subjecting busway to twisting, denting, impact, and rough
handling. Do not install damaged busway; remove from project site.
C.
Furnish the following extra materials matching products installed as described

below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
clearly describing contents.
1. Bus Plugs: furnish quantity of bus plug units equal to ten percent of amount
installed, but no less than one unit of each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Available Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
General Electric Co.

Klockner Moeller
Square D Co.
Telemecanique
Or equally approved
(USA)
(Germany)
(USA)
(France)
2 02 BUSWAYS, GENERAL:
A. Busway shall be provided complete and of following type as shown on drawings.
1. Plug-in type, indoor, completes with manufacturers recommended fittings
and accessories where indicated and as required for a complete, functioning
and safe installation.
B. Busways shall include bus bars, electrical insulators, enclosures, flanges,
elbows, offsets, cable tap boxes, weatherheads, transformer connections, power
take-off sections, expansion joints, end closures, supports, and other
components and accessories needed to form complete systems.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16466
C. Ratings: three phase with voltage and current ratings and requirements for
neutral and ground conductors as indicated and specified. Short circuit ratings of
busways shall be in excess of those indicated for each location.
D. Bus Bars Conductor Material: hard drawn Copper with not less than 98 percent
conductivity,
E. Bus Bars: silver plated at electrical contact surfaces and insulated over entire
length, with flame retardant 130 deg C class insulation applied by moulding,
extrusion or electrodeposite process.
F. Hot Spot Temperature Rise: not in excess of 55 deg C above an ambient
temperature of 35 deg C at any point in the busway when busway is operated at
rated load current and system frequency.
2 03 PLUG-IN BUSWAY (50 to 5000A, INDOOR)

A. Type: indoor, 600/1000 V grade, 3-phase, 5-wire with fully sized neutral and half
size dedicated earth bar, insulated, totally enclosed, non-ventilated and of
compact design, to provide degree of protection of IP43 to IEC 529, with ratings
as shown on the Drawings at site maximum ambient temperature conditions.
Busbar is to comply with approved standards. Short-circuit capacity is to be at
least equal to value at main protective device, for 1 second.
B. Construction: prefabricated, insulated flat copper conductors, with 2.5 mm
galvanized sheet steel or aluminum flanged casing, totally enclosed, nonventilated, indoor type. Housing is to be bonderized inside and outside and
finished with Grey baked enamel. Busbars are to be provided with extra
insulation between busbars and housing. Joints between sections are to have
special insulation, flanged and pressure bolted, easily dismantled and giving
equally strong mechanical connection to busbar sections. Any one section of
bus-duct is to be removable without disturbing adjacent sections.
C. Conductor joints for one modular length to the next are to be arranged in joint
stacks incorporating busway conductors, and each joint stack is to be arranged
for tightening with a single bolt. Joint design is to be such that any length or fitting
of a run may be removed without disturbing the connecting lengths.
D. Reactance: busbar is to be specially built and assembled to provide low
reactance.
E. Accessories: busbar is to be complete with necessary factory made adapter
boxes, junction boxes, bends, expansion connections, fittings, fire barriers etc. as
may be required to provide complete system between terminal points indicated
on the Drawings. Fixing and mounting materials are to be galvanized steel. For
vertically mounted busbars, spring suspension type hangers are to be used for
equalizing weight of busway between all supports.
F. Terminal adaptors or chambers are to be factory made. Coordinated components
at both ends are to match equipment connected thereto. Connections are to be
made with insulated copper bars of equivalent sections and of exact shapes to fit
and be fixed with bolts and spring washers.
G. Busway is to be ordered from the country of origin with proper lengths and
shapes. Busway cutting on site is not acceptable.
H. Plug-In Openings: five, dead-front, hinged cover openings per side of each 3 m
(10 ft) length of busway. Openings shall be useable simultaneously.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16466
2 04 PLUG-IN DEVICES:
A. General: compatible with the connected busway and of types as indicated. Plugin devices are to be equipped with spring reinforced contact fingers arranged so
they will not make contact with bus bars during plug insertion until the device
housing is positively earthed to the busway. Plug-in devices are to lock in
position mechanically and make positive earthing contact before to the power
connection when in the fully inserted position. Safety interlock are to be provided
on bus plugs having on and off positions to prevent insertion when they are in
the on position. Mounting hardware is to be captive on bus plug housing.
B. Plug-in units (tap off units) are to be of rating shown on the Drawings, and
comprise circuit breaker, made by same manufacturer of the busway, housed in
sheet steel enclosure complete with stabs, stab shields and earthing stab. No
cables are permitted for connection of the breaker to the busbar stabs. Protective
interlocks (releasable) are to be provided to prevent opening of cover whilst
circuit breaker is plugged in and in the closed position, to prevent insertion or
removal of unit when circuit breaker is in the closed position, and to prevent
closing circuit breaker with cover open. Circuit breaker is to be as described in
Division (16) Electrical Specification Section LV Circuit Breakers.
C.
Circuit Breaker Plugs: capable of operation from the floor. Circuit breaker shall
comply with Section LV Circuit Breakers with ratings and characteristics as
indicated. Breaker shall have deflectable interlock with bus plug door, only
accessible to trained personnel.
D.
All circuit breakers used shall be able to operate normally when mounted upside
down or at any angles. The tap-off units shall also have the provision to mounted
the earth fault relay together with the breaker. Tap-off units shall be of dust and
damp proof version, degree of protection IP54 with silver plated contacts suitable
for all ratings of busbar and shall be suitably earthed.
E.
The earthing contact of the tap-off unit shall always be made before that of the
live conductors and the last to break during removal.
F.
The MCCB used in the tap-off unit must comply to IEC 947-2. All MCCBs shall
have a rated service breaking capacity (Ics) of RMS value at 400 VAC equal or
higher than the prospective fault level of installation. It shall have current limiting
capabilities to protect the busbar trunking system and co-ordination table shall be
furnished by manufacturer.
G.
The tap-off unit and the busbar trunking system shall be interlocked to ensure
that the device is in the OFF position prior to installation or removal of the unit.
The tap-off unit shall have an interlock which prevents the cover from being
opened while the device is in the ON position and to prevent accidental closing
of the device when the cover is opened
H.
Voltage drop along the busbar trunking system should be comply with the
standards.
I.
Busbar Weight
Weight of the busbar shall not be over the standard values.
J.
Magnetic field at 1 meter from the center of the busbar shall not be over the
following values:
Busbar Rating
Magnetic Filed
1000 A
0.5 micro T
1350 A
0.7 micro T
1600 A
0.8 micro T
2000 A
1.13 micro T
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16466
2500 A
3000 A
4000 A
5000 A
1.63 micro T
2.1 micro T
2.7 micro T
3.8 micro T
2 05 FINISHES:
A.
Indoor Busway: manufacturers standard finish over corrosion resistant

pretreatment.
2 06 SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES:

A.
General: as recommended by busway manufacturer and conforming to Division

(16) Electrical Specification section Supporting Devices.
B.
Spring Mounted Vertical Riser Supports: adjustable for leveling and spring
tension and arranged to permit relative movement between floor and busway.
C.
Rigid Floor Supports: adjustable for leveling.
D.
Expansion Section: capacity and conductor provisions same as adjacent busway

section. Arranged to absorb expansion and contraction of bus bars and housing.
E.
Fasteners to connect busway supports to the building structure as follows:

1. Expansion Anchors: carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.
2. Toggle Bolts: all steel spring head type.
3. Powder Driven Threaded Studs: heat treated steel,
designed specifically for the intended service.
2 07 FIRE STOPPING:
A.
General: materials approved for fire ratings consistent with penetrated barriers.
Refer to Division (7) Thermal and water proofing works.
B.
Wall and Floor Flanges: sheet steel, 2 mm (12-gage) minimum thickness close
fitting to busway arranged to close the wall or floor opening at the busway
penetration.
C.
Two-Part Sealant: formed-in-place sealant as specified in paragraph FireResistant Joint Sealers in Division (16) Electrical Specification Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSTALLATION OF BUSWAYS:
A.
Install busways and accessories as indicated and in compliance with applicable

requirements of applicable codes/regulations. Conform to manufacturers written
instructions except where more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where manufacturers torquing requirements are not indicated,
tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in
the approved applicable standards.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16466
C.
Expansion Fittings: install at locations where busway crosses a building

expansion joint. In addition, install at intervals in long runs or risers where length
comes within 10 percent of the maximum length without expansion joints stated
by the manufacturer for the type and material of busway installed.
D.
Fire Stops: install fire stops where busway penetrates fire-rated walls and floors.
Seal between busway and opening and around opening with sealant or sealing
mortar having fire rating not less than that of wall, or floor penetrated. Where
busway manufacturers sealing and stopping devices are not fire rated, provide
fire stopping as required to satisfy authority having jurisdiction and Engineers
approval.
E.
Weather Seal: install integral weather seal where busway penetrates exterior wall
or roof. Provide appropriate flange and seal around openings to make weather
tight.
F.
Floor Penetrations; provide a minimum 75 mm (3-inch-high) curb around busway

penetrations of floors to prevent water from spills and leaks from contacting
busway.
G. Support busway from the building structure independently from other suspended
items.
H.
Conform to manufacturers recommendations for selection, spacing, and

installation of supports.
I.
Strength of each support including fastenings to the structure shall be adequate

to support busway load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four or 90 kg ( 200
1b), whichever is greater.
J.
Fastening Supports: unless otherwise indicated, fasten supports securely to the

building structure as specified in Division (16) Electrical Specification Section
Supporting Devices.
K.
Support at Connections to Equipment: where busways connect to equipment,

provide flanged fittings fastened to the busway and to the equipment. Support the
busway separately. Do not carry the weight of the busway on the equipment
enclosure.
3 02 EARTHING:
A.
Provide electrical bonding and equipment earthing connections for busways as

indicated and specified in Section Earthing System.
B.
Tighten bonding and earthing connections to comply with tightening torques

specified in applicable Standrad or to assure permanent and effective earthing.

A.
Test busway runs prior to energizing as follows and provide written report of tests.
B.
Phasing: verify that proper phase relationships exist between source, busway,
and connected equipment using phase rotation meter and verifying phase
continuity from source to equipment.
C. Insulation Resistance: measure IR for all busway components with 1000 Volt d.c.
megohmmeter and compare in report with manufacturers stated acceptable
values. Measure each phase to phase and each phase to earth. Any reading
should be better than 50 megohm-meter.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
D.
ODAC
Section 16466
Energize busway and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.
E. Test Failures: correct deficiencies identified by tests and make ready for retest.
Verify that equipment meets the specified requirements.
3 04 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR:

A.
Upon completion of installation of busways, remove burrs, dirt, and construction

debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches and abrasions.
B.
Galvanized Finish: Repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the

manufacturer.
C.
Paint Finish: repair damage using matching touch-up coating recommended by

the manufacturer.
3 05 ADJUSTMENT:
A.
Align busway runs vertically and horizontally to eliminate sags and twists.
Provide support stiffeners at locations where indicated and where there is
excessive movement.
B.
Check bus plug circuit breaker trip settings, fuse ratings, and starter overload
elements against connected loads and revise as required to conform to
recommended values.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16470

Section 16470 Distribution Boards (power and Lighting
panel Boards)
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
B.
A.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation, all distribution boards in
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of distribution boards of the

types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
B.

IEC, NEC, UL, and NEMA Standards pertaining to distribution boards.
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for distribution boards including size,
enclosures, and electrical ratings and characteristics.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layouts on architectural background drawings.
C.
Relay Coordination
D.
Short circuit and voltage drop calculation

Submit a comprehensive short circuit study as well as voltage drop calculation based on
the actual impedance values of the electrical components such as supply short circuit
level at the 10.5 KV (shall not be less than 500 MVA), transformer per unit impedance,
bus bars and cables impedances....etc.
1
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16470
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Distribution boards shall be miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) or Moulded case circuit

breaker boards as specified in the schedules or drawings.
B.
Distribution boards shall comply fully with the requirements of IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
C.
All interior components shall be mounted on a rigid fabricated chassis capable of being
removed and/or reversed for ease of wiring.
D.
Distribution boards shall be provided with a suitable earth bar and neutral bar, with
adequate provision for the connection of a circuit protective conductor for each outgoing
way.
E.
Terminals for the neutral conductor shall allow the individual connection of conductors
having a current carrying capacity equal to the full current carrying capacity of the phase
conductor.
F.
When the means of isolating the distribution board from the incoming supply is not to be
mounted immediately adjacent to the board, means shall be provided in the distribution
board to indicate whether or not the supply is "ON".
G.
Unless otherwise specified on the schedules or drawings, distribution board cases shall
be fabricated from zinc-coated or heavily rust-proofed heavy gauge sheet steel and be of
all-welded construction. They shall be adequately braced or stiffened, by folding or
otherwise, to form a completely rigid enclosure. Exterior corners and edges shall be
rounded so as to give a smooth overall appearance.
H.
Distribution boards shall have a side-hung hinged front cover, attached by means of liftoff hinges, and fitted with cylinder type locking handles. Covers shall be braced or folded
in such a manner as to prevent distortion or whip, and shall be fitted with dust-proofing
gaskets or edge seals.
I.
Distribution board cases shall provide a degree of protection IP31.
J.
Distribution board cases shall be of such dimensions that adequate space is available for
maneuvering and connecting the incoming and outgoing cables.
K.
Distribution boards shall be arranged for top or bottom or top and bottom entry according
to the requirements specified on the drawings or in the schedules.
L.
Distribution boards shall be provided with detachable end plates as specified in the
schedules or drawings.
M.
Each distribution board shall be provided with a durable circuit chart fixed to the inside of
the cover or immediately adjacent and bearing typewritten details, in plain language, of
the circuits supplied by each of the ways. The chart shall be on heavy weight paper or
thin card, and shall be protected by means of a rigid transparent plastic cover, it shall be
mounted in such a way that it can easily be removed for correction or alteration, then
replaced. The size of the chart shall be such that there is adequate space of recording
all of the required information and, in any case, shall not be less than A5 (210 mm x 148
mm).
N.
Each way in the distribution board shall be clearly numbered to correspond with the
numbering on the circuit chart.
O.
Each distribution board shall be provided with an engraved plastic label on the outside of
the front cover, bearing the designation of the board and its reference number, if any, as
given on the drawings or in the schedules. The label shall be fixed in position by
2
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16470
chromium-plated set screws. Each such label shall be not less in size than 100 mm x 30
mm, and shall bear the required inscription in white on a black background, using letters
and/or digits not less than 5 mm high.
P.
Distribution board covers shall incorporate locking facilities as specified in the schedules.
2 02 WORKS TESTS
A.
All assemblies shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of DIN/VDE

standards Part 1, plus requirements of associated standards.
B.
Works tests shall include inspection of all wiring and a complete electrical functioning
test.
C.
Protection relays shall be tested by primary current injection with currents equal to
D.
Works tests shall be done in the presence of Owner consultant.
2 03 FIELD TESTING
A.
ASSEMBLES
All assemblies shall be subjected to the routine tests as defined in IEC, DIN/VDE
standards. after installation on site. Test Certificates shall be provided.
B.
FUNCTIONAL UNITS
All functional units shall be checked for correct mechanical operation.
C.
PROTECTION CIRCUITS
All protection circuits with in relays used shall be tested for correct operation by
secondary injection of test currents. This shall be carried out at currents equivalent to
D.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Where specified in the schedules, protection circuits using current transformer (CT)
operated relays shall be tested by primary injection of current to prove the transformer
ratio.
2 04 COMMISSIONING
A.

the Works, each switchgear assembly shall be duly commissioned and left in full working
order. The term "Commissioning" shall be deemed to include:
1)
The energizing of functional device circuits and equipment which have previously
been inspected, tested, found to be satisfactory and capable of being energized
with compete safety.
2)
The starting up of all electrically powered plant and equipment, including that
supplied and installed under other contracts, and as specified in the schedules.
3)
The verification of the performance of each distribution board relative to all such
plant and equipment by the carrying out, where required, of further tests and the
making of all necessary adjustments so as to obtain optimum performance.
3
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
4)
Section 16470
The proving of all interlock operations in all possible combinations and the
operation of all control systems, metering and indications to meet the
performance requirements specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A.
Examine conditions under which distribution boards and enclosures are to be installed,
and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install distribution boards as indicated, in according with manufacturer's written

instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in according with recognized
intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of distribution boards with other work.
C.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts and equipment earthing
connections, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening
D.
Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are
permanently and mechanically anchored. Provide all angle units and accessories for
proper mounting.
E.
Provide properly wired electrical connections for distribution boards within enclosures.
F.
Double lugging is not permitted.
G.
Fill out distribution boards circuit directory card upon completion of installation work.
H.
Provide equipment earthing connections sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and

effective ground for distribution boards.

A.
Upon completion of installation of distribution boards and after circuiting has been
energized, demonstrate capability and compliance of panel-board with requirements.
Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
B.
Prior to energization of electrical circuitry, check all accessible connections to

manufacturer's tightening torque specifications.
C.
Prior to energization of distribution boards, check with ground resistance tester

phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements
are fulfilled.
4
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16470
D.
Prior to energization, check distribution boards for electrical continuity of circuits, and for
short circuits.
E.
Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
F.
After energization, check phase balancing and adjust accordingly.
G.
Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.

schedules.
220 Volt.
interposing relays.
(either 4-20 MA or 1-5 Volt or 10 Volt).
5
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16476

Section 16476 Air Circuit Breakers
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
B.
C.
The requirements of this section apply to air circuit breakers solid state type specified
elsewhere in these specifications.
D.
Low voltage switchgear assemblies and distribution board, Section 16425.
A.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation, air circuit breakers solid state type
as shown in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of air circuit breaker of the
service for not less than 5 years. Provide air circuit breakers produced by a
manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, NEMA,

DIN/VDE, IEC, EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to air circuit breakers which have
been UL listed and labeled.
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for air circuit breakers solid state type
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 GENERAL
A.
Air break solid state type circuit-breakers motor operated fixed type or with drawable type
as indicated on the drawings, (ACBs) shall be UL listed in accordance with UL standard
489 and meet the requirements of NEMA standard AB1-1975.
2 02 CONSTRUCTION
A.
ACBs shall be metal-clad, horizontal cassette type with positively driven "ON/OFF"
indication.
1
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
B.
Section 16476
INTERCHANGE
Means shall be incorporated to prevent the wrong circuit-breaker being racked in at fixed
position.
C.
SECURITY
Means shall be provided to padlock the breaker in the service, isolated and test
positions; and to close and independently padlock the shutters as specified in the
schedules. It shall not be possible to withdraw or rack-in shall be prevented.
Robust padlocks or cylinder locks shall be provided to lock each circuit-breaker in one or
other position during on-site testing and commissioning. This shall include locking the
shutters closed when a circuit-breaker is racked out. Two sets of keys shall be provided
for each padlock, together with a key cabinet and key schedule.
D.
ACBs shall be fitted with the protection devices solid state type, instruments indicators
and auxiliary control functions as specified in the schedules/drawings.
E.
OPERATING MECHANISMS
ACBs shall be of the triple-pole type as specified in the schedules/drawings.
Where specified, operating mechanisms shall be the trip-free type and shall have a
latching current equal to the short-circuit prospective value. Alternatively, the ACB shall
be fitted with an instantaneous digital trip or making current release which operates when
the ACB is closed onto a short-circuit. Anti-pumping devices shall be fitted to all
operating mechanisms.
The specific method of closing shall be as specified in the schedules or drawings, as one
of the following:
1)
Type MSO : Manual, spring operated closing arrangement with a handle for
charging and releasing the spring in one stroke.
2)
TYPE MSM or MSE : Manual, spring operated arrangement where the spring is
charged to a latched position pending mechanical/electrical initiation of closure.
The spring system shall incorporate the facility of charging for a second closure
when the breaker is closed.
3)
TYPE MWS : motor wound charged spring as types MSM or MSE. Motor wiring
and control circuitry shall be internal.
4)
TYPE SOC : solenoid operated from d.c. or rectified a.c.
Where ACBs with a spring stored energy closing mechanism are used in an arrangement
involving interlocking with other ACBs, the manual discharge of the spring closing
mechanism shall be disabled by the interlocking system.
Facilities shall be provided to remove or blank off the integral mechanical "CLOSE"
pushbutton where it could be used to override protection devices, lockout relays or
remote operating signals.
Mechanisms which store energy shall be fitted with stored energy status indicators.
F.
OPERATING FACILITIES
The ACB shall have facilities for isolation, withdrawal and test position operations with
the ACB isolated. Carriage position switches shall be provided for connection into
appropriate control circuits to permit electrical interlocks to be defeated when the ACB is
in the isolated and (where applicable) test positions as specified in the schedules.
2
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16476
Where specified in the schedules/drawings, earthing facilities shall be provided, to earth

the circuit and busbars in the service, test and isolated positions.
G.
OPERATION CLEARANCE
Circuit-breakers shall be installed with full clearances for arc-chute vents and adequate
side clearances for unimpeded operation and maintenance.
2 03 RATING
A.
The service performance characteristics shall be as specified in the schedules and
drawings.
Ratings specified are the required on-site ratings. Written confirmation shall be provided
to confirm that specified ratings will be obtainable under the conditions in which each
circuit-breaker operates. Operating conditions shall include due allowance for ambient
temperature, enclosure, physical situation, position and attitude of the ACB and the
proximity of other devices on full load.
B.
LABELLING
A label shall be provided, in a clearly visible position on the front of each circuit-breaker
on which the service performance characteristics shall be displayed.
2 04 PROTECTION AND TRIPPING

A.
RELAYS
Protective relay requirements shall be selected so as to ensure full discrimination
between system levels by the tenderer. Protective relays shall be of the solid state type
with selectable characteristics and comply with IEC, NEMA, DIN/VDE standards..
All relays shall be provided with test facilities for use in commissioning and testing from
the front of the switchgear.
Relays shall be of the integral or external type.
B.
TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS
Details of tripping characteristics shall be provided for each type of ACB at time of
tender. The details shall include manufacturer's full current discrimination tables showing
over current and short-circuit discrimination and, additionally a full set of overlay
transparency discrimination curves to enable discrimination settings to be checked.
All over current and short-circuit protective devices shall have separately adjustable time
and current settings. Adjustments and settings shall be possible from the front of the
ACB. The setting adjustment devices shall be behind a lockable cover plate, or similarly
protected against unauthorized access.
Energy for protective devices shall be obtained from integral current transformers.
Separate current transformers shall be of the accuracy class specified in the schedules
and comply with IEC, DIN/VDE NEMA standards, and of suitable ratio and rating for the
operating conditions. If the circuit-breaker is de-rated because of high temperature then
the current transformers shall be replaced with ones suitable for the higher operating
temperatures. Protection current transformers shall not be de-rated.
Under voltage, trip and closing coils which shall incorporate adjustable time delay shall
incorporates adjustable time delay shall be wired out to secondary isolating contacts in
the same position on each breaker to ensure interchangability of ACBs with the same
service performance characteristics.
3
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
C.
Section 16476
COMMISSION LABEL
A label shall be provided, in a clearly visible position on the front of each circuit-breaker,
on which the final commissioned release setting for that circuit-breaker shall be
displayed.
2 05 AUXILIARY CONTACTS
A.
ACB auxiliary circuits shall bearranged to provide a wiping action on contacts during
withdrawal and re-instatement of the ACB, to and from its isolated position
B.
On completion of the switchgear installation, each ACB shall be provided with auxiliary
contacts available for future use for both the ACB contact operation and the isolation
operation as specified in the schedules/drawings. Wiring to the switching contacts shall
be ferruled and brought to a terminal block.
C.
All auxiliary contacts shall be mounted in accessible positions and away from possible
electrical and mechanical danger.
2 06 SHUTTERS
A.
Where ACBs are isolated, safety shutters shall automatically cover exposed conductors.
B.
The shutters shall be able to be padlocked in the closed position, but shall be capable of
being fixed open where tests require conductor contact.
C.
Shutter shall operate automatically by the movement of the circuit-breaker, preferably

without using springs.
D.
Shutters shall be painted to IEC, DIN/VDE standards:
Shutters
Color
Incoming
Circuit
Shutters
"Signal
Red"
IEC, DIN/
VDE
Busbar
Circuit
Shutters
"Signal
Red"
IEC, DIN/
VDE
"BUSBARS
_____
BusSection
Shutters
"Signal
Red"
IEC, DIN/
VDE
"BUSBARS
(on each)
With white arrows to indicate

the section of switchgear
with which the shuttered
contacts are associated
IEC, DIN/
VDE
_____
_____
"Lemon"
Circuit
Shutters
Ref.
Lettering
(White)
"DANGER
LIVE
CABLES"
Additional
Requirements
_____
2 07 FINISHES
A.
Special treatments and finishes such as tropicalisation, anticorrosion finish and coldclimate treatment shall be applied where specified or where conditions make such
treatment necessary.
2 08 TOOLS
4
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
A.
Section 16476
Loose equipment shall include test leads and a lifting and transporting device plus any
other tools or equipment needed for routine maintenance.
2 09 TESTING
A.
ACBs shall be type tested by an independent approved testing authority and a complete
Compliance Certificate, including short-circuit ratings, shall be provided for each type of
circuit-breaker.
B.
In addition to the normal test requirements of IEC 947, ACBs shall be type tested in
enclosures similar to those in which they will be installed on site. Such tests shall include
temperature rise tests.
C.
A complete set of manufacturer's on-site testing and calibration equipment shall be

provided for commissioning and testing and for future fault diagnosis, testing and recalibration of settings, trip units, control units and process controllers forming part of the
installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A.
Examine conditions under which air circuit breakers are to be installed and notify in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with
the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install air circuit breakers as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized
intended function.
B.
Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of air circuit breakers.
C.
Provide carriage for with drawable circuit breaker.

A.
Prior to energization of air circuit breakers, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for
short circuits. Replace malfunctioning units with new unites and then demonstrate
compliance with requirements.
5
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16477

Section 16477 Miniature Circuit Breakers
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
C. The requirements of this section apply to miniature circuit breakers specified elsewhere in
1 02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
complete and make ready for operation, miniature circuit breakers as shown in accordance
with Drawings and Specifications.
1 03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of miniature circuit breakers of the
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 5 years. Provide miniature circuit breakers produced by a manufacturer listed
as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to miniature circuit breakers Provide miniature circuit
breakers.
1 04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for miniature circuit breakers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01
A. Miniature circuit-breakers (MCB's) complying with IEC, DIN/VDE Standards shall be

acceptable, however, all MCB's shall comply with the same standard and be from the same
manufacturer's range. MCB's shall be rated for uninterrupted duty at 220/380V.
B. MCBs shall have Type Tested. Manufacturer's tripping characteristics shall be provided for
each type of MCB specified.
C. Service and ultimate short-circuit capacities shall be as specified in the switchboard details.
D. The joule integral (I t) energy withstand let-through shall be specified for each MCB.
E. In multi-pole MCBs, including four-pole, all poles shall open, close and trip simultaneously.
1
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16477
2 02
MECHANISMS
A. Mechanisms shall be quick-make, quick-break, over-center type which are trip-free. The
contact position shall be positively indicated by coloured bands and/or lettering to show
whether the contacts are open or closed.
2 03
SECURITY
A. MCBs shall be proved with effective means of locking in the "OFF" position.
2 04
CHARACTERISTICS OF CIRCUIT-BREAKERS
A. MCB current ratings and instantaneous tripping characteristics shall be as specified in the
Cable and Distribution Board Schedules
B. The manufacturer's standard range shall include all MCB ratings, characteristics and auxiliaries
specified in the schedule.
2 05
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01
INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which miniature circuit breakers are to be installed and notify in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02
INSTALLATION
A. Install miniature circuit breakers as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of miniature circuit breakers.
3 03
A. Prior to energization of miniature circuit breakers, test for continuity of circuitry and for short
circuits. Replace malfunctioning breakers with new breakers, and then demonstrate
2
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16478

Section 16478 Moulded case Circuit Breakers Solid State
Type
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
C. The requirements of this section apply to moulded case circuit breakers solid state type
specified elsewhere in these specifications.
D. Low voltage switchgear assemblies and distribution boards. Section 16425.
1 02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
complete and make ready for operation, moulded case circuit breakers solid state type fuses
as shown in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
1 03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of moulded case circuit breakers
solid state type only for ratings above 200 Amps. (thermal & magnetic adjustable) whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide
moulded case circuit breakers solid state type only for ratings above 200 Amps. (thermal &
magnetic adjustable) produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this
section.
EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to moulded case circuit breakers solid state type only for
ratings above 200 Amps. (thermal & magnetic adjustable) provided moulded case circuit
breaker solid state type.
1 04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for moulded case circuit breakers solid state type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01
A. DEFINITIONS
The definitions of terms and symbols used in this Specification are those used in IEC947.
B. STANDARDS
Moulded case circuit-breakers solid state type, (MCCBs) shall comply with IEC947: Part 2 plus
any additional requirements of this Specification.
1
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16478
- Up to 200 Amps. to be equipped with thermomagnetic (thermal adjustable release).

- Above 200 Amps. to be equipped with solid state release (thermal & magnetic adjustable).
C. GENERAL
Short-circuit capacities, impulse withstand voltages and insulation levels shall be suitable for
the location of the circuit-breaker in the system, i.e. at service entrance level, distribution circuit
level, load level or specially protected level.
MCCBs shall be selected to ensure full discrimination up to and including the prospective shortcircuit, and earth fault currents as specified on drawings and Schedules for prospective earth
fault currents the disconnection times shall not exceed 5s.
MCCBs shall be energy limiting type unless specified otherwise in the schedules or drawings.
2 02
CONSTRUCTION
A. MANUFACTURE
MCCBs shall be manufactured with double insulation of the front face, insulating auxiliary
components from the main power poles thereby allowing as far as reasonable the fitting of
auxiliary units on site without full isolation of the unit.
B. CURRENT RATINGS
Rated currents, rated service short-circuit breaking capacities and trip release settings shall be
as specified in cable installation schedules and on drawings.
Current ratings as specified in the schedules and drawings are for uninterrupted duty at
220/380V in the final installed location on site under full load operating conditions of the
complete installation, i.e. taking account of heat produced by other devices and the ambient
temperature, physical situation, enclosure, position and attitude of the MCCB. The appropriate
de-rating factors shall be applied to manufacturer's standard ratings when selecting MCCBs to
meet the specified ratings.
MCCBs shall be suitable for operation in both the horizontal and vertical mounting position
without detrimental effect on operation or rating.
C. TRIPPING CHARACTERISTICS
Details of tripping characteristics shall be provided for each type of MCCB. The details shall
include manufacturer's full current discrimination tables showing overload and short-circuit
discrimination and, additionally, a full set of overlay transparency discrimination curves to
enable discrimination settings to be checked.
D. TEST CERTIFICATES
Complete certificates shall be provided for each type of MCCB, stating the service and ultimate
short-circuit capacities.
E. CONTACTS
The contact arrangement of current-limiting MCCBs shall be such that the current-limiting
contacts are in series with the main contacts and remain closed in normal operation, including
time delayed over current tripping.
2
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16478
Contacts shall be arranged so that normal current is carried by low-resistance silver alloy or
other non-welding material while arcing is handled by tungsten contacts.
Multi-set contact MCCB's shall be arranged using one set of contacts for thermal current and
other for arc interruption.
F.TERMINALS
Terminals shall be sized to accommodate the size and type of cable of incoming and outgoing
circuits as specified in the schedules or drawings. MCCBs shall be provided complete with
terminal shields.
Terminals shall be arranged for direct connection to busbars, front or rear as required by the
switchboard design.
All poles of multi-pole circuit-breakers shall be constructed so that contacts open, close and trip
simultaneously. It shall not be possible for one or more poles to be closed while another
remains open and vice-versa.
G. OPERATING MECHANISMS
Operating mechanisms shall be over-center, quick-make, quick-break type having operation in
which speed of operation of the breaker is independent of the operator.
All hand-operated circuit-breakers shall be fitted with rotary action handles. The handles shall
be lockable in both open and closed positions.
Where motor operated MCCBs are specified in the schedules or drawings, the motors the
clutches shall be as scheduled. Direct action operating handles shall be provided for local
operation.
Where solenoid operated MCCBs are specified in the schedules or drawings, the operating
voltage shall be as scheduled. Separate solenoids shall be provided for opening and closing
operations. Built-in push buttons shall be provided for local operation.
Indication of the "ON", "OFF" and "TRIPPED" conditions shall be provided not only by the
position of the handle but also by means of a colored band, or line which shall be visible when
the circuit-breaker is on but not when it is off or tripped.
The "TRIPPED" condition shall be indicated by the handle assuming a mid-point position
between "ON" and "OFF" It shall not be possible to manually place the handle in the tripped
position.
Indication shall be provided to confirm that all main contacts have separated.
H. ENCLOSURES
Moulded case covers and non-interchangeable trip elements shall be permanently sealed at
works to prevent tampering, but the trip elements may be changed/Adjusted and re-sealed on
site by using suitable tools.
All internal components of MCCBs shall be replaceable on site.
MCCBs shall be certified as satisfying the leakage current testes called for in IEC 947 with
regards to safety isolation.
MCCBs used for motor starting shall satisfy the Type 2 coordination requirements called for in
IEC 947. The MCCB and the starter shall preferably be of the same manufacture, and in all
cases shall be tested together and certified as satisfying the co-ordination requirements.
3
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16478
All MCCBs shall be of the same manufacture and those of like kind shall be of the same type.
This requirement applies to loose or individually mounted MCCBs as well as to those
incorporated within assemblies such as control panels, switchboards and distribution boards.
I.
PROTECTION MECHANISMS
Each pole shall provide inverse time over current protection and adjustable high set
instantaneous tripping. All polshall trip simultaneously if one detects a fault.
Trip units of ratings up to and including 250A shall be built in. Trip units above 250A shall be
replaceable.
Tripping mechanisms shall be selective limiting type to obtain discrimination or by
interconnection with other MCCB trip units.
All adjustable trips shall be visible and adjustable from the front with the breaker in position.
Adjustments to trip settings shall be made to all poles simultaneously by means of a common
adjustment mechanism.
Where thermal trips are used they shall be ambient temperature compensated, taking account
of the temperature inside the enclosure under continuous full load conditions. Heating of bimetal strips shall be indirect, mains connected up to 630A ratings and current transformer
operated above 630A rating.
J.
OPERATING FACILITIES
Facilities shall be provided for the use of a hand-held tester for on-site testing of all operational
features.
Where specified in the schedules/drawings, earth leakage trips, shunt trips, undervoltage trips
and remote operation shall be provided. These accessories shall all be factory assembled and
tested.
Current/energy limiting MCCBs which require replacement of the current limiters after operatic
shall not be re-settable until such replacement has been made.
2 03
AUXILIARY CONTACTS
A. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided where specified in the schedule or drawings, auxiliary
contacts shall operate simultaneously with the main breaker contacts.
2 04
TESTING
A. Testing shall be carried out in the manner prescribed in IEC 947 plus any additional testing
required on circuit-breakers for use in non-standard conditions.
B. For MCCBs of 1250A rating and above, a set of manufacturer's plug-in
setting/testing/diagnostic equipment shall be supplied for routine testing, setting and fault
diagnosis if specified in the schedule. Unless otherwise stated, only one test set is required
regardless of the number of MCCB's supplied.
2 05
GENERAL INFORMATION
A. The following information shall be provided for each MCCB .

-
Voltage and rated insulation voltage.

Rated current
Rated operational voltage and rated insulation voltage.
Number of poles
Rated service and ultimate short-circuit capacities.
Method of mounting
Method of connection
4
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16478
- Protection against external influence

- The It tripping characteristic curves and the peak let-through currents at prospective fault
levels,
- Rated short time withstand current
- Rated short-circuit making capacity
2 06
LABELLING
A. On the front of each MCCB a visible label shall be fitted and described as follows:
Labelling shall be marked as follows:
- Rated current and trip setting (for MCCBs with multiple current ratings the maximum value
shall be marked plus, without ambiguity, the value for which the MCCB has been adjusted),
- Rated voltage
- Manufacturer's name or trade mark
- Type designation, catalogue number or serial number
- Rated short-circuit capacity in amperes
- Reference ambient temperature if different from 30 oC
A label shall be provided, in a clearly visible position on the front of each circuit-breaker, on
which the final commissioned release setting for that circuit-breaker shall be displayed .
2 07
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01
INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which moulded case circuit breakers are to be installed and notify in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work
3 02
INSTALLATION
A. Install moulded case circuit breakers solid state type as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance
with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and
B. Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of moulded case circuit breakers.
3 03
A. Prior to energization of moulded case circuit breakers test devices for continuity of circuitry and
for short circuits. Replace malfunctioning breakers with new breakers and then demonstrate

5
JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16482

Section 16482 Motor-Control Centers
PART 1 - GENERAL
to this Section:
2. Motor Controllers.
3. Electrical Testing and Commissioning
4. B.M.S
1 02 SUMMARY:
A.
This section includes motor-control centers (MCCs) and motor control panels
(MCPs) for use on a.c. circuits rated 400 V or less, as shown on drawings and
schedules.
B.

1.
L.V Circuit Breakers for circuit breakers, and other similar devices used in
MCC s/MCP s.
2.
Motor Controllers for motor-control devices installed in MCCs/MCPs.
3.
Electrical Identification for identification labels and warning signs for

MCCs/MCPs and their components.
4.
L.V Wires and Cables, for insulated cables used in switchgear.
C.
Refer to Electrical Requirements for mechanical works in Division (15) Mechanical

Work for variable frequency drive.
D.
Refer to applicable sections in Division (15) Mechanical Works for requirements in

connection with system control and operation.
Refer to Division (16) Electrical Works section Building Management System for
connection to BMS.
E.
1 03 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and General
Requirements Specification Sections.
0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16482
B. Product data for each product and component specified or required for the
installation.
C. Shop drawings for each MCC/MCP including dimensioned plans and elevations and
component lists. Show ratings, including short-time and short-circuit ratings, and
horizontal and vertical bus ampacities.
D. Schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory coordinated protective
settings of individual MCC/MCP units.
E. Wiring Diagrams: interconnecting wiring diagrams pertinent to the class and type
specified for the MCC/MCP. Schematic diagram of the whole installation, elementary
diagrams of each controller unit clearly indicating components and terminal
markings.
F. Shop drawing of spare fuse cabinet showing material, dimensions, and features
including storage provisions for fuse cartons.
G. Qualification data for field-testing organization certificates, signed by the Contractor,
certifying that the organization complies with the requirements specified in Quality
Assurance below. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses,
names of Engineers and Owners, plus other information specified.
H. Certified reports of field tests and observations specified in the article Field Quality
Control in this Section.
I. Maintenance data for MCCs/MCPs, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance
Manuals specified in Division (1) and in Division (16), Section Basic Electrical
Requirements.
A. Compliance with IEC or BS: comply with the requirements of the following standards,
as applicable:
IEC269.1, BS 88
IEC255, IEC50, BS 142
BS 159
IEC 185, BS 3938
IEC 337-2, BS 4794 PT2
IEC 51 and IEC 512, BS 89
Cartridge fuses
Electrical Protective Relays
Busbar and Busbar Connections
Current Transformers
Control Devices
Direct acting Indicating analogue Electical
measuring Instruments.
IEC 521, BS 5685
Electric Meters
IEC 144, BS 5420
Degree of protection of enclosures
IEC 947-184, BS 5424 PTI
Contactors
IEC947
Low Voltage Switch gear & Control gear
IEC 439, BS 5486 PTI
LV Switchgear and Control Gear
Assemblies
IEC 292-1,1A, 1B, BS 4941 PTI Motor starters D.O.L.
IEC 292-2, BS 4941 PT2
Motor Starter, Reduced Voltage Star
/Delta
IEC 292-4, BS 4941 PT4
Motor Starter Reduced Voltage Auto
Transformer
Industrial control devices, controllers and assemblies
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16482
B.
Field-Testing Organization Qualifications: to qualify for acceptance, the testing

organization must demonstrate, that it has the experience and capability to conduct
satisfactorily the testing indicated.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: ensure that MCC/MCP spaces are sufficient
for type and size of MCCs, including clearances from adjacent surfaces, for feeder
management and installations entering or leaving the MCCs/MCPs and for
maintenance.
1 05 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A.
Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery
path as indicated.
B.
Store so condensation will not occur on or in MCCs/MCPs. Provide temporary

heaters as required to prevent condensation. Store MCCs/MCPs in clean dry
spaces. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical
damage.
C.
Handle MCCs/MCPs in accordance with manufacturers rigging and moving

instructions.
1 06 EXTRA MATERIALS:
A.
B.
Spare Fuses: furnish six spares of each type and rating of fuse and fusible devices
required. Include spares for:
1. Control power fuses.
Spare Indicating Lights: furnish 6 of each type required.
C.
Touch-Up Paint: furnish 3 half-pint containers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 MANUFACTURERS:
2 02 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS (MCCs):

A.
Type: totally enclosed freestanding sectional type, with sections joined to form one
assembly. Sections to be designed to allow other sections to be easily added or
removed.
B.
Construction: 2 mm thick sheet steel, adequately reinforced and braced for maximum
rigidity, sand blasted, rust inhibited after fabrication and sprayed with one coat primer
and two coats enamel internally and externally.
C.
Enclosure: to IEC 439 and IEC947-1, protection IP51 to IEC 529 except as otherwise
indicated.
l. Use of draw-out design for combination starter units. Reduced voltage controllers
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
D.
ODAC
Section 16482
for motors above 150 HP may be of the fixed mounted type.

Voltage Rating: 1000V rated insulation voltage and 400V rated operational voltage.
E.
Wiring Classification: class II, Type B, as defined in NEMA ICS 2 or equal standard
(unit wiring diagrams including interconnection and interlocking to be provided by
MCC supplier, and each starter unit to be completely factory interwired up to a
terminal back to be provided per unit, including interwiring between units and
interlocking provisions to remote devices).
F.
Compartments: modular, with individual doors with concealed hinges and quickcaptive screw fasteners. For combination starter units provide interlocks so that
disconnect means must be in the off position before door can be opened, and so
door cannot be closed with the disconnect means in the on position, except by
consciously operating a permissive release device. Provide handles with off position
down and which can be locked in the off position.
G. All components of the starter are pluggable mounted on a withdrawable chasse

racked on the MCC. where the IP of the panel should be maintained at the IP 42
when the drawer is removed from the panel.
H.
Wiring Spaces: provide each vertical section of structure with horizontal and vertical
wiring spaces for wiring to each unit compartment in each section. Provide supports
to hold wiring rigidly in place.
I.
Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Section: equal to or greater than indicated
available fault current of the system in rms symmetrical amperes at the motor-control
center location for one second minimum, at rated voltage and frequency.
J.
Schematic Wiring Diagrams: to be firmly fixed under glassene within each motor
control unit, showing each component, terminal markings and component symbols
and labels.
K.
All panels should be totally type tested according to IEC 439 particularly for short
circuit withstand, degree of protection, and thermal withstand
2 03 MOTOR CONTROL PANELS (MCPS):

A.
B.
C.
Type: wall mounted or unit mounted, lockable type, IP42 for indoor installations.
Construction: minimum 1.5 mm thick hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, finished with one
coat etch primer and one coat stove enamel internally and externally.
Panels Installed Outdoors and in Wet Areas: to have weatherproof totally sealed
water and dust-proof IP55 enclosures.
D.
Voltage Rating: 1000V rated insulation voltage and 400V rated operational voltage.
E.
Components: panels are to contain necessary breakers, starters, busbars, push

buttons switches, selector switches, relays, indicating lights, interconnecting and
interlock wiring and all devices and accessories required for automatic or manual
operation of equipment as specified under equipment concerned.
F.
All components of the starter are pluggable mounted on a withdrawable chasse

racked on the MCC. where the IP of the panel should be maintained at the IP 42
when the drawer is removed from the panel.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16482
G. Labels: starters, switches, electrical devices and accessories to be clearly labelled in

English as to function and number. Labels to be permanently fixed under each
component.
H.
Schematic and wiring diagrams to be mounted in permanent approved manner on

inside of panel door. Diagrams are to show each component cross referenced with
component labels.
I.
All panels should be totally type tested according to IEC 439 particularly for short
circuit withstand, degree of protection and thermal withstand
2 04 BUSES:
A.
Material: 98% pure electrolytic copper (1Amp/mm2), with electro-silver plated contact
surfaces, full length, one piece, sized based on a total maximum operating
temperature of 100 deg.C. at full continuous rating (50deg.C. temperature rise above
50 deg.C. ambient). All busbars to be edge-wise installed using non-magnetic
metallic support fitted with insulation material.
B.
Ampacity Ratings of Main Buses: as main incoming device; circuit breaker or

disconnect switch, or as indicated on drawings.
C.
Neutral Buses: Full size.
D.
Equipment Earthing Bus: non-insulated, horizontal copper bus in accordance with the
standards.
E.
Busbar Arrangement: extend main phase, neutral and ground buses with same
capacity the entire length of the MCC/MCP, with provision for future extension at
both ends by means of bolt holes and captive bus splice sections or approved
equivalent.
2 05 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES:
A.
General: provide a modular arrangement of motor controllers, control devices,

overcurrent protective devices, transformers, instruments, indicating panels, blank
panels, and other items mounted in the compartments of the motor- control center as
indicated.
B.
Motor Controller Units: provide combination controller units as specified in Division

(16) Electrical Specification Section Motor Controllers; of types and with features,
ratings, and circuit assignments indicated. Provide units that automatically line up
and connect with vertical section buses while being racked into their normal
energized positions. Units shall have short-circuit current ratings equal to or greater
than the short-circuit current rating of the MCC/MCP section.
C.
Over-current Protective Devices: provide types of devices with features, ratings, and
circuit assignments indicated. Individual feeder tap units acceptable through 250
ampere rating only, shall be installed on drawout mountings with connectors that
automatically line up and connect with vertical section buses while being racked into
their normal energized positions.
D.
Phase Failure and Phase Sequence Protection: is to be provided on the main circuit
breaker/switch of the MCCs/MCPs with individual trip indication for each function.
Necessary shunt trip devices are to be provided.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16482
E.
Spaces and Blank Units: compartments fully bussed and equipped with guide rails or
equivalent, ready for insertion of drawout units.
F.
Spare Units: fully equipped with breakers/starters, with type, sizes, and ratings as
indicated, and installed in compartments indicated spare.
G. Connection to BMS: coordinate with the BMS supplier and provide all necessary
interface devices, instruments, transducers, dry contacts, etc. in the MCCs/MCPs
for connection of all required points to the BMS as specified or indicated in the BMS
schedules.
2 06 CONTACTORS:
A. Motor starter contactor shall be of the electromagnetic type rated for uninterrupted duty
as defined in standard IEC-158-1
B. Main contact of motor-starter contactors shall be of silver plated copper.
C. Each motor-starter contactor shall be provided with the required auxiliary contacts.
D. Insulation class of operating coils shall be class E or better.
E. Operating coils of contactors shall be suitable for operation from the control supply
system specified in the drawing.
F. Contactors shall be of double break , non-gravity type
2 07 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAYS:

A. Starters shall be complete with a three element positive acting ambient temperature
compensated time lagged thermal overload relay with adjustable settings , the setting
range shall be properly selected in accordance with the drawings.
B. Thermal overload relays shall be hand reset type with manual/automatic reset facility.
C. 'Stop' push button of the starter and hand reset device shall be separate from each
other.
D. Overload relay hand reset push button shall be brought out on the front of the
compartment door.
E. Overload relay shall be provided with at least one 'NO' and one 'NC' or one changeover contact.
2 08 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
A. Current transformers shall be of the dry type.
B. Current transformer shall have a short time withstand rating equal to the short time
withstand rating of the associated switchgear for one second for breaker feeders
C. Unless otherwise specified , the minimum performance requirement of current
transformers are as follows:
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16482
Measuring CTs 10 VA and 15 VA accuracy class 5P and an accuracy limits factor of 10.
D. Test links shall be provided in both secondary leads of the CTs to easily carry out
current and phase angle measurement tests.
E. All current transformers shall be earthed through a separate earth link on the terminal
block to permit easy measurement of the current transformer insulation resistance
2 09
RELAYS:
A. The following clauses shall apply to the protective relays.
B. Relays shall be :1-
Enclosed in dust proof flush mounting drawout type cases.
2- Accessible for setting and resetting from the front.

C. Auxiliary relays shall be provided with at least two separate voltage free contacts.
D.
Make and type of relays shall be subject to the purchasers approval.
2 10 INDICATING INSTRUMENTS AND METERS:

A. Electrical indicating instruments shall be of minimum 96 mm square size , 90 scale
deflection with a class of accuracy of 1.5 , suitable for flush mounting.
B. Indicating instruments shall have provision for zero adjustment outside the cover.
C. Instrument dials shall be parallax free with black numerals on a white dial.
E. Ammeters provided on motor circuits shall be provided with a suppressed extended
scale to indicate motor starting current.
2 011
INDICATING LAMPS:
A. Indicating lamps shall be:
Of the filament type and of low watt consumption.
Provided with translucent lamp covers of colours 'red' 'green' and 'amber' as
required in the control wiring.
B. Pulps and lenses shall be easily replaceable from the front .
2 012
CABLE TERMINATION:
A. Suitable compression type , heavy duty brass cable glands with check nuts, rubber
sealing ring and brass washers mounted on a removable gland plate shall be
provided to support all power and control cables entering the switchgear. Cable
glands shall be plated to avoid corrosion
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16482
B. Power cable glands and crimping type lugs shall be supplied to suit the cable sizes
indicated in S.L.D.
C. The vendor shall select the power cable glands and lugs based on the cable type.
2 013
EARTHING:
A. Each MCC shall be provided with an earth busbar running along the entire length of
the board.
B. At either end of the earth bus , one (1) clamp type terminal with nuts, bolts and washers
shall be provided for bolting the PURCHASER's earthing conductor.
C. Earth busbars shall be supported at suitable intervals.
D. Positive connection between all the frames of equipment mounted in the switch board
and earth busbar shall be provided by using insulated copper wires .
E. All instrument and relay cases shall be connected to the earth busbar using 600/1000
V grade , 2.5 mm2 standard , copper earthing conductor.
2 014 PUSH BUTTONS:

A. The ON push buttons shall be of the momentary contact push to actuate type.
B. All push button shall be fitted with the required NO and NC contacts.
C. ON push buttons shall be green in colour.
D. 'STOP' push button shall be red in colour.
2 015
STARTERS:
1) Starters shall be rated for continuous duty .
2) Utilization categories for contactors in all types of starter shall be IEC 947
AC-3 unless otherwise specified for particular applications.
3) Starters up to and including 10 KW shall be direct on line . Above 10 KW and
up shall be open transition automatic star-delta.
4) Extra starters 50 % as spare starters.
A. Direct on line (D.O.L) Starters
D.O.L starters for voltage up to and including 1000 V a.c shall comply with
IEC947. They shall be rated for intermittent periodic duty or intermittent duty class
0.3 and comply with the requirements of utilization category AC-3.
B. Automatic star-delta (Asd) Starters
1) In all types of star-delta starters the correct phase relationship between the
star and delta connections to minimize disturbance on changeover shall be
maintained.
2) In all star-delta starters the star and delta contactors shall be electrically and
mechanically interlocked so that they cannot close or be closed at the same
time.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16482
3) Where overload relays are connected in the phase circuit the overload relay
scales shall be clearly marked to show whether they represent line current or
whether the scale must be multiplied by 1.7 to represented line current.
C.
All components of the motor starter should be selected from type 2 coordination
tables, type tested according to IEC 947
2 016 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS:

A.
2 017
Provide identifying devices as specified in Division (16) Electrical Specification

Section Electrical identification
FINISHES:
A.
2 018
Manufacturers standard finish suitable for the environment in which installed. Colour
to be approved by the Engineer
CONCRETE BASES:
A.
Concrete and Reinforcement: provide in accordance with Specification Concrete

Work.
B.
Shop Drawings and Details: provide exact dimensions and all necessary framing
provisions, cabling provisions and submit for approval by the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSTALLATION:
A.
General: install MCCs/MCPs in accordance with the manufacturers written

installation instructions and regulations/codes applicable.
B.
Anchor each motor-control center assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized
in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Attach by tack welding or
bolting. Level and grout sills flush with motor-control center mounting surface.
3 02 CONCRETE BASES:
A.
General: where a membrane-waterproofed floor or pressure slab is indicated under

the MCC/MCP location, or elsewhere as indicated, provide a concrete foundation
pad. Install 100 mm-high sills on the pad as specified above.
B.
Form concrete equipment bases having permanent steel frame, using approved
standard steel channels, locate as indicated, and construct 100 mm (4 inches) larger
in both directions than supported unit. Miter and weld corners and provide cross
bracing. Anchor or key to floor slab.
C.
Install reinforcing bars tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves using
manufacturers installation template.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16482
D.
Form concrete equipment bases using framing lumber with form release compounds.
Locate as indicated and construct 100 mm(4 inches) larger in both directions than
supported unit. Chamfer top edges and corners.
E.
Install reinforcing bars, and place anchor bolts and sleeves using manufacturers
installation template.
F.
Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of equipment.
G. Clean exposed steel frames and apply 2 coats of rust-preventative metal primer and
2 coats of exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel in color selected by the Engineer.
H.
Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and temporary blocking of

moving parts from MCC units and components.
3 03 IDENTIFICATION:
A.
Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified
in Division (16) Section Electrical Identification.
B.
Operating Instructions: frame printed operating instructions for MCCs, including

control sequences, and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or
metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of
MCCs/MCPs.
3 04 CONNECTIONS:
A.
Tighten MCC/MCP bus joint bolts and electrical connector and terminal bolts in
accordance with manufacturers installation instructions and torque-tightening values.
Where manufacturers torque values are not stated, use those specified in applicable
standards.

A.
General: comply with applicable requirements of the Engineer approved testing

organization.
B.
Testing Organization: arrange and pay for the services of an independent electrical
testing organization to perform quality control electrical testing and calibration, visual
and mechanical inspections, and tests of MCCs/MCPs.
C.
Testing Preparation and Pretesting: perform the following preparations for tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Test insulation resistance of buses and portions of control wiring that disconnect
from solid-state devices through normal disconnecting features. Insulation
resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable.
Make continuity tests of circuits.
Provide set of Contract Documents to test organization. Include full updating on
final system configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from
those indicated in original Contract Documents.
Provide manufacturers instructions for installation and testing of MCC/MCP to
test organization.
Inspect MCCs/MCPs for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory
labels, circuit connections, and nameplate compliance with up-to-date system
drawings.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16482
6.
Perform operational test and exercise of mechanical components and other

operable devices in accordance with manufacturers instruction manual.
7. Check MCC/MCP anchorage, external clearances, and alignment and fit of
components including internal elements.
8. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench.
Refer to manufacturers instructions for proper torque values.
9. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for motor control
and protective devices as specified in Division (16) Electrical Specification
Sections LV Circuit Breakers and section Motor Controllers.
10. Device Ratings and Settings: verify ratings and settings of overload relays,
motor circuit protectors, and any overcurrent protective devices. Make final
adjustments of devices in accordance with Division (16) Electrical
Specification Section LV Circuit Breakers and Section Motor Controllers or
other related Sections of the Specification and drawings.
D.
Quality Control Testing Program: assure MCC/MCP installation meets specified

requirements, is operational within specified tolerances, and provides appropriate
protection for systems and equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
Test and inspect MCCs/MCPs in accordance with manufacturers

recommendations and these specifications.
Schedule tests and provide notification at least 1 week in advance of test
commencement.
Reports: prepare written reports of test results and observations. Report
defective materials and workmanship. Include complete records of adjustments
and corrective action taken.
Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests and related work, apply a label to
tested components indicating results, person responsible, and date.
Verify appropriate capacity, overcurrent protection, and operating voltage of
control power elements including control power transformers and control power
wiring.
Check phasing of supply source to the bus.
Test motor-control devices as specified in Division (16) Electrical Specification
Section Motor Controllers.
Test overcurrent protective devices.
Retesting: correct deficiencies and retest. Verify by the retests that specified
requirements are met.
3 06 CLEANING:
A.
Inspect interior and exterior of MCCs/MCPs. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
3 07 EARTHING:
A.
Provide equipment earthing of MCCs/MCPs as indicated and as specified in

Section Earthing. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified
by Manufacturer or in applicable standards to ensure permanent and effective earth.
3 08 DEMONSTRATION:
A.
Training: arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service

representatives to demonstrate MCCs/MCPs and train Owners mainte-nance
personnel.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16482
B.
Training: conduct a minimum of 4 hours of training in operation and maintenance as

specified under Instructions to Owner Employees in General Requirements Section
Project Close-out. Include training relating to equipment operation and
maintenance procedures.
C.
Schedule training with at least seven days advance notification.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16485

Section 16485 Contractors
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
and Division-1 (general requirement), apply to work of this section.
B.
C.
The requirements of this section apply to contactors specified elsewhere in these

specifications.
A.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation, contactors as shown in
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of contactors of the types

for not less than 5 years. Provide contactors produced by a manufacturer listed as an
Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
B.

IEC, EN, NEC, and Standards pertaining to contactors. Provide contactors.
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for contactors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 GENERAL
A.
Contactors shall be suitable for use on three-phase, four-wire, 380/220 V, 50 Hz.

supplies and fitted with 200 - 250 V a.c. coils, unless otherwise detailed. Contactors shall
comply with IEC, DIN/VDE Standards only contactors which have been type tested to
meet the requirements of the IEC, DIM/VDE Standards BS shall be used.
B.
Contactors shall be rated for intermittent periodic or intermittent duty Class 0.3. The
utilization category shall generally be AC-3 but category AC-1 may be used where the
load is positively identified as being non-inductive, but excluding tungsten filament lamps.
C.
The contactors shall be mounted in enclosures to IEC, DIN/VDE Standards with a degree
of protection classified as IP51.
D.
Only one manufacturers' interlocking relays shall be used on one project. Relay coils
shall be for 200 - 250 V, 50 Hz, unless otherwise detailed elsewhere.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16485
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A.
Examine conditions under which contactors are to be installed and notify in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work
3 02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install contactors as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,

requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended
function.
B.
Coordinate, as necessary to interface installation of contactors.

A.
Prior to energization of contactor devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for
short circuits. Replace malfunctioning units with new units, and then demonstrate
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16490

Section 16490 Automatic Reactive power Compensation
(Power Factor Capacitors Correction)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 01
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special

Conditions, and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division.
The requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this
section unless specified to the contrary.
C. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, applies to work of this section.
1. 02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests
necessary to complete, make ready and set to work for operation by the Owner,
switchboards in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
1 03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of

switchboards of the types and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years as approved by Architect.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and
DIN/VDE, IEC, BS, EN, NEC, UL, NEMA, ANSI, AND IEEE Standards pertaining to
centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies. Provide centralized
automatic power factor capacitor assemblies and components conforming to one or
more of the foregoing codes and standards.
1 04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's data for centralized automatic power factor
capacitor assemblies including sizes, enclosures, electrical ratings and characteristics
and wiring diagrams.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of
centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies with related low tension,
single-line diagram, and outline drawings.
1 05
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 01
Section 16490
GENERAL
A. Provide fully automatic capacitor assemblies for low tension applications as indicated
on the plans and single line diagram.
B. Assemblies shall be fabricated as extensions of the low tension centralized automatic
power factor capacitor assemblies when indicated.
C. Each assembly (unit) shall provide 95% power factor correction with built in safeguards
to prevent over capacitance.
2 02
RATINGS
A. The voltage rating of the power factor correction equipment shall be 380 volts between
phases.
B. The total KVAR capacity of the assembly units shall be as indicated on drawings.
C. The total KVAR shall be automatically switched in steps of 50 KVAR.
2 03
CAPACITOR CELLS - DRY TYPE
A. Individual capacitors shall be self-healing utilizing polypropylene as a dielectric with

vacuum deposited conductors on the polypropylene as electrodes.
B. Each three phase capacitor shall be furnished with an approved pressure sensitive
interrupter. The interrupter shall disconnect all three phases at the same time to
maintain a balanced circuit.
C. Capacitors shall be contained in hermetically sealed metal cans to prevent
atmospheric contaminants from shortening the useful life.
D. Dielectric material shall be low loss, less than 0.5 watts per KVAR.
E. Dry cells encapsulation medium shall be a thermoplastic material which allows out
gassing to engage the pressure interrupter.
F. Terminal bushings shall withstand 10KV AC to ground and be rated 30 KV BIl or
greater.
G. Nominal design life of individual capacitor cells shall be 20 years.
H. Individual capacitor cells shall be covered by a five year warranty.
I.
All capacitor cells shall have threaded terminals for wire connection.
J. To reduce line transients on system no stage shall switch more than 120 KVAR and no
capacitor cell shall exceed 25.0 KVAR.
2 04
CONTROLS
A. All controls shall be mounted on enclosure door for easy inspection and service.
B. A door interlock shall be provided to disconnect control power when enclosure door is
opened.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16490
C. A personnel ground fault breaker shall be provided to disconnect control power upon
accidental contact with control power and earth (ground).
D. Reactive Power Controller/Power Factor Meter
1. Controller shall measure the reactive current on every passage of the voltage
through zero.
2. A LED display shall be provided to indicate the stages that are on.
3. To prevent leading power factor the controller shall be provided with a
programmable target cosine selector.
4. The time delay between switching of capacitors must be field programmable and
have a range of 10 seconds to 10 minutes to reduce hunting and allow voltage
decay as noted in par. 2.7.
5. All output contacts shall be disabled within 15 milliseconds of main power
interruption. The controller shall retain its programming after the restoration of
supply voltage. The controller shall bring the capacitor bank back on line in a step,
phased, normal sequence.
6. Controller shall be able to select 1:1:1, 1:1:2, and 1:2:2 switching sequence of
capacitor steps.
7. Controller shall be able to display power factor with indication for an inductive or
capacitive power factor.
E. On-Off Switch
1. On/Off switch shall control power to all door mounted controls.
2. On/Off switch shall contain pilot light to indicate "on" mode.
F. Blown Fuse Lights
1. Three "Push-To-Test" blown fuse pilot lights, one per phase-door mounted, to
indicate a blown fuse condition.
2. Each fused phase, of each 50 KVAR step, shall have its own blown fuse indicating
light mounted in close proximity to the fuse for easy identification.
2 05
ENCLOSURE
A. The enclosure shall be fabricated from 2.65 mm minimum thick, cold rolled steel.
B. An internal grounding lug shall be provided.
C. A baked enamel finish in matching switchgear grey color shall be used.
D. Capacitor cells shall be accessible for visual inspection and replacement from the front
of the cabinet.
E. Removable lifting eyes shall be provided.
F. The enclosure door shall have a three point latch with key locking handle.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 06
Section 16490
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
A. All power wiring shall have a thermoplastic insulation rated for 105 degrees C at 500
volts.
B. System wiring connections shall be made to copper bus bars braced for 65,000 amps
or greater.
C. Contactors shall be rated for switching of reactive current by the contactor
manufacturer.
D. The automatic power factor correction equipment shall be warranted by the
manufacturer of the capacitor cells.
E. Air core transient suppression coils shall be provided in series between the contactors
and capacitor cells.
F. All wiring connections shall be mechanically fixed with nut or screw.
G. The automatic power factor correction shall be an expandable modular design.
2 07
DISCHARGE RESISTORS
A. Capacitor "cells" shall be provided with discharge resistors to reduce residual voltage
to less than 50 volts within one minute of de-energization, unless local codes govern
otherwise.
B. Resistors shall be chosen to insure a 20 year minimum life.
2 08
FUSES
A. To provide for major fault protection, line fuses shall be provided on all three phases of
each switched stage and fixed bank.
B. Line fuses shall be current limiting, U.L., recognized Class T type.
interrupting ratings shall be 200,000 amps for fuses of 30 amps and above.
Minimum
C. Fuses shall be designed for capacitor applications and shall be rated not less than
200% capacitor current rating.
2 09
PERFORMANCE FEATURES
A. The capacitor shall be rated for continuous duty at 40 degree C ambient at 1,000
meters and below.
B. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of 5% on either the voltage and current wave-forms
shall not effect the life of capacitors, contactors or controllers.
III. A + 10% variation in line voltage shall not effect the life of the capacitor.
2 010 SYSTEM COMPATIBILITY

4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16490
A. Provide in each assembly, space and connection such that if in the future, chokes and
filters will be required, the installation can be accomplished in the field with minimum
down time.
2 011 TESTING
A. All capacitor cells shall be traceable through construction and testing.
B. The automatic capacitor bank shall be tested for proper operation prior to leaving the
factory. The following checks, measurements, and operations must be confirmed and
recorded for each stage.
C. The certified record of these tests shall become part of the permanent documentation
package that travels with the automatic capacitor bank.
- WIRE CONNECTIONS
- TORQUE CONNECTIONS
- PHASE TO PHASE, RESISTANCE CHECKS
- CONTROLLER OPERATION, MANUAL OPERATION
- CONTROLLER OPERATION, AUTOMATIC OPERATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01
INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which centralized automatic power factor capacitor

assemblies are to be installed. Notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to
proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3 02
INSTALLATION
A. Install centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies as indicated in

accordance with manufacturer's written instruction, requirements of applicable
standards, NECA's "Standard of Installation," or equal and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements
and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of centralized automatic power factor
capacitor assemblies with other work.
C. Mount the switchboard assembly on flush steel aligning channels elevated above floor
level by a concrete pad and as noted on drawings. Provide aligning shims to achieve
level installation where channels cannot be provided.
D. Insure that centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies are shipped in
sections which can be fitted through the structures and openings available.
E. Bond together the centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies structure,
sections and all conduits terminating at same with a 120 mm bare copper earth
(ground) cable and connect to the switchboard earth (ground) bus and to the earthing
(grounding) grid as required. Provide conduits terminating at centralized automatic
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16490
power factor capacitor assemblies with Earthing (Grounding) Wedges of the required
size.
F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance
with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors.
G. Provide 6.35 mm minimum thick x 60 cm wide insulation mat in front of centralized
automatic power factor capacitor assemblies and rear of free standing equipment and
extend 30 cm beyond ends.
H. Provide protective covering during construction.
I.
Touch up marred or scratched surfaces to match original finish.
J. Provide control fuses, with five spare fuses for each rating.
K. Adjust operating mechanism for free mechanical movement.
3 03
A. Upon completion of installation of equipment and after circuitry has been energized,
test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible,
field-correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise
remove and replace with new equipment and retest.
B. Prior to energization of switchboards and centralized automatic power factor capacitor
assemblies:
1. Perform insulating resistance test on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-toearth for (1) minute. Minimum test voltage to be 1,000 volts D.C. with a minimum
resistance of 100 megohms.
2. Check centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies for continuity and
for short circuits.
3. Notify Architect of any abnormalities.
C. After assemblies are energized, demonstrate functioning in accordance with
manufacturers requirements.
3 04
MAINTENANCE
A. All maintenance and inspection on the capacitor assembly shall be done with the
system disconnect device in the open position.
B. Maintenance and inspections should be limited to 15 minutes or less so not to affect
utility billing.
C. An annual inspection of the capacitor cell shall be done to identify failing capacitor
cells (a bulged cover is the symptom to watch for) . END OF SECTION 16490
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16495

Section 16495 Transfer Switches
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division (1) Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1 02 SUMMARY:
A. This section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less. It includes the
following items:
1. Transfer switch products, General.
2. Automatic transfer switch (ATS).
3. Non-Automatic transfer switch.
4. Bypass/isolation switch.
5. Remote annunciation system.
B. Related Sections: the following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1. Division (16) Basic Electrical Requirements, Electrical Testing and
Commissioning and other sections apply to work of this section.
2. Conductors for hard-wired connections between transfer
switches and remote equipment are specified in Division
(16) Section Low Voltage wires and cables
3. Electrical Cabinets, Boxes and Fittings.
4. Division (16) Main L.V. Distribution boardsand Diesel generating sets.
5. Division (16) Building Management System
1 03 SUBMITTALS:
A. General: submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division (1)
Specification Sections.
B. Shop drawings or published product data for each transfer switch, including
dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing minimum clearances;
conductor entry provisions; gutter space; installed features and devices; and
materials lists.
C. Wiring diagrams, elementary or schematic, differentiating between manufacturerinstalled and field-installed wiring.
D. Single-line diagrams for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch
showing connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch, power
sources, and load, plus interlocking provisions.
E. Operation and maintenance data for each type of product, for inclusion in
Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division (1). Include all features
and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. List all factory settings of
relays and provide relay setting and calibration instructions.
0
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16495
F. Manufacturers certificate of compliance to the referenced standards and tested

short-circuit closing and withstand ratings applicable to the protective devices
and current ratings used in this Project, as indicated and as specified in
paragraph Tested Fault Current Ratings.
G.
Qualification data:
Assurancearticle.
For
firms
and
persons
specified
in
the
Quality
H. Field test reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: firms are experienced in manufacturing equipment of
the types and capacities indicated and have a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Comply with IEC 947-6, IEC 337, IEC 439-1, IEC408, and IEC204-1.
Comply with IEC 529,Enclosure protection classes or NEMA equivalent standards.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: obtain ATSs, NATSs, BP/ISs, and required
accessories from a single manufacturer that assumes responsibility for all system
components furnished.
D. Emergency Service: manufacturer maintains a service center capable of providing
emergency maintenance and repairs at the Project site with an 8- hour maximum
response time.
E. Certification of Power Authority: items furnished under this Section are to be
certified for emergency service, by Power Authority or other Authorities/Institutes
having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 MANUFACTURERS:
.
2 02 TRANSFER SWITCH PRODUCTS, GENERAL:

A. Number of Poles, Current and Voltage Ratings: as indicated on drawings. In
general:
1. Units smaller than 600 amperes shall not have different current ratings for
different classes or mixtures of loads, including 100 percent tungsten filament
lamp or 100 percent inductive load.
2. Units 600 amperes and larger shall have current ratings that apply to mixtures
of loads including 30-percent-maximum tungsten filament lamp load.
3. The rating of any contact shall be a minimum of 1.5 times the rated load it
controls.
B. Tested Fault-Current Ratings: closing and withstand ratings shall exceed the
indicated available rms. Symmetrical fault current at the equipment terminals
based on testing according to IEC 947-6-1, conducted at full-rated system
voltage and 20 percent power factor. Rate each product for withstand duration
time when tested for rated short-circuit current correlated with the actual type of
circuit protective device indicated for transfer switches as follows:
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16495
1. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Larger than 150 Amperes: 3

closing and withstand duration cycles.
2. Power Circuit Breakers: 10 closing and withstand duration cycles.
3. Current-Limiting Fuses: 0.5 (nominal) closing and withstand duration cycles.
C. Connection to Building Management System (BMS): coordinate with the BMS
supplier & provide all necessary interface devices, instruments, dry contacts, etc.
for connection of all required points to the BMS as specified or indicated in the
BMS schedules.
D. Solid-State Controls: repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2
percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 deg C to plus
70 deg C.
E. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: components to meet or exceed
voltage surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to
applicable approved standards (According to IEC Standards).
F. Four-Pole Switches: where 4-pole switches are indicated, provide full- capacity
neutral switching.
G. Oversize Neutral: ampacity and switch rating of neutral path through units
indicated are to be double the nominal rating of the switch.
H. Enclosures: general-purpose IP51 to IEC144 except as otherwise indicated.
I. Heater: within enclosure of units exposed to outdoor temperature and humidity
conditions, connect thermostat within enclosure to control heater.
J. Factory Wiring: train and bundle factory wiring and identify consistently with shop
drawings, either by colour code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape
markers at terminations.
1. Designated terminals accommodate field wiring.
2. Power Terminals Arrangement and Field Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side,
or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
3. Terminals: Pressure-type, bolted, suitable for copper or aluminum conductors
of sizes indicated.
4. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
K. Electrical Operation: where indicated, accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily
energized solenoid or electric motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and
electrically interlocked in both directions. Switches using components of moldedcase circuit breakers or contactors not designed for continuous-duty and
repetitive switching between active power sources are not acceptable.
L. Switch characteristics: designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated
current between active power sources.
M. Switch Action: mechanically held in both directions for double-throw switches.
N. Switch Contacts: use silver composition for switching load current. Contactors rated
225 amperes and more shall have separate arcing contacts.
O. Overcurrent devices are not part of transfer switch products.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16495
2 03 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS):

A. Type: wall or floor mounted, galvanized sheet steel cubicle, comprising two main
contactors or circuit breakers and controls necessary for automatic transfer of
power supply from normal source to stand-by source, voltage sensing control
relay and time delay relays to signal generator start and stop, auxiliary switches
and indicating lights etc. as necessary for the required operation of the system.
B. Automatic Unattended Operation (for utility-to-generator ATS): when voltage and/or
frequency of any phase drops below an adjustable setting (75% - 98%) of utility
normal supply, for an adjustable period of 0 - 300 seconds, power failure relay is
to actuate generator starting control, whilst normal mains contactor is to open.
After an adjustable period of 0 - 10 seconds from sensing stabilized rated voltage
and frequency of generator at the ATS, the emergency contactor/CB is to close.
Upon restoration of normal main supply to above 95% of rated voltage and/or
frequency, for an adjustable preset period of 2 - 30 minutes, emergency
contactor/CB is to open and normal mains contactor/CB is to close.
C. Mechanical and electrical interlocks are to prevent contactors/circuit breakers from
being closed simultaneously at any time. Transfer mechanism is to be powered
from the source to which the load is being transferred.
D. The following selector switches are to be provided for utility-to-generator ATSs:
- Two position, maintained contact selector switch, marked Auto, Test:
Auto: the control is set for automatic unattended operation as described above.
Test: the control is to initiate test operation of the ATS by simulating a loss of
the normal power source, causing the generator to start and transferring the
load to the emergency source if the load/no-load selector switch is set on load
position, otherwise generator is to run at no load.
- Two position, maintained contact selector switch, marked Load, No Load:
Load: is to allow the generator to carry load during testing.
No Load: is to allow the generator to start and run but at no load.
E. Utility-to-utility or two energized sources automatic transfer switch is to
automatically operate as described in item B above under automatic unattended
operation, except that no generator start signal is required. The ATS is to be
provided with a preferred source selector switch marked Source 1, Source 2.
F. Transfer Time Delay Bypass: two manual push buttons are to be provided to
bypass the time delay on the normal source (or source1) and the generator
source (or source2).
G. Maintenance selector switch marked ON, OFF, is to be provided inside the ATS
enclosure to allow for disconnection of the control power to the transfer motor
circuit in order to test the transfer logic circuitry without initiating load transfer.
Positioning the switch on OFF position is to isolate the control logic circuit from
the transfer motor, permitting manual operation of the ATS or testing of the logic
circuitry without load transfer.
H. Automatic Retransfer: if it is stated on the drawings that automatic retransfer from
the emergency source (or source 2) to the normal source (or source 1) is not
required, a selector switch marked AUTO, MANUAL is to be provided. On
manual position, automatic retransfer is disabled, while it is enabled on auto
position.
I. ATSs dedicated for fire pumps: are to meet requirements of NFPA 20, Installation
of Centrifugal Fire Pumps, NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, and are to be
listed by the Underwriter Laboratories Inc (UL) including UL-1008, Automatic
transfer switches and UL-508, Industrial Control Equipment.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16495
J. Motor disconnect switch is to be provided to disable the linear actuator (which is

used to move the contact assemblies between the normal and emergency power
sources), for the purpose of servicing and maintenance of the transfer equipment.
It is to be located inside the enclosure.
K. Pilot lights are to indicate which contactor is on, green for normal source
available; red for emergency source available. Engraved nameplates shall be
provided accordingly.
L. Instruments shall include voltmeter and ammeter with phase selector switches.
M. Contactors are to be to IEC 947, 3-phase, 4-pole, magnetic type, 600 V rating,
capable of interrupting at least ten times rated current inductive or non- inductive
loads under normal service conditions and are to have replaceable main arcing
contacts and arc quenching devices. Contactors are to withstand, without
welding or burning of contacts, an inrush current of 20 times normal rating upon
closing and the heaviest short-circuit of the system for the period required by
upstream protective switchgear to operate or a minimum of 0.1 second,
whichever is greater. Three N.O. and three N.C. spare SPDT contacts (10A,
240V a.c.) are to be provided on each contactor.
N. Circuit breakers used instead of contactors as transfer switches are to provide
same functions as a minimum requirement and are to be electrically and
manually operated, non-automatic type.
O. Wiring: moisture and heat resistant, silicon rubber insulated, stranded copper
conductors, modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal blocks, with
suitable numbering strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required.
Flexible wiring is to be used on all hinged/draw-out components.
P. Connections are to be made at a front terminal block with no live metal exposed.
Power cables are to terminate on fixed insulated copper connectors suitably sized
to receive specified cables. Cable glands and gland plates are to be provided.
Q. Metal cases of instruments, control switches, relays etc. are to be connected by
flexible protective conductors, of not less than 2.5 mm2 section, to nearest
earthing bar or terminal.
R. Earthing: earthing busbar to be provided for connection of protective earthing
conductors, using set-screw or bolted anti-turn pressure terminations.
S. Ferrules: wire ends are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at
each termination.
T. ATS with manual bypass switches provided as required and where shown on
drawings are to combine manual bypass switches and automatic transfer switch
with a draw out isolation system. Bypass switch is to consist of non- automatic
Kirk-key interlocked switches or circuit breakers, fully rated, manually operated
and rated for sum loads as automatic transfer switch. Bypass switch is to provide
bypass to either normal or emergency source by use of a selector switch and
permanently mounted external liver, mechanically interlocked to prevent
paralleling of sources. An engine start switch is to be provided to allow generator
set to be started when bypass I son emergency sources. Bypass switch is to be
of the make-before break type. A dead source lock out is to prevent any
possibility of bypassing the load to an energized source.
U. Incorporation into LV Switchboards: if it is required on the drawings to incorporate
the ATS within a LV switchboard, necessary coordination is to be carried-out with
the LV switchboard supplier to ensure full matching and compatibility between
both products.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16495
2 04 BYPASS / ISOLATION SWITCH:

A. Comply with requirements of IEC 150 Standards.
B. Description: Manual type arranged to select and connect either source of power
directly to the load, isolating the transfer switch from the load and from both power
sources. Include the following features for each combined automatic transfer
switch and bypass/isolation switch:
1. Means to lock the bypass/isolation in the position that isolates the transfer
switch, with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of the
transfer switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks prevent transferswitch operation, except for testing or maintenance.
2. Draw-out Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provides physical separation from
live parts and accessibility for testing and maintenance operations.
3. Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and short-circuit Withstand
Ratings: Equal to or greater than those of the associated automatic transfer
switch, and with the same phase arrangement and number of poles.
4. Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches do not exceed those of
automatic transfer-switch contacts when they are carrying rated load.
5. Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer-switch isolation can be
performed by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less.
6. Legend: Manufacturers standard legend for control labels and instruction
signs give detailed operating instructions.
7. Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components
from the front without removing other parts or main power conductors.
C. Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches:
Factory-installed copper bus bars, plated at connection points and braced for the
indicated available short-circuit current.
2 05 MANUAL NONAUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH:

A. Comply with the requirements of IEC 947 and/or NFPA 110 for non-automatic
transfer switches.
B. Operation: By external manual handle operable only with door closed, provide
quick make quick break manual switching action. Switch is capable of manually
transferring the load in either direction with either or both sources energized.
C. Double-Throw Switching Arrangement: Incapable of pauses or intermediate
position stops during switching sequence.
D. Mechanical positions indication for either sources.
2 06 REMOTE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM:

A. Remote annunciation system for condition at indicated transfer switch shall be via
Building automation system and shall include the following:
1. Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of
transfer-switch controls.
2. Switch position.
3. Switch in test mode.
2 07 FINISHES:
A. Enclosures: manufacturers standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment
and primer.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16495
2 08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Factory tests components, assembled switches, and associated equipment to
ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and timedelay settings for conformance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric
strength test conforming to IEC 947 requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSTALLATION:
A. Floor Mounting of Transfer Switches: level and anchor the unit to the floor.
B. Identify components according to Division (16) Section Electrical Identification.
3 02 WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS:

A. Match the type and number of cables and conductors to the BACS control points
required for the transfer switches. Provide necessary raceway to accommodate
required wiring.
3 03 CONNECTIONS:
A.
Tighten factory-made connections, including connectors, terminals, bus joints,

mountings, and grounding. Tighten field-connected connectors and terminals,
including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturers published
torque tightening values. When manufacturers torquing requirements are not
indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques
specified in Standards.
3 04 EARTHING:
A. Make equipment-earthing connections for transfer switch units as indicated and as
required by applicable Regulations/Codes. Refer to Section Earthing.

A. Manufacturers Field Services: provide services of a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise field tests.
B. Preliminary Tests: perform electrical tests as recommended by the manufacturer
and as follows:
1. Measure phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels
with insulation resistance tester, including external annunciator and control
circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by the manufacturer.
Meet manufacturers specified minimum resistance.
2. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
C. Field-Tests: give 7-day advance notice of the tests and perform tests in presence of
owners representative.
D. Coordinate tests of ATS with tests of generator plant and run them concurrently
where ATS is associated with a generator plant.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16495
E. Tests: as recommended by the manufacturer and as follows:

1. Contact Resistance Test: measures resistance of power contacts for
ATSs,.Non-automatic transfer switches and bypass/isolation switches.
Resolve values in excess of 500 micro-ohms and differences between
adjacent poles exceeding 50 percent.
2. Earth Fault Tests: coordinate with testing specified in Division (16) Section
L.V. Circuit Breakers to ensure sensors are properly selected and located to
optimize ground-fault protection where power is being delivered from either
source.
a. Verify earthing points and sensor ratings and locations.
b. Apply simulated fault current at the sensors and observe reaction of circuit
interrupting devices.
3. Operational Tests: demonstrate interlock, sequence, and operational function
for each switch at least 3 times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to ATSs and of emergency
source with normal source available.
b. Simulate low phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source of
ATSs.
c. Verify time-delay settings and pick-up and dropout voltages.
F. Test Failures: correct deficiencies identified by tests and prepare for retest. Verify
that equipment meets the specified requirements.
G. Reports: maintain a written record of observations and tests. Report defective
materials and workmanship and retest corrected items. Record adjustable relay
settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach
a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
3 06 DEMONSTRATION:
A. Training: furnish the services of a factory-authorized service representative to
instruct Owners personnel in the operation, maintenance, and adjustment of
transfer switches and related equipment. Provide minimum of 4 hours of
instruction scheduled 7 days in advance.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16500

Section 16500 Lighting
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
B.
A.
necessary to complete and make ready for operation all lighting fixtures, ballasts, and
lamps in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting fixtures, ballasts,

and lamps, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years.
B.

IEC, NEC, UL, NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI Standards pertaining to lighting fixtures, ballasts,
and lamps. Provide lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps products and components
which have been labeled by approved authorities.
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for lighting fixtures, ballasts, and lamps;
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Details of construction and finishes

Electrical ratings
Mounting
Photometric data
Submit samples as directed by the Engineer.
Drawings to scale
Lighting track
B.
Samples : Submit sample for each type of lighting fixture specified in the lighting fixtures
schedule for review and approval.
C.
Test : Submit type test certificates for the specified lighting fixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 GENERAL
A.
All luminaires shall be manufactured to IEC 598-1 and 598-2.
B.
All luminaires supplied by the contractor shall be photometrically tested.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16500
The contractors shall produce upon request, the photometric data for any luminaire
specified or supplied.
C.
All luminaires shall be provided with a lamp compatible with the control gear used.
D.
Luminaires shall not be suspended by their flexible cord.

suspension shall be provided.
E.
All flexible cords shall be anchored at both ends such that the cord is free from strain.
F.
Any plastics used in the luminaire shall be light and UV stable and shall be suitable for
their application.
G.
All sheet steel components shall be suitably pre-treated and electrostatically spraypainted using acrylic polyester or epoxy powders.
H.
Non-compatible materials shall not be used in contact with each other.
I.
Louvers shall be restrained to prevent them from failing out of the body of the luminaires
under normal conditions and when re-lamping. Metal louvers shall be earthed to the
body of the luminaire or the earth terminal.
J.
Diffusers shall be restrained to prevent them from falling out of the body of the luminaires
under normal conditions and when re-lamping.
K.
Luminaires fitted with high frequency or electronic control gear shall be disconnected
before the circuit is tested for insulation resistance.
L.
All luminaires designed for internal use shall be constructed to IP 20 and be Class 1
unless otherwise stated.
M.
All luminaires designed for external use shall be constructed to minimum classification of
IP 44 and be class 1 unless otherwise stated.
A separate means of
2 02 INCANDESCENT Luminaires
A.
Luminaires for incandescent light sources shall be designed to accommodate the

specified lamp.
B.
Where the specified lamp is either unsuitable for the luminaire or the construction of the
luminaire is liable to affect the life of the specified lamp alternatives shall be offered to the
Owner's Authorized Representative.
C.
Care shall be taken in handling quartz envelope lamps, where the lamps should not be
handled directly. Where this does occur, the lamp should be cleaned using a soft cloth
moistened with white spirit.
D.
Luminaires using low voltage tungsten halogen lamps shall each be supplied complete
with its own transformer unless otherwise stated.
E.
Wire wound transformers shall be rated at 230/11.8 V and comply with IEC 742, Class II
and be insulated to Class H of IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
F.
Transformers shall be protected against overload and short-circuiting.
G.
Where multi point transformers are specified voltage regulation shall be a maximum of
6% and each luminaire shall be wired separately.
H.
Final connections to luminaires shall be carried out using silicon rubber sheathed cables.
I.
Where low voltage tungsten halogen lamps are to be dimmed, the dimmer shall be of the
hard fired type suitable for inductive loads.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16500
J.
Transformers used in dimmed circuits shall be down rated as recommended by the

manufacturer.
K.
Electronic transformers shall be designed to IEC 742 and 34C/Comex (pk) 8 and 14 with
RFI suppression to a minimum standard of IEC, DIN/VDE : 0875 and shall comply with
the EMC directive.
L.
Electronic transformers shall have short-circuit and overload protection.
M.
Electronic transformers shall contain a soft start circuit and be self-regulating.
N.
Electronic transformers used in dimmed circuits shall be suitable for dimming. The
dimmer shall be compatible with the transformer and be recommended by the
transformer manufacturer.
O.
When installed in ceiling voids, the transformer shall be properly supported to avoid the
transmission of vibrations.
P.
When installed in ceiling voids, the transformer shall be capable of subsequent removal,
wither through the fitting aperture or through an access panel.
Q.
Transformers shall be located away from high temperature parts of the lamp and
luminaire or any other heat radiating surface in the void.
R.
Lamp-holders in dichroic or capsule luminaires shall be easily accessible for re-lamping.
S.
Lamp-holders for tungsten halogen lamps shall be of the best quality with ceramic bases
suitable for the currents and temperatures achieved during constant use.
T.
Springs and other metal parts in the lamp-holder assembly shall not deteriorate during
used such that poor contact arcing, welding or slackness can occur.
U.
Dichroic and Sealed Low Voltage Tungsten Halogen Lamps :

Where sealed low voltage lamps are used the luminaire shall be designed to cope with
the increased temperature.
Where dichroic lamps are used the internal wiring shall cope with the increased
temperature.
All dichroic lamps shall be of the captive type and supplied with a GU 5.3 base.
V.
Capsule Low Voltage Lamps

Capsule lamps shall not be installed using bare hands.
Where capsule lamps are used the envelope shall be made of quartz glass.
Where capsule lamps are used a protective glass shall be incorporated into the luminaire
design.
W.
Mains Voltage Tungsten Halogen Lamps

luminaires designed to accommodate double-ended mains voltage tungsten halogen
lamps shall be designed to ensure that a minimum bulb wall temperature of 250 oC and a
maximum pinch point temperature of 350 oC are achieved.
2 03 FLUORESCENT Luminaires (LOW PRESSURE)

A.
Unless otherwise stated fluorescent tubes of the size, wattage and colour detailed in the
schedules shall be supplied with each luminary.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16500
B.
All cables shall be secured within the luminary body to prevent loose lengths from
touching hot surfaces or becoming trapped beneath cover plates. Cable clips or cleats
shall be captive and if secured by adhesive, shall not loosen with age.
C.
All fluorescent luminaires shall be supplied with low loss gear plus electronic starters.
Control gear shall have power factor correction to achieve a minimum p.f. of 0.9 lagging.
The control gear enclosure shall be designed to limit the maximum temperature of the
ballast to its stated rated temperature.
D.
E.
F.
Wiring within2the fixture and for connection to the branch circuit wiring shall not be less
than 1.5 mm for 220 volts application. Insulation shall be silicone rubber for the lower
temperatures (fluorescent fixtures) and impregnated asbestos for the higher
temperatures.
Aluminum reflectors and louvers shall be made from high purity aluminum (99.9 %
minimum) with low or very low ir. The anodic film shall have a minimum thickness of 2.5
microns.
Louvers and reflectors shall be packed separately from the luminary body and protected
against damage.
Aluminum louvers shall not be installed until after the building has been thoroughly
cleaned prior to practical completion.
G.
Louvers shall not be installed using bare hands. Any louvers found with finger, palm
marks or builders dirt and dust shall be removed and cleaned using a high pressure hose
with kodak 600 dirt emulsifier or a similar method approved by the louvre manufacturer.
Louvers shall not be wiped clean.
H.
Diffusers shall be made from UV stabilized acrylic or light stabilized polycarbonate,

injection moulded or equal and approved.
I.
The diffusers shall not support combustion and shall be self-extinguishing.
J.
Lamps of different types or ratings shall be controlled from separate dimmers.
K.
Lamps or dimming circuits shall be of the same color temperatures and color
appearance. To maintain a constant appearance all lamps on dimming circuits shall be
changed at the same time.
2 04 LAMPS
General :
Lamps shall be of wattage and type as shown on the Drawings.
Lamps for final permanent installation shall not be placed in the fixture until so directed by the
Engineer and this shall be accomplished directly before the building areas are ready for
occupancy by the Employer.
Lamps shall be furnished and installed in all lighting fixtures supplied.
Lamps used for temporary lighting service shall not be used in the final lambing of fixture units.
Fluorescent Lamps :
Lamps shall have bi-pin bases and a minimum approximate rated life of 12,000 hours.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings all fluorescent lamps shall have the colour rendering
index (84) and equal to "TL" D 36 W (26 mm diameter) and "TL" D 18 W (26 mm diameter) as
manufactured by PHILIPS.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16500
Incandescent Lamps :
Incandescent lamps 200 watts and below shall be inside frosted type.
Lamps shall be for operation at 220 volts with a minimum approximate rated life of 1000 hours.
Lamps shall have an E.S. screw base for lamps up to 200 watts and a G.E.C. screw base for
lamps 300 watts and larger.
High pressure mercury lamps :
Lamps shall have the following characteristics :
Nominal Wattage
125
250
Minimum Lumen Output after

100 burning hours
6300 Lumen
13000 Lumen
Life time 24000 hours.
2 05 COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A.
luminaires containing compact fluorescent lamps shall be designed to ensure the correct
working conditions for the lamp.
B.
All compact fluorescent luminaires shall be supplied with low loss control gear and single
pulse electronic starters.
C.
Compact fluorescent lamps shall be suitable for operation with either conventional or
high frequency ballasts.
2 06 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM

A.
Exit signs shall be manufactured to meet the appropriate requirements of IEC, DIN/VDE
standards.
B.
All "Exit" signs and fire safety signs shall be of the pictogram type utilizing the pictograms
as given in IEC, DIN/VDE standards. Where wording is incorporated on the signs it shall
be in accordance to IEC,DIN/VDE standards.
C.
Sizes of lettering shall comply with IEC, DIN/VDE standards.
D.
Self-energized signs (in respect of luminosity) shall comply with IEC,DIN/VDE standards.
E.
Each sign shall be internally illuminated by two separate systems of lighting.
F.
The housing shall be designed to maintain an internal ambient temperature below that of
the lowest temperature rating of any piece of equipment installed therein.
2 07 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS
A.
GENERAL
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the design and installation of all
lighting complies with CIBSE lighting code LC1 1988 and lighting guide LG3 1989 and
with this specification.
All layouts shall be
Representative.
developed
in conjunction
with
the
Owner's
Authorized
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16500
In general all lighting shall be wired in a minimum of 1.5 mm single core cables and
protected by a 16 A Type 2 or 3 MCB. Larger cable sizes shall be used where necessary
to comply with the IEE wiring regulations 16th. edition.
B.
PLANT AREAS
All plant areas shall have fluorescent luminaires as specified in the schedules.
The contractor shall ensure luminaires are positioned such that lighting levels are not
significantly affected by adjacent services such as pipework or ductwork. Where
necessary luminaires shall be installed on chains.
The contractor shall consider the use of plantrooms (i.e. lift motor room, electrical
switchroom, water tank room) before determining the lighting design criteria.
C.
EXTERNAL LIGHTING
The Contractor shall install supplies to positions of luminaires shown on the lighting
drawing. Wherever possible outlets shall be waterproof type.
ART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A.
Examine conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed. Notify in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with the work until
3 02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install lighting fixtures as indicated, in accordance with lighting fixture manufacturer's

written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to insure that installation complies with requirements and
fulfills intended function.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with other

works.
C.
Install each fixture properly and safely. Furnish and erect hangers, rods, mounting
brackets, supports, bases, cables, canopies, channels, frames, and other equipment
required.
D.
Furnish lighting fixtures complete with appurtenances required for the proper, safe and
distortion-free installation in the various surfaces in which they appear.
E.
Obtain each lighting fixture packaged with complete instructions and illustrations showing
how to install. Install lighting fixtures in strict conformance with manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions.
F.
Install lighting fixtures plumb and at a height from the floor as specified. In cases where
conditions make this impractical, refer to the consultant for a decision. Use ball aligners,
hang straights and canopies on pendant fixtures.
G.
Do not install fixtures and/or parts such as finishing plates and trims for recessed fixtures
until all plastering and painting that may mark fixtures finish has been completed.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16500
H.
Lighting fixture locations in mechanical and technical rooms is approximate. Coordinate

mounting height and location of lighting fixtures to clear equipment and to illuminate
equipment adequately.
I.
Support all lighting fixtures independently.
J.
Whenever a fixture or its hanger canopy is applied to a surface mounted outlet box,
utilize a finishing ring to conceal the outlet box.
K.
Make splices in internal wiring with approved insulated "wire nut" type mechanical
connectors, suitable for the temperature and voltage conditions to which they are
subjected.
Use wire suitable for temperature, current, and voltage conditions to which it is subjected
where utilized for connections to or between individual lamp sockets and lamp auxiliaries
(i.e., wires which do not constitute "through circuit" wiring).
L.
M.
Replace blemished, damaged or unsatisfactory fixtures as directed.
N.
Install all lighting units set true and free of light leaks, warps, dents, and other
irregularities.
O.
Install all lighting units free of dust and dirt.
P.
Do not scale electrical drawings for exact location of the lighting fixtures. In general, the
approved coordinated reflected ceiling workshop plans shall indicate the proper locations
of lighting fixtures.
Q.
Rigidly align continuous rows of lighting fixtures for true in-line appearance.
R.
Do not install recessed fluorescent fixtures weighing more than 18 kilograms directly on a
concealed or exposed ceiling spline of a lightweight acoustical ceiling system. Support
such fixtures from the building structure.
S.
Do not mount surface or pendant type fluorescent fixtures regardless of their weight
directly on the concealed or exposed ceiling spline of a lightweight, acoustical ceiling
system. Support such fixtures from the building structure.
T.
Install reflector cones, baffles, aperture plates, light controlling element for air handling
fixtures, visible trim, and decorative elements after completion of ceiling tiles, painting
and general cleanup. Carefully handle to avoid scratching or fingerprinting and provide
completely clean to the Owner at the time of acceptance.

A.
Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures and after building circuitry has been
energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with
requirements. When possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed
with retesting.
B.
Certify that the equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, and tested.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16515

Section 16515 Interior Lighting
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including ProjectGeneral and
Supplementary Conditions, apply to work of this section.
B. Division (16) Electrical Specification Section Basic Electrical Requirements and
other sections apply to work specified in this section.
1 02 SUMMARY:
A.
Provide labor, materials, equipment, accessories and services, and perform

operations for installation of lighting system including all hardware necessary for
installation whether so detailed under fixture description or not .
B.
This section includes complete interior lighting fixtures, emergency lighting units,
control gear, mounting provisions, accessories and connection to circuit wiring and to
corresponding lighting control equipment.
C.
Extent, location, and details of interior lighting fixture work are indicated on drawings
and in schedules.
D.
Types of interior lighting fixtures in this section include the following:

1. High-intensity-discharge (HID) lighting fixtures.
Mercury-vapor.
Metal-halide.
High-pressure-sodium.
2. Fluorescent & compact fluorescent lighting fixtures.
3. Incandescent lighting fixtures.
4. Emergency lighting fixtures.
5. Decorative lighting fixtures.
6. The work shall include all necessary hardware and accessories to provide
complete workable system
E.
Design Layout: fixture layout has been determined from photometric data of specified
fixtures to achieve desired level and uniformity of illumination. Reflected ceiling plans
are to be checked to ensure exact positions of fixtures with respect to structural
members, ducts, pipes, other installations and ceiling panels/tiles, where required.
Certain fixtures are shown in provisional positions, pending preparation of final
equipment layout drawings. Such fixtures are to be located in coordination with final
equipment layout so that illumination is as intended by the design.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
F.
ODAC
Section 16515

1.
Section Lighting Control and Dimming System for modular dimmers,

programmable lighting control systems, time switches, photoelectric relays,
occupancy sensors, power relays, and contactors.
2.
Section lighting
1 03 DEFINITIONS:
A.
Emergency Lighting Unit: a fixture with integral emergency battery power supply and
the means for controlling and charging the battery. They are also known as an
emergency light set or package.
B.
Fixture: a complete lighting unit, exit sign, or emergency lighting unit. Fixtures include
lamps and parts required to distribute the light, position and protect lamps, and
connect lamps to the power supply. Internal battery powered exit signs and
emergency lighting units also include a battery and the means for controlling and
recharging the battery. Emergency lighting units are available with and without
integral lamp heads and lamps.
C.
Luminaire; fixture.
D.
Rated Average Life: the time after which the average of a lamp type lumen output
has reached down to 80% of its initial 100 hr value as specified, under normal
conditions.
1 04 SUBMITTALS;
A.
Product Data: submit manufacturers product data and installation instructions on

each type interior building lighting fixture and component, any modification made
necessary, catalog number, serial number, operating characteristics and photometric
data.
1. Data on batteries and chargers of emergency lighting units.
2. Product certifications signed by manufacturers of lighting fixtures certifying that
their fixtures comply with specified requirements.
3. Full technical data of the cold cathode lamps and transformers along with a test
certificate from an independent laboratory verifying characteristics of the system.
B.
Shop Drawings: submit layout drawings of interior lighting fixtures on reflected ceiling
plans and their spatial relationship to each other and to other trades or systems such
as structural members, ducts, pipes etc.. In addition, submit fixture shop drawings in
booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in luminaries type
alphabetical or numerical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly
indicated on each sheet. Submit details indicating compatibility with ceiling grid
system.
C.
Shop drawings for cold cathode lighting are to be coordinated with the supplier and
submitted for approval including scale plans and details showing method of
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16515
installation of lamp holders, lamps, reflectors, transformer housings, primary and

secondary feeds as well as complete bill of material.
D.
Wiring Diagrams: submit wiring diagrams for interior lighting fixtures showing
connections to electrical power panels, switches, dimmers, controllers, and feeders.
Differentiate between portions of wiring which are manufacturerinstalled and
portions which are field-installed.
E.
Samples: submit one complete operating unit for each type of light fixture specified,
together with colour and texture samples where required, to the Engineer upon
request at no cost to the owner. In the event that alternate make is offered provide a
sample for comparison unless otherwise specified or dictated by the Engineer.
F.
Maintenance Data: submit maintenance data and parts list for each interior lighting
fixture and accessory; including trouble-shooting maintenance guide. Include that
data, product data, and shop drawings in a maintenance manual; in accordance with
general requirements of General Requirements Division Division (1).
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: firms regularly engaged in manufacture of interior

lighting fixtures of sizes, types and ratings required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B.
Fixture Design and Standards: the Specification and the Drawings are a guide to the
selection of lighting characteristics and lighting fixtures, giving general features of
construction, materials, method of installation and conditions of operation. Unless
otherwise specified, fixtures are to be manufacturers standard series, designed and
manufactured for the purpose and application required, generally in accordance with
the Drawings and complying with IEC 598 and CISPR 15.
C.
Special Listing and Labeling: provide fixtures for use in damp or wet locations,
underwater, and recessed in combustible construction specifically listed and labeled
for such use. Provide fixtures for use in hazardous (classified) locations that are
listed and labeled for the specific hazard.
D.
Special Project Warranty: submit a warranty, mutually executed by manufacturer and

the Installer, agreeing to replace rechargeable system batteries that fail in materials
or workmanship within the special project warranty period specified below. This
warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights and remedies the
Employer may have under the Contract Documents.
1. Special Project Warranty Period: 10 years, beginning on the date of Substantial
Completion. A full warranty shall apply for the first year of the period, and a
prorate warranty for the last 9 years.
E.
Installers Qualifications: firms with at least 3 years of successful installation

experience on projects with interior lighting fixture work similar to that required for
this project.
F.
Electrical Code Compliance: comply with applicable local code requirements of the
authority having jurisdiction or other code applicable to installation, and construction
of interior building lighting fixtures approved for the project and as referenced in
pertinent specification in this section.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 06
ODAC
Section 16515
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
Lighting layout and fixtures configuration based on selected fixtures type and
Engineering calculation. The contractor shall verify the calculations in light of the
approved fixtures type with detailed calculation report to verify illuminant intensities
and quality of lighting as specified and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B.
The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the work in this division with the
components of ceiling systems specified and other works.
C.
Lighting fittings shall be of first class quality, made by approved manufacturer and
shall be suitable for trouble free operation on the system voltage at site.
D.
Lighting fixtures shall be controlled by switches and dimmers as shown on layout

drawings. Lighting fixtures in public areas, corridors and parking areas shall be
controlled centrally from the building management system in addition to local
switches unless otherwise indicated or shown on the drawing. Provision shall be
provided in the lighting panels for remote control. All necessary equipment and
devices required for the purpose shall be provided.
1 07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A.
Deliver interior lighting fixtures in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which

properly protect fixtures from damage.
B.
Store interior lighting fixtures in original packaging. Store inside well- ventilated area
protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity, laid flat
and blocked off ground.
C.
Handle interior lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of
finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.
1 08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:

A.
Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and
raceways, to properly interface installation of interior lighting fixtures with other work.
B.
Sequence interior lighting installation with other work to minimize possibility of

damage and soiling during remainder of construction.
1 09 EXTRA MATERIALS:
A.
Furnish extra materials matching products installed, as described below, packaged

with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels describing contents.
Deliver extra materials to the Owner.
1. Complete Fixtures: a quantity equal to 10 percent of installed units of types
shown on drawings for interior lighting:
2. Lamps: 10 lamps for each 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 1
of each type.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16515
3. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for each 100 of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least 1 of each type.
4. Ballasts: 1 for each 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 1 of
each type.
5. Globes and Guards: 1 for each 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at
least 1 of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 MANUFACTURERS:
2 02 LIGHTING FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION GENERAL:

A.
B.
Generally: construction and wiring of fixtures are to comply with the Regulations and
Standards. Fixtures are to be fabricated, assembled and wired entirely at factory.
Manufacturers name, factory inspection stamp and official quality label are to be
fixed to each fixture supplied.
Lighting Fixtures (Luminaries); to be manufacturers standard, as given in Lighting
Fixture Schedules shown on the Drawings, or equal.
C.
Sheet Steel Housings: to be not less than 0.6 mm thick, and thicker when required
by the Specification or the Standards.
D.
Sheet Steel Reflectors: to be not less than 0.5 mm thick.
E.
Aluminum Reflectors: to be not less than 0.7 mm thick, unless otherwise approved.
F.
Fabrication: metalwork is to be mitered, welded and ground smooth without tool

marks or burrs. Flat metal parts are to be stiffened by forming grooves and edges
during fabrication. Metal parts are to have finish free from irregularities.
G.
Rust-Proof Ferrous Base: ferrous metal parts are to be bonderized (treated with
corrosion resistant phosphate solution) and given an approved rust-inhibiting prime
coat before application of final finish.
H.
Finish for Non-Reflecting Metal Surfaces: approved baked enamel paint. Paint colour
on fixture frames and trims is to be as specified or as selected by the Engineer.
I.
Finish for Light Reflecting Surfaces: white baked enamel paint having reflection
factor not less than 85%. Mirror reflectors, where specified, are to be highly
polished, anodized aluminum with reflection factors not less than 97%.
J.
Mechanical Resistance of Finish: after finish has been applied on steel surfaces and
cured, it is to withstand a 6 mm radius bend without showing signs of cracking,
peeling or loosening from base metal.
K.
Resistance Of Finish To Ultra-Violet: finish is to withstand 72 hours exposure to an

ultra-violet RS lamp placed 100 mm from surface without discoloring, hardening or
warping, and is to retain the same reflection factor after exposure.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16515
L.
Heat Resistance: finishes, wires and components inside fixtures are to be certified
materials to resist the temperatures or other conditions encountered in the fixtures.
M.
Wiring Inside Fixtures: to be not less than 1 . 5 mm2, and insulated for 230 V
application. Insulation is to have acceptable characteristics to resist maximum
temperatures inside fixtures. Wiring is to be terminated on screw type fixed insulating
terminal blocks.
N.
Hinges: fixtures with visible frames and hinged diffusers are to have concealed
hinges and catches, and stainless steel retaining clips. Other alternative equally
durable products may be submitted for approval.
O.
Suspension and Aligners; to be provided for pendant fixtures for axial, vertical and
horizontal alignment. Vertical adjustment is to be minimum 25 mm. Hangars to be 12
mm (1/2 inch) steel tubing of same finish as fixture with ceiling canopy or as
approved or selected by Engineer.
P.
Recessed Fixtures: to be constructed to fit into suspended ceilings without distorting

fixture or ceiling. Plaster rings are to be provided for plaster or concrete ceilings.
Q.
R.
Removal of Parts for maintenance is to be possible without removing fixture housing.

Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water
white, annealed crystal glass except as indicated.
1.
2.
S.
Plastic: highly resistant to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure
to heat and UV radiation.
Lens Thickness: 4 mm (0.125 inches), minimum.
Exit signs are to be provided with integral automatic high/low trickle charger in a selfcontained power pack. with sealed, maintenance-free, nickel cadmium battery and
with special project warranty.
2 03 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES:
A.
Lamp Holders Generally: to IEC 400, heavy duty, moulded white plastic with noncorroding spring contacts.
B.
Lamp Holders for Industrial Fittings: spring loaded turret type, heavy duty, dust
protected.
C.
Ballasts Generally; to IEC 82. Only single or two-lamp ballasts are to be used in any
one fixture. Two-lamp ballasts are to be lead-lag, series type. Equipment is to be
enclosed in sheet steel casing with corrosion resistant finish.
D.
Ballast thermosetting compound is not to soften, liquefy or support combustion under

any operating condition or upon ballast failure, and is to fill ballast enclosure and
dampen vibrations. Temperature rise, under normal operating conditions, is not to
exceed 55 deg. C above maximum ambient temperature of 50 deg. C.
E.
Ballast Type: electronic type switch start (or electronic dimmable type for dimmed
fixtures), unless otherwise stated in fixture description or shown on the Drawings,
power factor corrected to above 0.9, having manufacturers lowest case temperature.
Sound rating is not to exceed level given in the Standards.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
F.
ODAC
Section 16515
Ballast Rating: ballast is to be manufactured and certified for the specific lamp it
controls and for operation from nominal power supply, with voltage and frequency
equal to nominal voltage and frequency of distribution network.
G. Capacitors: to IEC 566, having snap-type connectors and fastening, bolt type M8, for
fixing to fixture.
H.
Starters, if required, are to comply with IEC 155, and are to be selected in
conjunction with respective ballast and lamp.
2 04 INCANDESCENT LAMP FIXTURES:

A.
Incandescent Lamp Sockets: to IEC 61 and IEC 238, high grade porcelain; E27 (ES)
screw sockets for lamps not exceeding 200 W and E40 (GES) screw sockets for
lamps 300 W and over.
2 05 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMP FIXTURES:

A.
Type: fixtures are to be complete units including integral ballasts (and ignitors for
HPS lamps where indicated) and lamps of required number and type, and are to
have lighting distribution characteristics equivalent to model and manufacturer
indicated in the fixture description.
B.
Accessories: fixtures are to have mounting accessories, such as suspension rods or

chains, rails or brackets, and protective glass covers with gaskets for protection
against dust and humidity or type of corrosive atmosphere predominant in the
location.
Ballasts and Ignition Devices are to be power factor compensated to at least 0.9
lagging, and type specially selected for lamp type and size used. Lamp is to be able
to start with at least +/-10% variation from nominal line voltage and continue in
normal operation with dips attaining 20% for four seconds. Compensation is to
ensure there is no great increase in operating current during starting and that gear
losses do not exceed 10% of normal wattage. RF suppression circuit is to be
provided.
C.
2 06 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS:

A.
Conform to BS or equal international standards Provide self-contained units with the

following features and additional characteristics as indicated.
B.
Battery: sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type with 3 hr autonomy (running time),

10 year nominal life minimum, and special project warranty.
C.
Charger: minimum two-rate, fully-automatic, solid-state type, with sealed transfer

relay.
D.
Operation: relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80percent of nominal or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when
voltage approaches deep-discharge level. Relay disconnects lamps and battery
automatically and recharges and floats on trickle charge when normal voltage is
restored.
2 07 LAMPS:
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16515
A.
All lamps to be of high luman, emergy saving type.
B.
Rated voltage of incandescent and PL lamps is to be equal to nominal voltage of

distribution network. Lamps with different rated voltages are not acceptable.
C.
Incandescent Lamps for General Lighting Service(GLS): to have screw base type ES
for lamps 200 W and below and type GES for lamps 300 W and above. Inside
frosted (IF) lamps are to be used unless otherwise specified. Guaranteed rated life is
to be above 800 hours.
D.
Reflector Lamps (R): for indoor and outdoor use, with silver reflector and prismatic
lens. Light beam is to be narrow (spot), wide (flood) or extra-wide (wide flood) as
indicated in the fixture description.
E.
Tungsten-Halogen Lamps: tubular, quartz, resistant

Guaranteed rated life is to be above 2000 hours.
F.
Straight Tubular Fluorescent Lamps: to IEC 81 (SSA 138 and SSA 139) and, unless
otherwise specified, are to be switch start type, bi-pin, rated as indicated in the fixture
description and with improved fluorescent internal coating. Colour of light is to be
high colour rendering, cool or warm white according to the area of application and
subject to the engineers approval. Lamps are to be low energy type with tube
diameter 26 mm. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 8000 hours.
to
high
temperatures.
G. PL-C Compact Lamps: single ended, compact-miniature lamp, with electronic ballast,
consisting of four narrow fluorescent tubes welded together, with integral instant
starter and capacitor and with special two-pin plug-in base and socket, high colour
rendering type, warm white appearances unless otherwise is indicated on the
drawings. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 5000 hours.
Lamps are to be type PLC as manufactured by Osram, Philips or other equal and
approved.
H.
High Pressure Mercury Vapour Lamps: to IEC 188, and to include quartz discharge
tube in an internally coated avoid outer tube. Coating is to be yttrium vanadate
phosphor with colour temperature of 3300 deg. K. Guaranteed rated life is to be
above 8000 hours.
I.
High Pressure Sodium Lamps: type SONT (tubular), with guaranteed average rated
life (down to 80% output) above 10000 hours.
J.
Metal Halide Lamps: comprising quartz discharge tube enclosed in clear tubular
hard-glass outer bulb, operating on same principle as all gas discharge tubes with
iodide additives indium, thallium and sodium in the mercury discharge, to increase
intensity in three spectral bands; blue, green and yellow-red with high colour
rendering. Lamps are to be to IEC 188 with E40 base. Guaranteed average life is not
to be less than 10000 hours.
Permissible base temperature is to be not greater than 250 deg. C, and maximum
bulb temperature not greater than 550 deg. C. Lamp burning position for 2000 W,
230 V lamp is to be possible up to 75 degrees.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16515
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 EXAMINATION:
A.
Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed, and
substrate for supporting lighting fixtures. Notify Engineer in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner to the
Engineer.
3 02 INSTALLATION:
A.
Generally: install fixtures level, aligned and parallel or square to building lines and at
uniform heights as shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Make
final height adjustment after installation.
B.
Fixture Support: provide fixture and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers, brackets
and flanged bolted fittings, as necessary, to support weight of fixture. Submit details
of hangers etc. and method of fastening for approval. Rigidly secure fixtures
mounted on outlet boxes to fixture studs. Install hooks or extension pieces, when
required, for proper installation. Provide one point of support in addition to the outlet
box fixture stud for individually mounted fixtures longer than 600 mm.
C.
Stem Hangers: provide two stem hangers for individually mounted pendant fixtures.
Stems are to have suspension aligners and are to be of suitable length for
suspending fixtures at required height.
D.
Suspended Ceilings: if ceiling construction is unable to support weight of fixtures

without strain or deformation, suspend fixtures directly from building structure.
E.
Solid Ceilings: coordinate dimensions of recesses in ceilings with exact fixture

dimensions and structural elements.
F.
Continuous Rows: arrange fixtures so that individual fixtures can be removed without
dismantling remaining fixtures. Provide minimum spacing between fixtures.
G. Cover Plates: install cover plates over fixture outlet box or opening in ceiling or
structure when left unused.
H.
Flush Recessed Fixtures: install to completely eliminate light leakage within fixture
and between fixture and adjacent finished surface.
I.
Ventilation: keep ventilation channels free after fixture is installed, if required by the
design of the fixture.
J.
Earth metal frames of fixtures as described in the Specification.
K.
Tightness: ensure that enclosed fixtures are reasonably insect/dust tight when
installed, and completely weatherproof for installations subject to weather
conditions.
L.
Lamps for Permanent Installation: place new lamps in fixtures immediately prior to
hand-over and when instructed by the Engineer. Lamps used for temporary service
are not to be used for final lamping of fixtures.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16515

A.
Visual Inspection: check neatness of installation, uniformity of equipment and

nameplates etc.
B.
Illumination Measurements: to be taken at selected locations, to determine level and

uniformity.
C.
Operation: check lighting installations for operation including control and regulation
equipment.
D.
Electrical Data: measure power factor, current and voltage at start for installations
with discharge lamps.
E.
Furnish stock or replacement lamps as indicated above, of each type and size lamp
used in each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owners storage
space.
F.
Provide instruments to make and record test results.
G. Tests: give advance notice of dates and times for field tests. Verify normal operation
of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been energized
with normal power source. Interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper
operation of emergency lighting installation. Include the following in tests of
emergency lighting equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
Duration of supply.
Low battery voltage shutdown.
Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
Low supply voltage transfer.
Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat

procedure until all units operate properly.
3 04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A.
Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and construction debris upon completion of
installation. Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses.
B.
Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.
3 05 EARTHING:
A.
Provide equipment earthing connections for interior lighting fixtures as indicated in

Section Earthing. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified
in applicable standards to assure permanent and effective grounds.
3 06 DEMONSTRATION:
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
A.
ODAC
Section 16515
Upon completion of installation of interior lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry
has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and
compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site,
then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new
units, and proceed with re-testing.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16520

Section 16520 Exterior Lighting
PART 1 GENERAL
1 01 WORK INCLUDED:
A. Description: Furnish, install, connect and test the following, all as shown on the
drawings and specified herein:
1. Street lighting poles, luminaries, fittings and accessories.
2. Free standing bollards and luminaries.
3. Wall mounted exterior light fittings and luminaries.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
1. Section of Quality Control
2. Section of Traffic Signal System
3. Section of Concrete Reinforcement
4. Section of Precast Structural Concrete
5. Section of Painting
6. Section of General Provisions for Elecrical Work
7. Section of Basic Materials and Methods
8. Section of Power System Warning Signs and cable Identification.
9. Section of Conductors and Accessories
10. Section of Grounding and Bonding
11. Section of Lighting Fixtures
12. Section of Roadway Lighting Systems
1 02 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS:

The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of
quality for materials and products. The Contractor may propose alternative codes
and standards providing them giving an equivalent degree of quality as the
referenced codes an standards and are submitted to the owner consultant
engineer for reviewing and approval in advance of their use. All equipment
furnished under these specifications which is not determined or having any
restrictions in local regulations concerning with electrical affairs shall conform to
the appropriate standards of:
1. NEC
National Electrical Code
2. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
3. IES
Illuminating Engineering Society
4. ANSI
American National Standards Institute
5. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
6. NFPA
- National fire Protection Association.
1 03 SUBMITTALS:
The following shall be submitted to the owner consultant engineer for approval
prior to commencing work:
l. A list identifying manufacturers and all material and equipment items proposed
for use in the work of this Section.
2. Manufacturers specifications, data sheets, shop drawings, installation
instructions, operation instructions, and maintenance and repair
recommendations for each item.
0
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/
LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16520
3. Manufacturers Certificates of Compliance: To indicate that each material and

equipment item complies with the requirements of the specifications. Any test
results shall also be submitted, in report form.
4. Recommended list of spare parts.
1 04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. All fittings, panels, luminaires and accessories shall be boxed, crated, and
wrapped, or otherwise suitably protected during delivery, storage and
handling. On delivery, they shall be stored in a secure and dry facility.
B. All poles shall be suitably packed during transportation and protected from
abrasion, impact and other damage.
1 05 SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall not use any spare parts furnished under the contract with
the equipment, without the owner consultant engineer approval. These shall be
stored as directed by the owner consultant engineer.
1 06 QUALITY CQNTROL:
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of all materials used in the
work in accordance with section of quality control. The Contractor shall develop
a supplier quality control program for review covering procedures for shop
inspection and field supervision to ensure acceptability of materials, fabrication,
welding, galvanizing, and installation.
PART 2
- PRODUCTS:
2 01 GENERAL:
A. All goods and products covered by these specifications shall be procured,
when available, from an approved manufacturer. Procurement of all goods
and products shall be approved by the owner consultant engineer.
B. All goods and products shall be new and designed for operation in a
corrosive atmosphere at 2300 m above sea level, an ambient temperature
of 40 C and humidity of 90%.
2 02 CRITERIA FOR LIGHTING PQLE ASSEMBLIES:

These criteria apply to aluminium, steel and fiberglass lighting pole, bollards,
& arm assemblies.
A. Poles and mast arms shall be designed and fabricated for service under the
following conditions:
- Wind Speed.180 km/hr
- Temperature range. 0 C to 50 C
Relative humidity range 10% to 100%
B. All elements of lighting pole assemblies shall be designed and fabricated to
preclude the entry of water.
C. Smooth raceways shall be provided inside all elements for internal wiring.
1
LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16520
D. All materials shall be anticorrosive type.
2 03 ALUMINIUM POLES & ARMS:

A. Poles
1. Poles shall be one-piece seamless tapered tubes fabricated by anticorrosive material Poles shall have full-length tapers with round or
polygonal cross sections.
2. Each pole shall be provided with a reinforced oval handhole, minimum
size of 100mm x 165mm, located on the side away from traffic. Wrought
aluminium covers conforming to ASTM B 26 and stainless steel tamper
proof screws for attaching covers to handhole shall be provided.
3. Each pole shall be provided with a copper alloy grounding lug, readily
accessible from the handhole.
4. Each pole shall be provided with a removable cast aluminium pole cap,
held securely in place.
B. Arms:
1. Arms shall be single member or truss-type as indicated per drawings
and shall be made.of aluminium alloy conforming to ASTM anticorrosive type and shall have a suitable mechanical strength.
2. Provisions shall be made for bolting either a single member or trusstype mast arms to poles. Wrought aluminium bolting plates aluminium
alloy, shall be welded to poles; matching plates shall be welded to arms.
3. Bolts and nuts, or tube nuts, shall be of .type 304 stainless steel
material conforming to ASTM -A 276.
C. Anchor Base
1. The anchor base shall be die cast anti corrosive aluminium, conforming
to the requirements of ASTM B 85. The aluminium alloy shall be
selected to give a minimum yield strength of 290 MPa. The base shall
telescope the pole and shall be welded to the pole by two
circumferencial welds, one on the inside bottom and one on the outside
top. The base shall be designed and welded to develop the full strength
of the pole.
D. Welding of Aluminium
1. All welding shall be performed by welders who have provided
certifications that they are fully qualified in the welding of aluminium.
Certifications shall be acceptable to the owner consultant.
2. The inert gas shield arc method shall be used. Welds shall be free from
cracks and porosity.
E. Hardware
A1I. mounting and fastening hardware use in conjunction with aluminium
poles and arms shall be of type 304 stainless steel material conforming to
ASTN A 276.
F.Finish
Aluminium poles and mast arms shall he finished with a uniform
nonspecular surface, the natural colour of Aluminium. Anodizing shall be
applied to the aluminium for surface protection and long life. Surfaces shall
be anodized to form an oxide film of not less than 22 micron, after which a
proper sealing process is required. Finish shall be smooth, uniform and free
from disfiguring scratches, dents and other detrimental markings.
2
LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16520
2 04 STEEL POLES & ARMS:

A.
Poles
1. Poles shall be tapered galvanized steel anticorrosive type tubes
fabricated from minimum 3mm thick steel conforming to specification
ASTN A595 or A36. The pole shall be tapered uniformly for its full
length. One longitudinal electric arc weld will be permitted; no
transverse welds will be permitted. After welding, the pole shall be
cold rolled to flatten the weld. and to develop a minimum yield
strength of 330 Mpa. Poles shall have round or polygonal cross
sections.
2. Each pole shall be provided with a reinforced oval handhole,
minimum size of 100mm x 165mm, located on the side away from
traffic.
2 05 FIBERGLASS POLES AND ARMS:

A.
Poles
1. Poles shall be of fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP), cylindrical or
conical. The pole surface shall be totally weather and corrosion
resistant in earth and air, completely smooth exterior, homogenous
and non-porous. No glass fibers shall appear at the outer surface, and
the outer 0.5-1.0mm shall consist of pure polyester. A minimum of
one layer of the fiberglass-reinforced polyester shall be unidirectional.
The poles shall be available in any colour specified by the owner
consultant the colour shall be completely light stabilized and
impregnated from the surface through the thickness of the material.
2. Mast Pole tops shall be designed to receive the approved arm(s)
and/or luminaire (s).
The pole tops and the parts of the pole surface intended as assembly
attachment points for further accessories shall be reinforced with
stainless steel wire mesh to prevent loosening of fasteners in those
particular areas.
3. Each lighting pole shall have a handhole access, fully integrated into
the surface of the pole. The handhole door shall be weatherproof,
electrically safe and tamper proof.
B.
Arms
Mast arms shall be of galvanized steel, anodized aluminium or other
compatible corrosion resistant material, of length indicated in contract
drawings.
C.
Anchor Base
1. Pole base shall be a steel plate, which forms an integrated part of the
pole. The pole base shall have a welded vertical steel inner cone,
which extends into the bottom of the fiber-glass pole.
2. The steel plates shall conform to ASTM A-36 or approved equal. The
steel base plate shall be complete with holes pattern, as shown in the
drawings, for high tensile strength anchor bolts and one central hole
for cable entry.
D.
Accessories
All steel accessories of the pole shall be hot dipped galvanized
conforming to ASTM A-123 or approved equal after completion of the
fabrication. No further touching up, finishing or modifications shall be
carried out after galvanizing. The minimum thickness of zinc coating shall
3
LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16520
be 500 g/sq.m. The galvanizing shall be carried out by total immersion in

a bath of molten zinc.
2 06 ANCHORS BOLTS:
Anchor bolts shall be made from high strength steel having minimum yield
strength of 345 MPa. The treaded portion shall be 150mm long. Other
dimensions shall be as shown on the drawings. Two hexagon nuts shall be
furnished with each bolt; one for leveling and one for fastening. The threads of
the bolts and the hexagon nuts shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance
with ASTM A 153.
2 07 SLIP BASE INSERTS:

A. Poles shall be fitted with slip base inserts when so indicated on the
drawings.
B. The plates comprising the slip base insert shall be steel conforming to the
requirements of ASTM A 36. Alternatively, the bottom plate may be cast
steel, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 27, Grade 70-40.
C. The steel plates shall be galvanized to ASTM A 123.
D. For poles with steel bases, nuts and bolts in slip base inserts shall be steel
conforming to ASTM A 325, galvanized to ASTM A 153; or alternatively,
Type 304 stainless steel material conforming to ASTM A 276.
E. For poles with aluminium bases, nuts and bolts in slip base inserts shall be
stainless steel.
2 08 BOLLARDS:
Bollards shall he manufactured to the dimensions shown, and the fasteners
shall be of the sizes shown, in the Contract Drawings. The bollard shaft shall be
constructed of heavy gauge, thick wall anticorrosive alloy of aluminium in one
seamless tube. The .top cap shall be cast aluminium sealed against the
weather and secured with a socket, tamper-proof screw. The internal cast
aluminium base plate shall be secured with four (4) anchor bolts on a holtcircle. The polished-diffuser shall he polycarbonate and be enc1osed by.
Polycarbonate or aluminium louvers set at a 45 angle. The alignment rods shall
be cadmium-plated steel and the lamp holder shall be weather-proof ceramic
designed for firm lamp support.
The all-aluminium construction architectural surface shall be finished with a non
lead black baked acry1ic enamel or other se1ected finish. Painting shall be as
specified in Section of painting.
Outside dimensions and construction shall be in accordance with the detailed
Contract Drawings.
2 09 LUMINAIRES:
A. General: Luminaires and a11 accessories shall comp1y with the
requirements specified below: and the luminaires shall be suitable for
operation on 220V, 50Hz. unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
Ballast shall conform with applicable requirements of ANSI C82-4 it should
be thermally protected, high power factor auto-regulator type with a
minimum operating power factor of 95%, Ballasts shall be suitable for
operation within 10 percent variation in voltage, and 2 percent variation
in lamp watts Luminaires shall be equally distributed on 3 phase Luminaire
type are specified in the following paragraphs:
4
LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16520
B. Luminaire Types Pole Mounted

1. Mounting height as per DWG: The luminaire shall house 250 watt HPS
lamp and shall have a one-piece die-cast aluminium silicon alloy body
to give maximum resistance to corrosion. The control gear shall be
integral within a separate compartment of the luminaire housing. A
porcelain lampholder shall be supplied with a terminal block of nonhygroscopic material. The refractor of the luminaire shall be prismatic
heat resistant borosilicate glass, the prismatic formation to redirect the
lamp flux to provide a medium, A high purity brightened and anodized
reflector shall be housed in the luminaire.
Luminaire shall be gasketed to provide a weather proof seal with the
lower rim of the body and shall be supported by quick release stainless
steel toggle catches. Filtered breathing shall be provided for either thru
a separate filter or thru filter gasket.
The luminaire shall be provided with a 250- watt high pressure sodium
lamp. The ballast shall be fitted with a capacitor to give a Power Factor
correction of 0.95.
C. Luminaire Type Bollard Mounted
Bollard lightings: 0.75 to 1.2 metre-mounting heights. The bollard shall
have either a 70-watt sodium lamp as required. The bollard shall be
made to the dimensions and style shown in the Drawings. The
lampholder shall be weatherproof ceramic, designed for firm lamp
support.
Typical applications are for aesthetic and accent lighting, for example in
landscaped areas, parks, shopping arcades etc.
D. Luminaire Types Wall Mounted
Wall mounted luminaires may be installed either inside the concrete
block wall flush with the surface or attached to the outer surface of the
wall in the manner specified and detailed in the Drawings. The housing
for the luminaire shall be one-piece aluminium casting of an alloy
containing less than 0.3% copper to prevent corrosion when cast in
concrete.
A cast aluminium junction box may be attached to the luminaire
housing and enclosed by a removable cover. The interior volume of the
junction box shall contain four threaded taps, two with removable plugs.
A temporary cover shall be furnished to keep the housing clean until
the electrical components are to be installed.
The luminaire door frame shall be one-piece aluminium casting with a
fine pebbled texture on the outer surface. Trapezoidal outer contour
shall tilt the refractor 18 from vertical.
The refractor shall be tempered borosilicate glass with a smooth outer
surface flush with the doorframe, and vertical inside f1utes. An optical
injection molded (in lieu of glass) refractor shall be provided if shown in
the Drawings. It shall be identical in appearance to the glass refractor
and contain an ultra violet inhibitor.
A silicon rubber gasket shall be installed between the door frame and
housing. A neoprene gasket shall be provided between the junction box
and housing. The entire luminaire shall be weathertight.
Reflector shall be one piece hydroformed aluminium. The bottom
surface shall he finished in matte black to prevent any escape of
upward light.

5
LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16610

PART 1 - GENERAL
1 01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and
Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The
requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless
specified to the contrary.
C. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16110.
1 02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
complete, make ready and set to work for operation by the Owner, transfer switches complete
with bypass and isolating switches in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
1 03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of transfer

switches, of types, ratings, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide transfer switch produced by a
manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section. Interlocking circuit breaker
type transfer switches are not acceptable.
BS.
1 04
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for transfer switch.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings.
1 05
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A. Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective parts and
workmanship under terms of the manufacturer's standard warranties for a period of two years
from date of issuance of C. of P. and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the
job site at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 02
TRANSFER SWITCHES
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16610
A. Rating: As indicated on drawings, 4 pole for a normal and emergency source of

220/380 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 hertz of required ampere ratings and RMS
amperes interrupting capacity; rate of 4th pole is identical to the main poles and rate
neutral bus for full switch ampere rating unless otherwise noted.
B. The Degree of protection should be IP-43.
C. Full Phase Protection:
1. Voltage sensing of all normal sources on all phases: Pickup adjustable from 85-100% of
nominal and dropout adjustable from 75-98% of pickup; factory set pick-up at 90% and
dropout at 80% of nominal.
2. Sensing of emergency source on all phases: Pick-up voltage adjustable from 85-100%;
pick-up frequency adjustable from 90-100%; sensing of emergency source to prevent
premature transfer; factory set pick-up at 90% of nominal voltage and 95% of nominal
frequency.
D. Transfer Switch: Double throw having electrically operated normal and emergency positions
inherently interlocked mechanically and with main contacts mechanically attached to a common
shaft; rated for continuous duty in an unventilated sheet metal enclosure.
E. Contacts: Silver alloy wiping action type protected by arcing contacts; transfer in 1/6th of a
second or less for main contacts make switch and relay contacts, coils, springs and control
elements removable from the front of the transfer switch without removal of the switch panels
from the enclosure and without disconnection of drive linkage or power conductors.
F.Relays and Timers: Voltage sensing relays and adjustable timers capable of adjustment while
energized, through calibrated dials; sensing relays to operate without contact chatter or false
response when voltage is slowly varied to drop-out and pickup level.
G. Withstand Rating: Minimum long-time short circuit withstand rating per UL Standards 1008 as
follows, unless higher withstand ratings are indicated on drawings:
Switch Ampere Rating
1000-2000
Withstand Rating
85,000A
H. Accessories
1. Time delay to override momentary outage adjustable from 1 to 6 seconds, factory set at 1
second.
2. Retransfer time delay to normal or preferred power source : Adjustable from 2 to 25 minutes.
3. Adjustable time delay, 5 to 15 minutes, on shutdown of engine-generator after retransfer of
the load to normal or preferred source.
4. Test switch with the following positions:
a. Test
b. Automatic
c. Engine starting contact
5. Gold plated 10 ampere engine starting contacts.
6. Push to test type pilot lights to show switch in either normal or emergency position. (Amber
for normal and blue for emergency).
7. Auxiliary contacts, one to close on normal position, the second to close on emergency
position, with a minimum of three normally open and three normally closed contacts, rated
10 amps at 600 volts.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16610
8. All time delay and sensing functions readily field adjustable over the ranges indicated and
operate without drift over a temperature range of minus 15 C to 70 C.
9. Time delay on transfer to emergency for controlled loading of generator 0-1 minutes, set at 0
minutes.
10. Provide exerciser clock (2 week type) to automatically start the generator for 30 minutes.
I. Control Panel: With protective cover and an isolation plug in the wiring harness to disconnect all
control wires between control panel and main transfer panel.
2 03
BYPASS SWITCH
The bypass switch is the same basic design as that of the transfer switch and therefore has the
identical electrical ratings. It is operated manually by means of the bypass handle, with a quickmake/quick-break action. The handle has three positions: Automatic, Bypass to Normal, and
Bypass to Emergency.
In the Automatic position, the bypass-to-normal and the bypass-to-emergency contacts remain
open and therefore are not exposed to the destructive effects of fault currents or wear during
normal operation.
When the isolation switch is in the "Isolate" position, the bypass switch can also serve as a manual
transfer switch, allowing the load to be switched from one source to the other as desired, thus
providing a redundant backup to the transfer switch. Regenerative voltage from the load is
prevented from feeding back into the transfer switch during the source-to-source manual transfer.
2 04
ISOLATION SWITCH
The isolation switch is integrated with the transfer switch in a drawout design. Power connections
and disconnections are accomplished with drawout type contacts. The fault current with
standability is consistent with that of the transfer switch.
These contacts are not subject to wear since they never make or break the power connections.
Correct alignment and positive connection and disconnection are accomplished through the
operation of the isolation handle. All power connections are made with silver-plated copper.
Means are provided to padlock the isolation handle in the open position.
The functions of bypass and isolation are performed manually by means of two handles:
1. Bypass Handle
This handle permits load bypass to either source. There are three positions :
1. Automatic.
2. Bypass to normal.
3. Bypass to emergency.
2. Isolation Handle
This handle is interlocked with the bypass function and can be operated only when the bypass
handle is in the bypass position. The isolation handle allows three positions :
1. Closed : The automatic transfer switch is connected to both power sources and the load in
the normal operating mode.
2. Test : In this position, the automatic transfer switch is withdrawn from the load circuits.
However, both sources are still connected to allow electrical functional testing without
disturbing the load which has been bypassed directly to a source.
3. Open : All power to the transfer switch is disconnected, and it is completely isolated.
Maintenance technicians can perform hands-on inspection and maintenance procedures.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16610
The transfer switch can be completely physically removed through a drawout mechanism if
so desired.
Both handles extend through plate, accessible from outside the enclosure. Handle
positions and operating instructions are clearly indicated. Also supplied are indicators
showing :
1. Normal source available.
2. Emergency source available.
3. Bypassed to emergency.
4. Bypassed to normal.
5. Transfer switch closed on normal.
6. Transfer switch closed on emergency.
2 05 ADDITIONAL BUS BAR CONNECTIONS FOR FIRE PUMPS

FEEDERS
The supplier of the Automatic transfer switch and bypass switch shall provide additional Bus Bar
connections for fire pumps feeders from the outgoing section to keep power supply for fire pumps
working 24 hours.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01
INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which transfer switches are to be installed and notify
Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed
with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02
INSTALLATION
A. Install transfer switches, including associated control devices as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance
with local authority requirements to ensure that installation complies with requirements and
B. Coordinate with other work as necessary to interface installation of transfer switch work with
other work.
C. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where
manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to
comply with manufacturers criteria for tightening torques.
D. Anchor mounting hardware firmly to walls, floors to ensure enclosures are permanently and
mechanically secured. Provide all hardware and accessories for proper mounting.
E. Provide equipment grounding connections for transfer switch units as required.
3 03
A. Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability
and compliance of transfer switches with specifications.
Where possible, correct
malfunctioning units at site then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and
replace with new units, and retest at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Test transfer switches, by means of simulated power outage; automatic start-up by
remote-automatic starting, transfer of load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to these tests, adjust
transfer switch timers for proper system coordination.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
3 04
Section 16610
PERSONNEL TRAINING
A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner and Operator's building

personnel in procedures for starting up, testing and operating transfer switches and
auxiliary equipment. Furnish operator's manual providing installation and operating
instructions for each transfer switch.
3 05
INTER CONNECTION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS
schedules.
220 volt.
interposing relays.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Section 16625

PART 1 - GENERAL
1 01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Division-1 "General requirements", apply to work of this Section.
B. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, applies to work of this Section.
1 02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
complete and make ready for operation, a diesel engine generator set complete with engine
generator batteries, charger, silencer, day tank, generator control panel and all required
appurtenances and accessories. Refer to appropriate section of Specifications and drawings
for additional requirements.
1 03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of diesel engine generator sets of
the types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 10 years. Provide diesel engine generator set produced by a
manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, ISO 8528, DIN,
VDE, IES, EN, NEC, UL, NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards pertaining to diesel generator set.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 37, "Installation and Use of
Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines;" NFPA 99, "Standard for Health Care
Facilities;" NFPA 101, "Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures;" "Life
Safety Code;" "NFPA 110;" and "Emergency Standby Power Systems".
D. Service: Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse located within 100 Km of the job site, at
which spare parts are stocked and where a field service engineer who is a full-time employee
of the manufacturer permanently resides, and is a factory trained and qualified individual whose
primary duty is field service.
E. Equipment Rating: 220/380 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 hz, 1500 rpm, Kw rating as indicated on
the drawings. At temperature 50 C and altitude 1500 m and humidity 90%. at 0.8 power factor
and capable of continuous operation at rated output for the duration of any utility power failure
up to 24 hours.
Ratings of diesel electric set based on operation of the set at rated generator RPM when
equipped with all necessary operating accessories, such as air cleaners, radiator fan,
lubricating oil pump, fuel transfer pump, fuel injection pump, jacket water pump, governor
alternating current generator and exciter. All ratings must be factory certified.
F.The same manufacturer is to build, test, and ship the whole system (the engine, generator, and
all major items of auxiliary equipment).
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 04
Section 16625
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for diesel engine driven generator sets and
components, including:
1. Drawing of the diesel generator set.
2. The following data in tabulated form:
a. Make of engine.
b. Number of cylinders.
c.
Bore, inches (millimeters).
d. Stroke, inches (millimeters).

e. Piston displacement, cubic inches (liters).
f.
Piston speed, feet per minute (liters/min.), at rated RPM.
g. BMEP at rated KW output.

h. Make and type of generator.
i.
Generator electrical rating, KVA or KW at .8 power factor.
j.
Number and type of bearings.
k.
Exciter type.
l.
Generator insulation class and temperature rise.
m. Parts and service support.

n. Engine manufacturer's certified engine BHP curve and certified generator set fuel
consumption curve.
3. Batteries and battery charger.
4. Silencer.
5. Day tank.
6. Fuel system complete.
7. Cooling system complete.
8. Exhaust system complete.
9. All auxiliaries.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings of diesel
engine generator sets.
C. Submit a certified test report showing serial number of the engine, generator and all
accessories furnished, and actual readings taken during a factory-conducted full load test
including the following:
1. Cold start acceleration to rated voltage and frequency within 8 seconds.
2. Full and partial load applications and rejections during the test (at least 2 per hour).
Frequency and voltage stability and transients not to exceed the limits specified herein.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Section 16625
3. 15 minutes 1/4 load, or function warm up, 1/2 hour 1/2 load, 1/2 hour 3/4 load, and 2 hours
full load; plus 2 hours overload at 110%. Test shall be conducted at .8 power factor.
4. Demonstrate that all applicable safety shutdowns function along with their respective audio
and visual alarms.
D. Ten working days written notice shall be given prior to factory tests being carried out and all
necessary facilities shall be made available for the consultant to witness such tests.
E. A complete set of tools and portable instruments for the operation and equipment shall be
provided, together with suitable means of identification, storage and securing.
1 05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND

HANDLING
A. Obtain all necessary permits prior to delivery.
B. Delivery and rigging shall be fully coordinated with, and approved by the consultant.
C. Upon delivery, inspect for physical damage and compare nameplate rating of unit with this
specification.
D. Prior to installation, engine-generator controls and all associated electrical equipment shall be
stored indoors, fully protected from weather, dust and dirt.
E. Extreme care shall be exercised to prevent bumping or dropping. All rigging and handling shall
be in full accordance with engine-generator manufacturers' requirements.
Avoid the use of excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical
equipment contained therein.
F.Do not install damaged equipment, remove from site and replace with new equipment.
G. Extreme care shall be taken to assure that all equipment is properly secured and braced for
any overland and vertical travel.
1 06
EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A. Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective parts and
workmanship under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period
of not less than 1 year from date of initial start-up and Owner acceptance of the system and
include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site. The system warranty not to
be limited by running hours.
1 07
SYSTEM SERVICE CONTRACT
A. The supplier of the diesel engine generator set to provide a service contract for a period of five
years after guarantee period and include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Engine manufacturer's recommended procedures for weekly (biweekly) inspection and
maintenance to be done by user.
2. Quarterly inspection by the supplier personnel to review the weekly maintenance records
being kept by user and train any new Owner operating personnel. Inspection to include
scheduled oil sampling for lube oil contaminants as outlined below. Also include a 100%
load test run on the generator set.
3. Annual inspections to include all of items in above paragraph except run the generator set
under system load.
B. Scheduled Oil Sampling
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Section 16625
1. In order to forecast and minimize engine downtime, the supplier of the equipment must
provide an oil sampling analysis kit which operating personnel can utilize for Schedule Oil
Sampling.
2. Scheduled Oil Sampling of the atomic absorption spectrophotometry method and accurate
to within a fraction of one part per million for the following elements:
a. Iron
b. Chromium
c. Copper
d. Aluminum
e. Silicon
f. Lead
3. In addition, test the sample for the presence of water, fuel dilution, and antifreeze.
4. Provide all equipment needed to take oil samples in a kit at the time of acceptance and
a. Sample extraction gun (1).
b. Bottle(10).
c.
Postage-paid mailers (10).
d. Written instructions (1).

5. Provide immediate notification to the consultant when analysis shows any critical reading. If
readings are normal, provide a report showing that the equipment is operating within
established parameters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01
GENERAL
The Contractor shall supply, install and commission the automatic start diesel generating sets with
all necessary switchgear, control panel and accessories all as either herein specified or shown on
the Drawings.
The size of the set shall be prime rating to the rating shown of the Drawings, when operating at the
specified frequency, voltage, altitude, maximum temperature and humidity.
The Contractor shall be guided by the emergency power room layout details shown on the
drawings, but a final detailed and dimensioned layout suitable for construction shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval, prior to ordering of equipment.
The Contractor shall indicate the nearest location from which service facilities and spare parts may
be obtained.
The design of the plant and its installation including all ancillary equipment, shall be such as to
minimize noise and vibration.
Materials and workmanship - All materials, equipment, and parts comprising the units specified
herein, shall be new and unused, of current manufacture and highest grade.
Manufacturer - The unit shall be factory assembled, and tested as complete unit by the engine
manufacturer. It shall be inspected and started at the job site by his authorized dealer having a
parts and service facility in the area.
Warranty - Equipment furnished under this section shall be guaranteed against defective parts or
workmanship under dealer's standard warranty. Warranty period shall in no case be less than one
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Section 16625
year of unrestricted service commencing from date of putting the unit into service and not limited to
any fours limitation.
Tests - The generator set shall receive the manufacturer's standard factory load testing. Prior to
acceptance of the installation, equipment shall be tested to show it is free of any defects and be
subjected to full load test.
Start-up and Instructions - On completion of the installation, start-up shall be performed by a
factory-trained dealer service representative. Operating and maintenance instruction books shall
be supplied upon delivery of the unit and procedures explained to operating personnel.
Specifications and Drawings - The bidders shall furnish information showing manufacturer's model
numbers, dimensions and weights for the generator set and major auxiliary equipment. Proposed
deviations from the specifications shall be stated in the bid. The successful bidder shall submit
copies of pertinent drawings. and wiring diagrams for approval.
The diesel generator set should have performance class G2 according to ISO 8528.
2 02
OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM
The loss of normal power from the transformer shall automatically cause the generating set to start
through Automatic Transfer Switch.
The Diesel generating set shall have an automatic start facility.
The emergency generating set shall be designed so that it will come up to steady full speed from
cold condition within 10 seconds of the "start" impulse. It shall then be capable of accepting 100%
of its power rating load under power factor variations of 0.8 to unity lagging with maximum transient
voltage over or under 5-7 % maximum transient frequency variation of + 5% with steady frequency
+ 1/2% of nominal (within 5 sec's).
Should the Diesel engine fail to start in 10 seconds following the "start" impulse, it shall come to
rest for 10 seconds. Two further attempts shall be automatically performed with intermediate
periods of rest. Should the set not start after three attempts, an alarm shall sound and signal "start
failure" shall illuminate.
It shall be possible to operate the set manually for testing and normal operation purposes. For this
purpose the set shall be provided with a duty selector switch arranged for
OFF/TEST/MANUAL/AUTO. It shall be possible to run the engine with or without operation of the
Emergency Distribution Board circuit breakers.
The Diesel generator set must still be running a 3-5 minutes after transfer and after removal of all
load to ensure that a change-over in the event of a repeated mains failure can rapidly be realized
and to obtain a cooling effect to avoid an accumulation of heat.
2 03
EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
The engine-generator sets shall be a complete package unit mounted on rigid base suitable for
skidding as indicated in the drawings.
The design of the set shall allow the easy replacement of major items subject to wear.
A flexible coupling shall be fitted between the engine and generator to provide the drive and
absorb the transmission of shock loads, and shall be completely shielded by a coupling ring
and adequate steel guards.
Complete protection from machine vibration is required for the building and all instrumentation
and control equipment, including engine-mounted instruments. This may be achieved either by
mounting the combined engine/generator unit to a separate sub- frame resiliently mounted on
the main frame, or by mounting the entire main frame on anti-vibration mountings, and securing
the machine instrument panel by its own resilient mounting. The machine instrument panel by
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Section 16625
its own resilient mounting. The mountings employed, method of mounting and floor structure
and thickness shall be approved by the manufacturer and the Engineer.
2 04
DIESEL ENGINE
The engine shall be of the direct injection four stroke, even number of cylinders dual turbo-charged
and after cooled and not series turbocharged. It shall operate on diesel fuel oil at 1500 R.P.M.
including the capacity to withstand 10% overload for one hour in any period of twelve hours. The
net power rating of the engine under worst site conditions shall be such as to deliver the net electric
power indicated on the generator taking into consideration generator efficiency.
The engine shall be of the water-cooled, radiator type with gear driven water pump system shall be
pressurized and equipped with a heavy-duty radiator mounted integrally with the set and cooled by
a refers flow fan. A fan coil and hand protection guard shall be fitted. Coolant temperature shall be
measured and controlled by means of one or more thermostats.
The lubricating oil system shall be of the full pressure circulating type, complete with full flow
lubricating oil filters with replaceable elements and a lubricating oil heat exchanger. Filter system
shall be equipped with a spring loaded by-pass valve as an insurance against stoppage of
lubricating oil circulation in the event the filters become clogged.
Adequate inspection openings per cylinder to provide quick access and inspection of camshafts
and connecting rod.
The fuel system shall be complete and shall be capable of supplying the engine by gravity from a
day fuel tank. It shall be equipped with easily replaceable fuel filter elements. The fuel system
shall be equipped with a built in, gear type, engine driven fuel transfer pump, capable of lifting fuel
against a head of 250 cms. for supplying fuel through the filters to the injection pump at constant
pressure.
The exhaust system shall be insulated complete with dry type exhaust manifold with flanges,
flexible exhaust expansion connections, exhaust pipes and a residential exhaust silencer which
shall be fitted with a drain plug at its lower end to permit evacuation of condensed humidity. The
exhaust piping shall be insulated with asbestos tape with a total thickness not below 10 mm.
The electric starting of the engine shall be possible either manually by means of push button or
automatically by means of the automatic control panel. The starting system shall consist of a 24
volts d.c. starter motor, heavy duty 24 volts lead - acid battery and a suitable automatic trickle
battery charger. The starting pinion shall automatically disengage when the engine.
An isochronous electronic type engine governor with speed control and droop adjustments shall be
provided and shall be capable of providing accurate speed control within 1% of the rated speed.
An automatic shut-down protective system with signalling lights shall be provided to shut down the
engine in the event of engine overspeed, low lubricating oil pressure, and high cooling water
temperature.
Complete shut down system shall be arranged to energize an alarm system located within the plant
room and to trip the respective generator circuit-breaker.
The following engine mounted instruments shall be provided :
1. Water temperature gauge calibrated in C
2. Lubricating oil temperature gauge calibrated in C
3. Lubricating oil pressure gauge.
4. Tachometer.
5. Operating time meter.
6. Oil filter differential.
7. Jacket water temperature.
8. fuel pressure.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 05
Section 16625
GENERATOR
The generator shall be of drip VDE 0530 proof construction, in accordance with screen protected,
revolving field, brush less type with adaptor and flexible coupling for direct connection to the engine
at the flywheel end.
Required Generator Characteristics
1. Type
Brushless with salient pole field system incorporating rotating exciter and
three phase rectifier system.
2. No. of phases
Three with 4 terminals
3. Voltage
380 Y/220
4. Winding connection Star with grounded neutral

5. Net rated output
6. Power factor
As indicated on the drawings @ 50 C ambient temperature.

0.8 lagging.
7. Frequency
50 Hz.
8. Overload
10% of name plate rating for one hour every 12 hours.
9. Insulation
Class "F" stator class "F" rotor with temperature rise according to class F
105 C over 40 C ambient temperature.
The exciter shall be of the static type with a digital voltage regulator forming an integral part of the
alternator.
Overall voltage regulation from no load to full load, including hot to cold, variations and load power
factor between 0.8 lagging and unity shall be within + 0.5% of nominal voltage.
Voltage buildup shall be in a positive and rapid manner even when the machine is connected to its
load circuit.
The line to line voltage wave form shall be at least to the requirements of VDE 0530 (less than 5%
deviation. The total harmonics content shall not exceed 3%.
Radio interference suppression shall be at least according to degree "N" of VDE 0875 or
equivalent.
Engine-Generator Set Control : The control shall have automatic remote start capability. A panel
mounted switch shall stop the engine in the STOP position, start and run the engine in the RUN
position and allow the engine to start and run by closing remote contact, and stop by opening the
remote contact when in the REMOTE position.
a. The control shall include a cycle cranking function. The cranking cycle, nonadjustable, shall
consist of an automatic crank period of approximately 10 seconds duration followed by a rest
period of approximately 10 seconds duration. Cranking shall cease upon engine starting and
running. Two means of cranking termination shall be provided, one as backup to the other.
Failure to start after three cranking cycles shall shut down and lockout the engine, and visually
indicate an over crank shutdown on the panel.
b. The control shall shut down and lock out the engine upon : failing to start after the specified time
(over crank), overspeed, low, lubricating oil pressure, high engine temperature, or operation of a
remote manual stop station.
c. The generator control panel shall have degree of protection IP 54.
d. The control shall provide a twelve light engine monitor on the control panel; one red light for each
of the four shut downs (except the remote manual stop), and one yellow light each for the high
engine temperature and low engine oil pressure pre-alarms, and one green run light. The
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Section 16625
control panel monitor shall include; a flashing red light to indicate the generator set is not in
automatic start mode, a yellow light to indicate low coolant temperature, a yellow light to indicate
low fuel, and two red lights for auxiliary use (for a total of twelve).
A panel mounted switch shall reset the engine monitor and test all the lamps. The enginegenerator set starting battery(ies) shall power the monitor. Operation of shut down circuits shall
be independent of indication and pre-alarm circuits. Individual relay signals shall be provided for
each indication for external circuit connections (not to exceed 1/2 amp draw) to a remote
annunciator. A common alarm contact for external connection to an audible alarm shall be
provided.
e. Provide a low coolant level shutdown, which shall be indicated as a high engine temperature
fault.
f. Provide the supervised points as indicated in fire alarm system section 16722.
g. Control panel shall be mounted on the generator set with vibration isolators or wall mounted type
as indicated on the drawings. The control shall include surge suppression for protection of solid
state components. A front control panel illumination lamp with On/Off switch shall be provided.
Control panel mounted indicating meters and devices shall include: Engine Oil Pressure Gauge,
Coolant Temperature Gauge, DC Voltmeter, and Running Time Meter (hours); Voltage adjusting
rheostat, locking screwdriver type, to adjust voltage +/- 5% from rated value; Analog AC
Voltmeter scale 0-500 V dual range, 90 degree scale, 2% accuracy; Analog AC Ammeter, dual
range, 90 degree scale, 2% accuracy; Analog Frequency meter, 45-65 Hz, 90 degree scale, +/0.6 Hz accuracy; Seven position phase selector switch with OFF position to allow meter display
of current and voltage in each generator phase.
h. Provide exerciser clock (2-week type) to automatically start the generator for 30 minutes.
2.6
FUEL SYSTEM
The generator shall be provided with a fuel system as indicated in mechanical specification section
(15660 & 15661).
2.7
BATTERY TRICKLE CHARGER

A battery trickle charger mounted on the generator control panel shall be supplied with the
generator in order to maintain the two battery sets in good condition. It shall be fitted with on-off
switch indicator light, input and output fuses and reverse current protection. Upon operation of the
standby plant the charger shall be disconnected from the battery and from the mains. An ammeter
to indicate rate of charger and battery voltmeter shall be fitted for each set of batteries.
2.8
ENGINE GENERATOR SUPPORT AND ISOLATION SYSTEM

A. Equip the engine and generator set with a suitable common steel base for mounting the
engine-generator unit on a concrete foundation.
B. Spring Isolators: Freestanding and laterally stable rated for seismic areas with housings that
include vertical resilient limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed; the
isolators complete with neoprene acoustical friction pads between the baseplate and supports.
C. All mounting leveling bolts rigidly bolted to the equipment; spring diameters no less than 0.8 of
the compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs to have a minimum additional travel
to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection.
D. Provide a minimum of six Mason type 'SLR' rated deflection 5 cm, 2431 kg load spring mount
and six No. Z1225, 2268 kg "all-directional seismic snubber." Prior to installation, approved
manufacturer shall submit installation drawing for approval.
2 09 MISCELLANEOUS
The Contractor shall calculate the reinforced concrete foundation block to support the generating
set. Calculation and detailed drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
A water pipes shall be installed between the radiator and the engine.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Section 16625
The Contractor shall supply and install all piping cabling and other required accessories and items
for a complete emergency generating set.
The Contractor shall supply all the required standard and special tools for routine maintenance and
normal over hauls, in suitable cupboard.
The spare parts required for normal operation during 1500 operation shall be supplied with the set,
and placed in a suitable cupboard. Priced spare part list shall be supplied with the Tender.
Manuals and Technical literature required for operation maintenance and overhaul shall be
supplied in English in 3 copies.
2 010 EQUIPMENT DATA/SHOP DRAWINGS

The equipment data to be provided by the Contractor prior to ordering any material covered by this
sub-division shall include but not be limited to :
Complete technical data on diesel engine, includes operating characteristics, site rating, fuel and
lubricating consumption, manufacturer's catalogue cuts, dimensions and weights, etc.
- Detailed description of all components of the engine: starting system, super charge, governor,
injector, cooling radiator, air, fuel and lubricating filters etc.. with manufacutrer's catalogue cuts
and operating characteristics.
- Detailed description of all auxiliaries : batteries and charger, fuel day tank, exhaust pipe and
silencer.
- Detailed description of engine control, instruments protection, alarms and cut offs, etc.
- Complete technical data on generator and excitation: standards to which it complies, type of
insulation, system of cooling system of excitation voltage regulation, etc.. with manufacturer's
catalogue cuts.
- List of standard and special tools supplied for routine and major overhauls.
- List of spare parts for 1500 hours operation.
- Operator's manuals, maintenance book and drawings.
The Contractor's shop/construction drawings for installation covered by this sub-division shall
include but not be limited to:
Complete drawings of the generating plant in the particular location of the project, with indication of
all components, piping exhaust pipes, power and control cabling, etc.
- Construction drawings of the foundation block with indication of holes for anchoring bolts.
- Schematic diagram for power and control wiring.
- Complete lay-out drawings of piping.
- Shop drawings for all supports, frames, louvers plates.
- Plans and elevations of control panels.
2 011 TESTS
Sets shall be available for visual inspection at works by the consultant before loading for despatch
to site.
Sets shall be available at works for noise level tests to be made by the consultant before loading for
despatch to site.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Section 16625
Performance tests shall be made as specified on the Equipment Data Sheets.
2 012 GENERATOR PROTECTION

The generator shall be protected against all types of excess current that will damage the generator
electrical system.
Earth leakage protection shall be provided by means of a 'core balance' residual current device.
The restricted earth fault protection level shall be capable of being varied over the range 0.3 amps
to 10 amps.
The Contractor shall provide all auxiliary equipment necessary for monitoring the electrical
parameters utilized in the protection systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which diesel engine-driven generator sets are to be installed and notify
Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed
with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 02 INSTALLATION
A. Install diesel engine-driven generator set as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of applicable Standards and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of engine-generator equipment work with other
work.
C. Lift generator using eyes and other devices provided by the manufacturer.
D. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors.
E. Align shafts of engine and generator within tolerances recommended by engine-generator unit
manufacturer.
F. Provide break glass station to shut down engine generator set.
G. Provide equipment grounding connections for diesel engine-driven generator units as required.
H. Install diesel fuel piping from diesel engine to day tank.

A. Upon completion of installation of diesel engine generator set, test and inspect system to ensure
compliance with requirements. When possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then
retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
B. At the construction site, provide the services of a competent, factory trained engineer or
technician employed by the manufacturer of the diesel engine generator set to technically
supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the set and major
auxiliaries.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Section 16625
Make adjustments and test in the presence of the Owner.

C. Provide start-up and load test in accordance with NFPA 110 and include the following:
1.
A minimum of 3800 liters of fuel oil for testing.
2.
Record room temperature and time of beginning of test.
3.
Start the units and record the number of seconds it takes each unit to get it started.
4.
Record voltage readings on all phases and also running hour meter reading RPM and
frequency meter reading. Use a hand tachometer to check RPM against frequency meter
reading.
5.
Provide load banks for full load rating of generator to test all systems on generator for
minimum of 4 hours.
D. Mechanical Examination
1. Check engine fuel system and water cooling system for possible leaks during the load test. If
any fuel or water leaks are observed, stop the unit and tighten or replace the leaking item as
required, and restart the load test. It is necessary that each unit run for 2 hours at full load
without any leaks or excessive water temperature, low oil pressure, etc., before acceptance.
2. Deliberately speed up the engine by misadjusting the governor and record the speed at which
the engine automatically shuts down.
3. Simulate low oil pressure by shorting the contacts of the oil pressure relay, to test for automatic
engine shutdown on low oil pressure.
4. Simulate high water temperature by shorting the contacts of the water temperature relay to test
for automatic engine shutdown on high water temperature.
5. With engine running under load, during the last half hour of the 2-hour test, measure room and
outdoor ambient temperatures. Room temperature not to exceed the motor-generator
manufacturer's limit for room temperature with outdoor air temperatures at 35 oC design day.
The Contractor to submit this data to the motor-generator
manufacturer for computation of
o
equivalent room temperature based upon 35 C day operation. Manufacturer to certify that
room
o temperature data is consistent with manufacturer's recommended operating limits for a
35 C design day.
3 04 INSTRUCTION AND FINAL INSPECTIONS

A. Laminate or mount under plexiglass a set of operating instructions for the system and install
instructions within a frame mounted on the wall near the diesel engine-generator set.
B. Furnish the services of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician for five 4-hour
periods for instructing personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment, on the dates
requested by the Owner.
C. Contractor to furnish 5 copies of operating, maintenance and diagnostic instructions and parts
list, and illustrated parts books covering the engine-generator and auxiliary equipment which will
require operating instructions and periodic maintenance.
D. Supply one complete set of spare oil, fuel and air filters plus one set of lamps and fuses.
3 05 PERSONNEL TRAINING
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Section 16625
A. Building Operating Personnel Training : Train Owner's building personnel in procedures for
starting up, testing and operating stand-by generators and auxiliary equipment. Furnish three
operator's manual providing installation and operating instructions for each generator.
3.6 DIESEL GENERATOR: SCHEDULE OF SPECIAL TESTING/COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the acceptance and type of tests carried out at the manufacturer's works, the following
testing/commissioning procedures shall be carried out:
A. At the manufacturers works
All testing to the satisfaction of the Owner's consultant shall be carried out as follows:
Heat Run
-
50% for hour + 75% for hour..

2 hours full load + 1 hour 10% overload.
1)
Recorded hourly readings of speed, oil pressure, oil temperature, water temperature,
fuel consumption, battery charge rate and voltage, generator voltage, load current, kilowatt
output, frequency and power factor, generator temperature rise when connected to a
resistive/reactive load to produce 0.8 power factor.
2)
Demonstration of voltage regulations at set point of 385V from full load to no load to full load,
including transient variation and response time.
3)
Demonstration of speed/frequency regulation under conditions of 2 above.
4)
Cold start, 3 attempts and lockout on set fail.
5)
Cold start, run up and on full load time.
6)
Demonstration of accuracy of all metering using standard test meters.
7)
Demonstration of operation and setting of all protective relays and timing devices.
8)
Demonstration of full sequential operation.
9)
Demonstration of all alarm and indication.
10) Temperature rises on generator starter/rotor.

11) Installation resistance of generator bed plate wiring and controls.
Records of all tests shall be made in appropriate test folders and initialled by the Contractor and
Owner's Consultant . These shall be photocopied and 3 No sets provided under the contract.
The Contractor shall provide 14 days notice of tests to the Owner's consultant and shall allow
witnessing of tests by the Owner's consultant.
B. On Site After Installation
The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, instruments, tools, fuel, lubricating oil and test
loads for commissioning tests.
The tests specified below shall be carried out by Contractor in the present of the Owner's consultant.
The Contractor shall carry out the following:
1)
Check that the base is levelled in all directions, that engine and generator shafts are in
proper alignment and that the vibration absorbing devices are properly installed and located.
2)
Check water and sum oil levels.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Section 16625
3)
Check the battery and terminal connections.
4)
Check that the types and grades of fuel and oil are as recommended for the unit.
5)
Fill the main and daily service tank with the correct amount and grade of diesel fuel oil.
6)
Check that all radiator and engine block water drain points are free from sludge and other
blockages.
7)
Check engine bolts, main drive couplings, valve clearances, fuel pump settings, governor
settings, pipeline connections, water hose, exhaust coupling, flexible pipe work, etc.
8)
Check all connections on the alternator and at the control panel.

All lugs for principal
connections shall have clean and bright contact surfaces. A suitable abrasive material shall
be used where necessary.
9)
Check access panels and doors for proper opening and closing and for the functioning of any
interlocks fitted.
10)
Check all signal and control circuits for correct operation.
11)
Measure the resistance of stator, rotor, and exciter windings and ensure that this is not less
than the Specialist Supplier's figures.
12)
Start the engine by means of the 'start' push button and allow it to run up to normal speed.
Check that during the time the engine starter motor is in operation, the mains battery charger
is automatically switched off
13)
Check instruments and gauges for normal operation and response and check that the
generator voltage is being maintained within the prescribed limits, making due allowance for
no-load conditions. Compare the reading of the frequency meter with that of the engine
tachometer.
Stop engine after 30 minutes. Check water and oil levels.
14)
15)
Restart set and run at various loads for periods totalling at least 3 hours. Check the voltage
and current in each phase in turn and that the voltage and frequency are being maintained
with the required limits with large alterations of load. Note the rate of charge on the alternator
ammeter with the engine stopped. Check against specialist rates in necessary.
16)
Check the operation of the turbo-charger unit and the colour of the exhaust gas at various
loads.
17) Check that all the engine safeguards operate satisfactorily.

18) Check the vibration absorbing devices for proper operation and that the performance of all
flexible connections, both mechanical and electrical are satisfactory.
19) Check the effectiveness of the radio suppression.
20) Check the temperature rise in the alternator.
21) Check the operation of all auxiliary fans, motors, pumps, float switches etc, and their
associated switching control gear.
When all tests are satisfactory and agreed with the Owner's consultant, the lubricating oil be finally
checked, the fuel oil tank replenished and the set left in normal operating order.
When installation of the set and control panel is complete and the installation has been
commissioned, they shall be subjected to load tests as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
50% load for hour.

75% load for hour.
100% load for 2 hours.
110% load for 1 hour.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Section 16625
Sound level readings in the following areas to establish compliance with 75 dB at 7 m from
generator room.
a) 7m from generator set room.
b) 7m from exhaust outlet pipe.

The system supplier is responsible to provide all required switches, auxiliary contacts, relays, wiring,
terminal blocks transducers to provide signaling and metering information for the central control
system and to accept START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
schedules.
All signals to the BMS system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @ 220
volt.
interposing relays.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16671

Section 16671 Lighting protection System
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and General Specification sections, apply to this Section.
to this section:
1. Basic Electrical Requirements
2. Earthing System.
3. Electrical Testing and Commissioning.
1 02 SUMMARY:
A.
Provide labor materials, equipment and services, and perform operation required for
instllation of lightning protection system and related work as indicated on the
drawings or specified herein.
B.
This section includes lightning protection systems for buildings and associated
structures and includes requirements for lightning protection systems components
including, but not limited to, the following:
-
Air Termination Network

Earth Termination Network
Connections to reinforcing bars of structures
Bonding
Accessories
C.
Requirements of Division (16) Electrical Specification Section Earthing, and

communication sections are related to this section.
D.
System Description: Protect entire building including roof projections, chimneys, and
roof mounted equipment.
1 03 SUBMITTALS:
A.
B.
Technical Data: submit data for approval including manufacturers illustrated

catalogues with description and specification of component parts for air termination,
conductors, fasteners, joints (test links), earth point and connectors, wall inserts and
bolts and any accessories forming part of the lightning protective system.
Product Data for each component specified. Include the following:
1. Roof adhesive data
2. Decorative air terminal illustration.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
C.
ODAC
Section 16671
Shop and Construction Drawings; submit drawings for approval including, but not
1.
exact location and routing of roof conductors with indication of sleeves and
connections to steel bars
2. exact routing of interconnecting conductors, bonding and grounding provisions

3.
earth termination points and test link points.
4. Include indications for use of raceway and data on how concealment requirements
will be met.
D.
As-Built Drawings: provide as-built drawings and indicate nature of soil, special
earthing arrangements, test conditions and results obtained.
E.
Records: submit the following:

1. actual layout and specification of components of the system
2. nature of soil and characteristics and any special earthing arrangement
3. test conditions and results: Field inspection reports indicating compliance with
specified requirements.
A.
Installer Qualifications: engage an experienced Installer to install lightning protection

system. Upon request, submit evidence of such qualifications to the Architect.
B. Standards: NFBA 870, Lightning Protection Code.

- UL 96A, Installation Requirement for Lighting Protection System.
- LPI-175, Lightning Protection Institute-Standard of Practice.
- BS 6651, Protection of Structures against Lightning

A.
Co-ordinate installation of lightning protection system with the installation of other

building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures,
building materials and metal components requiring interface with lightning protection
systems and building finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 MANUFACTURERS:
2 02 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Air termination network, is to consist of vertical air terminal rods interconnected with
horizontal conductors around periphery (or parapet), and along inner edges of roofs
that are higher than adjacent parts, unless they fall in zone of protection of a higher
conductor and as shown on the drawings. Horizontal conductors on roof are to be in
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16671
a mesh as per code requirements. and at least as shown on the drawings. All
elements of lightning protective system are to be joined together and to steel
reinforcing bars of outer columns as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Down Conductors: air termination network is to be connected to earth via bare

copper down conductors running as shown on the drawings and to be bonded by
exothermic welding to the steel reinforcing rebars of the building structure at roof and
ground level and every 30 m (max.).
C.
Earth Termination Network: is to consist of an earth rod at each down conductor.
D.
Inspection Earth Pits: is to be provided at the building corner rod for testing of the
resistance to earth of the system according to code requirements and as shown on
the drawings.
Bonding: all metalwork in or on outside of structure is to be bonded to the lightning
protective system roof conductors or to exposed earthing points bonded to
reinforcing bars in the structure. Metal work includes water pipes, tanks, sign
structure, communication supports, metal sheaths and exposed parts of electrical
installations, vents, exterior metal staircases, metal window frames, vent pipes, steel
doors or door frames and main earthing terminal or bar of electrical installations.
E.
F.
Bonding: metal work leaving or entering a structure and having system continuity
(water piping, etc.) is to be bonded as directly as possible to the earth termination,
near point at which service enters or leaves the structure, at nearest earth point or at
nearest main earthing terminal or bar of protective earthing system (refer to Section
Earthing of the Specification)
2 03 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS:

A. Provide lightning protection system materials and components, that comply with
approved manufacturers standard design, in accordance with published product
information.
B. Provide air terminals, bonding plates, conductors, connectors, conductor straps,
fasteners, grounding plates, grounding rods, rod clamps, splicers and other
components required for a complete system that meets the Standards.
C. Roof Conductors: bare, high conductivity, annealed stranded copper conductor, 70
mm2 cross section as shown on the drawings.
D. Air Terminal Rods: taper pointed copper, 15 mm diameter (min), 75 cm length as
shown on the drawings.
E. Down Conductors: bare high conductivity annealed stranded copper conductor, 70
mm2 cross section as shown in the drawings.
F. Earth Rod: 19 mm diameter high strength, low carbon steel core of high tensile
strength (600 N/mm2), grade 43A of BS 4360, with 99.99% pure electrolytic copper
molecularly bonded into steel core, 0.25 mm minimum thickness. Driving head is to
be high strength steel. Couplings are to be long length silicon bronze, grade CS101
of BS 2874, internally threaded. Threads are to be rolled onto rod to ensure uniform
layers of copper and strength.
G. Inspection (Earth) Pit: precast concrete construction, of dimensions shown on the
Drawings, with heavy duty cover matching surroundings floor finish and with brass
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16671
plate engraved Earth Pit Below inset in cover. One pit is to be provided for each
earth rod.
H. Bonding Conductors: high conductivity, bare annealed soft drawn stranded copper
cable 70 mm2.
I. Accessories including supports, joints, fasteners, clamps, bonds, test links etc. are to
be copper or copper alloy and specially manufactured for the purpose. Clamps and
connectors are to be specifically designed and sized for clamping and connecting to
the various shapes and surfaces of bonded metalwork. Bimetallic connectors are to
be used between different materials. Galvanized or plated steel nails, screws and
bolts will not be accepted on copper installations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 01 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS:
A.
1. Install lightning protection systems as shown on drawings, in accordance with

equipment manufacturers written instructions, and in compliance with
applicable Standards or Codes specified above.
2. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections.
Avoid sharp bends.
B. Conceal system conductors.

C. Conceal interior conductors.
D. Conceal conductors from normal view from all exterior locations at grade within 200feet of building.
E. Support roof conductors and down conductors using fasteners spaced at not more
than 900 mm centres horizontally and vertically, and fix by anchor bolts or lead
inserts with machined screws.
F. Bends in conductors are not to be less than 200-mm radius and are not to exceed
90-degree turn.
G. Down conductors are to follow most direct path between air terminals and earth rod.
Re-entrant loops are not permissible.
H. Joints and Bonds: clean and treat contact surfaces with non-corrosive compound.
Protect joints between dissimilar metals from moisture by inert, tenacious material,
and with overlapping joints not less than 20 mm long. Joints and bonds are to be as
few as possible and made mechanically and electrically effective by clamping,
bolting or exothermic welding. Effective cross-sectional areas of joints and bonds are
not to be less than that of main conductor.
I. Bond exposed metal parts of structure to lightning protective system if clearance
between any element of lightning system and metal part is less than 1800 mm or the
distance allowed by the Standard, whichever is smaller.
J. Inspection (Earth) pit is to extend 150 mm below top of earth rod. Cover earth rod
connector with suitable protective compound, which can be easily removed for
inspection. Connector is not to be covered with backfill material and is to remain
clean.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16671
3 02 CORROSION PROTECTION:
A. Use no combination of materials that may form an electrolytic couple of such nature
that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture, unless moisture is
permanently excluded from the junction of such metals. Where unusual conditions
exist that would cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors, use conductors with
suitable protective coatings.

A. Perform inspections of the lightning protection system installation in accordance with
the Standards. Provide Engineer with one copy and retain one copy at the project
site throughout construction for reference.
B. Document the inspections on Standard Forms. Provide one copy of each completed
form to the Engineer.
C. Provide advance notice of at least 48 hours to the Engineer before concealing
lightning protection system work.
D. Provide inspection and delivery certificates to the Engineer.
E. Provide Authority Certification of the system, obtaining necessary certifications and
signatures and preparing and handling necessary forms.
F. Tests on Site and Records
1.
Resistance to earth of each isolated earthing point and of the complete bonded
installation is to be measured during the dry season and checked against
specified resistance.
2.
Electrical continuity of conductors and lightning system, bonds etc. is to be

checked by use of resistance measuring instruments.
3.
4.
Check the installation against the detail layout drawings.

Check earth tapes and down conductor against the specification, installed as
per manufacturers standards and applicable standards, securely clipped.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722

Section 16722 Multiplex/Address Fire Alarm Life Safety
System
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
Drawings
and
general
provisions
of
Contract,
including
General
and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of
this section.
B.
General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 16010, applies to work of this
section.
C.
The requirements of this section apply to Fire and Life Safety System specified elsewhere in
the specification; coordinate with Division 15 for interface with mechanical systems.
1 02
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Work includes a complete fire alarm system in each building and providing all materials,
equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to furnish and install an analogue
Addressable Fire Alarm Life Safety System of the zoned, non-coded, indicating, fully
integrated and field programmable system, closed circuit general alarm (loudspeakers and
strobe light), electrically supervised type. Provide supervised wiring, all operations, and
hardware, as described herein and shown on plans.
B.
The system consists of but not be limited to the following :

1.
Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP).
2.
System printer at the FACP
3.
Telephone line modem.
4.
Remote Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) display and keyboard to be located in security room.
5.
Satellite fire alarm control panels.
6.
Power Supplies.
7.
Fire brigade interconnection.
8.
Addressable manual fire alarm stations.
9.
Addressable area photoelectric smoke detectors.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
10.
Addressable area photoelectric smoke detectors with integral buzzer.
11.
Addressable duct smoke detectors (detectors supplied and wired by this

contractor).
12.
Addressable area heat detectors.
13.
Addressable area heat detectors (900C).
14.
Voice control panel.
15.
Preamplifiers, line amplifiers and power amplifiers.
16.
Tone generator.
17.
Pre recorded message unit.
18.
Master paging microphone.
19.
Voice/alarm tone speakers with strobe light.
20.
Voice/alarm tone horn speakers with strobe light.
21.
Master telephone handset with telephone selectors and indicators.
22.
Fireman's telephone stations with break glass.
23.
Sprinkler waterflow switch alarm (Switches wired by this Contractor).
24.
Sprinkler valve tamper switch monitoring (Switches wired by this Contractor).
25.
Fire pumps monitoring and alarm (Power failure, phase reversal, pump running).
26.
Emergency generator monitoring.
27.
Zone addressable modules (for

non-addressable initiating devices).
28.
Control zone addressable modules.
29.
Elevator recall control and relays.
30.
Central station operation.
31.
Interface with B.M.S. system.
32.
Visual monitoring/status of items at the FACP.
33.
Conduit and wire.
34.
Approved fused cut-out panels.
35.
Battery and battery/inverter (UPS) back-up operation.
36.
C.
Section 16722
waterflow
and
tamper
switches
and
other
Interface with public address sound system to achieve silent to PA zones

corresponding to fire alarm zones.
The fire alarm system is to be installed for addressable initiating and control circuits with
hard-wired signaling (loudspeakers/strobes) circuits utilizing conduit, tubing and wire serving
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
all peripheral devices such as manual stations, smoke detectors, heat detectors and waterflow
switches, etc.
D.
Obtain and deliver a final certificate of approval to the Owner from the Fire Department for all
fire alarm and detection work under this contract through filing the appropriate documents and
including but not limited to the following :
1.
E.
Prepare as-built riser diagram showing all fire alarm related equipment, wire and conduit
sizes and counts and connections to elevator recall, and control equipment, any
sub-systems and must include a complete description of system operation. Each
drawing to have a standard building department note which reads: "This plan is
approved only for work indicated on the application specification sheet. All other matters
shown are not to be relied upon, or to be considered as either being approved or in
accordance with applicable codes."
It is the responsibility of this Contractor to produce all written requests to the Fire Department
for inspections of the fire alarm system and associated equipment.
Written requests to be produced in a fashion to ensure inspection when equipment is fully
operational in accordance with this specification. Contractor to gain final approval in an
expedient manner and not to delay the obtainment of a Certificate of Occupancy for this
location.
F.
Contractor to be responsible for testing all the fire alarm equipment after completion of work
and prior to any inspection with written report given as proof of condition of the system. All
system devices and their circuits to be in first class operating condition after completion of
work.
G.
Wiring
1.
All fire alarm system equipment and wiring must be installed in conformance with the
VDE/DIN, IEC, BS and National Electrical Code.
2.
All low voltage wiring for the systems must be installed in true Class 'A' form with the
'return' portion of the circuit home run in separate piping. Class 'A' return for more than
one circuit may be contained in a common pipe. Class 'A' return pipe(s) must be
labeled as such with lettering, directional arrows or other method to differentiate it from
the other circuit pipes.
3.
Loudspeakers to be connected in a Class 'B' format . Each signalling circuit to be

provided with individual over current protection so that a short on one signalling device
will not affect any other signalling circuit. At least two circuit to be provided per floor.
4.
All fireman's telephone stations will be on an individual class "B" circuit per floor.
5.
One Class 'B' strobe circuit to be provided for each floor.
6.
Wiring to be flame retardant cable run in approved raceway throughout. Addressable

initiating and control circuits to be twisted/shielded. Signaling (loudspeakers /strobe)
circuits to be twisted/non-shielded.
7.
All raceways are to be concealed in hung ceilings or run in concealed areas to minimize
exposure in public corridors and spaces. Where raceways are run in corridors, they
must be installed in upper corners at ceiling secured to protect against tampering where
possible.
H.
All system components of the Fire Alarm Life Safety system to be U.L. listed by one
manufacturer.
I.
After the completion of the installation of the Fire Alarm System, this Contractor shaperform a
complete demonstration test of all systems and devices to the satisfaction of the Owner and
their consulting engineer.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
A.
Manufacturers: firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fire alarm, life safety equipment of
service for not less than 10 years. Provide fire alarm life safety system equipment produced
by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section. Unless submitted
components are U.L. listed or Factory Mutual approved in the name of the organization a
"manufacturer" will not be considered.
B.
Standards Compliance: comply with requirements of all applicable local codes, NEC, U.L.,
NFPA, and NEMA Standards pertaining to Fire Alarm, Life Safety systems.
1.
The following standards are to be included and recognized as part of the specification
for performance and quality of installation and equipment:
1. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code (1997).
2. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
3. NFPA 72A Edition: Standard for the installation, maintenance and use of
protective signaling systems.
4. NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Sys
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
List of all types of equipment and components provided including model numbers, mounting
accessories and quantities.
B.
Description of operation of the system as described herein, to include all exceptions,

variances or substitutions listed at the time of bid.
C.
Calculations to support size of standby batteries, manufacturer's printed product data,

catalog cuts and description of any special installation procedures.
D.
Proposed zone list with description of zones (alarm, monitor) as they would appear on the
FACP.
E.
Provide shop drawings as follows:

1.
1:25 scale drawing of Fire Alarm Control Panel and fire command station.
2.
1:50 scale floor plan showing equipment locations, drawings and raceway runs.
3.
Fan shut-down, automatic and manual control wiring details. Coordinate with Section
15000.
4.
Complete riser diagram showing all equipment and size, type and number of all
conductors and conduits.
5.
Peripheral device connection details showing all module and device wiring details.
F.
Provide samples of various items, when requested.
G.
Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with this
specification. Where the proposed system does not comply or accomplish the stated
function or specification in a manner different from that described and specified a full
description of the deviation shall be provided.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
Where a full description is not provided it shall be assumed that the proposed system does
not comply with the requirements in the specification.
H.
Amplifier sizes and point capacity.
1 05 OPERATION
A.
Activation of any manual pull station, heat detector, duct smoke detector, area smoke
detector, or sprinkler waterflow or pressure switch, to provide the following automatic
operations:
1. Sound a pulsing audible signal at the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Pressing the alarm
acknowledge key on the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall silence the audible signal during
the alarm condition.
Subsequent alarm conditions shall again sound the audible signal.
2. Flash the general alarm LED indicator on the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Pressing the
alarm acknowledge key on the fire alarm control panel shall continuously light the
general alarm LED indicator during the alarm condition. Subsequent alarm conditions
shall again flash the general alarm LED indicator.
3.
Display a general alarm indication and system status summary (numbers of alarm,
supervisory and/or trouble conditions) on the Fire Alarm Control Panel Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD). Pressing the alarm acknowledge key shall display, for 30 seconds, the
individual device display, to include the "alarm" status and custom label (up to 40
characters and spaces) for the addressable device reporting the alarm condition. At the
end of the 30 second period, the general alarm indication and system status summary
shall again be displayed.
The individual device display may be recalled at any time by repressing the alarm
acknowledge key or until the alarm condition is reset to normal.
4.
Enter the custom label for the device reporting the alarm condition with time and date of
occurrence into the fire alarm control panel historical alarm log for future recall.
5.
Sound the slow whoop alarm signal throughout the building. The alarm signals may
be silenced during the alarm condition by operation of the Fire Alarm Control Panel
alarm silence switch. Subsequent alarm conditions shall initiate the strob light.
6.
Flash all alarm strobe lights throughout the building. The alarm strobe lights may be
turned off during the alarm condition by operation of the Fire Alarm Control Panel alarm
silence switch. Subsequent alarm conditions shall again turn on the alarm strobe lights.
7.
Automatically shut down all supply and return/exhaust fans of air recirculating systems
serving the building, floor(s) in alarm. Give visual status of fan(s) at FACP.
8.
Recall all automatic elevators to the ground/entry level or alternate level if designated
by the local authorities.
9.
Automatically initiale a prerecorded messages of the voice panel to the alarmed zones.
10. Send an alarm signal to a Central Station monitoring facility to dispatch the Fire
Department.
11. Activate the remote CRT display to show the alarm activation to include the time and
date and custom label for the device reporting the alarm condition.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
12. Activate the remote printer to printout a hard copy record of the alarm activation to
include the time and date and custom label for the device reporting the alarm condition.
B.
C.
Speaker Control Circuits

1.
Each speaker zone must be divided into two speaker circuits. (Circuit A and Circuit B).
Speakers must be connected in an alternate format, so that upon a circuit failure 50%
of the speakers are audible and no two adjacent speakers are on the same circuit.
2.
Each speaker zone (with dual circuits) must be connected to its own amplifier. It is,
therefore, possible to have as many channels as there are speaker zones. If high
power amplifiers and speaker splitter zones are used a minimum of three channels
must be supplied. An ALERT channel, an ALARM channel and a PAGE channel.
3.
Supervision of speaker circuit wiring must be continued, while quiescent, or selected

to alarm mode.
4.
Speaker zones to have a maximum initial loading of 75% capacity.
5.
Speakers inside guest rooms in Hotel shall be connected to FACP via control signal
module for each speaker
System Supervisory Operation for Off/Normal Conditions

1. The following equipment or devices associated with the fire alarm
system shall be supervised for normal and off/normal conditions :
2.
1.
Sprinkler valve tamper switches.
2.
Fire pump power failure and phase reversal.
3.
Emergency generator running and failure to start.
Activation of any items in C.1 above to automatically:

1. Sound an audible signal at the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Pressing the supervisory
acknowledge key on the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall silence the audible signal
during the off/normal condition. Subsequent off/normal conditions shall resound
the audible signal.
2. Flash the general supervisory service LED indicator on the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
Pressing the supervisory acknowledge key on the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall
continuously light the general supervisory service LED indicator during the
off/normal condition. Subsequent off/normal conditions shall again flash the
general supervisory LED indicator.
3. Display a general supervisory indication and system status summary (numbers of
alarm, supervisory and/or trouble conditions) on the Fire Alarm Control Panel
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). Pressing the supervisory acknowledge key shall
display, for 30 seconds, the individual device display, to include the "off/normal"
status and custom label (up to 40 characters and spaces) for the supervisory
device reporting the off/normal condition.
At the end of the 30 second period, the general supervisory indication and system
status summary shall again be displayed. The individual device display may be
recalled at any time by repressing the supervisory acknowledge key or until the
off/normal condition is restored to normal.
4.
Enter the custom label for the zone reporting the off/normal condition with time and
date of occurrence into the Fire Alarm Control Panel historical trouble log for future
recall.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
5. Activate the remote CRT display to show the off/normal activation to include the time
and date and custom label for the device reporting the off/normal condition.
6. Activate the printer to printout a hard copy record of the off/normal activation to
include the time and date and custom label for the device reporting the off/normal
condition.
D.
WARDEN TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION (TWO-WAY) FROM THE FIRE COMMAND

CENTER
1.
2.
Lifting a telephone handset from its cradle to automatically:

1.
Sound an audible signal at the Fire Command Station.
Flash the individual telephone "call/select" LED indicator for the calling- in
circuit at the Fire Command Center
Connecting the call, by operating the appropriate telephone line "call- connect"
switch, at the Fire Command Center shall automatically:
1.
Light the "call-connect" switch's built-in "operated" indicator lamp.
2.
Silence the audible call-in signal.
3. Connect the appropriate Fire-fighter telephone circuit to the Fire Command Center
master telephone for talking.
3.
Operating additional Fire-fighter telephone line select switches, at the Fire

Command Center shall automatically:
1. Permit Fire-fighter telephone to talk to other Fire-fighter telephone locations via a
patch in the telephone network, controlled at Fire Command Center. Up to five
Fire-fighter telephone may be operated simultaneously.
4.
E.
Fire-fighter telephone stations to be capable of making announcements over alarm

speaker circuits via a "patch" circuit and speaker circuit control switches, controlled
at the Fire Command Center.
Voice Communication System

1.
The voice communication system shall be an integrated modified triple channel system
with the capability of transmitting three (8) digitized and multiplexed audio signals
simultaneously to different areas of the building. The system shall include custom preprogrammed digitized voice messages, words, and alarm tones that can be transmitted
to all or specific areas of the building. The exact sequence of operations must be
confirmed with the consultant. The voice communication system shall provide prioritized
paging announcements to all zones and selected zones of the building.
2.
The system shall provide a local temporal back up tone at each amplifier to allow
evacuation signals to be broadcast in the protected premises in the event of a loss of
data communication from the multiplexed audio riser.
3.
A digital message unit shall be provided with 8 messages and 16 minutes of prerecorded emergency massaging. The message contained in the fully digital message
unit shall be recordable in the field on a computer.
4.
One (1) channel shall be used for general paging from a remote microphone. During a
fire alarm condition, general paging shall be automatically overridden by emergency
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
alarm tones and emergency paging from the EVAC center. General paging shall include
ability to page specific zones only and all call. Confirm zone arrangement, with
consultant prior to programming.
5.
The voice messages shall include an EVAC message, Drill Message and an All Clear
Message. The text of all the messages will be custom made to the approval of the
owner and the local fire department and must form part of the fire safety plan for the
building. The EVAC message will be configured such that the floor of alarm can be
incorporated into the message. Voice splicing will allow the EVAC voice message to
indicate what floor or area is actually in alarm in a high rise building. All messages will
be professionally recorded in a sound studio before being digitized
6.
The approved digitized EVAC message may be automatically broadcast after one (1)
minute to all zones in the evacuation alarm mode. The message may only be manually
activated, at the central alarm and control facility after one (1) minute to all zones in the
alert mode, if supervisory staff is present and have acknowledged the alarm. This is to
prevent the building occupants receiving a false sense of security that someone has
responded to the fire alarm condition.
7.
All messages may be repeated three (3) times before being terminated. Once the
message has been completed the speakers will automatically resume sounding the
same alarm tone they were sounding prior to the announcement.
8.
All messages, words, and alarm tones will be digitized and stored on a plugable
integrated circuit chip located on the audio controller board. All equipment must be
approved for use with the specific voice communication system by the voice
communication system manufacturer.
9.
1-way voice communication shall provide intelligible low level reproduce tones and/or
voice instructions to all areas of the building. The system shall have the ability to
automatically or manually sound the second stage evacuation tone (120 pulses per
minute) in the zone and/or on the floor of alarm, while at the same time being able to
sound the first stage alert (20 pulses per minute tone or voice instructions to other
areas of the building.
10. The sysem shall be capable of selecting the proper tones and phrases based upon
specific conditions and location, sort and transmit the audible information and repeat
the transmission as many times as required.
(Phrases, words, and alarm tones) shall be stored on non- volatile solid state integrated
circuits and shall be completely field programmable on the site.
11. The handset microphones shall be a dynamic noise cancelling type with a frequency
response from 100 to 10,000 Hz. Any automatic alarm which may be sounding may be
overridden by the use of the microphone.
When the manual voice announcements are completed the system shall revert back to
the previous alarm unless reset or restored to normal by authorities in charge. The main
fire alarm control panel shall have a master microphone to control the speaker circuits
in all areas. Provide remote handset microphone and paging control unit at security
room.
12. Manual control of the building speaker circuits shall be accomplished via dedicated
speaker circuit toggle switches. These switches give the operator the ability to select
the areas of the building to be activated during an alarm condition
1 06 SYSTEM SUPERVISION
A.
Fire Alarm Life Safety System to be electrically supervised to automatically detect and report
trouble conditions as follows:
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
1. The fire alarm system wiring (except control wiring between fans and their control
zone addressable module) shall be electrically supervised to automatically detect
and report trouble conditions to the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
2. Any opens or grounds on Monitor Zone Addressable Module alarm initiating,
supervisory or status monitoring circuit wiring and any opens, grounds or shorts
across addressable data communications, alarm signal or alarm light wiring shall
initiate a system trouble condition.
3. System addressable devices shall be supervised for placement and normal operation.
Removal of an addressable device or the failure of its internal electronic circuitry
shall initiate a system trouble condition.
4. Operation of the central station agency alarm disconnect switch or any manual control
commands that alter the system from its normal programmed standby configuration
shall initiate a trouble condition.
b. Trouble conditions shall automatically:
1. Sound an audible signal at the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Pressing the trouble
acknowledge key on the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall silence the audible signal
during the trouble condition. Subsequent trouble conditions shall resound the
audible signal. The audible trouble signal shall also resound at programmable
time intervals to remind the system operator that the trouble condition(s) still
exists.
2. Flash the general system trouble LED indicator on the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
Pressing the trouble acknowledge key on the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall
continuously light the general trouble LED indicator during the trouble condition.
3. The visual indication shall remain on until the trouble condition is restored to normal.
Subsequent trouble conditions shall again flash the general trouble LED
indicator.
4. Display a general trouble indication and system status summary (numbers of alarm,
supervisory and/or trouble conditions) on the Fire Alarm Control Panel Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD). Pressing the trouble acknowledge key shall display, for
30 seconds, the individual device or circuit display, to include the "trouble" status
and custom label (up to 40 characters and spaces) for the addressable device or
circuit reporting the trouble condition. At the end of the 30 second period, the
general trouble indication and system status summary shall again be displayed.
The individual device/circuit display may be recalled at any time by repressing
the trouble acknowledge key or until the trouble condition is restored to normal.
5. Enter the custom label for the device or circuit reporting the trouble condition with time
and date of occurrence into the fire alarm control panel historical trouble log for
future recall.
6. Pre-amplifiers and tone generators to be arranged so that a trouble condition transfers
the operation to an identical and equally sized standby unit immediately. Preamplifier units to be supervised at all times.
7. Power amplifiers to be arranged so that a trouble condition automatically transfers the
operation to an equally sized standby amplifier. Primary and standby amplifiers
to be supervised at all times even while the amplifier has been selected and is in
operation.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
8. Activate the remote CRT display to show the trouble condition activation to include the
time and date and custom label for the device or circuit reporting the trouble
condition.
9. Activate the remote printer to printout a hard copy record of the trouble condition
activation to include the time and date and custom label for the device or circuit
reporting the trouble condition.
1 07 SYSTEM WALK TEST

A.
The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall permit one person system walk test. The walk test mode
shall be passcode protected, requiring the entry of a minimum five digit passcode before the
walk test mode is enabled.
B. Fire alarm system addressable devices may be divided into as many as eight groups for testing
purposes. Putting one group into the walk test mode shall not impair the normal operation of
the remaining seven groups.
C.
When a group of addressable devices is put into walk test mode, the alarm verification
function, if provided, shall be disabled in order to expedite testing.
D. The walk test mode may be enabled for a programmable amount of time up to 8 hours. If no
devices in the system/an enabled group have been activated during the programmed time,
the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall automatically revert to normal system operation.
E.
When placed in the walk test mode by authorized personnel, activation of any alarm initiating
device shall:
1.
Sound a pulsing two second signal on all audible alarm signalling devices.
2.
Log the alarm condition in the Fire Alarm Control Panel historical trouble log for future
review/recall.
3.
The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall automatically reset itself after each alarm test.
F. When placed in the walk test mode by authorized personnel, momentary disconnection of
addressable data communication, alarm initiating, supervisory or alarm signalling circuit
wiring shall:
1. Sound a continuous four second signal on all audible alarm signalling devices.
2.
Log the trouble condition in the Fire Alarm Control Panel historical trouble log for
future review/recall.
3.
The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall automatically reset itself after each circuit's wiring
is reconnected.
1 08 QUALIFICATIONS OF MANUFACTURER
A.
Manufacturer and/or supplier of system specified shall have following qualifications and
submit documentary evidence of same:
1.
Existence at time of bidding of localfactory authorized office near project site, with staff
of factory trained engineers and technicians who are qualified to provide instruction,
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
routine and emergency maintenance and repairs on portions of systems. Proof to

include evidence of at least three similar installations currently in satisfactory service.
Installations by another distributor of proposed manufacturer will not be accepted as
proof.
2.
Having 10 years or more of experience in successful application, installation and

operation of computerized systems, and sub-systems, as herein specified and noted.
3. Provide written guarantee that local office will be maintained with qualified staff of
engineers and technicians for an agreed upon period.
1 09 TRAINING OF CONSOLE OPERATORS

A.
Manufacturer to train not less than 5 operators of console, with personnel on job instruction
provided by competent engineer representing Manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer to provide each operator with complete, printed operating instructions and brief
sub-system description in manual or handbook form.
C. Manufacturer to provide two distinct training sessions, with minimum training time of one day
each. Sessions scheduled to suit requirements, may be scheduled at any time from award
of contract to end of guarantee period at owner's request.
D.
Manufacturer to train operators in preventive maintenance of console printers and other

equipment, inclusive of replacing paper, tapes and bulbs.
E.
Manufacturer to furnish letter stating that operators have completed training operation of
system.
1 010
COORDINATION
A.
Contractor to coordinate with Mechanical Contractor and Section 15000 for installation of
duct mounted smoke detectors and motor controls.
B.
Contractor to coordinate with Sprinkler Contractor and Section 15000 for interface with
sprinkler devices.
C.
Contractor to coordinate with Elevator Contractor for interface with terminal recall relay.
D. Contractor to coordinate with Architect for final locations of devices and appearance.
1 011
ZONING OF DEVICES (FOR LED ANNUNCIATION AT FACP)

A.
B.
C.
Manual Alarm Stations: Provide one alarm zone per floor.

Area Smoke Detectors: One detector zone per floor plus individual zone for all electric
rooms/closets per floor and mechanical rooms per floor.
Sprinkler Water Flow Switches: Individually zoned per switch for alarm.
D. Sprinkler Valve Tamper Switches: Provide one monitor zone for each switch or a maximum
of two switches per zone if serving the same sprinkler branch line.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Refer to the attached manufacturer's list.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
2 02 MATERIAL
A. Wire and Conduit: Provide in accordance with system requirements as stated herein and by the
manufacturer in accordance with all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction and
installed in conduit throughout.
2 03 EQUIPMENT
A.
Basic System Equipment, Addressing and Operating Capabilities

1.
The addressable fire alarm system shall provide an individual multiplex data address for
each addressable manual fire alarm station, addressable area smoke detector,
addressable heat detector, Monitor Zone Addressable Module and Control Zone
Addressable Module.
2.
The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall provide Standard 72, addressable data
communications circuits to provide connection of and communication with the
addressable devices, as required by these specifications and/or as shown on the
drawings. Each addressable communications circuit shall provide the capability of
communicating with up to 127 addressable devices.
In order to permit future additions, no more than 80% of the addresses available on any
single addressable data communications circuit shall be utilized.
3.
Addressable data communications between the Fire Alarm Control Panel Addressable
Interface Circuit Modules and addressable devices shall be digital transmissions which
shall consist of multiple 11 bit messages with start, data, parity and stop bits.
Address, parity, overrun, framing and check sum tests must be passed for any
message to be considered valid. Addressable data communications circuits between
the Fire Alarm Control Panel and addressable devices shall operate at 4800 baud.
Each NFPA 72, Style 6 (Class A, four-wire) addressable data communications circuit
shall be capable of communicating with an addressable device up to 375 wiring meters
distant and with a total up to 1,500 meters of wiring in all branches.
4.
Monitor Zone Addressable Modules shall be provided to connect to and provide

individually addressed alarm initiating, supervisory or status monitoring circuits for
non-addressable devices such as sprinkler waterflow alarm switches, remote building(s)
alarm and trouble, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fans and/or dampers. Each Monitor
Zone Addressable Module shall provide one NFPA 72, Style D (Class A, four wire)
supervised circuit. Assignment of individual MZAM circuits for alarm, supervisory or
status monitor operation shall be accomplished during the programming of the Master
Controller Module Central Processing Unit (CPU) software.
5.
Control Zone Addressable Modules shall be provided to connect to and provide Fire
Alarm System Control of remote equipment such as air handling systems and stairwell
smoke hatches.
Each Control Zone Addressable Module shall provide one individually addressable
control relay with Double-Pole, Double-Throw (DPDT) contacts fused. Assignment of
individual CZAM relays for control operation shall be accomplished during the
programming of the Master Controller Module Central Processing Unit (CPU) software.
Each of the following types of equipment shall be provided with a CZAM control relay
typically as follows:
1. Fans: Provide one release contact for each fan as required by the Mechanical
Specifications and Local Codes and authorities.
6.
Alarm speaker/alarm Strobe Light Combination Units: Provide a minimum of one NFPA
72, Style Z (Class A, four wire) supervised, alarm speaker/light circuit, wired from the
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
Fire Alarm Control Panel, for each floor. Each circuit shall support a ground of up to 15
alarm speaker/alarm strobe light units .
7.
Each of the following types of remote equipment associated with the fire alarm system
shall be furnished with a manual control switch at the Fire Alarm Control Panel, as
required by the functional requirements of these specifications, but shall be typically as
follows:
1. Provide a switch with LED status for lock-out of elevator recall operations for use
during testing of system.
2. Provide a switch with LED status for disconnection of Central Station signalling.
3. Provide a switch with LED status for each supply and return/exhaust fans.
B. Fire Alarm Control Panel(s): The Fire Alarm System Control Panel(s) shall incorporate all
control, alarm, relay and necessary modules and components in surface mounted cabinets.
The operating controls and zone/supervisory indicators shall be located behind locked, steel
door/Plexiglas window assemblies, with keys made available only to Fire Department and
other authorized operating personnel. All control modules shall be labeled, all zone
locations shall be identified, and the panel shall be provided with a set of permanently
mounted operating instructions.
The panel, door and frame assembly shall be steel, with red finish. The panel shall contain
system power supplies, data bus conductors, battery charger and all necessary function
modules and components, including but not necessarily limited to the following:
C. Master Controller Module: A panel shall be provided to act as a central processing, indicating
and control location for the fire alarm system and shall include:
1. Solid state, microprocessor based, Central Processing Unit (CPU) to process all system data and
generate all system automatic alarm functions. Any addressable device or conventional
har-wired alarm initiating, supervisory or status monitoring circuit may be software programmed
to activate any system control relay or signalling circuit. All control-by-event programming,
custom LCD display labels and alarm codes shall be stored in non-volatile solid state memory,
which shall be on-site programmable.
2. Four levels of access to system control and software functions. Level 1 shall be the lowest level
of access and shall not require a passcode. Levels 2, 3 and 4 shall require a passcode of up to
ten digits, with Level 4 being the highest (most restricted) level of access. System software shall
permit up to 20 individual passcodes to be programmed into the system.
3. Solid state memory for alarm and trouble historical logs. Each log, alarm or trouble, shall be
capable of storing up to 300 events with the time and date of occurrence.
4. A module placement supervisory circuit through the module data conductors.
5. 80 character, alphanumeric, backlit, Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).
6. System alarm LED indicator with alarm condition acknowledge button.
7. System supervisory condition LED indicator with supervisory condition acknowledge button.
8. System trouble condition LED indicator with trouble condition acknowledge button.
9. System power on LED indicator.
10. System alarm silence button.
11. System reset button.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
12. Central station alarm disconnect switch with "activated" LED indicator.
13. Four programmable control switches with "activated" LED indicators.
14. An alarm/trouble audible signal.
15. Display action and data entry/control keypads.
16. Two NFPA 72, Style Z (Class A, four-wire) alarm signalling circuits.
17. Two alarm operated Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) relays.
18. One trouble operated Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT).
19. System Meter Module: The system meter module shall provide visual indication of system
voltage and supervisory current. The meter module shall contain a voltmeter with a range of from
0 to 50 VDC for indicating system voltage. The module shall be readily disconnected for ease of
servicing and placement supervised via its connection to the Master Controller Module.
20. Addressable Interface Module:
The addressable interface module(s) shall provide one
addressable data communications circuit to enable the Fire Alarm Control Panel to communicate
with the addressable devices. Each addressable data communications circuit shall provide
NFPA Standard 72, Style 6 (Class A, four-wire) supervised operation. When wired for NFPA
Standard 72, Style 6 (Class A, four-wire) operation, a single open or ground fault shall not impair
a circuit's operation. Addressable data communications circuit wiring shall be supervised for
opens in the circuit, shorts across the pair and ground faults. An addressable data
communications circuit fault shall initiate a system trouble display and audible trouble signal at
the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
21. Faults on one addressable data communication circuit shall not impede operation of other
circuits. The module shall be readily disconnected for ease of servicing and shall be placement
supervised by the Master Controller Module.
22. Provide available spare space in the FACP for a minimum of two future addressable interface
modules.
23. Indicating Appliance Signal Circuit Modules: The indicating appliance signal circuit module(s)
shall provide two or six independently controllable alarm signal circuits.
Each alarm
signal/speaker circuit shall be configured for NFPA 72, Style Z (Class A, four-wire) supervised
operation monitoring for opens, shorts or ground faults. When wired in the Class A, four-wire
configuration, a single open or ground fault shall not prevent the activation of the alarm signal
devices.
24. When a circuit fault is detected, the module shall light the general trouble LED on the Master
Controller Module and initiate a system general trouble condition.
25. Each signal circuit shall be protected by an individual fuse on the module. The module shall be
readily disconnected for ease of servicing and placement supervised by the Master Controller
Module.
26. Auxiliary Control Relay Modules: The auxiliary control relay module(s) shall provide relays and
their bases, complete with terminals for Contractor wiring, for control of external equipment
functions.
Each module shall provide eight independently, controllable, Single-Pole,
Double-Throw (SPDT) relays. Each relay shall also be provided with a supervised, status
monitoring circuit to monitor the status of the controlled device (status contacts provided by
others).
27. The module shall be readily disconnected for ease of servicing and shall be placement
supervised by the Master Controller Module.
28. Communication Module: The module shall provide two communications ports with ASCII output
(adjustable baud rate) for operation of system printers and/or cathode ray tubes (CRT'S).
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
29. The fire alarm control panel (FACP) shall have a built in printer
30. Telephone Line: It converts data in the RS232C format to or from FSK modulation to permit data
communications over leased/dedicated telephone lines to remote system devices such as CRT
displays and printers. It shall be capable of providing either half-duplex (two-wire) or full duplex
(four-wire) operation.
31. The modem shall provide a power-on LED indicator and six diagnostic LED indicators for:
receive data, transmit data, carrier on, clear to send, request to send, and data set ready.
32. Battery Pack: The fire alarm system shall be provided with battery backup capability. The
batteries shall provide 24-hours of normal standby operation and 30 minutes of normal alarm
operation at the end of the 24-hour standby period. The batteries shall be placement and
high/low voltage supervised by the Master Controller Module.
33. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic
34. Standby power for the system shall be produced by maintenance free, sealed, lead acid or nickel
cadmium batteries. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or
disconnection of the batteries shall be audibly and visually annunciated at the control panel.
Battery chargers shall have the following operating characteristics :
1. Ability to charge batteries to 70% of their capacity withing twelve (12) hours
2. Compatible with either lead acid or nicad batteries.
3. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be individually fused.
D. Power Amplifiers
1.
Primary amplifiers are to be sized to accommodate all the speakers shown on the
drawings, tapped at four watts with 25% spare capacity included. Back-up amplifiers
to be include this equipment at time of bid.
2.
Each audio power amplifier shall have integral audio signal

demultiplexers, allowing the amplifier to select any one of eight digitized audio channels.
The channel selection shall be directed by the system software. Up to 8 multiple and
different audio signals must be able to be broadcast simultaneously from the same
system network node.
3.
Each amplifier output shall include a dedicated, supervised 25/70 Vrms speaker circuit
which is suitable for connection of emergency speaker appliances. Each amplifier
shall be also include a notification appliance circuit rated at 24 Vdc @ 3.5A for
connection of visible ( strobe ) appliances. This circuit shall be fully programmable and
it shall be possible to define the circuit for the support of audible , visible , or ancillary
devices.
4.
Standby Audio amplifiers shall be provided that automatically sense the failure of a
primary amplifier and automatically program themselves to select and de-multiplex the
same audio information channel of the failed primary amplifier and fully replace the
function of the failed amplifier.
5.
In the event of a total loss of audio data communications, all amplifiers will default to
the local EVAC tone generator channel. If the local panel has an alarm condition,
then all amplifiers will sound the EVAC signal on their connected speaker circuits.
6.
Audio amplifiers shall automatically detect a short circuit condition on the connected
speaker circuit wiring and shall inhibit itself from driving into that short circuit condition.
7.
Technical performance
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Section 16722
Power rating : 30 W RMS continues duty measured with sine wave signal.
Frequency response : 20 Hz to 20 kHz fully loaded.
No load to full load differentiation less than 3 db.
Noise 65 db below rated output.
Distortion less then 0.5%
Quiescent power consumption 50 mA
Full load power consumption 2.1amp.
Output voltage to be 25/70 volt constant voltage distribution configuration.
Peripheral Devices: The following material to be supplied and installed as indicated on the
drawings:
1.
System Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) touch screen Display and Keyboard :
The CRT display shall have coloured, non-glare, 20 inch diagonally measured screen.
The detachable keyboard shall be of the enhanced, 101 key type and shall permit data
communication with the system Central Processing Unit (CPU) to permit the operator to
acknowledge system alarms and request status reports. The following feature shall be
available
1. Graphical Annunciation and Control.
2. Up to 25,800 Custom Graphic Screens, Field Generated/Edited Via Auto CAD DXF
File Format Drawing Tools.
3. Custom Alarm and Trouble Messages Guide Operator Dispatch Response.
4. Seven Access Levels for 256 Users.
5. Includes Network Interface for Wired or Fiber Optic Communications.
6. 20" High Resolution Monitor.
7. Desk Top Enclosures.
8. Touch-screen and Mouse Operation.
9. Extensive Historical Logging:
10. Up to 500,000 Events.
11. Compatible with Spread Sheet and Data Base Programs for Report
Customization.
12.
13.
14.
15.
2.
Operator Notations can be Added.

Graphical DiagnosTools Identify Exact Status of Network Nodes and Wiring.
Dial-Up Service Modem for Remote Access.
RS232 Ports for Connection to Printers, Paging Systems, or Third Party
Systems.
System Printer: In the Hotel and stock exchange desk-top type printer shall provide
with the following operational capabilities:
1.
A permanent hard-copy record of all pertinent details of system activity.

Included on this record shall be all unscheduled status change events, all
operator acknowledgments of these events and all operator control commands
into the system and the time and date of all occurrences.
2.
The system printer shall record all alarm, supervisory and trouble conditions by
address number and custom label.
The custom label, of up to 40 characters and spaces, and time and date of
alarm, supervisory or trouble condition activation shall be printed out in a
language text so that the source of the condition is clearly understood without
referring to a code directory. Printout by address or code number only shall not
be as considered functionally equivalent.
3.
The custom label (location message), of up to 40 characters and spaces, for a

specific device or circuit shall correspond to that displayed on the Fire Alarm
Control Panel Liquid Crystal Display.
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
3.
Section 16722
Addressable Manual Fire Alarm Stations: Double Action (lift cover and pull alarm lever),
non-coded type manual station, of cast metal construction, with normally open,
Single-Pole, Single-Throw general alarm contacts. The manual station shall include an
addressable module which shall consist of printed circuit board with discrete circuitry for
monitoring the station alarm contacts. When operated, the alarm lever shall remain in
its "down" position to indicate its operation, with alarm contacts closed until the station
is reset. The station shall be reset by opening the front, resetting the lever and closing
the station front.
The station shall be tested by opening the station front and then returning same to
normal. It shall be necessary to open the station to replace the break rod. A spare
break rod shall be furnished with each station.
4.
Addressable photoelectric smoke detector

Photoelectric sensors operate on a light scattering principle. The sensing chamber
contains an infrared LED source. This source is placed at an angle from a spectrally
matched photo diode receiver. A trans-impedance amplifier circuit provides an output
voltage to an 8 bit A to D (analog to digital) converter.
As smoke particles enter the smoke sensing chamber and cross the light beam of the
LED, more scattered (reflected) light reaches the receiver. A digital representation of
the voltage output is then transmitted to the data acquisition system, along with the
sensor type and address.
5.
Addressable photoelectric smoke detector with built in buzzer UL listed photoelectric

with integral alarm LED, 85 db buzzer fed from FACP
6.
Addressable Heat Detectors: Shall be two-wire, combination rate-of-rise alarm function

and fixed temperature element heat detector. Activation of the rate-of-rise or fixed
temperature alarm functions shall be self-restorable when the ambient temperature
stabilizes. Each detector shall utilize solid state components and shall be listed for U.L.
Standard 521. Detectors shall be provided with surface mount, addressable base
assembly with an alarm LED indicator and screw terminals for all connections. The
addressable base shall respond to polling signals from the Fire Alarm Control Panel
and shall report alarm or trouble status changes. Base assemblies shall provide
detector twist/lock capability.
7.
Monitor Zone Addressable Modules:

Shall be individually addressable alarm
initiating/supervisory circuit board(s) and shall consist of printed circuit board with
discrete circuitry for monitoring normally open, dry contacts using NFPA 72, Style D
(Class A, four-wire) circuit supervision. The monitor shall respond to polling signals
from the Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall report alarm initiating/supervisory circuit
status changes to it. The monitor shall include a field programming capability for the
assignment of its individual address number and clamp-type terminals for making wiring
connections.
The monitor shall draw its power from the Fire Alarm Control Panel via a separate
power circuit. The monitor shall be furnished for flush mounting or surface mounting,
where shown on the drawings.
8.
Control Zone Addressable Modules: Shall be individually addressable control relay and
shall consist of printed circuit board with discrete circuitry for controlling one individually
addressable control relay with Double-Pole, Double-Throw contacts. The control shall
respond to control signals from the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
The control shall include a field programming capability for the assignment of its
individual address number and clamp-type terminals for making wiring connections.
The control shall draw its power from the Fire Alarm Control Panel via a separate power
circuit.
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
9.
Section 16722
Duct Smoke Detectors: UL 268A listed, addressable, photoelectric type, incorporating

sampling tubes and housing designed for this application.
Duct mounted smoke
detectors hidden from view to be supplied with remote indicating pilot lights for
wall/ceiling mounting near the location of the hidden detector. The detector to be of the
same manufacturer as the control equipment and incorporate a built-in test station.
10. Fire-fighter's Telephone Stations

1.
11.
Fire-fighter's Telephone Stations: Provide a semi-flush, mounted enclosure,

painted red, with telephone handset permanently mounted in a break glass type
enclosure.
Visual Display Unit : Desk-top type, providing as the fire alarm system
(CRT) annunciator display with eighty (80) characters per line by
twenty-four (24) lines on a 30 cm diagonal screen. The VDU also to be
equipped with keyboard and battery standby power to enable it to
operate, during alarm conditions, for ten minutes at the end of a 24 hour
period.
12. EVC Cone Speakers

a.
In all finished areas provide a 114 mm cone-type speaker with a round enamel
painted steel baffle suitable for ceiling or wall mount applications. Speaker
assembly shall consist of the following:
1.
Fire retardant and moisture proof cone rated 4 watts.
2.
70 volt matching transformer complete with 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2 and 4 watt tapps.
3.
220 gram magnet.
4.
80 Hz to 13,000 Hz frequency response.
5.
94 dB at 1.2 m, with a 1 watt input.
6.
The loudspeaker shall be provided complete with metal grille and fire dome
(back box).
7.
Moisture repellant treated steel enclosure.
8.
Pretap speakers at 2 watt tap.
9.
Specially designed for fire alarm system and it

must be listed by for this purpose.
10.
11.
13.
Built in strobe light with flash output 75 cd.

Built in current limiting electronics.
EVC Horn Speakers

a.
In all parking areas, unfinished areas or mechanical rooms provide

114 mm red, horn speakers. Speaker assembly shall consist of the following:
1.
Rugged die-cast metal housing.
2.
Vandal resistant grille.
18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
3.
High efficiency driver.
4.
70 volt matching transformer complete with 25, 5, 1, 2 and 4 watt tapps.
5.
400 Hz to 4,000 Hz frequency range.
6.
90 dB at 3 m, with a 2 watt input.
7.
Pretap horn speakers at 1 watts.
8.
Weather-proof boxes for horns designated WP.
9.
Specially designed for fire alarm system and it

shall be listed by for this purpose.
10. Built in strobe light with flash output 75 cd.

11. Built in current limiting electronics.
E. Unit Prices
1.
Provide, as part of written bid proposal, a unit price for each of the peripheral devices as
described above.
2.
All unit prices are to reflect current prices of specified equipment and remain as the
purchase price for a minimum of one year from the date of contract bid as assigned by the
engineer.
3.
Bids for this contract will not be accepted without unit prices in written proposal form.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A.
Examine areas and conditions under which fire alarm system is to be installed. Notify Owner
in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with
3 02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install fire alarm devices, wiring and main equipment as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and in accordance
with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and
B.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of fire alarm system with other work.
C.
Protect all equipment from dirt, moisture and construction debris, subsequent and during
installation until project is accepted by Owner.
D.
Fire stop penetrations of floor slabs or fire walls in accordance with all local codes.
E.
Contractor to furnish all conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and similar
devices necessary for a complete installation. All wiring types as recommended by the
manufacturer installed in conduit throughout or as approved by the local Fire Department.
Junction boxes to be painted fire department red for identification.
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
F.
End of Line Devices (Resistors/Diodes/Capacitors): Shall be furnished as required for

mounting as directed by the manufacturer.
G.
All wiring shall be color coded throughout, to local or National Electrical Code Standards. All
wiring shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer, type Flame retardant, and shall
be installed in dedicated, rigid, threaded, steel, galvanized conduit throughout. Provide flex
conduits at waterflow, tamper and smoke vent connections.
H.
All wires shall test free from earth (grounds) or crosses between conductors.
I.
Circuit wiring from the Fire Alarm Control Panel to the system peripheral equipment shall be a
minimum of as follows:
1.
Each addressable data communications circuit: Two cables, each composed of two 1.0
2
mm conductors, twisted and shielded.
2.
Each alarm initiating, supervisory or status monitoring circuit originating from a Monitor
Zone Addressable Module: Four 1.5mm2 conductors.
3.
Each alarm ceiling, wall or horn speakers and light circuit originating from the Fire
Alarm Control Panel: Four 1.5mm2 conductors.
4.
Each control circuit originating from a Control Zone Addressable Module: Two 2.5mm2
conductors.
5.
.Zone addressable module power circuit/feed: Two 2.5mm2 conductors.
J.
Fire alarm system terminal and junction locations shall be identified in accordance with NFPA
Standard 70, Section 760-3. Terminal and junction boxes shall be painted red and stenciled
in white letters "FIRE ALARM," preventing unintentional interference with the fire alarm system
wiring during testing, servicing and additional modifications to the system.
K.
The system shall be arranged to receive power from three-wire, 220/380 volt, 50 Hertz
alternating current supply through fused cut-out, as shown on drawings. All low voltage
operation shall be provided from the Fire Alarm Control Panel(s).
L.
All final connections between system equipment and the wiring shall be made under the
supervision of a trained manufacturer's technical representative.
M.
Wiring within component enclosures and terminal cabinets: All wiring shall be installed in a
neat and workmanlike manner and shall be trained parallel with or at right angles to the sides
and back if any enclosure or cabinet.
All circuit conductors broken, spliced, or connected in any enclosure, cabinet, mounting or
junction box shall be connected to terminal blocks with each terminal spade lugs or with
approved pressure type terminal blocks. A terminal cabinet shall be installed where any
circuit tap is made and must be painted fire department red. All wiring within the enclosure
shall be readily accessible without removing any component parts.
N.
System Field Wiring: Field wiring shall be solid copper sized as required. Wiring connecting
2
the power supply shall be minimum 2.5mm size conductors.
All conductors shall be installed in rigid heavy metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing run
surface or concealed and as required by applicable codes. Each conductor used for the same
specific function shall be distinctively color coded. Wiring for the fire systems shall be
installed as herein described and separate from any other wiring systems.
3 03
A.
CLEAN UP
Upon completion of the installation, all debris created by the installation shall be removed
from the premises or disposed of as directed by the Owner.
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722

A.
Upon completion of installation of Fire and Life Safety System and after system has been
energized, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Field correct or
replace defective equipment, and retest.
B.
A factory trained technician to supervise the final connections, tests and

adjustments of all equipment upon completion. Each device be tested by the
manufacturer's representative, in the presence of the owner's representative; a test
report completed in triplicate, and signed by the owner's representative to indicate
that he witnessed the testing of the system.
A copy of the test report shall be posted adjacent to the Fire Alarm Control equipment and
enclosed in a glass directory stainless steel frame.
C.
Upon completion and prior to all acceptance, perform complete system tests as follows:
1.
Actuate all manual and automatic alarm and monitor initiating devices one at a time and
verify proper operation.
2. Verify:
1. Operation of all signaling and indication systems as specified including proper
zone identification and labeling at the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
2. Fan shut-down.
3. Transmission of alarm to security office.
4. Manual control of items as specified.
5. Class and type of wiring.
6. Automatic operations of specified items.
3.
Power:
1.
2.
Verify operation of standby power sources as follows:

1.
Remove primary
specified.
2.
Remove primary
secondary source.
power
power
and
and
check
check
for
for
battery
automatic
operation
as
switch-over
to
Check for proper sequence and priorities.
D.
Submit 5 copies of test data and results, signed by test personnel.
E.
Correct or adjust items not found acceptable by authorized representative.
F.
Repeat tests to indicate corrected items.
3 05 GUARANTEE
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16722
A. All components, parts and assemblies supplied by the manufacturer to be guaranteed against
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 12 months from Owner and fire
department acceptance.
B.
Equipment manufacturer to have a local branch office staffed with trained, full-time employees
who are capable of performing testing, inspection, repair and maintenance services for the life
of the System.
C.
Contractor to guarantee all wiring to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects
for one year. The manufacturer to furnish a one-year maintenance contract, free of charge to
the owner, effective from the date of installation for maintenance and inspections of the
manufacturer's equipment; with a minimum of two inspections during the contract year. A
local manufacturer service department which stocks standard parts to be available to the
owner. If required, maintenance is to be performed during normal working hours, at no cost to
the owner, for a period of twelve months from the completion date of the installation, unless
damage is caused by misuse, abuse or accident.
3 06 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

A. The equipment manufacturer shall make available a fully equipped service organization, capable
of guaranteeing an on-site service response time within 8 hours to a service request call. Site
service shall be available 24 hours per day and seven days per week.
B. As part of this Contract, the Contractor shall receive from the equipment manufacturer and turn
over to the Owner the following system spare parts:
1. 50% spare of each type of fuse.
2. 30% spare of each type of lamp (excluding LED type).
3. 10% spare of each type of alarm initiating device.

4. Other devices as described herein.
C.
The equipment manufacturer shall make available, to the Owner, a price quotation for a one
year maintenance and testing agreement, to take effect on the date of final acceptance.
3 07 INTERCONNECTION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS

The system supplier is responsible to provide all required switches, auxiliary contacts, relays, wiring,
terminal blocks transducers to provide signaling and metering information for the central control
system and to accept START/STOP, open/close, set point from it.
schedules.
All signals to the BMS system should be potential free to actuate devices of less than 20 VA. @ 220
volt.
interposing relays.

22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section

Section 16740 Telephone System
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and
B.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A.
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary
to complete and make ready for operation a telephone system in accordance with Drawings
and Specifications.
B.
The work covered under this Section of the Specification shall include but not be limited to,
supplying, installing, connecting, testing and putting into satisfactory operating the following:
1. Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchange (EPABX).
2. Operator consoles.
3. Battery and charger.
4. Telephone sets (Digital and analog).
5. Main distribution frame.
6. Complete installations including all accessories and ancillary equipments
required for a complete working system ready for service of the premises.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of type of equipment required for
the telephone network system whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of telephone company, applicable local

codes DIN/DE, IEC, EH, and NEC pertaining to telephone network system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers data for telephone system.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete

with risers and details.
C.
Compliance list: Submit a fully detailed compliance statement with this specification.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 GENERAL
A.
The contractor shall, install, test and commission a complete separate telephone system.
B.
All work related to the telephone system shall conform to the requirements of the Public
Telephone Authority, with which the Contractor shall acquaint himself.
C.
The telephone equipment supplier shall be the authorized distributor of the approved
manufacturer and must maintain a local staff of specialists for engineering assistance,
maintenance and repair.
D.
The telephone system should be the latest model in design currently produced by the
manufacturer.
2 02 STANDARDS, REGULATIONS AND WORKMANSHIP

A.
The telephone system shall comply with all relevant IEC, DIN/VDE and Egyptian Standards.
B.
The telephone system shall be designed and installed by component personnel specializing
in this type of work. Installation shall be carried out to the highest standards of
workmanship.
2 03 DISTRIBUTION
A.
EPABX Specifications
1.
The EPABX shall be full common control redundancy, solid- state, pulse code
modulation (PCM), electronic stored program controlled, PSC type time division
multiplex (TDM) switching.
2.
The EPABX shall be of the modular, plug-in type, fully tested at the factory.
components shall be located in compact accessible cabinets.
3.
Capacity
1.
The EPABX of the project block shall have the following capacity :1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
All
Internal (extension) lines (DTMF) 200

External (trunk) lines : 10
Operator console: 1
System fails transfer circuits
: 25% of trunk lines.
The system shall be wired for 1024 extension lines and 152 external lines.
4.
The EPABX shall operate with a temperature range between 0-50 C ciclus and 1090% humidity.
5.
Construction
1. The EPABX shall be of the metal cabinet design, with hinged doors and completely
dust-proof.
2.
All metal surfaces internal to the equipment and not normally visible from the
exterior shall be suitably protected against corrosion.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
3.
All external metal surfaces shall be treated, prior to finishing, with metal spray
galvanizing, plating, or other approved surface treatment and shall then be primed
or otherwise treated to provide a first class base for Duct- Enamel or a similar
finish.
4.
The EPABX cabinets shall contain all the switching equipment, such as the
controls, connecting sets, service panel, service terminal and speechpath network.
5.
All semi-conductor devices shall be encapsulated in hermetic packages. The

system shall be designed in such a way that very low humidity shall not damage
the semi-conductor devices. The devices shall be protected against any static
discharges.
6.
For printed circuits boards, the laminate material shall preferably be of epoxy glass
filament. The conductor width and spacing shall guarantee a high quality product,
reliable under extreme circumstances, at the chosen voltages and currents.
Adequate protection against corrosion of copper conductors shall be applied.
7.
Where plugs and sockets are used, reliable pressure connectors shall be provided.
8.
The EPABX shall have the maximum flexibility for expansion of facilities and also
amendments to facilities. This shall be done without interruption of service.
9.
All control functions shall be performed by LSI micro- processors and

miniprocessors.
10. The peripheral functional units, such as the connecting sets and line systems, shall
utilize complementary MOS or CMOS circuit components.
11. All circuits shall be accommodated on one-or two-row plug-in card modules and
connected electrically to one or two-row module frames via multi-contact plugs.
The module frames shall be interconnected via multi-contact plug-in cables which
shall be accessible from the rear and housed in cabinets.
12. Faulty plug-in cards shall be replaceable without any interruption to the remaining
equipment.
13. The capability shall be provided for station numbers to be assigned to lines at the
time of installation in accordance with a customer-desired numbering plan and to
permit reassignment while in service to permit personnel moves without requiring
number changes. The numbering system shall utilize a three or four digit
numbering plan which shall be changeable without hardware or wiring alterations.
6.
Technology
The EPABX shall be capable of interfacing with the local PTT. It shall be in full
compliance with CCITT recommendations and shall have at least the following
specifications:
1. The common control should consist of different cards for different functions such as
processor, network control, tone generator.
2. Full duplication should be provided for all control and service cards (components) :
Processor, Memory, Network control, Traffic cards, Tone generators, Tone
detectors, Clock, Magnetic storage media, TDM bus, switching matrix,... etc.).
3. Memory Shadowing Technique : All changes in customer data or lines status
should affect both memories (active and standby) simultaneously in such a way that
when an error is detected in the active control group, a 100% transparent switchover to the standby will take place.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
4. Remote cabinet capability over fiber to carry a minimum of 200 simultaneous calls
between the main & remote cabinet.
5. VDU terminal for local maintenance, administration and traffic measurements.
Programming should be done through friendly English language menus with on-line
helping capability at any point.
6. Dial-up modem for remote maintenance, administration and traffic measurements.
7. When an error (with a severity level greater than a pre-determined level) is detected
by the continuous selftests and diagnostic routines, the system automatically calls a
pre-programmed telephone number for service and leaves a message to the
remote maintenance center indicating the type of error detected.
8. Full Universal Port Slots Architecture : Any interface card can be installed at any
available slot in any module.
9.
DID TRK lines: 8 ports/card.
10. On-card Protection against over-voltages and over-currents should be provided for
all analog extensions.
11. Traffic : Erlanger/Extension = 0.5 min. at the required configuration.
12. Minimum Busy Hour call competitions (BHCC) = 20,000
B.
General system Features

1.
Station to Station Calling

Station to station calling will be allowed.
2.
Classes of Service
An extension, authorization code or trunk group will be assigned a class of service
(COS). The COS will define which features and types of calls are allowed.
3.
Automatic Station Release

The switch should automatically release any station or telephone that has been off-hook
for a specified length of time without being connected to a call.
The time is programmable depending on the COS.
4.
Direct Outward Dialing

Direct outward dialing will allow users to make outside calls through central office trunks
without attendant assistance. The system administrator will assign an access code
(such as digit 9) through the system editor. Users will dial the access code and the
destination address number.
5.
DTMF to Dial Pulse Conversion

The system must be able to accept DTMF signals and outputs dial pulse signals as
required by the outgoing trunk group. The system administrator will define the signaling
mode for each extension and trunk group through the system editor.
6.
Dial Pulse to DTMF Conversion

The switch must perform dial pulse to DTMF conversion in a similar manner as DTMF
to dial pulse is converted.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
7.
Section
Dial Tone Detection

The switch shall be equipped with wide band dial tone detection circuits to detect dial
tone. The switch shall be configured with dial tone detect, before out pulsing the
address digits. If no dial tone is detected, a user selectable default timer must define
the pause time before sending address digits.
8.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

The system must provide DID cards to allow any extension numbers to be directly
called from the public network without attendant intervention.
The system should allow incoming digits to be translated, added absorbed, and
changed to avoid limitations caused by PTT available numbers.
9.
Direct Inward system Access (DISA)

DISA feature is required to allow system users with assigned authorization codes to use
the system facilities or network from off-premises locations.
10. Tandem Trunking

The switch must support trunk-to-trunk connections. A call originating on one trunk may
access another trunk in the following ways :
1.
A caller on an incoming trunk may directly dial a call that uses an outgoing trunk
(as in the case of DISA calling).
2.
An incoming trunk call may be routed automatically, as soon as it originates, to an

outgoing trunk group.
3.
An attendant, station or telephone set may transfer a trunk call to another trunk.
11. Flexible Station Numbering Plans

The system administrator must be able to assign numbering plans from one to 6 digits.
12. Mixed Station Dialing

The switch must allow for any combination of decadic (dial pulse) and DTMF dialing.
13
Direct In Lines
The system should allow incoming calls on any trunks to go directly to a selected
extension hunt groups, nights bells, programmable keys in digital sets as programmed.
14. Group Hunting

The system administrator will be allowed to define hunt groups in the following modes:
1.
Circular Hunting - Hunting starts at the called originator and proceeds to the
bottom of the hunt group list. If no idle station is found, then the system continues
hunting from the top of the list (unless hunting started at the top of the list).
Hunting ends with the extension that appears just before the originator.
2.
Terminal Hunting - Hunting starts at the called originator and proceeds to the
bottom of the hunt group list. If no idle station is found, then hunting ceases and
the caller receives one of the following treatments:
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
1. The caller receives busy tone.

2. The caller is routed to a defined overflow number for the hunt group.
3. The caller is automatically queued until a member of the hunt group becomes
idle.
3.
Master Number Hunting - When the master number for a circular hunt group is
called, then hunting begins with the first extension in the hunt group list.
4.
Distributed Hunting - If the master number for a circular hunt group is called, then
hunting begins with the extension in the hunt group member list that follows the last
extension that received a group-hunted call.
5.
Secretarial Hunting - This feature allows a secretarial telephone extension to serve

as the overflow number of one or more hunt groups.
6.
Consecutive Hunting - the hunt group is configured so that hunt group members
have consecutive extension numbers. This configuration option allows any of the
hunting types described above.
7.
Non-Consecutive Hunting - The hunt group is configured so that hunt group

members do not have consecutive extension numbers.
15. Fully Restricted Stations

May be assigned a class of service that permits only internal (station to station) calls.
This extension cannot make or receive trunk calls.
16. Originating Restriction
Selected stations and trunks will be prohibited by class of service from originating any
calls. If a call is dialed, it should be routed to intercept treatment.
17. Outward Restriction
Selected stations will be prohibited by class of service from originating calls that use the
public telephone network.
18. Terminating Restriction
Selected stations and trunks will be prohibited from receiving any calls.
calls to restricted stations or trunks will receive intercept treatment.
Attempted
19. Toll Restriction

The class of service assigned to an extension, trunk or authorization code will
determine what telephone numbers will be accepted for call routing. Restriction will be
based on area code or may disallow calls that include the digits "0" or "1".
20. Flexible Intercept Treatment
Calls that cannot be completed by switching equipment will receive intercept treatment that is, they may be diverted automatically to an attendant, a recorded - announcement
or a tone. The system administrator can specify and change the type of intercept
treatment for various types of invalid calls, such as
1. Calls to an unassigned extension number.
2. Calls using an invalid access code.
3. Calls to a restricted extension.
4. Calls to restricted area and office codes.
5. Attempts to access restricted features.
6. Partial dialing or no dialing into dial tone, busy tone or queue prompt tone.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
21. Recall Dial Tone

A special "stutter" dial tone will be given station users to indicate that a call is placed on
hold. For example, if a station user "hookflashes" to place a call on hold, the hook flash
should be followed by recall dial tone.
22. ETN Compatibility
The system must support trunk circuits and database flexibility to provide access to
Electronic Tandem Networks (ETN). Access to the ETN will be gained automatically
and by dialing an access code and the private network address digits.
Different extensions with different classes of service can access different trunk groups
by the same access code.
23. Least Cost Routing/Automatic Route Selection
The switch must be programmable to automatically select the most economical route
for call completion.
The system must analyze such factors as caller class of service (COS), call destination,
time of day and day of week before allowing the call to go through, be placed in queue
or given intercept treatment.
24. On-Hook Queuing (Callback Queuing)

The system must be programmable based on station class of service to allow the call
into queue when premium routes are busy. The caller dials a callback code to indicate a
desire for on-hook queuing.
The switch will ring the caller and automatically outpulse the address digits when a
route is available. Queue times will be definable by the system administrator.
25. Off-Hook Queuing
When no circuits are available to complete an outgoing extension-to-trunk or trunk-totrunk call, it may be placed in a prioritized first-in first-out queue. A queue tone will be
delivered to the caller. Callers with priority trunk calling in their class of service are
automatically placed at the head of the queue. To retain a place in queue, a caller must
wait off-hook. When a trunk becomes available, the system should search the queue
and place the next call in line for the route.
26. Time of Day Routing
The system administrator will be able to configure the Least Cost Routing feature to
restrict or allow calls over certain routes based on time of day and user class of service.
27. Day of Week Routing
The switch must be configurable to allow or deny calls over certain routes based on the
day of week and caller class of service.
28. Single Digit to 26 Digit Translations
The switch must accept up to 16 dialed digits and analyze from one to 10 digits. System
translators may be defined to translate a single digit or any number of digits up to 26.
Both digit prefixing and suffixing are required.
29. Paging
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
The switch must allow dial access to customer provided paging equipment. A minimum
number of four different zones with the following capabilities.
Paging interfaces for four different zones with the following capabilities :
1.
Meet-me paging : The paged party can dial an access code to be connected to the
paging party.
2.
Depending on COS,, the extensions can access zone 1, or zone 2, or both, and
can override existing announcement, and cannot be overridden while making an
announcement.
30. System Failure Transfer

The supplier must provide system failure transfer equipment to allow 25% of trunk lines
to be connected directly to predetermine extension lines.
31. Hot Line Stations
Hot-line stations will be configurable so that a pre-programmed telephone number,
either inside or outside the system, is automatically dialed whenever the station goes
off-hook
32. Hot Line Trunks
Individual incoming trunk circuits will be configurable so that incoming calls on those
trunks will automatically be routed to another pre-programmed number, either inside or
outside the proposed system.
33. Call Redirection Groups
Extensions and trunks with incoming calls will be assignable to one or more call
redirection groups in the system's configuration database. Calls may be redirected for
internal, external or both type calls. Call redirection groups will be activated by dialing a
user definable code.
34. System Speed Calling
System speed call numbers should be available in blocks of 100 with a maximum of
1000 numbers available.
35. Night Service
When the attendant workstation is placed in the night mode, the attendant should be
able to activate a call Redirection Group so incoming calls may be redirected to a preselected extension or trunk group or hunt groups.
Two different night service provisions should be provided.
COS of extensions should be changed as programmed when the system is switched to
night (1) or night (2).
36. Trunk Answer from any Station
The switch must be configurable so that incoming trunk calls will activate a common
alerting system such as a night bell. Calls may be answered from any station with the
appropriate class of service.
37. Automatic Trunk Camp-on (Call Waiting)
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
Trunks that are configured to route calls directly to stations, may automatically camp-on
the station. The caller should receive ring back and the called party should receive call
waiting tone.
38. Uniform Call Distributor
The system should support a Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) feature. Up to 16 UCD
groups should be available as an option that is addable at any time in the product life.
One UCD group should be included in the system.
39. Callers name display (CND)
CND is used to display the name room number and related information (such as status
code, language designation) of the calling party on an appropriate digital telephone.
The display should allow for a minimum of forty (40) characters and should
accommodate guest and administrative call parties. The CND information will be
automatically received over the PMS interface. Vendor agrees that this feature will
function adequately with existing PMS at cutover.
40. Recorded Announcements
In addition to the trunk requirements noted above, the proposed system will provide for
recorded announcements (to five languages) and music on hold. The announcement
must be fully integrated & part of the EPABX (not external). As voice mail is also
required by this proposal, vendors are also invited to address the recorded
announcement requirements in that context.
41. Voice Mail Service (VMS)
The system shall be provided complete with a voice mail system to handle message
requirements for the Hotel and stock Exchange Epoxy .
A stand alone voice mail system is required for ensuring that all messages are
delivered accurately on time and with total security.
The no. of mail boxes should be equivalent to the capacity of the EPABX with the
following minimum capacity.
For Hotel Block : at least thirty two (32) hours of storage and eight simultaneous access
ports .
For Stock Exchange : at least sixteen (16) hours of storage and eight simultaneous
access ports .
The voice mail system should offer the following services :
1. It should be integrated with the PMS system to allow the check in/check out
information to create/delete guests mail boxes automatically.
2. The message recipient should be able to retrieve messages from any location
whether inside or outside the building. He may have the message repeated,
retained or erased.
3. Message should be handled for guests who have not yet checked in-thus
overcoming the problem where a room number has not yet been allocated.
4. Several languages should be available to enable VOICE MAIL SYSTEM to
guide the foreign persons in their native tongue.
5. Messages forwarding to another mail box with the ability to record an
introductory comment.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
6. Every mail box user (guest or administration staff member) should be able to
record a greeting message to be played to incoming callers.
7. Multi security level for access including personal I.D. number for message
confidentiality even where persons are sharing a room.
8. Messages should be kept for a period specified by the administration, after
they have been deleted or after a guest has checked out.
9. Remote alarm in case of system failure.
10. Remote software support and change should be available.
11. Dual storage media should be available for retrieval of messages in case of
one fails (disk mirroring).
42. Answer Detection
The system shall be able to use the facilities of answer supervision signals which is
given by Telecom Egypt on the trunk lines in order to determine the exact value of the
trunk calls based on the exact call duration time which will start from the first instant of
the second party reply.
43. Fax Facilities
The system shall be able to transfer the fax facilities directly to a selected rooms from
the public network without attendant intervention.
C.
Ancillary Equipment
1.
Diagnostic maintenance console and printer

This shall be provided and installed near the EPABX. This panel shall be used for the
input and display of user data, test and management functions and shall be protected
against misuse by means of a password. At least four password controlled access
levels should be available. Faults shall be indicated on this panel.
2.
Call Accounting
The telephone call accounting system shall be provided as integrated system.
The system will include:
1. Call accounting processor with VDU.
2. Accounting report printer.
3. Maintenance/Audit trial printer (Log).
4. PMS interface shall be interfaced with the PMS to meet the requirements listed
below.
The system must meet the requirements listed below :

A.
Billing Methods and Rates

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Local Calls.
Domestic.
International.
Operator assisted.
Time of day discounts.
Algorithms.
Any add-on taxes.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
b)
Section
Separate billing algorithms

1. Local (including "Zone billing").
2. Domestic long distance.
3. International.
4. Departmental billing.
c)
Unique billing - Administrative

1. Actual cost.
2. Monthly output.
3. Detail and summary.
d)
Unique billing - guests

1. Operator assisted or direct dial rate base depending upon how the call was
placed.
2. Fixed surcharge.
3. Percentage markup (with at least 6 different rate steps set by time and length of
call).
4. Discounts on domestic operator assisted calls.
5. Discounts on international operator assisted calls.
6. Discounts on credit card calls.
7.Surcharge to special calls may be added.
e)
Unique billing-concessions :
1.
2.
f)
Monthly output.
Billing rate options similar to others but with a different implementation. (i.e.
The administration may surcharge any calls but not those made by
concession.).
Billing Clock
1. Time of Day.
2. Weekends.
3. Holidays.
g)
Reporting Requirements
1.
All billable call records must be sent immediately to Property Management

System if PMS is available.
2.
When the PMS system fails, the Call Accounting system must be able to
resend the records through the PMS Interface from a specific time and date
as entered through a command.
3.
Night audit reports will be available to identify the call details and total cost of
calls placed by station since the last night audit.
4.
At checkout the guest will have available an itemization of all calls placed
and the charges where appropriate.
5. Direct dial-where hotel establishes billing we will itemize charges at our

established rates, including taxes.
6.
Operator assisted - we will include the operator assisted to the above

itemization. We also require the ability to place handling charges on nonsent paid calls such as credit card and third party billed calls and add them
to the itemization.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
7.
When needed, there will be available an itemization of all calls placed and
the charges where appropriate.
8.
Direct dial-where administration establishes billing charges will be itemized

at established rates, including taxes.
9.
Totals should be available for each day and total stay.
10.
When cashiers ask for the itemization, the records will be cleared from
memory, but summary information will remain available for historical retrieval
for at least 3 months.
11.
When non cashier terminals retrieve records, they have the option to clear
memory (for those records called only).
12.
Time/date sequential call records will be logged to a printer, and will also be
available on demand for a 1-day to 1-week retention for each trunk group.
The costs on these call records will approximate the building's actual cost for
comparison to billing from the local telephone carrier.
13.
h)
A daily "balance sheet" is necessary for night audit showing.
14.
The additional accrued guest charges for calls since last night's audit.
15.
Collections on guest call charges for the day.
16.
Yesterday's receivable.
17.
Current receivable.
18.
The current total cost of service for guest calls that have not yet been billed.
19.
The system should bar calls from rooms if the predetermined credit-limit of
the said guest is exceeded.
20.
The system should report internal calls for specific extensions to monitor the
performance service extensions to see how efficient this service is.
Technical Requirements
1.
Must be able to "manually" add and delete records to individual station files.
2. Data storage for a five day guest stay.

3. Memory capacity alarm should advise hotel to "post" records on guests checking
out on that day so as to make room in memory.
4.
I)
5.
Failure alarms - Major (system and minor (station/trunk monitoring problem)

at operator console area.
No single failure can cause complete loss of data. (Including head crash).
6.
Automatic system restart from a power failure.
7.
1 remote access modem for maintenance.
8.
1 log printer to list all calls as they occur.
9.
1 RS-232 Interface to PMS System.
10.
Should be available disk mirroring.
External (Remote) Maintenance:

12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
D.
Section
1.
Database update (rate tables).
2.
Statistical analysis of traffic.
3.
First level trouble shooting upon system failure.
4.
Billing rate tables to be updated/modified over the dial-up maintenance

access line.
ATTENDANT CONSOLE FEATURES

1.
General
The EPABX shall be provided with the attendant console having at least the following
characteristics:1. The operator console shall be V.D.U or L.C.D. of a type integrated with the
EPABX and not an add-on P.C.
2. The console should be of single pair wiring.
3. Equipped with a light weight handset, headset and cradles, which can be
mounted on either side of the console body. The jacks provided shall be also
suitable for connection of handset and/or headset.
4. The (CRT) (in case of V.D.U. Type) display screen have high resolution and
mounted on a tilt and swivel base complete with keyboard provided with various
types of push buttons for control of such functions as break-in (BKI), conference
(CONF), night operation (NT) and others.
5. Designed to take full advantage of the EPABX system's flexibility and to provide
the attendant with everything to most efficiently handle even the heaviest traffic
and have complete control of all calls at all times. A quick glance should
identify the nature of a call ( e.g. whether an incoming call is internal or
external, or special service).
6. Able to operate in a load sharing mode with other future console.
7. All customer data entry performed from the maintenance terminal should be
performed from the attendant consoles as well.
8. Distance from EPABX cabinet must be as indicated on the drawings.
2.
CONSOLE FEATURES
a)
Absent Mode
The proposed console must be capable of being placed in an absent mode, such
as is the case during night service, so that calls may be redirected to another
console or answering position.
b)
Alphanumeric Display
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
The proposed console shall include some form of alphanumeric display providing
various call processing information on active call, calls in recall queue and system
status. It must also perform alphanumeric Dialing (Dial by name).
c)
Access to Integrated Name Directory

The proposed console should be able to access a EPABX integrated name
directory to dial by name.
There should be only one data entry in the telephone directory data base (stored in
EPABX memory) to be accessed after words from all consoles and digital display
sets (local storage in external memory is not required).
d)
Automatic Recall
The proposed system must provide the capability for any trunk call extended by the
attendant to return to the same console within a configured amount of time or after
6 unanswered rings.
e)
Barge
The proposed switch must support the barge feature as initiated by the attendant.
This feature should allow the attendant to break into an existing conversation,
proceeded by a warning tone audible to all parties.
f)
Call Park
The proposed console must be able to enact the call park feature. Using this
feature, the attendant should be able to transfer a call to a particular extension
without actually ringing that extension. The call should remain parked until it is
either picked up or times out, at which time it would return to the console.
g)
Call Release
The proposed console should incorporate a RELEASE key , or something
comparable, which when pressed, will extend the current call to its specified
destination.
h)
Call Splitting
The proposed console should allow the attendant to split calls and consult privately
with either the source or destination party of the call currently being processed.
i)
Camp-On
The proposed console should support the camp-on feature. The attendant should
be allowed to place both internal and external callers in queue for a dialed
extension which is currently busy.
Any number of calls should be able to be
camped onto a busy extension.
j)
Cancel
The proposed console should incorporate a CANCEL key, or something
comparable, which will allow the attendant to terminate any call or function
currently being processed.
k)
Console-Less Operation
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
The system should be able to operate without an attendant console, if so desired.

l)
Multiple Console Operation

The proposed system must be capable of having up to fifteen (15) consoles.
m) Interposition Calling
When the system is equipped with multiple attendant, one may call the other by
dialing the private extension number assigned to the other attendant console.
n)
Loop Transfer
In a multi-attendant system, one attendant should be able to transfer a call from the
active position to the next call of another attendant.
o)
On-Line Directory
The attendant console should have access to the system directory. By entering
the first few letters of a name, the name and number will appear on the CRT
screen. Up to 10,000 entries will be supported.
p)
Automatic Directory Dialing

When the attendant is viewing the directory display and moves the cursor to the
name, it should not be necessary to dial the digits of the number. By pressing a
single key the call should automatically be extended to the extension identified by
the cursor.
q)
Paging Access
The attendant console should be equipped with a page key which connects the
attendant to the paging system.
r)
Speed Calling
Individual departmental and system speed calling should be available for attendant
consoles.
s)
Features Setup and Cancel

The console should set up features to extensions such as do not disturb, wake-up,
message waiting and should be able to clear all features for individual extension
and all extensions.
t)
Call Transfer
Attendants will be able to transfer calls to any extension with the appropriate class
of service.
u)
Trunk Dialing for Restricted Stations

When a station user requests attendant assistance in placing a trunk call, the
attendant should be able to dial the call without requiring the call to hang up. When
the attendant releases the call, it is transferred to the station.
v)
Trunk to Trunk Connection

An attendant must be able to establish a connection between two tandem trunk
circuits.
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
w)
Section
Information Display
The proposed attendant console should display information about the call status
and the console status. Indicate which of the below information fields are available
with proposed console.
x)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Absent mode.
Active call source and destination.
Called number.
Date and time.
Directory.
Incoming call identification.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Extension number.
Trunk group number.
Eight lines of recall information.
Trunk group status.
Music on Hold
The Vendor must provide music to incoming calls that are placed on hold music
source will be provided.
y)
Message Waiting Control

The attendant console will have the capability of allowing the attendant to
command the EPABX to activate message waiting indicators on station and
telephone set users desks.
z)
Extension Status Inquiry

Through a COS controlled feature, attendants should be able to check the status of
other stations. The status displays should show BUSY, IDLE.
The following states should be reported BUSY (in use but not in conversation),
CONV (in conversation),
IDLE (in hook) LOCK (locked out) MBSY (in
maintenance busy), RING (the extension is ringing).
1.Serial Call
The operator can set an outside line in a serial call mode to connect him to other
extensions after finishing previous calls.
E.
Software Package
1.
PMS Interface
The PMS interface should allow full bi-directional communication between PMS
computer system and the EPABX.
All check in/check out functions are carried out on the front of house FOH computer.
The FOH computer then sends automatically the following messages to EPABX:
1.
Check in/Check out message which causes the guest's telephone to be unbarred
or barred to the appropriate level immediately.
2.
Guest's name for immediate entry in the EPABX telephone directory. removed on
check-out automatically.
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
3.
2.
Section
Wake-up time should be sent to the EPABX which will ring the guest's telephone at
the appropriate time and report back if the call was successful or not.
The EPABX should send the following messages to the FOH computer
1.
Message Waiting Notification : When a message is registered or canceled for a

guest, the computer system sends an order to the EPABX to change, accordingly,
the state of the message light associated with its extension number. The message
waiting lamp should also work in conjunction with the voice mail system to indicate
if new voice messages were received for a certain room. Once all voice messages
are retrieved, the message lamp should automatically go off (unless new computer
messages still not delivered to the guest).
2.
Room status update any change of room condition entered via a guest telephone
by the maid will be send immediately to the front FOH computer
3.
Message registration a message containing all call details after completion of an

outside call.
4.
Telephone call accounting billing including methods, rates and total value.
5.
The bi-directional link should be highly secured and supports a range of routines to
provide automatic resets and updates of messages in the unlikely event of link
failure.
The PMS interface should provide full integration (full bi-directional communication)
with the hotel PMS and computers.
3.
Room Search
The receptionist can search for rooms by particular parameters. Typically the search is
for vacant and clean rooms ready for letting. Combinations of the following may be
used for room search :
3.1 Conditions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean
Not clean
Maid present
Out of service
To be inspected
3.2 Occupancy Status

1. Vacant
2. Occupied
3. Reserved
4.
Room Status :
The receptionist may display the current status of all rooms on the console at any time
and may print the status report.
The receptionist should be able to change the Occupancy Status of a room from the
console the maid can also change the Condition Status from the guest telephone by
dialing a code.
The EPABX should change automatically all occupied rooms to not clean at a certain
programmable time in the morning.
The receptionist should be able to keep precise track of maid's movement.
5.
Setting Call Restrictions:

17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
During check in the receptionist should be able to set the level of restriction required by
the guest.
When check-in is effected, the room telephone is automatically un-barred to the set
level of restriction.
Upon check-out the system should automatically bar the calls so that no further calls
can be made after checkout.
6.
Call Blocking
The system should allow total and partial restriction on internal calls. The operators
should be able to set the call block upon guest choice.
7.
Do Not Disturb
The operator should be able to set up, cancel, or check DO NOT DISTURB for a
particular guest. the wake-up call should automatically override the DO NOT DISTURB
feature.
8.
Message Waiting
All guest should be equipped with message waiting lamp.
The receptionist will be able to set-up, cancel or check the message waiting lamp
status. When a guest having the message lamp lit calls the operator the system should
indicate the receptionist that a message is waiting to be delivered to the calling station.
9.
Automatic Wake-up :
The receptionist should be able to set, check, or alter a wake-up call as per guest
requirement.
The no. of attempts, the length of ringing and the interval of ringing should be
programmable.
The system should generate the following wake-up logs (print outs) :
1. No answer for wake-up call.
2. Altering or canceling a wake-up call.
3. Each wake-up attempt whether successful or not.
The receptionist should be able to print the wake-up logs on demand or automatically.
The Hotel guests should be able to set their own wake-up calls from their room
telephones, as an alternative ensuring a reliable service for guests but relieving the
operator of this time - consuming task.
Recorded messages in guest native tongue (ten languages at least) should instruct the
user to key the required time into the telephone hand set.
The automatic wake-up system should then ring the appropriate telephone at the
appointed time and delivers a message such as "Good morning - this is your wake-up
time" in guests native language.
The wake-up should allow the following :

1.
Wake - up greetings in guest's native language.

18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
2.
Several calls can be made at the same time.
3.
Automatic alert if wake-up call is unanswered.
4.
Full reporting providing management information and back-up.
5.
Calls set from a telephone handset will be followed by spoken confirmation of time
set i.e. "your call has been set for seven thirty a.m." in guest native language.
6.
Snooze facility gives the guest the option to dial any digit for another call in 10
minutes with reporting.
7. Two different wake-up calls can be set for the same room.
10.
Single Digit Services :

Each service station can be called by single digit with no restriction on digits used.
The service station should be equipped with multilane digital display sets which displays
guest name and room no. while ringing.
The guest may then be answered by name and would not be asked for a room number.
11. Automatic Attendant :

The Hotel must be confident that calls are not lost, callers should always be greeted
quickly and in a professional manner, and providing recorded messages for greeting
callers and or invite him to dial the room number he requires, or zero for the operator.
If there is no reply from the required extension, the caller is given the option of
automatic routing to the voice mail system to leave a message or transfer to the
operator.
The automatic attendant should allow the following :
1. When outside callers are not answered after a number of rings the system
automatically answers the caller with appropriate greeting.
2. Automatically re-routes callers to a guest's mail box.
3. Where leisure facilities are available to non-residents, the feature allows automatic
attendant to designated line which will allow callers to directly access the
relevant person to, for example, book a tennis court or massage appointment.
4. Allow bulletin board advertising hotel facilities to incoming callers.
12. Mini Bar Costing :

To insure correct charges reaches the guest account before check out.
1. The room waiter should be able to dial mini bar costing code and his personal I.D. code.
2. Recorded message should instruct room waiter to enter room no. followed by item code
and quantity.
3. Talk back to confirm each entry.
4. Room waiter should be able to replay and correct entries.
1.
A confirmation code should by available for dialing at the end of entry to send it
to the PMS.
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
2.
Section
Details of all transactions should be stored and the following information should
be available :
3. Full details of each transaction should be printed at the end of the transaction.
F.
4.
Consumption report lists all items consumed on a base of per room, per floor and
for the Hotel as a whole.
5.
Hotel management should be able to identify the average time spent by the room
waiter in each room.
6.
Sales statistics report should be given on items consumed, profit and percentage
of total profit gained for each item.
Power
1.
2.
Normal power available is 220 V, single phase 50 Hz. or 380 V, 3-phase system.
Power supply system shall consist of (N+1) rectifiers, batteries and closed cabinet
housing provided to supply continuous DC power to the EPABX.
The batteries shall be floated on the load side of the rectifiers and kept continuously
charged.
3.
Rectifier
The rectifiers shall be solid state (N+1) and of sufficient capacity to supply the required
power to the EPABX and maintain the batteries in a fully charged condition. The quality
of the output voltage shall be within the required limits of the EPABX. The rectifier shall
include input and output circuit-breakers, alarms for over-temperature; loss of input
power and low battery voltage, input voltmeter and ammeter, output voltmeter and
ammeter.
4.
Batteries
The batteries shall be sealed lead acid and shall be provided with all necessary
hardware and wire for interconnection. A suitable mounting rack shall be provided for
battery installation.
5.
Outage Time
The power supply fed via batteries shall permit eight hour of continuous operation
without loss of features or a reduction in system capacity in case of failure of normal
power.
The vendor must submit with the tender the rating in AH for the batteries and its
calculation sheets.
6.
Recharge
Following the restoration of normal power the batteries shall be returned to 90% of full
charge in 12 hours.
7.
Power Cabinet
Rectifiers, batteries, alarm panels, supervisory panels, and circuit breakers should be
includes in a power cabinet.
G.
1.
Telephone Sets
Analogue Telephone Sets
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
1. General
1.
Telephone sets shall be streamlined and stylish of the latest models.
2.
Wall or desk mounted telephone sets shall be provided as shown in the list but
subject to final review before ordering.
3.
Telephone sets shall be of the push button type. The handset sensitive elements
of the mouth and ear pieces shall be of the replaceable cartridge type.
4.
6.
All telephone sets shall be fully protected against entry of dust and insects etc. The
colour of the sets shall be to Owner selection at a later date. A wide range of
colors shall be available.
Telephone sets shall be provided with a cord and plug of the same colour as the
set.
The cord shall have a length of not less than 2.5 meters.
7.
Sample of the telephone sets shall be submitted for review and approval.
8.
Telephone sets of the guest rooms in hotel shall be 2-line type
5.
2.
Telephone Set Electrical Specifications

1.
During the dialing operation, the telephone circuit unit shall be short-circuited so
that the impulse generator remains directly connected to the line without
interference from electrical components which can affect transmission of impulses
or be affected by same.
2.
It is required that the receiver capsule be protected by a click suppresser. The

transmitter capsule shall be of spit proof type.
3.
The set shall show an optimum impedance adaptation to the extension lines in the
band from 300 to 3, 400 Hz. The frequency response curve for transmission shall
be uniform and without sharp deviations within the band (300-3,400 Hz.).
4. Impulse generating contacts shall be protected by means of a spark-suppresser (DC

circuit). The bell circuit shall be disconnected from the line as soon as the handset
is lifted.
5.
3.
The sets shall withstand an insulation test of 220 volts, 50 Hz. for 30 seconds.
Telephone Set Mechanical Specification

1.
The telephone set shall be tropicalized and shall be protected against the
penetration of insects and corrosion, both in the components and in the metallic
parts and printed circuit.
2.
On the base plate, the year of manufacture and series number shall be engraved.
3.
The bell unit shall have a sound level regulator to control the sound from a
minimum to a maximum. This regulator shall be easily accessible to the user.
4.
The base plate shall be made of galvanized laminated steel, fitted with a layer of
yellow or lacquered chrome, or of thermoplastic material with high impact
resistance. It shall have four antiskid feet made from rubber or an approved
equivalent material.
5.
The housing of the set shall be made of thermoplastic materials or other materials
having characteristics which cannot be affected by perspiration oils, detergents etc.
Its surface shall be smooth and its colour shall not be affected by age nor by the
discoloring effects of light.
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
6.
The whole set shall offer optimum resistance against deformation, impact,
scratches and effects of dropping.
7.
The handset shall be constructed of the same material and colour as that used for
the housing of the set and shall be well balanced for comfortable and easy
handling.
8.
The external cover of the cables shall be polyethylene or equivalent.
9.
The telephone sets shall be equipped with special plug-ended connector cords for
connecting the handset to the telephone set base and for connecting the base to a
special wall connector block (terminal box). The plugs snap-lock into mating
connectors on the handset, base and connector block. The lock shall be released
without special tools.
10. Ease of maintenance shall be provided e.g. facility of repairing and changing
components without interfering with others, ease in repairing sets on the user's
premises etc.
4.
5.
Tone Pad Unit

1.
The operating principal of this device must be an electronic generator of voice

frequencies. The frequencies used must be those standardized by the CCITT.
2.
The numerical digits to be compatible with arento.
3.
The keys shall be of the design that guarantees normal rapid repositioning after
having been depressed.
4.
Distortion shall be less than 10 per cent.
Telephone Set Features

1.
Call Forward
All Calls : A station user will be able to program the system to forward all calls.
2.
On-Busy : A station user may choose to forward calls only when the set is busy.
No-Answer : A station user may program the set to forward calls after a
predetermined number of ring cycles.
Automatic Callback
Busy : When a caller calls another EPABX station and encounters a busy
condition, a code may be dialed to request automatic callback. When both stations
are idle, the callback will be initiated.
No-Answer : Station users shall also be allowed to place callbacks into no-answer,
ringing stations.
3.
Call Hold with Automatic Callback

Station users may place calls on hold through the hold button of a teleset or
through the flash function of regular phones. If a trunk is placed on hold and the
station user attempts to hang-up, the system will automatically re-ring the station.
4.
Alternate voice and Data

The first type of electronic teleset should be available with a low cost data option
card to allow for alternate voice and data. When the user is in the data mode,
phone calls must ring through in the normal fashion. Alternate voice and data must
use only one pair and one port from the switch.
5.
Call Park
22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
The proposed system must allow an attendant, station user or teleset user to
specify any extension number on which a call can be parked. A parked call can
be retrieved from the station or attendant that parked it or from any other station or
attendant.
6.
Call Transfer
Teleset users through the use of the transfer key and regular phone users through
the flash function will be allowed to transfer calls to other stations.
7.
Call Waiting (Automatic Trunk Camp-On)

The proposed system will be programmable to have DID calls automatically campon to busy stations. the caller will receive ring back tone and the station user will
hear camp-on tone.
8. Camp-On
A station user or attendant when calling a busy station will be able to dial a single
digit code to indicate to the station user a call is waiting.
9.
Cancel
The proposed Electronic Teleset will have a key to cancel calls or cancel feature
programming.
10
Conference
The proposed system must allow station users and attendants to establish
conferences between other station users and callers from outside the system. The
switch should allow for at least fifty (50) simultaneous conferences with up to 8
members in each conference.
In addition, a meet-me conference feature must be available in the proposed
system which will allow a station user to initiate a conference with pre-selected
stations by dialing a single access code. As each station answers, it is added to
the conference.
The system shall accommodate up to 99 such preset conference groups.
12. Consultation Hold

A call may be placed on hold at a station by hookflashing, or at a teleset by
pressing the hold key. The user will then be allowed to dial another call, internal or
external for consultation. The user will be able to "flip-flop" between calls through
the use of the hold function.
13. Data Privacy
To prevent data calls from being interrupted by voice calls or tones, a data port will
be given a data privacy class of service.
14. Directed Call Pick-Up
Station users will be allowed to dial a directed call pick-up code plus the extension
number and pick up calls.
15. Discriminating Ringing
23
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
A minimum of four distinct types of ringing will be available to allow users to

distinguish different types of calls. These are :
1. Station calling.
2. Attendant of trunk calling.
3. Callback ringing.
d. Executive intercom ringing.
16. Dial by Name
Digital display set users must be able to dial by name (internal + external
destinations) through accessing the integrated name directory stored in EPABX
storage memory.
17. Executive Override
Station users, teleset users and attendants with the appropriate class of service
may break into existing conversations. Warning tone must be given to the busy
station.
18. Feature Keys
Each Teleset shall be provided with time saving feature keys. Indicate which of
the features shown below are offered with the proposed teleset.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Intercom.
Callback.
Conference.
Park.
Transfer.
Mute.
Menu.
View.
Speed Dial.
Messaging.
Data.
Redial.
Pick-up.
Hold.
Cancel.
Call Waiting.
Speaker phone control.
The names of these features should be printed on the telephone set

19. Group Pick-Up
Each station and teleset may be assigned to a pick-up group. this allows user's
within the group to pick up other stations' calls by dialing a predetermined code.
The proposed system must support a minimum of 600 pick up groups.
20. Multi-Line/Switched Loop Operations
Voice and data telesets should be equipped with a minimum of four ringing and
parking destinations called "loops". A loop may be dedicated to a single extension
number or may be used for calls to a number of different extension numbers.
21. Integrated Desk Top Speaker Phone
Each Voice and Data Teleset must contain a high quality integrated speaker phone
suitable for desk top "hands free" use.
24
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
22. Loop Status Indicators

Each proposed teleset must have programmable loop indicating LEDs to show line
status. Flashing rates will be used to indicate loop status.
23. Message Waiting Indications
The proposed system must support message waiting indications on regular phones
and both types of Electronic Telesets.
24. Mute Function
A single button mute function should be provided to disconnect both the speaker
phone and the handset.
25. Repertory Dial Keys
Each Teleset with Voice and data should contain a group of keys which can be
programmed at the teleset to perform dialing functions (min. 12 keys).
26. Station Speed Calling
Station users, based on class of service, should be given up to 40 speeded call
numbers. Station users will be allowed to build their own list by programming the
destination address numbers. the proposed system should allow 2500 systemwide.
27. Department Speed Calling
Station users may have access to blocks of department speed call numbers.
Access to each block is based on user's class of service.
1.
Transfer All Calls

Teleset users through the transfer key and other station users through the
flash function may transfer either trunk or station calls.
2.
Trunk to Trunk Connection

Station users may establish trunk to trunk connections by placing one call on
hold and dialing the other address number.
3.
Volume Control Keys

Each Teleset should be equipped with volume control keys to control both the
handset and speaker, as-well-as ringing level. One control should adjust all
three of these functions.
4.
Intercom Operations
The Teleset should provide both direct intercom to a predetermined executive
phone and selected intercom to any executive phone in the screening group.
5.
Extension Security
An analog station user or teleset user should be able to enter a self originated
code to prevent their station from originating or terminating calls. Telesets
should display "LOCK" when they are in the Extension Security mode.
Describe the extension security feature of the proposed product.
6. Extension Status Inquiry

25
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
Through a COS controlled feature, teleset users should be able to check the
status of other stations. The status displays should show BUSY, IDLE. The
following states should be reported : BUSY (in use but not in conversation),
CONV. (in conversation), IDLE (on-hook), LOCK (locked out), MBSY (in
maintenance busy), RING (the extension is ringing).
7.
Music-on hold
This feature provides a music to a C.O. incoming party who is being held
under the conditions such as consultation hold, call hold, attendant console
operation and so on.
8.
Standard data port for access to P.C./FAX connection.
9.
Maintenance Supervisory Extensions

Any ordinary extension can be programmed as a supervisory extension to
perform the following :
6.
1.
Check message waiting lamp condition and turning the lamp on or off
remotely.
2.
Canceling and setting-up any feature for another extension, i.e. call
forward, don't disturb.
3.
Testing trunk line condition, busying it out and returning it back to service.
Required Features of the Display Teleset

1.
Screening Services for Executive

Screening Options
The system editor must allow the system administrator to define the executive's
extension to be screened, monitored or neither.
Loop Operation
While in conversation on one call, another call to the same extension should ring any
idle loop of the screening group.
Private Extension
Executive Telesets may be assigned one or more "private" extensions that are not
screened or monitored.
2.
Screening Services for secretary

Group size
A single secretarial teleset or groups of secretarial sets (up to 32) should be able to
screen up to 63 other telesets or regular phones.
Switchable Loops
Members of screening groups should share up to four loops. Any call to any screened
member should ring on any idle loop.
Overflow Treatment
If all four loops are busy and calls are received, they should be queued on the group,
overflow to another group or be routed to a recording or busy tone.
26
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
3.
Section
Calling Party Name Display

For intra-EPABX calls the name of the calling party will be displayed to the teleset user.
For incoming trunk calls the display will show information about the calling trunk group.
4.
Call Forward Source/Destination Display

If the teleset user dials a call which is forwarded via the call forward feature, then the
name associated with the new destination should be displayed at the calling teleset.
5.
Camped-On Name Display

The name of the camped-on person showed be displayed for intra-EPABX calls.
6.
Duration of Call Display

The call duration will be displayed during the time the call is in progress through timer.
7.
Menu Display
By pressing the MENU key of the teleset, a list of features will be displayed to the
station user.
8.
Time and Date Displays

The display teleset will display the time of day and date in the liquid crystal display area
(if desired
9.
Flexible Ringing Assignments

Telesets in a screening group should have definable indicators for alerting the user a
call is received. The system administrator should be able to define ringing as ring
immediately, or delay ring, or worrying. The choices should be audible ringing, flashing
LED or text display or any combination of these.
10. Standard data port for access to P.C./FAX connection , for the two line telephone sets.
G.2
Digital Telephone Sets

Digital telephone sets shall be provided with all features of the analogue
sets described above but with additional LCD display and memory storage buttons.
1.
System Administration Features

1.
General Requirements
The digital switch must supply state of art features for system administration. User
friendliness, flexibility and the amount of useful data will be major considerations.
2.
System Access
Access to the system administration features will be by RS232C ports and controlled by
user passwords. A minimum of four ports are required with at least four levels of
passwords.
3.
Serial Port Functions
27
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
The function for each port can be defined by the system administrator. For example,
one port may be used for CDR, another used for the database configuration functions.
Describe the proposed switches' flexibility in this area.
4.
Database Configuration Editor

The database configuration editor is required to perform moves and changes, speed
call numbers, define least cost routing, etc. The editor as are all system administration
functions must be done from either a local or remote CRT terminal. Describe the
proposed products capabilities in this area.
5.
Call Detail Recording (CDR)

The proposed system must supply information about each call. the CDR record should
be available at one of the system administration ports in real time. It's desirable for the
switch to store up to 25,000 call records internally. This storage buffer should be
pullable from a remote location. Describe the proposed product's capabilities for CDR
and indicate which of the below fields are available.
FIELD
-------1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
6.
DESCRIPTION
-------------------Audit Trail
Call type.
Call status.
Queue status.
Conference number.
Start date.
Start time.
Answer time.
End time.
Queue time.
Calling switch number.
ANI station number.
Calling station number.
Calling trunk group number.
Calling circuit number.
Calling routing class.
Access code.
Selected facility.
Selected Station.
Selected trunk group number.
Selected circuit number.
Selected route pattern.
Dialed digits.
CDR/Auth. code validity.
Authorization code.
Project code.
Calling class of service.
Selected class of service.
Selected routing class.
Authorization Codes
Several increments of authorization should be available with the proposed switch. Up
to 15,000 codes of 12 digits in length should be supported. Up to nine digits should be
validated. Describe the proposed products capability for authorization codes.
7.
Project Codes
The CDR record should contain a separate field for tracking costs related to certain
projects. Projects can be forced or non-forced and can be up to 10 digits in length.
Describe the proposed switches' support for project codes.
28
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
8.
Section
Circuit Diagnostics
The proposed system should provide systems diagnostics. The signaling function and
voice frequency level should be tested for lines and trunks.
9.
Alarm Indicators
Alarm information should be output to a system administration RS232 port for local or
remote access. In addition, three levels of alarm relays should be provided for minor,
major and critical alarms. Describe the proposed system's alarm reporting features.
10. Individual Circuit Access

A system circuit using a line or trunk shall be provided for maintenance purposes and
for automatic trunk test equipment access. This maintenance circuit should be able to
access individual circuits for testing. Describe the proposed systems approach to
circuit testing.
I.
Vendor Responsibility
Vendor to perform as following
1.
Meet service dates as specified by client.
2. Include in the proposed system the cost, maintenance and spare parts for a minimum of
two years (list of spare parts and cost of each part to be included).
3.
Provide a maintenance contract for service commencing on one year warranty

expiration date.
4.
Stock all replacement parts necessary to insure that repairs will not be delayed because
of manufacturing time or shipping time. Detail the parts that will be kept on site.
5.
Specify the period of time following the discontinuance of production of the proposed
make and model that the manufacturer will guarantee the availability of replacement
components.
6.
Specify a service response time and provide skilled and competent factory trained
craftsmen.
7.
Train client personnel in emergency testing and repairs in case of a system down
condition. Procedures are to be detailed outlining the basic restoration functions to be
performed before placing a service call. these checks and repairs should not affect the
warranty.
8.
Conduct through on-site training for all office personnel in the use of the system.
9. Guarantee that the proposed system will perform as specified in the vendor's proposal.
10. Guarantee that all costs quoted are not subject to change as long as an order is placed.
11. Specify who will provide warranty and contract maintenance if other than the vendor.
12. Provide a copy of the proposed system purchase contract as an integral part of the
proposal.
13. Support all ancillary equipment associated with building's telecommunications system.
14. Evaluate wiring requirements and conduct complete site survey prior to system
implementation.
15. Provide documentation consisting of
29
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
Specific installation instructions for the individual EPABX, including trunking diagram,
grouping schemes, floor plans, grading plans, etc. as well as complete installation and
maintenance instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
General description.
General circuit diagrams with their descriptions.
Detailed circuit diagram with descriptions for all accessories.
Mounting schemes.
Layout of all distributors.
Cabling instructions.
Layout of operators' positions.
Survey drawings with sufficient information to understand the
operation of the EPABX.
9. List of circuit symbols, colour codes, etc.
16. Provide the following additional information

1. National and local taxes if applicable.
2. Costs of moving station equipment.
3. Installed cost to replace existing EPABX and associated
equipment.
4. Current labour charge for non-contract maintenance specify
hourly or per call and minimum charge (if applicable).
17. A summary of vendor company history and corporate organization must be provided.
This information should include total number of employees, annual revenues and key
strategic alliances. Innovative plans regarding the implementation of ISDN technology
in the hotel industry should be addressed.
18. Provide a project organization plan, which will include all tasks, schedules and vendor
personnel assignments. Vendors must also define their responsibilities pertaining to
installation coordination with telephone company, long distance carriers, etc.
19. Provide a complete list of on-site spare parts provided. For spare parts not located at
the site, provide information regarding the nearest available supply depot and the total
time required to deliver parts to the site.
20. Provide a trouble - reporting plan including
1. Type of trouble logs used.
2. Tracking/audit trail of actions to assure that work is
performed.
3. How trouble priorities are set.
4. Escalation procedure.
5. Anticipated and guaranteed time frames for responses to
major and minor problems during regular working hours and
all other hours.
21. Define major problem criteria (at minimum, this should be a condition which causes a loss
of call processing capability.
22.
Required Response Format
The vendor is required to structure the description of the proposed system in the following
format :
1.
System name and model number.

30
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
2.
Manufacturer and year introduced to marketplace.
3.
Description of switching technology and equipment.
4.
Equipment capabilities.
5.
Type of control.
6.
System electrical requirements.
7.
Power failure strategy.
8.
Vendor support :
8.1 Include one copy of the proposed maintenance agreement.
8.2 Include agreements for support on ancillary equipment.
9.
Spare parts inventory :

9.1 Include the location of the spare parts depot.
9.2 Include a complete list of spare parts within 120 kilometer radius of the property.
10.
Please define the system's ability to meet cutover and growth requirements defined in
the technical specifications.
11.
Please describe system expansion beyond equipped levels.

1.
2.
3.
Describe modular growth factors.

Define lead times for various system additions.
Project impact on requirements for additional equipment cabinets, floor space,
attendant positions, etc.
Specify the following:

1. Maximum number of stations.
2. Maximum number of trunks.
3. Floor space and loading requirements.
4. Heat loading.
5. Traffic loading by station, both at cutover and with any expected expansion.
12.
Features
All features cited in technical specification should be addressed in the following format
regarding their availability. Other features not requested but available in the system
should be included at the end of the list of features.
Feature Standard Optional Custom Unavailable Cost.
13.
System traffic capacity

Provide definitive information on the systems total traffic (internal, incoming, outgoing)
capacity per line.
31
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
14.
Section
Automated long distance charge back concept :

The system's ability to track, report, and bill on station-user dialled long distance calls
for charge back purposes must be described. Please include detailed definition of :
1. Call detail reporting (i.e. originating room or extension line, telephone number dialled,
length of call, time of call, trunk used, LD equivalent charge, etc.)
2. Method of capturing data.
3. Output data format options.
4. Number of terminals supported (cashier, log, auditor, etc.)
15.
Statistics
Describe the systems ability to generate (locally) traffic reports detailing CCS, PEG
Count, and Busy by trunk and trunk groups. In addition, describe the system's ability to
utilize the most economical routing (MER) or automatic route selection (ARS) if
applicable.
16.
Class of service flexibility

Please describe the range of Class of Service options available in the system.
17.
Compatibility with low and medium speed data transmission.
18.
Reserve power options.
19.
Proposed dialling plan.
20.
System installation.
1.
2.
21.
22.
Describe site requirements and modifications which are needed to install, test,
and cutover the system.
Equipment space and distribution requirements based on a complete site review.
3.
Switching equipment space, electric, environmental requirements based on the

site review.
4.
Layout of room sketch showing EPABX requirements based on the existing or

proposed switch room.
5.
Entrance, riser console cable conduits (if required as a result of the site review).
7.
Equipment apparatus cabinets per floor.
Detail critical path to meet the scheduled cut-over date please indicate lead-time
estimate (days) for each item listed below :
1.
Entrance, console riser conduits in place.
2.
Switching equipment space complete.
3.
Floor apparatus cabinets complete.
4.
Station design complete.
5.
Full complement of spares on site.
Training
32
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
23.
24 .
Section
1.
Console operators.
2.
Employees.
Publicity
1.
Telephone numbers (main and DID).
2.
Directory listings defined.
3.
Reference of call procedures if required.
4.
Internal directory preparation.
5.
Post cutover review and adjustment.
WIRING NETWORK
Incoming telephone lines shall terminate in a centralized
indicated on the drawing.
Main Distribution Frame as
A dedicated trunking and conduit network shall be provided and Telephone Distribution
Frames shall be installed as indicated on the drawings.
Telephone Distribution frames shall be installed in lockable steel cabinets with removable
side panels to allow easy access for installation and maintenance.
Telephone cable shall be installed in the trunking system. All cables shall be clearly marked
with positively fixed durable labels, identifying each cable pair with a unique reference
number at all frames, junction boxes and telephone outlets.
Telephone wiring shall be completely segregated from any other system.
25 .
MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAMES

The distribution frames shall be of free-standing type enclosure and shall have sufficient
capacity for all connected pairs extension full ( based on extension wired capacity ) plus 10
% spare as indicated on the drawing. All circuits for extension lines shall be fully protected
against over-voltage and over-current.
Terminals shall be identified by numbered tags corresponding to the respective lines or
extensions. The contractor shall submit the proposed numbering scheme for prior approval
by the Engineer.
All internal and external lines shall be connected Plugged into the distribution frames by
quick connect method.
2 04
Refer To The Attached List of Recommended Manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
1.
Examine conditions where telephone network system is to be installed. Notify in writing of

conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
33
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
16740
Section
3 02 INSTALLATION
1.
Install telephone system, in accordance with manufacturers written instructions,

requirements of applicable Standards, requirements of the telephone company and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with
requirements and serves intended purpose.
2.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of the PABX with the telephone raceway
system.
Limit bends in conduit for telephone company wiring between junction boxes, pull boxes,
cabinets, or other cable access points to not more than two 90 bends. Maintain a minimum
radius of 1 meter for all runs other than branch runs to outlets.
3.

1.
Upon completion of telephone system, test system to demonstrate compliance with

requirements. When possible, field-correct defective equipment, then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
34
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16750

Section 16750 Structured Cabling
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and
B.
A.
Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary
to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner structured cabling in accordance
with Drawings and Specifications.
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of structured

cabling system of types, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B.
Standards Compliance: Comply with the latest editions of the requirements of applicable
local codes, and the following standards: 1.
Electronic industries association (EIA), Telecommunications industries association (TIA)

for commercial buildings.
2.
The institute of electrical and electronic engineers, Inc. (IEEE).
3.
International organization for standardization (ISO).
4.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
5.
International Electromechanical Commission (IEC).
6.
ISO 11801.
C.
Service Manufacturer must have a factory warehouse at which spare parts are stocked were
a filed service engineer who is a permanent, full time employee of the manufacture, factory
trained and qualified individual whose primary duty is field service resides.
D.
All work must be

installers/vendors who
installed by
are certified
system manufacturers certified system

and experienced in implementing the
Selected data cabling system and to perform related testing programs.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1 04
Section 16750
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers data and installation instruction details for structured
cabling system.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings.
C.
Samples: Submit samples from all accessories, fittings and cabling.
D.
Provide calculations to support the attenuation, bandwidth, number of pairs, type of cables
and type of all accessories.
1 05 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY
A.
The system manufacturers shall provide a minimum fifteen (15) year warranty on all passive
components including the structural cabling system. These warranties shall be provided in
written certificate form.
B.
The system manufacturers shall provide in writing to the Owner that in event of the demise or
failure of the installing certified system installer/vendor, the manufacturer shall be responsible
for providing another certified system installer/vendor to fulfil the remainder of the warranty
conditions.
C.
The Contractor shall provide a guaranteed twenty-four (24) hour response time to any
warranty claims.
D.
Contractors must ensure that the selected network cabling component manufacturer and the
wiring manufacturer must have contractual relationships to ensure that the system warranty is
a true end-to-end structured cabling system warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 01
GENERAL
A.
The contractor will maintain proper separation from low voltage electrical supplies or
equipment to ensure no interference on communication lines.
B.
Where cables go through a bend minimum manufacturers bending radius shall be observed
and adhered to.
C.
All cables, components and items of equipment are to be fully marked with positively fixed
labeling devices to facilitate identification. As a minimum cables to be labeled at the following
points :
1.
2.
3.
4.
User end cable/connection.

Equipment room and cable/connection.
User outlet.
Patch panel connection.
Identification shall include user outlet number, floor number, location & service.
Final numbering scheme to be approved by the owner prior to installation.
The contractor shall submit a marking system for approval by the owner.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16750
2 02 DATA CABLING
A.
All data cabling shall be EIA/TIA standards compliant throughout.

Data cabling shall be Enhanced category 5, high performance twisted pair distribution cables.
B.
All cables shall be 4 pair Enhanced category 5 UTP UL listed consisting of 24 AWG (0.5
mm2) thermoplastic insulated solid conductors formed into four individually twisted pairs and
enclosed by a thermoplastic jacket and internal/external. Cables shall be laid inside
galvanized steel conduits.
C.
Cables shall run from the user outlet to data racks (indicated on drawings) without any
transition point.
D.
Data backbone shall be 4 core multi -mode 62.5/125
m fiber optic cable.
2 03 DATA OUTLET
A.
Data outlet shall be Enhanced category 5, eight - position RJ-45 modular, jacks, T568A
pinned and modules mounted within the service floor outlet box or on wall flush mounting.
The face plate shall be the same shape and colour of other power outlets.
Each outlet to receive one 4 pair cable.
2 04 EQUIPMENT ROOM TERMINATIONS

A.
All data cables shall be terminated on patch panels which will be mounted within 19 rack
mounted in a 42 U glass fronted cabinet for an Enhanced category 5 system.
B.
Each connector module shall have a T568A eight pin RJ-45 jack on the front and a four pair
IDC (insulation displacement contact, 110 style block) connector on the back.
C.
Patch panels shall be provided for termination of fiber optic cables and shall include required
ports to suit the respective cabling connectors.
D.
The contractor shall provide all necessary cable management units, brackets,
required accessories and labeling required for complete installation.
E.
Each data rack shall be equipped with power conditioner unit.
2 05 JUMPERING
A.
All jumpering shall be provided by the owner.
2 06 ADDITIONAL DATA CABLING REQUIREMENTS

A.
The contractor shall provide the following additional cabling for data services.
1.
Provide link cables for active media intelligent Hubs within rack.
2.
Provide
patch
cords
Enhanced
category
5
for
patching
between
intelligent Hubs and patch panels. The number of patch cords should be equal to the
number of ports of patch panel.
3.
Provide link cables Enhanced category 5 between fileservers and

patch panel.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
4.
Section 16750
Provide fiber optic patch cords for patching between fiber optic patch
panels and the active Hubs / Switches. The number of cords should
equal to the number of fiber optic ports of the fiber optic patch panel.
2 07 EQUIPMENT CUPBOARD TERMINATIONS

(EQUIPMENT/PATCHING RACKS)
The contractor shall provide the following equipment racks within the equipment telephone room on
each floor. The racks and their configuration are as follows :
1. 1 No. 42 U cabinet for LAN services requirement, complete with all required mounting
hardware, label kits, Velcro style fasteners and ancillary devices as indicated on the drawings
and as specified.
Rack shall be complete with side panels lockable glass front access door and lockable rear
metal door.
2. Each rack shall have a continuous power distribution strip mounted at each side for full height
of rack complete with a minimum of eight outlets. Each strip to be plugged into a 13 Amp outlet
located adjacent to racks in equipment cupboard. Supported by an uninterruptable power
supply. Provide adequate cable management facilities within the racks to support the cables
and ensure that cables are properly secured to prevent stress.
Adequate air flow within rack is required to maintain the expected levels of equipment to be
located within each rack, therefore fan assemblies are to be supplied.
2 08 PATCHING AND PATCH LEADS

The contractor shall provide for all patching interconnection and patch leads as may be required.
Contractor to submit unit price within the tender for both configuration and patch leads. A unit price
cost option is included within appendices section.
Final patching requirement shall be determined prior to the commencement of patching.
2 09 TELEPHONE CABLES
A. Telephone cable shall be UTP, Enhanced cat 5 and it shall be used for final connection from
data rack to the telephone outlets.
B.
Enhanced cat 5 multipair cable shall be used for connection from Data rack in floors and the
main distribution frame.
C.
The telephone outlets shall be RJ45, Enhanced cat 5. Submit sample of the telephone socket
for review and approval.
2 010 TELEPHONE TERMINAL CABINETS

A.
110 connect cross connect blocks shall be provided with capacity as indicated on drawings.
B.
The connection blocks shall be suitable for telephone cables termination,

i-e accept 24AWG (cat 5E) telephone cables.
C.
The connectors shall be installed inside the 19 inch data rack.
2 011 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

Refer to the attached list of Recommeded manufactarers.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16750
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which structured cabling are to be installed. Notify Engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
B. Install
commission
and
test
to
work
structured
cabling
systems
in
accordance
with
the
manufacturers
recommendations
and
telecommunications service providers regulations.
3 02 CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
Plan and install all structured cabling

cable
manufacturers
recommendations.
communication cables in accordance with,
systems
Label
in accordance with the

and
record
all
data
Cable Schedules.
Cable Drawings.
Install optical
standards.
fiber
cables
in
accordance
with
BS
7718
and
Handle, store and install equipment and components of

cabling
systems
in
accordance
with
the
recommendations. Obtain all equipment and components from a single
otherwise instructed.
Inspect all equipment and components on delivery,
installation and reject and replace any which are defective.
before
fixing
and
All cables must be installed without splices or cuts

elimination of reflections, discontinuities, impedance mismatches, etc.
to
C.
The maximum horizontal length

patch panels shall not exceed 90 m.
voice
D.
Wiring shall be mechanically protected by cable trunking.
E.
PENETRATION THROUGH FIREWALLS
the
data
outlet
other
the structured
manufacturers
source unless
B.
from
all
and
after
ensure
the
outlet
to
A conduit sleeve shall be provided where horizontal cables penetrate

firewalls. The conduit sleeve shall be sized at 40 % fill ratio with a plastic
bushing at both ends.
After the conduit sleeve is installed, the
be filled with firestop and smoke seal materials.
F.
opening
around
the
conduit
shall
INSTALLATION OF OUTLETS
Each cable shall be tested and identified with the face plate.
All outlets shall be mounted 300 mm above
jack/faceplate configuration as detailed on drawings.
G.
SEPARATION OF DATA COMMUNICATION

ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE
finished
CABLES
floor.
FROM
Provide
SOURCES
outlet
OF
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16750
All
data
communication
electromagnetic
radiation
SP-2072 and the following :
cables
shall
in
accordance
be
separated
from
with
TIA
standard
sources
of
proposal
1. If both data and small power cables (2 KVA power circuits) are
installed in grounded, ferrous metal conduit throughout their run, then no
separation is required (i.e. : EMT conduit).
2. FT-6
rated
data
cabling
conductors (2 KVA power
125 mm clearance.
with
no
circuits) in
metallic
raceway
and
power
a grounded raceway requires
3. For fluorescent luminaries, the required clearance is 300 mm.

4. Clearance increases up to 600 mm for power circuits over 5 KVA.
5. For
large
motor,
clearance is 1 m.
transformers,
power
panels,
etc.,
6. cables must be routed to avoid direct contact with

water piping or other heat sources to avoid thermal degradation.
the
required
steam
piping,
hot
and
secure
to
H. INSTALLATION OF RACKS
Provide
open
racks
wall/floor/ceiling as required.
In locations where more
together.
Provide
wiring
rack to another is not exposed.
where
shown
on
drawings
than one rack is required,

channel
interconnection
such
butt multiple
that
wiring
racks
from
For
open
racks,
provide
metal
raceway
channel
for
all
conductors
extending down from ceiling, such that wiring is not exposed. Secure
channel to rack and ceiling.
All wiring shall be run neatly bundled with wiring management channels.
Properly ground racks and equipment to room ground bus.
I.
SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A complete
the following :
identification
system
shall
be
provided
that
clearly
designates
1. The horizontal cable.

2. The workstation (or faceplate).
3. The horizontal/passive patchpanel port.
4. The HUB/active patchpanel port.
5. The patch cords.
A
Cable Identification
Horizontal UTP cables for both data and telephone systems shall be permanently identified
at both ends.
Faceplate
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16750
Workstation
faceplates
shall
be
designated
manner as cables. Faceplates shall be labelled.
C
in
identical
dulicate
Patchpanel And Patch Cord Identification
Patchpanel ports shall be identified in simple numeric form.

Patch cords shall be identified at both ends
not necessarily corresponding to port numbers.
D
an
in
simple
numeric
form,
Identification Log
All cable and workstation identification shall be recorded in a hard
copy CABLE IDENTIFICATION LOG which is to be handed over to
the Owner after cable testing and certification is complete. A duplicate
copy is to be forwarded to the Project Manager.
J.
CO-ORDINATION WITH NETWORK INTEGRATOR

Co-ordinate work with the work of the Owners Network Integrator.
The Network Integrator must be present on site to witness and coordinate
the
required
system
testing.
The
cabling
Contractor
and
the
Network
Integrator
must
together
perform
a
job
walk
through
upon
completion of testing, together sign the cabling test reports to verify
that
network
cabling
is
properly
installed
and
performs
to
acceptable
standards.
K. CABLE TESTING AND SYSTEM CERTIFICATION

The
structured
data
cabling
system
certification
cable testing and verification according to the standard.
The verification of each
and shall be documented
part of
the
hard
copy
installation.
shall
include
100%
cable shall be performed by the contractor

on a cable testing sheet which shall form
documentation
supplied
at
the
end
of
the
Testing Procedures
Testing shall
documentation
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
be performed
sheet. Testing
as per the
shall include,
enclosed
but not
sample cable
be limited to
test
the
Cable length
Attenuation
Near end crosstalk (next)
Noise
Resistance
End to end continuity
Opens or shorts
Pair polarity
Any cable not passing the testing procedure shall be

entirety. No splicing is permitted in the repair of any defective cable.
replaced
in
its
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775

Section 16775 CCTV System
PART1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Specification sections, apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division-16 sections apply to this Section:
1. Section 16010: Basic Electrical Requirements".
1 02 SUMMARY
A. This section includes a complete closed circuit television (CCTV) system
covering the Main Building and all buildings related to it.
B. System is to consist of the following basic components:
1. Switcher.
2. Color cameras for general surveillance with protective housing (Fixed
Camera, color Dome and PAN/TILT/ZOOM Camera with motion detector)
3. Control desk/console.
4. Video distribution controller.
5. Power supply units.
6. Color monitors.
7. VCR.
8. Digital recording system.
C. CCTV System Functional Description: System generates video images,
processes them and distributes them to monitors. System is to ensure remote
control for video camera equipment.
D. The system must have unified, open, interface protocole e.g. backnet,
lonmark, .. etc. in order to allow the different systems to share data and
communicate to each other.
E. System/work is deemed to include all items of work needed for the project.
Minor items, which do not appear in the specifications and which are
necessary for normal operation of the system, are implied as ancillary
equipment and are deemed to have been indicated.
F. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to
this section:
(a) Section 16110: Raceways and Empty Conduits
(b) Section 16120: L.V. Wires and Cables.
(c) Section 16135: "Electrical Cabinets, Boxes, and Fittings".
1 03 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Specification sections.
B.
Product Data: for each type of products specified in this section. Include data
on features, components, ratings, and performance. Include dimensional plan
and elevation views of components and enclosures and details of control
panels. Show access and working space requirements.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
C.
Maintenance Data: for systems and products to include in "Operating and

Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Detailed operating instructions covering operation both under normal and
abnormal conditions.
2. Routine maintenance requirements for system components.
3. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be
stored at the site for ready access.
D.
Wiring Diagrams: detailing internal and interconnecting wiring for power,

signal and control and that distinguishes between field-installed and factoryinstalled wiring.
E.
Product Certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying products comply

with specified requirements.
F.
Qualification data for manufacturer and installer as specified in "Quality

Assurance" article. Data describes capabilities and experience.
G.
Field test reports for all tests required for system operation, certified by an
official testing authority.
Shop and Construction Drawings: Submit drawings for approval including, but
not be limited to:
1. Detailed schematic diagrams
2. Configuration and construction details of central control cabinet, and
operating consoles
3. Console and cabinet layouts with equipment located in as-installed
positions.
4. Complete and detail cable routing.
Wiring diagrams are to bear manufacturer's signature indicating that they
have reviewed the drawings and that they are correct with regard to
sizes, wiring and configuration and will operate in accordance with
function, scope and intent of the specifications.
H.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms experienced in manufacturing systems
and equipment of the same types and capacities used for this project that
they have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Service Center: Select a system manufacturer who maintains a service center
capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs
at the project site with a 24-hour maximum response time.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is a factoryauthorized service representative of the system manufacturer to supervise
system installations.
D. CODES AND STANDARDS:
1. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code".
2. Provide listed and labeled system components for which there is a listing
and labeling service.
3. Comply with CCITT or EIA recommendations and standards for data
signal characteristics, formats, and communication protocols.
E. Guarantee: during the experimental period ( as defined under Field Quality
Control section), the system is to be operating under the Contractors
supervision and responsibility. After the satisfactory completion of this period,
the system is to be taken over by the Client, as per contract conditions,
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
whereby a two-year guarantee period will commence. All spare parts, which
might be needed to replace existing components during the guarantee
periods, are to be born by the Contractor unless it is provide that the
component to be replaced is defected by abuse.
1 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

1. Deliver C.C.T.V. equipment and components in factory-fabricated
containers or wrappings, which properly protect equipment from
damage.
2. Store C.C.T.V. equipment and components in original packaging.
Store inside in a well-ventilated space protected from weather,
moisture, soiling, humidity, and extreme temperatures.
3. Handle C.C.T.V. equipment and components carefully to prevent
damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Do not install-damaged
units or components; replace with new.

1. Installer shall notify local operating company in writing of C.C.T.V.
connection requirements to ensure proper and timely interfacing of
building telecommunication systems with the operating companys
systems.
2. Coordinate with other electrical work including wires/cables, electrical
boxes and fittings, and raceways, to properly interface installation of
C.C.T.V. system with other work.
3. Sequence installation of C.C.T.V. system with other work to minimize
possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction.
1 07 MAINTENANCE:
1. Agreement to Maintain: engage installer who is willing to
execute with Owner the required agreement for
continued maintenance of the C.C.T.V. system.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2 01 MANUFACTURERS:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements,
manufacturers offering C.C.T.V. system products that may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Pilco
(U.S.A)
G.E
(U.S.A)
GEUTEBRUECK
(Germany)
Or equally approved.
2 02 TELEVISION SYSTEMS GENERAL

3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
1. Products and Equipment: Standard products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in manufacturing components of the type
indicated. Components are to be modular, plug-in type, heavy duty,
and industrial or commercial grade units. Equipment is to be siliconbased, solid-state integrated circuit devices. All system components
may not be shown on the Drawings. Provide components not shown
on the Drawings where required to achieve the specified
performance.
A.
Power Supply:
1. Power Supply Characteristics: power operated devices to operate
within specified parameters for AC voltages within 220 V 10%.
2. AC power operated devices are to be protected against transient
voltage surges by suppressors complying with UL Standard 1449
"Surge Suppressors, Transient Voltage.
3. Signal cables and connected components are to be protected from
transient voltage surges by internal surge suppressors and absorbers
specifically designed for that purpose.
B. Environmental Conditions: System components are equipped and rated
for the environments where installed.
1. Equipment for outdoor use:
1. Temperature : 0 deg. C to + 50C deg C.
2. Relative humidity : to 100 percent
3. Weather Housing prevents entry of moisture due
to driven rain, wind .. etc.
2. Equipment for indoor use :
1. Temperature:0 deg. C to + 40 deg. C
2. Relative humidity :0 to 100%.
C.
RF and Video Impedance Matching: Signal-handling system

components, including connecting cable, provide end-to-end impedance
matched signal paths. Matching and balancing devices are used at
connections where it is not possible to avoid impedance mismatch of
balanced to unbalanced circuits.
2 03 CCTV SYSTEM OPERATION

1. This write-up briefly describes the operation of the proposed
CCTV system.
2 04 DESIGN AND OPERATION

1. CCTV system is to provide complete colored camera surveillance for
all areas as shown on the Drawings. Sequential and automatic group
switching/manual switching of camera outputs giving on screen
camera identification.
2. CCTV system is to include the following:
1. Set of power switching relay modules for central on/off power
switching for cameras.
2. Keyboard for control of all operations including automatic and manual
switching of cameras.
3. On screen text inserter modules with programmable-manual keying
facilities.
4. Time and date generation modules for recorders and spot monitors
inputs.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
5. Spot, 20" color monitor.

6. Sequential 20" color monitor.
7. PC-based switching controls system with video management
software.
3. Total System Performance: is not to be inferior to the following:
1.Video input signal
: 1 VPP composite (1.5 VPP max.) 75 ohm
Impedance, BNC Sockets
2. Video output signal
: 1 VPP composite (adjustable from 0.8 V to 1.2 VPP),
BNC sockets
3.Video bandwidth
: 6 MHz at +/-0.5 dB; 9 MHz at +/-3 dB
4.Signal-to-noise ratio
: greater than 55 dB weighted
5. Differential gain
: greater than 4% at 4.43 MHz
6.Differential phase
: not greater than 4 deg. at 4.43 MHz
7. Crosstalk attenuation
: greater than 55 dB at 4.43 MHz
8. Alarm buzzer
: 5.5 KHZ + 1 kHz
9. Operating time of
: 1-5 minutes, adjustable alarm
10. Temperature limits
: 0 to + 50 deg. C
11. Humidity
: not less than 100%.
12. Audio output signal
: IV peak to peak
4. CAMERAS AND ANCILLARIES
1 Cameras: color, CCD type, designed for high
reliability, with usable video at low lighting levels,
remote set-up via RS-485, save all camera setting to
file on PC, electronic masking function, menu for
local set-up, fully integrated to video management
system and having at least the following
characteristics:
2. Fixed Cameras:
The Camera shall be of 1/3 inch format CCD imager complete
with varifocal lens auto lris
The tube shall not be damaged, nor the image lost when headlights or
spotlights shire into the lenses.
The camera shall have the following technical specifications:
1. Picture storage:
1/3"
2. Video standard:
CC1R / PAL
3. Sensor Pixels:
752 x 582
4. Horizontal resolution:
>480 TVL
5. Minimum sensitivity Color:
0.3 Lux / F 1.2
6. Synchronization:
Internal / external
7. Single / noise ratio:
48dB
8. White balance:
Automatic / manual
9. Control / setup interface:
2 wire RS-485
10. Electronic masking zones:not less than 3 zones via screen
menu/RS 485
12.
Set-up parameter storage:
Internal,
nonvolatile with upload/download to / from PC via RS-485
12. Back-light compensation:
not less than 6 areas selectable via
menu / RS-485
13 .Automatic gain control:
selectable via menu/RS-485
14. Lens mounting:
C/CS mount.
15. Lens connection:
DC/Video signal
16. Operation temperature:
-10 C to + 50 C
17. Supply voltage:
100VAC 240 VAC
18. Humidity Limits
90%
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
Movable Cameras:
Color, CCD type, designed for high reliability, with usable video at low
lighting levels, and having at least the following characteristics:
Television standard:
Color
: CCIR, 625 lines, 50 fields/sec.
Image sensor
: interline transfer CCD
Sensor size
: 1/4-inch (752 H x 582 V pixels)
Resolution
: 480 TVL minimum
Sensitivity : 0.2 lux
Video amplifier
:
Output voltage
: 1 vpp into 75 ohm
Output impedance
: 75 ohm 5%
Automatic gain control
: 20 dB
Frequency bandwidth
: 4.8 MHz
Gamma correction
: 0.5 - 1 adjustable
Deflection
:
Intermediate
: 2:1 (interlace)
External synchro-nisation
: CVS signal, sync signal or H&V
signals (sync signal output 4 VPP)
Image geometry
: distortion free
Lens mount
: Cs mount thread
Power supply
: 220 V +/-10%, 50 Hz (remote power
supply); camera
D.C. power is to be via local transformer-rectifier unit included in
camera terminal box
Connections
: power supply, video, external synchronization,
lens drive
Degree of protection
: IP 67 outdoor, with weatherproof
housing
Vibration resistance
: 7 g (10 to 60 Hz, swept sine wave)
Shock resistance
: 50 g.
Optical zoom
: 23 x 4.88 mm
Electronic zoom
: 16x
Color Domes:
High resolution color dome, 18 x motor zoom lens (4.1 73.8mm), 12 x
proportional digital zoom, brilliant color and contrast fidelity, and having
at least the following technical specification:
Image sensor:
1/4" CCD
Synchronization:
Internal / line lock.
Resolution :
not less than 480 TV Line
Video output:
1VPP / 75 ohm, BNC
S/N ratio:
about 50 dB
Sensitivity:
1 Lux
Backlight compensation:
ON/OFF/ STOP switch able
Motion detection:
ON/OFF (area/sensitivity setting)
Focus:
automatic / manual
Integrated lens:
Focal length 3.6 43.2mm 12 x optical zoon,
10 x digital zoon with location setting.
Camera ID :
Built in 1 line, 12 characters for location
Camera Connection:
Video out, Camera power, RS-485,
Alarm out
Ambient temperature:
-10c - + 50 C
Protection glass:
IP 66
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
Supply voltage:
24 VAC / 12 VDC 10%
8. Auto Iris lenses: are to be provided for all cameras, with internal
circuitry for sampling and weighing average video signal to produce
maximum viewing contrast. Selection of lenses is to be made
available for optimum coverage in accordance with camera location
and viewing range.
a. Veri-focal lenses auto iris :
Manual focal length and focus.
Direct control iris via connected camera.
b. Technical Specifications:
Format:
CS Mount 1/3"
Focal length in mm: 2.8 6.0
Object distance:
0.3m infinity
c. Motorized zoom lenses:
Motorized focal length and focus.
Linear gradient filters for AI
Direct control iris via connected camera.
d. Technical Specifications:
Iris control :
DC
Focal Length (f) in mm : 6.0 60
Object distance :
1.2mt - infinity
9. Brackets: are to be cast aluminum alloy wall/ceiling type, adjustable
360 degrees horizontally and -10+ degrees vertically and suitable for
mounting arrangements of fixed cameras. Brackets for controllable
cameras are to be rigid non-adjustable. All brackets are to be flanged
at wall/ceiling, with minimum four fixing bolts (expansion type for
concrete structures).
5. VIDEO MONITORS
1. Type: color, with steel housing, rack mounted in central consoles as
shown on the Drawings.
2. Monitors are to have mains controls, contrast, brightness, picture
height, vertical hold and horizontal hold controls, loop-through
connections, very high resolution, excellent picture quality, high
reliability for continuous operation, video inputs with loop-through,
integrated speakers, additional S-Video input and other facilities
including separate synchronizing of signal inputs, alternative video
input and overscan/underscan control.
3. Basic characteristics: are to be as follows:
Video Standard
: CCIR/PAL
Input impedance
: 75 ohm
Resolution
: greater than 750TV
lines
(at center of picture)
Luminance
: max. 100 cd/m2
Frequency bandwidth
: 6 MHz (-3 dB)
Video input for composite signal
: 2BNX, 1.0 VPP,
composite video sync negative, Loop through automatic
termination.
Monitor size : 20 inch, 17 inch (as shown on the Drawings).
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
VIDEO SWITCHER, VIDEO MATRIX AND CENTRAL

KEYBOARD (Digital Video Alarm Management):
Video Switcher: is a homing / bridging sequential switcher
with audible and visual alarm inputs. Inputs are automatically
sequenced through one monitor and manually switched to
any of the video inputs for continuous viewing on spot monitor
and or recording. Switcher is to accept external contacts
closures from standard alarm devices allowing a certain
camera to be automatically bridged to the spot monitor while
self contained audible and visual alarms are activated is to
have the following technical specifications.
Video Standard
: Studio quality (scanning rate
13.5 MHZ) CCIR/PAL.
Video input : Up to 32 (BNC)1 VPP 75 ohms
Video output : Up to 32 (BNC) 1 VPP75 ohms
Automatic Vido Switching Via Alarm Management.
Video gain
: unity
Frequency response
: 10 MHz (+/- 1 dB)
Maximum signal level
: 2 volts p p
Video connectors
: BNG
Switching intervals
: 1 to 70 seconds
Power supply
: 100-240 Va.c./50Hz 10%
Operating temperature
: + 5 C Up to 40 C
Storage media:
General :
Storage capacity up to 5,46 TB
Internally recording: Up to (4) hard disk.
Externally recording: Up to (15) hard disk.
1. VIDEO/AUDIO
SWITCHING
MATRIX
WITH
CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT: microprocessor-based system, consisting of
plug-in modules with system expansion facility, capable of routing
simultaneously any inputs to any outputs, and with minimum number
of inputs and outputs shown on the Drawings. Matrix is to be software
controlled for specific applications such as incremental switching
mode (cyclic) and connection of alarms, event-actuated subroutines, and for preventing or permitting various outputs. Central
processing unit is to allow full operator control and programming via
one keyboard and one other external control input. Keyboard is to
allow either operational or programming mode. Operational mode is
to allow manual or automatic selection and camera control.
Programming mode is to allow programming of automatic sequential
video switching, automatic pre-positions, alarm resets and time/date
display. Matrix switcher shall include:
1. Alphanumeric text inserter module for video-phased fading-in of
alphanumeric characters (minimum 4 lines with 40 characters
each) into standardized video signal of matrix panel inputs or
outputs
2. Date/time generator module for fading-in day, month, year, hour,
minute and seconds via the text module
3. Camera control matrix to allow routing of keyboard inputs on any
control outputs of controllable cameras shown on the Drawings
4. Video graphics display driver module for generating programmed
and synchronized graphics sequence
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
5. Automatic timer module for setting cyclic switching time, with

external timing-in and external timing-out circuits to effect
synchronized multi-camera/monitor control.
6. External synchronizing input is to over-ride internal sequence
switching interval setting
7. Interface module for up to 32 alarms from dry contacts
8. Interface module for selection of matrix panel from control unit with
serial RS232-C interface
1. Drive control and encoding modules for linking
microprocessor output to remote camera receiver of controllable
cameras via PCM link over a twisted pair cable
.9. Power supply unit, operating from 220 V, 50 Hz input, with output
adaptable to system requirements and capable of powering
matrix and components, control processor and all cameras
connected to system.
Video input signal
: 0.5 to 2.0 VPP composite
video signal
Input impedance
: 75
Frequency range
: 7 MHz (+/- 1 dB)
10MHz (+/- 3 dB)
Hum & noise
: -60 dB ref 1VPP
Differential gain
: less than 0.3 %
Differential phase
: less than 1 deg.
Temperature range
: to 50 deg. C
Relative humidity
: to 90%
Audio Input
: IVPP
2. CENTRAL KEYBOARD: is to be microprocessor based, control video
switcher matrix and remotely control zoom cameras. Control is to be
provided via 12- key keyboard with additional function keys and 16 digit LCD unit. Keyboard is to be compatible with other system
components and matches operating console.
Multifunction operator keyboard with back light graphical display,
stainless-steel key pad with soft keys remote-control driver output
and user programmable function buttons operator joy stick with
integrated zoom function.
Technical Data:
Power supply:
Operator Controls:
external D.C power supply

Stainless steel key board with
joystick with necessary numeric
keyboard card control.
+5 C up to 40 C
1 x RS 232, 9-way socket
1 x RS-422 Full duplex RJ-45
Temperature rang:
Serial :
6. RACKS, CABINETS AND CONSOLE

10.Switching Cabinets: are to comprise freestanding 20- inch racks
inside enclosed cabinets. Standard holes are to be provided for panel
mounting of control equipment and cable distribution terminal boards,
which are to be easily accessible for maintenance. Cabinets are to be
galvanized sheet steel box construction with joints welded on inside.
Multi-formed mounting channels are to be standard gauge cold rolled
steel, with secondary chassis providing infinite front-to-back
adjustment. Base section is to be minimum 1. mm thick cold rolled
steel. Blower panels are to be installed in base section of each
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
cabinet to provide required filtered air at zero static pressure. Depth

of unit is to allow cable access through bottom and back of racks.
11.Console: is to be of modular design and contemporary styling, solid
welded steel construction with concealed mounting screws, having
laminated desk top and monitor turret housing, and containing the
following:
Monitors
Telephone set
Auxiliary equipment.
12.Console is to have louvered side panels and interface styling
throughout. Sections are to include face mounted 40 mm drop edge
wiring surfaces with radius corners. Surface is to include one pair (per
section) of support arms 0 mm deep. Supervisor cabinets are to
include locking sliding drawer. Surface top and three sides are to be
finished in gray linen 1/16-inch thick texolite laminate. Cabinet is to
include down point cabinet sections to house closed circuit monitors.
Units are to be divided and are to provide good picture quality.
13.Finishes: steel cabinet and console are to be phosphates and treated
with one weatherproof base coat and two coats of epoxy paint or
approved air-drying enamel of color to be selected by the Engineer.
7. DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER
14.TYPE: Black and white/color recorder, with direct electronic function
control, remote control facility, and having the following
characteristics:
Television standards (CCIR): 62 lines, 0 fields/sec.
Hard disk capacity: 1200 GB
Picture resolution: 720x288(field) ,720x76
Picture quality: levels (Basic,normal ,enhanced,..)
Audio channels: one
Alarm recording duration: min. to end HDD, selectable
Stable video: less than 4 secs. After power-on
Recording time: real time, slow-motion, time lapse stationary picture.
Recording:
Speed :
Permanent:
Not less than 50 pictures/sec.

Adjustable time interval from picture to
picture per camera
Event:
Event controlled recording of individual
cameras or cameras groups with adjustable
time interval from picture to picture.
Event = Alarm contact, serial command
Activity detection, TCP/IP command.
1. Clock set up: date, month ,year
2. Alarm search: by alarm even list
3. Motion detection: motion detection sensor playback
4. Horizontal video resolution: greater than 600 lines, black
and white.
15.DAY PROGRAMMABLE VCR ON/OFF TIMER is to programmed up
to four on/off cycles per day which are different for each of the 3 days.
16.SINGLE FIELD OR MULTIPLE FIELD: When recording in record/stop
field mode, advance touch button on remote shot control signal is to
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
cause preprogram able number of fields/sec. If not further advance

signal is received in any 2. minutes period, an auto-protect circuit is to
advance the tape on field automatically to protect heads and tape.
17.AUTOMATIC END-OF-TAPE REWIND is to be programmable to
initiate recording over previous cycle. Recycle mode indicator is to
alert operator that unit is in this mode.
18.DROP-OUT/NOISE COMPENSATOR is to automatically fill-in tape
drop-outs to reduce picture noise.
19.USAGE HOUR METER is to be have range from zero to 10,000
hours.
20.MEMORY is to store time and tape reading chronologically for up to
16 alarms or power failures.
21.CONTROL INPUT is to control record, play, stop, rewind, fast forward,
search-reverse and stop field. Hand-held remote control unit is to be
provided.
22.AUTOMATIC PROTECTION is to include DEW indicator lockout, tape
slack lockout and head motor drag lockout.
23.SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS:
(a) Video:
1. Input: 1.0 VPP, 75 ohm, unbalanced
2. Output: 1.0 VPP, 75 ohm, unbalanced
3. Signal to noise ratio: better than 40 dB
4. Frequency response: 4 MHz
(b) Audio:
1. Input: -20 dB, unbalanced
2. Output: -6 dB, 1000 ohms, unbalanced
3. Frequency response: 80 Hz to 10 kHz
( 3 dB).
24. HIGH SPEED SEARCH is to be 30 times real time rate, and highspeed visual search is to be 2. times real time rate, in forward and
reverse.
25. LOCKOUTS: Programming lockout is to prevent unauthorized
program alteration, and electronic security lockout is to restrict
accidental or unauthorized operation of touch button controls.
8. CABLING AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
9. Video signal coaxial cable: 75 ohm (+/-1%), single coaxial, solid bare
copper conductor (1.0 mm diameter minimum), with cellular
polyethylene insulation, bare copper braided shield (9% shield
coverage) and black PVC jacket. Characteristics and calculated
attenuation levels are to be submitted for approval.
10. Control cable: are to be PE insulated control and signal cable as
described in the relevant Section of the Specification.
11. Power cables: 3-core, with copper conductors minimum 1.5 mm2
cross-section, PVC insulated (70 deg. C insulation grade), and as
described in Section "Wires and Cables" of the Specification.
12. Cables: Cables are to be supplied in minimum 400 m spool lengths
to ensure continuous lengths between camera and control center.
13. Connectors: CCTV cable connectors are to be type BNC. Power
cable connectors are to be crimp type with eye lugs, screwed to
insulated connection bars at racks or inside cabinets.
14. Raceways for CCTV: All cabling and distribution cables are to be run
in heavy gauge galvanized steel conduits or galvanized steel
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
trunking, whether shown on the Drawings or not, and as described in

the relevant Section of the Specifications. Trunking and conducting
sizes are to be calculated by the Contractor with a space factor as
required by the Regulations.
15. SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS
1. Cable, General: Coaxial cable elements have 75ohm nominal
impedance. Cables comply with Division 16 Section requirements and the
following conditions below.
2.
Cable,
General:
Coaxial
cables
have
75ohm
nominal
impedance and are 100 percent factory sweep tested, 5 to 450
MHz, by the structural return loss method. Cables run in
environmental air spaces are listed for use in plenums. The
following
types are included:
CCTV Camera Cable: Siamese-type including power and
signal
elements. Coaxial portion has stranded centre
conductor, cellular
polyethylene dielectric, 95 percent copper
braid shield and
PVC jacket. Control/signal elements are
shielded pairs,
No.22 AWG. Each camera cable run includes
at least 1 spare pair of
control/signal conductors.
CCTV Video
Distribution: RG59/U, cellular
polyethylene
dielectric, bare copper braid shield with 95 percent minimum
shielding factor, No. 22 AWG stranded copper conductor and PVC
jacket.CCTV Coaxial Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.
PART3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
1 01 Outdoor Installation: Conform to ANSI C2, "National Electrical Safety
Code."
1 02 Surge Suppressors Installation: Where AC power-operated devices
are not protected against voltage transients by integral surge
suppressors conforming to UL Standard 1449, install surge suppressors
at the devices' power line terminals.
1 03 Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except as otherwise
indicated. Conceal raceways except in unfinished indoor spaces.
Raceways are to be part of the cable price and are deemed to be
included.
1 04 Wiring Within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to
terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars and
distribution spools.
1 05 Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturers recommended pulling
tensions. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded
cable. Do not splice cable between indicated termination, tap, or junction
points. Remove and discard cable where damaged during installation and
replace it with new cable.
1 06 Exposed Cable: Install parallel to building lines, follow surface
contours, and support as recommended by manufacturer.
1 07 Equalization of Video Signals: Where system performance may be
degraded in certain operating modes because of varying connections of
multiple devices from mode to mode, revise component connections and
install video distribution amplifiers and attenuators as required to provide
consistent high-level performance.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
1 08 Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring use
numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal
cabinets, and equipment enclosures. Tighten connections to comply with
tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.
1 09 Grounding: As recommended by manufacturers except as otherwise
indicated.
1 010 Make final connections: to equipment in the presence of the
equipment manufacturer's representative.
B. CCTV SYSTEM INSTALLATION:
1. Camera Mounting: Install cameras in the general vicinity indicated,
adjusted to final locations defined by camera location tests. Provide
adequate headroom below cameras and their mountings. Where
necessary, change the type of mounting to provide adequate headroom
below.
2. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components: at control stations.
Do not install such items in the vicinity of the devices they serve except
as otherwise indicated.
IDENTIFICATION:
A. Identify: system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to
Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification".
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

1.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of factoryauthorized service representatives to supervise the field assembly
and connection of components and system testing and adjustment.
2.
Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and
interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
3.
Pretesting: Align and adjust the system and pretest all

components, wiring, and functions to verify they conform to
specified requirements. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items
with new items. Retest until achieving satisfactory performance and
conditions.
4.
Final Acceptance Testing Schedule: Schedule tests after

pretesting has been successfully completed and system has been
in normal functional operation for at least 2 weeks. Provide a
minimum of 10 days' notice of acceptance test performance
schedule.
5.
CCTV Camera Location Test: Support each camera temporarily at

the location indicated and connects to monitor. Adjust camera
location and mounting and substitute fixed lenses as approved to
provide required performance at monitor. Adjust locations within 15
feet (5m) of those indicated with no change in Contract cost.
6.
7.
Record: results of tests.

Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations
and retest until specified requirements are met.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16775
CLEANING:
1.
Clean: all system components including camera housing windows,

lenses, and monitor screens. Use methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.
ADJUSTMENT:
1. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 1 year of date of
Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the system
to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to 2 requested adjustment
periods at the site for this purpose without additional cost.
DEMONSTRATION:
1. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service
representative to demonstrate adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the system and
to train Owner's personnel. Include demonstration of methods to determine optimum
settings for system controls.
2. Conduct: a minimum of 72 hours of training as specified under Instructions to
Owner's Employees in Division 1 Section "Project Closeout".
3. Schedule: training and adjustment with at least 7 days' advanced notice.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790

Section 16790 Public address Sound System
PART1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1 01 GENERAL:
A. General
These General Conditions shall be considered as forming an integral part of the Voice Alarm and
Public Address System specifications and must be carefully examined for requirements before
proposals in response to this Specification are submitted.
In case of conflict between these General Conditions and the Specification, the Specification shall
take precedence. In case of conflict between these General Conditions or the Specification and
the system drawings, the drawings shall take precedence.
A
Work Included
The work includes materials, tools, equipment and documentation required for a complete and
working Voice Alarm and Public Address System as specified in this Document. It shall cover
operational specifications, Software and Hardware, for a new Voice Alarm and Public Address
System to be installed.
Scope of Work
The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying a system consisting of all parts and software as
necessary to assemble a complete and working system within the design intent as specified herein
to the Owner. All necessary components required by this specifications or shown on system block
diagram not are identified in this specification as system design may differ on a Manufacturer by
Manufacturer basis. The system shall incorporate hardware, software and firmware as required to
support a system as indicated on drawings and specifications.
The Voice Alarm and Public Address System shall consist of the following integrated subsystems
as specified herein:
1. Pre-wired Equipment Racks and consoles.
2. Program sources Subsystem
3. Pre-amplification and Audio Controller Subsystem
4. Power amplification subsystem
5. Surveillance System.
6. Speakers and Volume Controls
7. Alarm interface subsystem
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
8. Wire and cable network.

The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all power supplies, equipment, wire, cable and
system interconnects, etc. as described herein and as required by the various equipment
manufacturers.
C
Products Supplied but not installed under the section

Complete set of spare parts required to guarantee failure free operation of Voice Alarm and Public
Address System for Five (5) years.
Related Sections
Electrical General Provisions

Fire Alarm and Detection System.
Building Management System. (Option)
E
Alternates
Strict conformance to this specification is required to ensure that the installed and programmed
system will function as designed, and will accommodate the future requirements and operations of
the building owner. All specified operational features must be met without exception.
The authorized representative of the manufacturer shall be responsible for the satisfactory
installation of the complete system. All equipment and components shall be the manufacturer's
current model. The materials and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized
approvals agency for use as part of a Life Safety System.
All processing equipment and connected field devices (speakers and volume control) shall be
provided by the same system supplier, and shall be designed and tested to ensure that the system
operates as specified. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
The supplier shall submit a point-by-point statement of compliance for all sections in this
specification.
The equipment to be supplied will be considered only if it meets all sections of the performance
specification. Any deviations of system performance outlined in this specification will only be
considered when the following requirements have been met:
A complete description of proposed alternate system performance methods with two (2) copies of
working drawings thereof for approval by the Owner, not less than ten (10) calendar days prior to
the scheduled date for submission of bids.
The acceptability of any alternate proposed system shall be the sole decision of the Owner or his
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
1.2
COORDINATED WORK
The contractor shall carefully examine the Contract Documents, all related equipment schedules,
related drawings, etc. to ensure compatibility between the design and related packages.
1 03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1 03 01 Primary Function
A Voice Alarm and Public Address System shall be provided. The Contractor shall supply, deliver
equipment and documentation for the system. The primary function of the system is to broadcast
high intelligibility Emergency and Instruction messages to select and/or all areas, this in
accordance to EN60849
As the VA & PA system forms part of the Life Safety System, this Specification shall be read in
conjunction with other systems related to Safety System such as Fire Alarm and Detection System
Specification.
1 03 02 Secondary Function
The VA & PA system shall also be used for the broadcasting of routine public address messages to
staff and gusts at all normally accessible areas.
1 03 03 Third Function
The system shall also be used for the broadcasting of background music or other entertainment
programs to specified areas.
1 04
BID SUBMITTALS
1 04 01 Discrepancies (Requests for Information)

All discrepancies and/or questions shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Owner in
writing for clarification and or resolution. Questions and Owner responses shall be provided to all
registered contractor. The contractor shall communicate to the Owner, in writing any discrepancies
as soon as a problem is found.
1 04 02 with Bid. For individual proposals

Review of these preliminary submittals by the Owner is for purposes of evaluating the Proposals
and does not constitute approval for supplying equipment.
Pricing information shall be submitted in a separate sealed envelope identified on the exterior with
this (RFP) identification, the date submitted, the contractor and that the envelope contains
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
Confidential Pricing Information.

Contractor is expected to provide a proposal inclusive of all information requested in the
documents:
- A minimum of two (2) copies of your proposal shall be submitted to Owner for review and
consideration.
- Contractor shall prepare a Bill of Materials showing each item included in the Proposal to include
all installation accessories and materials. Equipment Lists must include the quantity, model
number, description, manufacturer, and price of each item unless Lump Sum pricing is specified.
Prices should be extended by quantity and totaled.
- Provide a detailed description of any and all voluntary alternates and include cost changes in your
voluntary alternates proposal document(s).
- Unit prices submitted with the proposal shall be used for all additions, deductions and alterations
of the original contract and shall further be used for future purchases by the Owner from the
Contractor for one (1) year from date of system acceptance.
1 04 03 Compliance
contractor shall submit a Statement of Qualification with their proposal that shall include the following
information:
1. Company name, Address, telephones number and Contact Person.
2. Brief Company History
3. Resumes of key personnel
4. Local staffing, job descriptions and number of persons in each position.
5. Local service capabilities to include hours of operation and maintenance availability.
6. Copies of Manufacturers Factory Training Certification for installation /repair personnel.
7. Description of local engineering and project management capabilities.
8. List of (10) references describing projects of similar size and complexity, including names and
telephone numbers of contact persons.
In addition, each contractor shall submit the following with their proposal. Failure to submit the
following information, documents and explanations may be reason to disqualify the contractors
submittal.
A detailed narrative fully describing the contractors understanding of the project, specific needs
concerns and requirements of the Owner.
A discussion of the contractors technical approach and plans to perform the technical
requirements - specified. The contractors shall discuss the issues, approaches, methodologies
and alternatives of the offer
The contractor shall include a functional block diagram(s) showing the major items of equipment by
part description or model number required for this offer and their relationship to each other and to
the total offer.
contractor shall include in the proposal a detailed list of all hardware and software components that
are included in the bid. This list shall include the quantity, manufacturer and model number of each
component.
The contractor may submit additional block diagrams, shop drawings or other explanatory materials
as appropriate to provide the Owner with a better understanding of the contractors submission.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
These materials shall become part of the Proposers submission.

Prior to System Integration/Installation
Two (2) Copies of all Submittals shall be provided to the Owner by the prevailing contractor for
review and approval. These Submittals shall be made within two weeks of notification to the
successful Contractor. The Owner shall have (2) weeks to review and comment on submittals.
Submittals shall consist of:
Plan shop drawing showing all field devices location, type, conduit size and related cable path
including all required information.
Wiring Shop Drawings with sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be submitted to
determine compliance with the Owners drawings and specifications.
Drawings shall include manufacturers name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements,
equipment layout, device arrangement, complete point to point wiring diagrams and conduit layouts
A riser diagram detailing the location of all components and the wiring relationships between them
will be provided.
Scaled plans and elevations of consoles/cabinets and or racks including the location of each
equipment for central control console shall be included.
Any hardware and/or software that will be modified to meet the specifications for this project shall
plainly identify as to the modification(s) from standard. The Contractor shall explain how this
modified hardware/software will be supported by the Manufacturer for a minimum of five (5) years
from acceptance.
Manufacturers specification sheets for each equipment will be submitted in the order listed on the
bid documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications
The Work described in this Section shall be the responsibility of a single Contractor.
Contractor Qualifications
The contractor shall submit evidence of successful completion of at least ten (10) systems similar in
size and complexity of this system. Names of Companies, Responsible individuals, addresses and
phone numbers of references for these systems shall be provided with this proposal
Manufacturer Qualifications
The primary manufacturer of the proposed system shall maintain manufacturing and/or a major
sales/marketing presence to include stockade of spare parts and a repair facility and shall be a
recognized name in the VA & PA industry.
ISO 9000 certification of the primary manufacturer is desired
Testing Qualifications
The Owner shall provide an individual knowledgeable in PA system operation and installation to
inspect, test and accept the system on the part of the Owner.
The installer shall supply similarly qualified individuals that are thoroughly familiar with the installed
system hardware, software operation and installation practices.
These individuals shall comprise the Inspection and Acceptance team.
WARRANTY
Standard Warranty
The standard Manufacturers warranty shall pass through to the Owner; however, such warranty
period shall not start until the Voice Alarm and Public Address system is fully accepted.
Special Warranty
The materials and equipment shall be warranted for a minimum period of one calendar year
starting from system acceptance regardless of any Manufacturers warranties.
The Owner is specifying an Open System. The Manufacturer and/or Contractor shall not void any
warranty provisions due to additional equipment being procured and installed in the Voice Alarm
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
system by the Owner or subsequent contractors unless demonstrable damage is caused to the
installed system by this additional equipment or installation.
1 07
MAINTENANCE
1 07 01 Extra Equipment / Materials / Spare Parts.

Provide a listing of recommended spare/replacement parts necessary to guarantee failure free operation
of Voice Alarm and Public Address System for at least 5-years. Any defective parts not supplied as spare
will be free of charge. Spare parts list must be approved by owner engineer before supplying.
1 07 02 Maintenance Service
Explain in detail how you will respond to any warranty claims and/or subsequent service contracts to
include where warranty/spare parts will be stored.
PART 2:
DEFINITIONS.
2 01 LEVELS.
The following voltage levels shall be associated with the respective circuitry unless otherwise specified:
1. Microphone level: less than -32 dbv.
2. Line level: -32 dbv to + 22 dbv.
3. Loudspeaker level: greater than 22 dbv.
2 02
IMPEDANCE.
The following impedance characteristics shall be associated with the respective circuitry unless otherwise
specified:
1. Microphones circuit: The characteristic impedance for microphone circuit must be 50
Ohm to 250 Ohm and not less than ten times the source impedance. The microphone
circuit must be balanced.
2. Line circuit: The characteristic impedance for line circuit must be 600 Ohm
2. max.
1. IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS.
3. The following definitions apply to each of the respective parameters and measurements unless
1. Frequency response: The minimum acceptable frequency response over which the
amplitude response is within +/- 3 dB @ 1000 Hz.
2. Total harmonic distortion: The maximum acceptable total harmonic distortion measured
at the maximum output with the applied signal sinusoidal waveform of any frequency
inside the band specified.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
3. Signal to Noise ratio: The minimum acceptable ratio of signals to noise levels, derived
from broadband measurements under design load, at maximum output, over the
specified frequency band.
4. Input clipping level: The minimum acceptable maximum level of input signal applied to
the device under test, under design load, at maximum output which maintained the
specified total harmonic distortion.
5. Sensitivity: The maximum acceptable minimum level of input signal applied to the unit
under test to provide the maximum output under design load.
PART 3:
PRODUCTS
6. MANUFACTURERS
7. As a standard of quality, provide Voice Alarm and Public Address equipment as provided
by established full line manufacturers such as (G+M), (Toa) or (Bosch).
8. Other Manufacturers will be considered providing they have been in business
specializing in the manufacture of VA & PA systems for a minimum of 10 years and offer
Open Architecture systems.
9. SYSTEM DESIGN
1. General:
10. VA & PA system must be designed and built based on TCP/IP, connecting sound control
desks and remote Paging Microphone using a LAN/WAN standard network. The LAN
connection must be monitored digitally. The links have to be a conventional (copper)
way, this due to the low crash resistance of Fiber Optic and the non compliance of Fiber
optic to the Standard EN 60849
11. Operation and control all items of system must be through user friendly GUI, operation
and management software must be part of supplied system, which has to be as well
connected by the LAN Network.
12. All material shall be new, unused and designed for the purpose specified.
13. Equipment not specifically listed but required for a compliant and operable system shall
be supplied, as required, by the successful Proposer at no additional cost to the Owner.
14. The public address system shall provide the project with the facilities to broadcast the
following audio programs:
1. Background music with interrupt for announcements.
2. Routine paging and staff location.
3. Emergency and Instruction Messages and alarm tones.
Emergency paging, routine paging or background music will be broadcast to all or selected areas of
the project according to requirements. Live messages must be broadcasted from either of two audio
sources (Fire fighter and Paging microphones) or alternatively, pre recorded emergency messages
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
must be broadcasted automatically or manually via digital speech system which must be interfaced to
the fire alarm control panel and security system.
The messages routing must be controlled with program controller and due the system will be used to
broadcast emergency messages, the system must be designed that the failure of a single component
shall not render the complete system inoperable.
The system must have continual critical signal path monitoring for the occurrence of fault conditions
i.e. from microphone capsule to loudspeaker voice coil.
VA & PA can be maintained and configured through the Internet using standard network components.
Every sound control desk must be assigned its own IP address, thus allowing status polling via the
Internet
The system components including wiring and cables must be complying with the requirements of
European Standard EN 60849.
3 02 02 System Performance.
Voice reproduction shall be of good quality and natural sounding, excepting those areas with average
noise levels in excess of 60 dB (A).
The system shall be free from audible distortion hum and noise. All switching shall be non-audible.
The system shall be capable of producing the following sound levels:
For background music, 10 dB more than ambient noise level.
For spoken message, 10 to 15 dB more than ambient noise level. With a pink noise signal limited to
the operating bandwidth of the system.
Any alarm tone signals used to precede emergency messages shall meet a minimum level of 65dB
(A), or a minimum of 5dB (A) above any ambient noise level which exists or is likely to occur for 30s
or more, in accordance with BS 5839.
The levels shall be measured at 1.5 m above floor level (1 m above floor level in seating areas) in all
normally accessible areas, using a sound level meter complying with BS 5969 (IEC 651) Type 1 or 2,
set to 'S' (slow) response and calibrated immediately before the measurements.
The system must provide a minimum of 95% sentence intelligibility at all listing areas. The
intelligibility of the system must be not less than 0.45 at any listener location and not less than 0.6 at
75% of listener location
The calibration procedure and the measurements shall be witnessed by the owner, who shall be
provided with a written set of results. All measurements must be carried out with background level of
noise less than the signal level by 10 dB.
Voice Alarm messages must be with good quality and natural audio (not digital signal).
The overall system performance must fulfill or exceed the following standards:
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
Amplitude Response +/- 6 dB within the defined frequency response.

Total Harmonic Distortion 1% maximum within the defined frequency response.
Signal to Noise Ratio
60 dB minimum.
3 03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.
3 03 01 Central System.
The central system equipments racks will be located at CONTROL ROOM.
3.3.2 Programs Source.
The signal sources must have the following priority of access to the system; signal sources
will be
arranged that the lowest number will have the highest priority.
Maximum number of sources must not be limited below 50, which shall be handled by a flexible
assigned of the Main system.
1- Fire fighter Microphone unit.
2- Pre recorded Digital Speech and tone Announcer.
3- Paging Microphone Stations
4- Background Music.
Emergency and routing paging messages must be broadcast from a multi zone control panel located
in the Control Center and (6) six Slave locations. This control panel must be able to address any
individual loudspeaker zone, any combination of zones or all zones simultaneously.
Pre recorded messages must be operated manually from the Fire Fighter Station or automatically via
an interface with the fire alarm.
Four background music sources are to be provided as follow:
1- One preset AM / FM tuners.
2- One multi deck cassette player.
3- One multi-play compact disc.
4- Any audio source (from Satellite system, Broadcasting studio, etc.)
3 03 02 System Zoning.
The building will be divided into the following separately addressable areas:
1. Public Areas
2. Technical Areas
3. Corridors
4. Bathroom of Guests if any
Spare power amplifiers must be incorporated within the central equipment, and shall be substituted
automatically in the event of the failure of an amplifier.
3 03 03 System Surveillance.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
The system must be continuously monitored for faults.

The Loudspeaker lines have to be monitored by impedance measurement without any additional
termination resistor and / or capacitor requirement. :
The system must detect all the following fault conditions.
1- Power supply failure.
2- Microphone capsule failure.
3- Digital voice announcer failure.
4- Amplifier failure.
5- Loudspeaker line open circuit.
6- Loudspeaker line short circuit.
7- Loudspeaker Short Circuit to Ground
8- Surveillance system failure.
9. Backup Battery failure
03 03 04 SYSTEM COMPONENTS.
The system will include the following components.
1- 19 inch Metal rack.
2- Audio signal sources.
3- Pre amplifier.
4- Audio signal processing equipments.
5- Power amplifiers.
6- Loudspeakers.
7- Volume control.
8- Fire alarm and security interface units.
9- Surveillance system.
10- Wiring.
03 03 05 Metal Rack.
The metal rack constructed of two die-cast frames and four upright aluminum extrusions, the rack
must be light, highly stable and can be easily adapted to suit particular applications.
Equipments must be installed in the rack in logical (signal path) sequence. Equipments requiring
routine operation must be at a convenient working height. Un-used rack space must be filled with
blank panels. The non-load bearing sides rear and top cover must be removable to give easy
access to the inside of the rack.
There must be separate paths for low level signals, 100 volt signals and mains distribution voltages.
All the connections cable must have length enough to maintain the equipments outside the rack
without disconnect it.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
6-mm smoked security glass door must be attached and supplied with lock and spare key.
Monitor Panel.
Monitoring / control speaker module for AF buses including automatic (priority-dependant) switch
off of the speaker signal during selection of your required sound or music source. This module
integrated 2W amplifier and speaker, and have 5 position selector switch and front panel volume
control.
Supply Input Panels.
A master supply switch panel for rack systems with power indicator lights (green) must be provided
at the base of the rack.
Heavy-duty screw termination must be provided for mains input and switched outputs.
A switched socket outlet must be provided and is intended for use with accessories, test
equipments and the AC outlet must be to European specifications.
The supply distribution panel provides switching for up 120 A, 24 VDC for supplying rack in case of
mains failure.
Ventilation Panel.
A single unit ventilation panel styled to match all other rack mounting equipments and normally
placed between pairs of power amplifiers and other associated equipments.
Forced Ventilation Panel.
Rack panel module incorporating mains supply operated fan for use in high ambient temperature
automatically operated with thermostat.
3 03 06 Audio Signal Sources.

The audio programs will be as follow:
1- Fire fighter Microphone unit.
2- Digital voice announcer based on MP3 Technology (12-Messages)
3- Tone Generator.
4- Paging Microphones.
5- AM / FM digital tuner.
6- Cassette deck.
7- Compact disk player.
3 03 07 Digital Fire Fighter Microphone.

The fireman microphone unit shall be provided at the control room.
The microphone unit shall consist of a freestanding case fitted with gooseneck microphone with
cardiod polar response fitted with a line pre amplifier and noise canceling circuit. The microphone
must have a push to talk button, a volume control shall not be fitted to the microphone.
Digital microphone consoles convert the voice signal to an MP3 bit stream signal and can be
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
connected to the sound control desks directly via the LAN.

A control panel shall be provided with fireman and security microphone unit to allow the following:
1.Keypad completes with zone LEDs and/or LCD.
2. Manual Alarm messages switches for 8-messages.
3. All call switch.
4. Press to talk switch.
5. Power On green LED.
6. System fault LED.
There must be monitoring for both microphone voice coil and pre amplifier. A pre announcement
tone alarm must be fitted into the paging console, it will provide a selectable tone type and trigger
automatically when the microphone activated.
Specifications:
I - Microphone.
1. Type
Dynamic cardiod characteristic.
2. Sensitivity
- 80 dB, +/- 3 dB, Ref. (0 db = 1V/ uBAR).
3. Frequency response
140 Hz to 7 kHz, +/- 3 db.
2. Pre-amplifier.
1. Input sensitivity for 0dBm output -70dB 240uV
2. Max Output level
+21dB 8.7V
3. Frequency response @-3dB
80Hz - 18 KHz
4. Output Noise ref to 0dBm 50dB

5. Max Surveillance signal output
6.Output source impedance
7. Distortion
1.7V @ 20 kHz
20 Ohms
< .2 % at nominal output @ 1Khz and maximum sensitivity.
3 03 08 Digital Voice Announcer.

Digital message player / recorder up to 99 messages of any length with total capacity 960 seconds
and have timer function from 1 minute to 60 minutes.
The digital voice announcer shall store the pre recorded alarm messages in Non- Volatile EPROM
memory.
The unit must be provided with switch to control message playback either once or continuous.
The unit must be self-monitored and provide indication of fault condition via a front panel LED and
opt-isolated contact.
There shall be no user controls on the unit other than switches to trigger the test messages. A
message run green LED shall be provided for message. Erasure of any message shall not be
possible without the connection of external components.
The message unit must be of modular construction
Specifications:
1. No of messages
up to 99
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
3. Sample rate
300 Hz. - 5.5 KHz, +/- 1 dB.

13.9 k samples / sec.
4. Signal to Noise Ratio

5. Dynamic range
> 45 dB.
66 dB.
6. Audio Output Level
0 dB.
7. Message Inialisation
normally open contact
8. Impedance output
600 ohm.
9. Battery back-up time 7 days
3 03 09 Tone Generator.
Electronic alarm tone generator shall be provided. The generator shall produce the
Universal chime / alarm module with up to 16 selectable different melodies each of which has up to
32 single tones.
3.4.2.4 Digital Paging Microphone Station.
The Paging Microphone Station shall be provided at Control Room and at (6) six slave security
desks.
The microphone unit shall consist of a freestanding case fitted with gooseneck microphone with
cardiod polar response fitted with a line pre amplifier and noise canceling circuit. The microphone
must have a push to talk button, a volume control shall not be fitted to the microphone.
Digital microphone consoles convert the voice signal to an MP3 bit stream signal and can be
connected to the sound control desks directly via the LAN.
A control panel shall be provided with fireman and security microphone unit to allow the following:
1. Keypad completes with zone LEDs and/or LCD.
2. Manual Alarm messages switches for 8-messages.
3. All call switch.
4. Press to talk switch.
5. Power On green LED.
6. System fault LED.
There must be monitoring for both microphone voice coil and pre amplifier. A pre announcement
tone alarm must be fitted into the paging console, it will provide a selectable tone type and trigger
automatically when the microphone activated.
Specifications:
I - Microphone.
1. Type
Dynamic cardiod characteristic.
2. Sensitivity
- 80 dB, +/- 3 dB, Ref. (0 db = 1V/ uBAR).

13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
140 Hz to 7 kHz, +/- 3 db.
2. Pre-amplifier.
1. Input sensitivity for 0dBm output -70dB 240uV
2.Max Output level
+21dB 8.7V
3.Frequency response @-3dB
80Hz - 18 KHz
4. Output Noise ref to 0dBm 50dB

5. Max Surveillance signal output 1.7V @ 20 kHz
6. Output source impedance 20 Ohms
7. Distortion < .2 % at nominal output @ 1Khz and maximum sensitivity.
3 03 010
AM / FM digital synthesizer tuner.
The digital synthesizer tuner must have the following feature:

MPX noise reduction for better signal to noise ratio.
FDNR low pass filter at output stage for greatly reduce the unwanted carrier contents to reduce noise and
distortion.
- RF attenuator to prevent powerful signals from causing distortion.
- Random presets for at least 30 FM / AM stations.
- Visual signal indicator.
- 2 antenna inputs to avoid multi-path interference.
- Anti resonance and anti vibration designs.
Specifications
FM section.
- Frequency range
87.5 - 108 MHz.
- Usable sensitivity.
< 2 uV.
- Signal to Noise ratio
> 65 dB.
- Distortion
< .2 %
- Frequency response
20 Hz - 15 kHz.
- AM suppression ratio
60 dB.
- Antenna input impedance 75 Ohm.

AM section.
- Frequency range
530 kHz - 1.6 MHz.
- Usable sensitivity.
< 300 uV.
> 50 dB.
- Distortion
< .5 %
- Antenna input
Loop antenna.
- Audio output level

FM at 100 % mod. > 600 mV / .9 K Ohm.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
AM at 30 % mod. > 100 mV / .9 K Ohm.

- AC Supply Input
3 03 011
240V, 50 Hz
Cassette deck.
The cassette must have the following feature:

- Two tape auto-reverse into one housing.
- Modular system to be easy in maintenance and repairing without service
Failure.
- Dolby B/C noise reduction with MPX filters.
- Visual peak hold level meter.
- Forward and backward indicator.
- Fast forward and rewind key.
- Locking search button with LED display.
Specifications.
- Signal detection
channel playback stereo cassette with mono output.
- Wow and flutter
< .025 %.

- Distortion
> 60 dB.
< .6 %
20 Hz - 20 kHz.
- Channel separation
> 95 dB.
- Audio output
- AC Supply Input
3 03 012
.5V / 1800 ohm.

240V, 50 Hz
Compact desk player
The compact desk player must have the following feature:

- Automatic level digital control.
- Anti resonance and anti vibration designs.
- Silent multi play mechanism.
- Multi memory and memory hold.
- Command identification display.
The player contain cartridge for pre loading 5 or 6 compact discs with random track
Selection
Specifications.
- Signal detection
Optical, semiconductor laser.
- Wow and flutter
can be neglect.
- Dynamic range
> 100 dB.

- Distortion
> 100 dB.
< .005 %
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
20 Hz - 20 kHz.
- Channel separation
> 95 dB.
- Audio output
2V / 600 ohm.
- AC Supply Input
240V, 50 Hz
The system must be powered by 240 VAC and 24V battery backup input in the event of mains
failure and hardware bypass module to complying with BS5839 part 8/IEC 948 for Voice Alarm
applications.
The system must be provided with a tone surveillance source for the local amplifiers and
loudspeakers lines with error indications being sent over the Data-link back to the main equipment
cabinet.
The system must be provided with 31 band graphic equalizer, viewed from LCD display assignable
to outputs and must be provided with 16 Memory pre-sets of all configuration parameters and 8 User
programmable input and output contacts.
Technical Specifications:
Inputs:
Connectors Type
XLR, Active Balanced or transformer balanced
Impedance
5 Kohm.
Sensitivity:
Line:
6, 0, -10 dbv
Mic:
-18,-30,-42,-54 dbv switchable
Phantom power
48 VDC switchable
Equalization:
HF
12 dB @3kHz
LF
12 dB @120Hz
Parametric Equalizer
Max. Input level
Mix range
3 bands +12 to -18 dB
12 dBv
-40 to +12 dB In 1dB steps
Compressor:
Threshold Range
Attack Time
-36 to +3 dBr relative to max. signal level

5 - 500 ms for 10dB step
Release Time
50 - 2000 ms for 10dB step
Gate threshold
-80 to -30 dBr
Outputs:
Connectors Type
XLR, Active Balanced
Impedance
150 ohms
Max. Output Level

Master Level Range
l3 dbv
-50 to +12 dB
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
Equalization
HF
12 dB @3kHz
LF
12 dB @120Hz
Contact Outputs
200 mA switchable at 24Vdc
Limiter:
Threshold Range
Attack Time
-30 to +3 dB
0 ms 10dB step
Release Time
200 ms 10dB step
Frequency response
THD + Noise
20-20000 Hz 1dB
<0,02 % 0dBV in, 0dBV out
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
>90 dB A-weighted; 0dBV in, 0dBV out
Dig. Audio Processing:

A/D Converters
20 bits delta-sigma 64x over sampling
D/A Converters
20 bits delta-sigma 8x over sampling
Internal Processing
32 bits floating point
Sampling Frequency
44.1 kHz
Dig. Controller:
Configuration Storage
Display Graphical
Host PC Port
EEPROM
LCD 240x64
RS 232
Power supply:
Power Requirement
3.4.4
240 VAC / 24 VDC
Power Amplifiers.
3.4.4.1 Modular Power Amplifiers.

The power amplifier system must be of modular construction and comprise a mainframe with
integral mains power supply with input for external DC supply in case of main failure.
The modular power amplifiers are used individually or combined to provide 100 volt line output with
the required power for each zone.
The power amplifier must be designed and built in according the latest electronic techniques to be
an efficient and extremely reliable with completely short and open circuit proof.
The input level must be controlled by level control input circuit to have constant output level in case
of variation of input source.
Specification
- Output noise
-Distortion
20 Hz - 20 kHz.
< -85 dB, relative to nominal output.
< .1 %.
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
- Input sensitivity
0 dBm for rated output.
- Input impedance
> 10 K ohm.
- Power output
as in BOQ.
- Output voltage
100 and 50 volt.
- Power supply
240 volt AC 50 Hz and 24 volt DC.
- Operating temperature
3 03 013
0 - 60 degree.
Loudspeakers.
The loudspeakers must have high fidelity and intelligibility, designed to broadcast background music
or paging. There must be wide variety of shaping, specification, colors and type to meet all
application for the project.
All loudspeaker must be 100 V line working and supplied with built in high quality audio
transformers, the transformer must have a minimum of 3 tapping with a ratio of at least 4:1 between
highest and lowest the type of speaker will be as follow:
1- Wall / Ceiling mounted Speaker.
2- Miniature Horn Speaker.
3- Bathroom Splash-proof Speakers.
3 03 014
Wall / Ceiling mounted Speaker .
The wall mount speaker must be designed acoustically for high quality sound reproduction and must
be easy for installation and maintenance. The speaker must be supplied with Fire Dome.
Specification
Rated / max. power
6W/6W
Transformer Tapping
Line input
100 and 50 volt.
Power output
full, and of max. Power.
SPL 1W/1m
90 dB
SPL rated power
97 dB
Effective freq. range
150 14000 Hz
Dispersion (-6dB) 1kHz / 4kHz
185( / 105(
Material
Flame retardant PC
Mounting
4 inch square box, 4 screws
Termination
IP-rating
Ceramic terminals
56
Operating Temperature
-20 (C / 90(C
3.4.5.2 Miniature Horn Speaker

The horn speaker must be designed to satisfy the outdoor or indoor application, it must be
manufactured in Polyamide with a metal bracket. The projector must be completely water resistant.
18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
The projector must offers clear speech and excellent quality background music reproduction.
The projector must be supplied wi
ith tapping transformer 100 volt.
Specification
Standard version
100 V transformer
Rated / max. power
8 W / 15 W
SPL 1W/1m
101 dB
SPL rated power
110 dB
Effective freq. Range
600 7500 Hz
Dispersion (-6dB) 1 kHz/ 4kHz
16/ 5
Directivity factor,
7500 Hz
Dispersion (-6dB) 1 kHz/ 4kHz
160 50Directivity factor,
Q (2 kHz) 6.0
Material
Polyamide
Mounting
Bracket or insertion
Termination
IP-rating
0.5 m cable
67
Operating Temperature
-20 (C / 90(C
3.4.5.3 Bathroom Splash-proof Ceiling Speaker.

The speaker must be designed to be used at humid and high temperature area such as bathroom
and in compliance with IP 64.
Specification:
- Rated power
3W
- Maximum input power
4.5W
- Input impedance
> 500 ohm.
- S.P.L (1W @ 1M)
87 dB.
- Frequency range
200 - 16000 Hz.
- Dispersion angle
140 degree conical.
- Transformer tapping
Line input
100 and 50 volt.
Power output
- Temperature range
3 03 015
full, and of max. power.

-20 to 60 C degree.
Fire Alarm Interface unit.
The unit must contains the necessary components to interface a public address system to a fire
panel and fire microphone, enabling the monitoring of all select control lines of the external cable
link.
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
The printed circuit board is mounted in a module that can be mounted into standard rack. This
module may be powered from two 24V dc supplies and, in the event of one failing, a fault will be
announced but operation is still possible via the remaining supply. Two sets of regulators provide
the necessary volt for correct operation, ensuring system integrity. The two supplies are
independently fused via a self-reset able fuse and the input voltage may be in the range of 2235Vdc.
The alarms interface unit shall trigger the digital voice messages, control the routing of the
prerecorded announcement to the appropriate areas and generate the control signal to initiate the
emergency sequence.
The number of the circuit required from the fire alarm panel must be the same number of the zones
for the public address system. End of line resistors shall be fitted in the public address system
racks to enable the fire alarm panel to monitor the status of the line cable.
The same function can be satisfy by the interfacing of F.A.C.P and Security panel softwares with
the audio System software, if it is possible refers to the consultant.
3 03 016 System surveillance.

The system shall be continuously monitored for faults. Audio lines shall be monitored using a
surveillance tones and impedance checking circuitry. The system shall detect all of the following
fault conditions:
1- Power supply failure.
2- Fire fighter and Security management microphones failure.
3- Digital voice announcer failure.
4- Amplifier failure.
5- Loudspeaker line short circuit.
6- Loudspeaker line open circuit.
The surveillance system consists of:
1- Tone generator.
2- Line surveillance unit.
3- Speaker surveillance unit.
3 03 017
Line surveillance unit.
A line surveillance unit must detect the presence tone at the output of Fire fighter and Security
microphone, speaker lines, and DVA and power amplifiers.
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
Normal and fault indications are given at the front of the panel, if one of amplifiers fail a standby
amplifier is automatically switched on. The changeover from main to standby amplifier is silent with
no noticeable break in the audio signal.
3 03 018
Speaker surveillance unit.
The speaker surveillance unit measures the impedance of the speakers circuit, in case of speaker
line failure there must be an indication for the short and open circuit.
Surveillance system specifications
- Maximum power handling
500 watts.
- Minimum detectable load
2 watt or equivalent cable loading.
- Nominal 20 kHz level
4 V rms.
- Fault indication threshold
+/- 15 % of normal operating impedance.
- Power supply
3 03 019
AC supply 240 V, 50 Hz and 24 VDC.
Volume control.
The volume control will be used to adjust the sound level through all areas of the project.
The volume control must be auto-transformer type. The volume control must be stepped
continuously rotating group volume control with 6-db voltage steps. The volume control must be
chosen to be able to handle 1.5 times the load will be controlled. The volume control must be
supplied with a priority override relay. The volume control will be installed inside the main rack of
sound system.
PART 4: Execution
4 01 Submittals
4 01 01 General Description and Requirements
The Contractor shall submit product data and shop drawings within 14 calendar days of notice of
Contract Award per the following requirements:
- Any specific needs or requirements pertaining to the management of the VA/PA system.
- Any special sequences and/or procedures that fall under the category of Contractor programming,
configuration or system options.
- Manufacturers specification sheets for all proposed hardware, software and material, partial
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
submittals will not be accepted without prior written request to and approval from the Owner.
Review and approval of Submittals by the Owner is for purposes of tracking the work and contract
administration and does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the
Contract Documents, or from proving equipment and/or services required by the Contract
Documents.
4 01 02 Product Data
Three (3) sets of product data shall be submitted in three ring binders divided into separate sections
for each subsystem or major type of equipment. Each section shall include the following:
- Equipment schedules listing all system components, the manufacturer, model number and quantity
of each.
- General functional description.
- Manufacturers specification sheets for all system components, including warranty information.
Specification sheets containing more than one device or component model number shall be clearly
marked as to which unit is submitted.
- General functional description of any software that may be used for system operation.
- Lay-down point diagrams defining all inputs and outputs for the system.
- Cable and wiring diagrams
- Lists of the recommended maintenance spare parts inventory to be provided for maintenance of
the system after installation.
4 01 03 Shop Drawings
- System riser diagram with all devices, wire numbers and wire designations.
- Schematic block diagrams for system.
- Wiring diagrams for system defining the intersection of all inputs and outputs for all equipment.
- Fabrication shop drawings for all consoles, cabinets and for all custom equipment to include
elevations, quantities, quantities and types of mounted equipment, heat dissipation, interconnect
cabling, conduit wire-ways and power supply locations.
4 02
QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING
4 02 01 Contractor Qualifications
The work accomplished under this section shall be the responsibility of the Legal Contractor. The
work accomplished by any sub-contractor to the Contractor shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall have a fully staffed local office including service personnel capable of providing
comprehensive maintenance and service for all equipment contained in the installed System.
4 03 RECORD DOCUMENTATION
Prior to the final acceptance test, the Contractor shall submit two (2) hard copies and one (1) CD-R
22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
of all documentation as specified below in .DXF or .DWG format. CD-RW media is not acceptable.
Record documentation shall include all information required in the prefabrication submittals but
revised to reflect installation conditions. Record documentation shall, at a minimum, include the
following:
- Mounting details for all equipment and hardware.
- Functional block diagrams for each subsystem.
- Wiring details showing rack elevations, equipment wiring and terminations and inter-rack wiring.
- Point to point wiring diagrams
- Layout details for all riser location(s), including power supplies, junction boxes, conduit and any
other related equipment.
Manuals
Record documentation shall also include Contractor generated or assembled Operation,
Configuration and Maintenance manuals for all devices, equipment and software modules. Manuals
shall include the following:
- Operational description of each system and sub-system
- Detailed programming descriptions for each system; including step by step procedures.
- Explanation of system inter-relationships. Explanations shall include operations of each system
and operations unique to the interfaces between each of the systems and possible conflicts that may
occur with the interfaces. Each explanation shall be identified, tagged, bound and indexed into a
single binder.
- Power-up and power-down procedures for each system.
- Description of all diagnostic procedures.
- A list of manufacturers, their local representatives and any sub-contractors that have performed
work on the project.
- Installation and service manuals for each piece of equipment.
- Maintenance schedules for all installed components. Schedules shall include inspections and
preventative maintenance schedules and documentation of all replaced or repaired equipment.
Manuals Composition
Hardware manuals shall include at a minimum, the following information:
- General hardware description and specifications
- Installation and checkout procedures
- Equipment layout drawings.
- System schematics and wiring lists.
- System setup procedures.
- Manufacturers repair parts list including sources of supply.
Operators manuals shall explain all procedures and instructions for operation of the system.
4 05
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A complete acceptance test will be carried out for each item in system to fulfill the system
performance.
23
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16790
The following test equipments must be available during all the tests:
1- Sound level meter for the following measurements
A - Audio level meter.
B - Distortion measurements.
C - Signal to noise ratio.
2- Pink noise generator & audio generator.
3- Oscilloscope for signal analysis.
4- Spectrum analyzer for audio band.
5- Intelligibility measurements.
System acceptance shall be a formal structured demonstration by the Contractor that all
specification requirements have been met and a formal acceptance by the Owner acknowledging
that fact on an item by item basis.
The Owner will conduct final acceptance testing of the VA/PA system with the assistance of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall have appropriate personnel, both Management and Technical,
present during this testing with the previously prepared and accepted Test and Acceptance
Document.
The Final Acceptance Testing shall consist of, as a MINIMUM, the following items and procedures:
- The Contractor shall conduct a complete test of the entire system and shall provide the Owner with
a written report of the results of that test. During the course of the Contractors system test, the
Contractor shall calibrate and test all equipment, place the interface system in service and test the
system.
During this test, the system shall be made fully functional and programmed such that all system
points, interfaces, controls, messages, prompts, etc can be exercised and validated.
The Owner retains the right to suspend and or terminate testing at any time when the system fails to
perform as specified. Furthermore, in the event it becomes necessary to suspend the test, the
Contractor shall work diligently to complete/repair all outstanding items to the condition specified in
the Specification and as indicated on the plans.
During the final acceptance test, no adjustments, repairs or modifications to the system will be
conducted without the permission of the Owner.
End of section
24
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16950

Section 16950 Testing and Comminssioning
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
General provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and Division-1
(General requirements), apply to work of this section.
B.
A.
Work includes providing all materials, equipment and accessories, required for testing
and commissioning of all systems, equipments and services relating to the electrical
works.
A.
Standards Compliance : Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, DIN/VDE,

IEC, NEC, NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards, pertaining to the testing and
commissioning.
1 04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Equipment Data : Submit manufacturer's data for testing and commissioning model No.,
type, size, range, .... etc.
B.
Testing Sheets : Submit a recommended test and commissioning sheets as per IEE
wiring regulations 16th. Edition.
PART 2 - TESTING
2 01 WORKS TESTS
A.
The consultant shall inspect and test at the makers' works, during manufacture and after
completion, all or any particular manufactured material, apparatus or equipment ordered
by the contractor for incorporation in the works, in order to prove that the material,
apparatus or equipment meets the requirements of this specification. The contractor
shall notify the Owner's authorized representative in advance of all such inspections and
tests.
The contractor must arrange on his expenses for works tests to be attended by the
Owner's consultant for all tests specified in different sections of specifications.
B.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's authorized Representative, at the time of
issue, three copies of each and every order for bought in material, apparatus and
equipment intended for incorporation in the works.
Each such order shall clearly state whether the item(s) which it covers is or are subject to
inspection or test before despatch to site.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16950
C.
Upon completion of manufacture, or before despatch in the case of stock items, all
material, apparatus and equipment intended for incorporation in the works shall be
subjected, to the tests specified in the relevant National Standard or elsewhere in this
specification together with such additional tests as may be required in order to prove
compliance with this specification. When no relevant British Standard exists, or the
appropriate National Standard fails to specify tests, the Contractor shall submit his
proposals for the tests he requires to provide compliance with the specification.
D.
The results of each and every test carried out in accordance with the provisions of this
specification shall be accurately and comprehensively recorded on a form of test
certificate signed by the person in charge of the testing procedure and countersigned by
the contractor and four copies of every such test certificate shall be submitted to the
Owner's Authorized Representative.
E.
Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements the date and time
of the test, the ambient conditions, a fully detailed description of the test(s) carried out,
the results obtained, and any relevant performance curves.
F.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the Owner's authorized
Representative is advised in writing whenever material, apparatus or equipment is ready
for inspection or test at his own or his suppliers' premises. At least seven days notice
shall be given, and due allowance shall be made for this period of notice in drawing up
the program of works.
G.
In cases where the manufacturer or supplier of material, apparatus or equipment relies

upon type tests to prove, either wholly or in part, the suitability of his product(s), then the
Contractor shall arrange for triplicate copies of certificates giving the results of such type
tests to be submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative at the time the order is
placed.
H.
No material, apparatus or equipment, from whatever source, shall be despatched to site

until the Owner's Authorized Representative has had the opportunity to inspect it or has
given written authorization for despatch.
I.
No inspection or testing by the Owner's Consultant nor the witnessing of satisfactory

tests nor the authorizing of despatch to site shall in any way relieve the contractor of any
of his obligations under this contract, nor shall it in any way limit the right of the Owner's
authorized representative to reject such items after delivery to site if they subsequently
prove to be defective or unsatisfactory or unsuitable for their intended purpose.
J.
When the contractor has ordered equipment from a manufacturer who, in turn, has
bought-in major components from a secondary supplier, the Owner's Consultant shall
have the right to elect to inspect such components at the works of the secondary
supplier, and the contractor shall ensure, when placing his orders, that such rights are
secured.
For the purposed of this clause, inter-departmental orders within the same organization
shall be treated in the same manner as orders involving separate organizations.
K.
The Owner's Consultant shall have the right to waive, at his sole discretion, the
requirements relating to his inspection of materials, apparatus, and equipment at the
makers' works. The exercise by the Owner's authorized Representative of this right
shall not in any way relieve the contractor of his obligation to carry out the prescribed
tests and to submit test certificates.
L.
No work shall be painted or otherwise prepared for despatch until it has been inspected
by the Owner's Consultant, or inspection has been waived and despatch has been
authorized.
M.
When one or more of the Contractor's purchase orders covers the supply of a number of
like components or items of equipment, the Owner's authorized representative shall have
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16950
the right to select that one item or component of each type and rating be subjected to
type tests as described in the relevant National Standard. Other similar items may then
be subjected only to routine tests.
2 02 SITE TESTS
A.
The Contractor shall carry out all necessary checks and tests to prove that the completed
installations fully comply with specified requirements.
B.
Upon completion of the electrical installation, or any substantial section thereof, the
installation, or any substantial section thereof, the installation or that section and all of the
associated electrical equipment shall be subjected to the tests specified in the relevant
National Standards and in the IEE Wiring Regulations, together with such other tests as
may be specified in order to prove compliance with the Specification.
C.
All of the required checks and tests shall be carried out in accordance with a program to
be agreed with the Owner's Authorized Representative, and facilities shall be made
available for the Owner's Authorized Representative to be present at all such checks and
tests if he so desires.
D.
Tests not carried out in the presence of the Owners' Authorized Representative shall not
be regarded as valid for the purpose of the Contract, unless the Owner's Authorized
Representative shall not be regarded as valid for the purpose of the Contract, unless the
Owner's Authorized Representative shall have authorized the Contractor to proceed with
the testing process in his absence.
E.
Every test certificate shall include, in addition to all other requirements, the date and time
of the test, the ambient conditions, a fully detailed description of the test (s) carried out,
the result obtained, and any relevant performance curves.
F.
No material, apparatus, equipment, or installation shall be covered or otherwise

permanently concealed from view instil the Owner's Authorized Representative has had
the opportunity to inspect it, o given written authorization for covering to proceed.
G.
No work shall have a final paint finish until it has been inspected by the Owner's
Authorized Representative or painting has been authorized, unless the final paint finish is
necessary to provide the necessary climatprotection.
H.
No apparatus, equipment, plant, or installations will be recognized as complete until all of

the specified inspections and tests have been satisfactorily carried out.
I.
The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have the right to waive, at his sole
discretion, the requirements relating to his inspection of materials, apparatus equipment
and installations and the witnessing of tests thereon. The exercise by the Owner's
Authorized Representative of this right shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his
obligations to carry out the prescribed tests and to submit test certificates.
2 03 CABLE TESTING
A.
As soon as is practicable after the completion of installation and jointing of the cables
specified herein, or of any usable group of such cables, the Contractor shall carry out the
tests described below, together with such other tests and measurements to prove
compliance with this Specification and with the requirements of the IEE Wiring
Regulations.
B.
An insulation resistance test, carried out with a 'Megger' insulation tester or other similar
type of testing instrument, to measure the insulation resistance between each conductor
and the remaining conductors and between each conductor and the metallic sheath, if
any, and armouring. The test voltage to be applied shall be as follows:
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16950
Low voltage cables

High voltage cables
500 volts
not less than 1000 volts
C.
The above tests shall be carried out both before and after any voltage tests and the
insulation resistance shall not be less than the figures in BS 6346, Table, 6, for all cables
up to 3.3kv. The Contractor shall submit insulation resistance figures for cables above
3.3kv.
D.
A voltage withstand test of 15 minutes duration shall be applied in accordance with the
relevant British Standard, at the test voltage indicated in:
BS 5467, Table 7, of for cables with thermosetting insulation.
BS 5346, Table 5, for PVC insulated cables, or
E.
The Contractor shall submit proposals on the appropriate test voltage in respect of other
types of cable.
F.
An earth continuity test shall be carried out to verify that the cable armouring and metal
sheath, if any, have been properly bonded to earth.
G.
Phase-rotation, and phase-correspondence shall be tested to prove that the cables have
been correctly connected.
2 04 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD TESTS

A.
Low voltage switchboards shall be thoroughly checked for correct functioning in every
respect and shall be subjected to the following tests:
With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power fuses fitted,
the panels shall be subjected to a voltage test across the following points:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Phase to phase
Phase to neutral
Phase to earth
Neutral to earth
The voltage levels and test direction shall be in accordance with the relevant National
Standard for the equipment provided.
This shall be followed by an insulation resistance test with an approved type of 500 V test
instrument. With all electronic components and time switches removed or isolated and
with all min isolators closed and power fuses fitted, an insulation resistance of not less
than 20 Megohms shall be obtained between each of the following points:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Phase to phase
Phase to neutral
Phase to earth
Neutral to earth
2 05 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT EARTHING

A.
The Contractor shall inspect and carry out tests on all the system and equipment
earthing provisions in accordance with the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16950
B.
The method of test and the selection of suitable test instruments shall conform to the
guidelines given in the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16 th. Edition.
C.
These tests shall be carried out on all system and equipment earthing supplied, installed
and connected under this Contract.
D.
Where an existing installation has been effectively extended in relation to the system and
equipment earthing provisions supplied under this Contract, the existing system and
equipment earthing shall be inspected and tested for compliance with the IEE Wiring
Regulations.
E.
The Contractor shall inspect and re-test the system and equipment earthing provided
under this Contract thirty days prior to the end of the Defects Liability period. The
Contractor shall give the Owner's Authorized Representative seven days notice of his
intent to carry out these tests.
PART 3 - COMMISSIONING
A.

the Works, the Contractor shall duly commission each section of the electrical
installation and leave it in full working order. The term 'Commissioning' shall be deemed
to include:
1)
The energizing of electrical distribution circuits and equipments which have
previously been inspected, tested, found to be satisfactory and capable of being
energize with complete safety.
2)
The setting of electrical protective devices and systems, where relevant, in
accordance with the directions of the Owner's Authorized Representative or, failing
such directions, in accordance with sound electrical engineering practice.
3)
The starting up of all electrically powered plant and equipment.
4)
The verification of the performance of all such plant and equipment by the
carrying out, where required, of further tests and the making of all necessary
adjustments so as to obtain optimum performance.
B.
Compliance with the requirements of this Section of the Specification shall not, by itself,
in any way relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the Contract.
C.
The Contractor shall ensure that all connections and adjustments are made correctly,
and that the installations and equipment are in a completely safe and satisfactory
condition.
D.
All activities carried out by the Contractor in pursuance of the requirements of this
section of the Specification shall be carried out, or continuously supervised, by a
competent and experienced commissioning engineer.
E.
If considered necessary, the Owner's Authorized Representative will set up a

Commissioning Panel to oversee all activities relating to commissioning of installations,
plant and equipment. The Contractor shall provide appropriate representatives as
members of the Panel to act in an advisory capacity assisting the Owner's Authorized
Representative in all matters relating to the commissioning process.
F.
The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have power to appoint and independent
Commissioning Engineer to act on his behalf in the control of all activities relating to the
commissioning process, and in such matters the said Commissioning Engineer shall be
deemed to be and authorized representative of the Owner's Authorized Representative
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16950
G.
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for ensuring that all switching operations and
all work on electrical circuits and equipment which have once been energized are
carried out in a thoroughly safe manner and shall operate, and rigidly adhere to, an
approved 'permit-to-work' system. For this purpose, the Contractor shall appoint an
'authorized person' as defined in the Electricity (Factories Act) Special Regulations, and
shall communicate the name of such person in writing to the Owner's Authorized
Representative.
H.
In appropriate cases the Contractor shall nominate a particular employee as 'Switchgear

Operator' and shall ensure that all switchgear operations are carried out by the
nominated person and that such person is always available for this duty when required.
I.
The Contractor shall prepare a commissioning schedule detailing the plant to be

commissioned, the operations to be carried out, the time scale, with exact dates for
specific operations, details of requirements for water and power services, and
attendance or provisions by others. This commissioning schedule, in draft from, shall
be submitted not less than four weeks in advance of the date on which commissioning is
to commence.
J.
If required by the Owner's Authorized Representative, the Contractor shall present the
information from the commissioning schedule in the form of a flodiagram or a PERT
('Critical Path') chart.
K.
The procedures to be followed by the Contractor for commissioning the electrical

equipment and installations shall be as directed by the Owner's Authorized
Representative or, in the absence of such directions, shall be proposed by the
Contractor and submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative for approval.
L.
No connections or adjustments shall be made to plant or equipment which has already

been commissioned and set to work, except with the prior consent of the Owner's
Authorized Representative.
M.
No plant or equipment shall be charged, energized or operated without the prior

agreement of the Owner's Authorized Representative. All applicable test certificates
shall have been first submitted to the Owner's Authorized Representative.
N.
All commissioning procedures shall be carried out in a safe and satisfactory manner and
in accordance with the provisions of the Factory Acts, the Health and Safety at Work
etc. Act, and the Electricity Regulations.
O.
Following completion of commissioning, each item of equipment or, where several items
of equipment are interdependent, the complete plant shall operate continuously and
satisfactorily under normal operating conditions for a period of 72 hours without defect
of any kind. In the event of any defect or mal-operation becoming apparent during this
period the Contractor shall forthwith determine the cause and rectify it by means of
repair, replacement, adjustment or modification and the reliability run shall be recommenced. All materials, equipment and labour required to locate and rectify any such
defect shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
P.
No plant, equipment or installation will be considered as complete until the prescribed

commissioning procedures have been satisfactorily carried out and the reliability run has
been completed without untoward incident.
Q.
The Owner's Authorized Representative shall have power to require that the hole of the
plant, equipment and installations, or selected parts thereof, be re-inspected and, if
necessary, re-tested immediately before the end of the contractual maintenance period,
and the Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements with the
Owner.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section16950
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970

Section 16970 Buiding management System (BMS)
PART 1 GENERAL
1 01
A.
1 02
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawing and general provisions of contract, including general and the supplementary
conditions, and Division 1 Specification Section, apply to this section.
WORK INCLUDES
Fully integrated building management system (BMS), UL listed, incorporating direct
digital control (DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring and control,
including color graphic workstations. System major elements include without being
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1 03
A.
Central processing units.

Personal computer operator workstations.
Date storage units.
Stand-alone Data terminal units.
Data communication units.
Stand-alone Remote control units.
Portable operators terminals
Data interface units.
Communication cable.
System software.
Console.
Uninterruptible powers supply (UPS).
RELATED WORK
The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 14 Section Conveying Systems
2. Division 15 Section Basic HVAC Requirements
3. Division 15 Section Electrical Requirements for HVAC Works
4. Division 15 Section HVAC Pumps
5. Division 15 Section Boilers
6. Division 15 Section Chillers
7. Division 15 Section Terminal Units
8. Division 15 Section Electric Drive Fire Pumps
9. Division 15 Section Sewage and Sump Pumps
10. Division 15 Section Water Distribution Pumps
11. Division 15 Section Air Handling Equipment
12. Division 15 Section Central Station Air Handling Units
13. Division 15 Section Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
14. Division 16 Section Wiring Devices for Lighting Control
15. Division 16 Section Fire Alarm System
16. Electrical Specification Section Medium Voltage Switchgear AND Ring Main Unit
17. Division 16 Section Distribution Transformers
18. Division 16 Section Uninterruptable Power Supply
19. Division 16 Section Main L.V. Distribution Boards
20. Division 16 Section Motor Control Centers
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
1 04
A.
Division 16 Section Diesel Generators

Division 16 Section Sound System
Division 16 Section C.C.T.V System
Division 16 Section Telephone System
Division 16 Section Voice / Data System
SCOPE OF WORK
General: all materials and/or equipment, necessary for proper operation of the system,
not specified or described herein are to be deemed part of the specification. Perform the
work under this section and provide all labor, materials services, equipment and
accessories necessary to furnish and install all instrumentation and equipment as
indicated by the Drawings and/or as required by the Specification, which without limiting
the generality there of, consists of the followings:
1.
Master Control Communication Station: to be located in the central control room

where shown on the Drawings and to be the primary operators position for the
systems being monitored and controlled. From this position the operator is to
monitor and control all system of the Building, chillers, air handling units, pumps,
ventilation control., etc.) via a communication network at a 1 million baud
communication speed.
2.
Direct Digital Controller (DDC) or so-called field processing units (FPU): to be

located where required and allocated for distributed processing units are to be
connected together through a communication network having a 1 million baud
communication rate. Field processing units or controllers (FPU) are to be of the
preprogrammed and/or programmable type of appropriate number of input/output
points for the specified application.
3.
Interfacing panels to enable connection to physical control points via transducers,

signal conditioners, interposing relays and the like.
4.
Instrumentation, including sensors/transducers, transformers, sensing piping,

tubing as required.
5.
Control valves, dampers, actuators and accessories.
6.
Field wiring conducting communication trunks from DDC/ FPU back to central
processors in addition to interconnections between processors peripherals, etc. to
yield a complete system. This to include power supply connection from nearest
emergency panels / substations
7.
Shop drawings, as-built drawings, instruction manuals, source-code program listing

and all other documentation as required.
8.
Testing and commissioning of installation at take over.
1 05
A.
ODAC
Section 16970
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Building Management System: distributed process control system consisting of central
control, central communications, and remote control systems to monitor and control the
following building systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems control.

Smoke control.
Energy management.
Plumbing systems control.
Building and exterior lighting.
Fire alarm and detection.
Intrusion detection.
Emergency power generator.
Power supply.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
B.
ODAC
Section 16970
Central Control System: Configure central processing units, mass memory units, data
terminal units, and related software to perform the following functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Develop, store, access, and update building management data base.

Provide human operator interface with system.
Display and record system operation.
Provide central monitoring and automatic control of building systems.
C.
Central Communication System: Configure central communication units, data

communication network, and related software to control input and output between
central control system and remote control system.
D.
Remote Control System: Configure remote control units, data interface units, input
sensing devices, and output control elements to perform the following functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
F.
Process variable sensing, signal transmitting, and signal conversion for each input
point.
Signal conversion, transmitting, and operation of control drive or other element for
each output point.
Receive remote control programs and system data from central communication
system.
Manual entry of remote control programs.
Storage of data and remote control programs.
Execute remote control program commands.
Transmit local status data to central communication system.
Execute commands received from central communication system.
General Product Description:

1.
The building management system (BMS) shall integrate multiple building function
including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy
management and historical data collection.
2.
The system shall be modular in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity
and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, DDC Controllers,
Application Specific Controllers and operators devices.
3.
System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any signal device for
alarm reporting and control execution. Each DDC Controller shall operate
independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management,
operator I/O and data collection. The failure of any single component or network
connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other
operational devices.
4.
DDC Controller shall be able to access any data from, or send control command
and alarm reports directly to, any other DDC Controller or combination of
controllers on the network without dependence upon a central processing device.
DDC Controllers shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator work
stations without dependence upon a central processing device.
System Integration
A web based operator stations will be used to monitor and integrate all the building
systems while the TCP/IP protocol will be the base of communication between the
building management, security, access control, lighting control and fire alarm system.
The backbone is an Ethernet network.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
The system should support one of the open protocols like BAC net, Lon Works that can
provide INTEROPERABILITY between the different systems from different
manufacturers.
Real-time data can be displayed on the terminals, for the different systems while system
can also provide prompt identification of any malfunction. Information is processed by
from where operator or engineer can take appropriate either through LAN or Internet.
Reports and analyses can be tailored for each system and viewed on an Internet
browser. User access can be customized on a need-to-know basis.
- Fire Fighting:
The fire fighting interface shall be integrated via hardwired cable between the panel
and DDC controllers of the BMS while the integration will be limited to monitoring the
panel problems, pumps, flow switches, detectors and any other building components.
- Fire Alarm:
Each intelligent detector can be displayed on the terminal graphic based software or
Internet browser, while any alarm must be displayed on any activated terminal.
System configuration is only permitted by password to higher technical level.
- Access Control:
Each door, panel, users information could be accessed from any terminal by
password. System configuration is only permitted by password to higher technical
level.
- CCTV:
Each camera can be monitored could be accessed from any terminal by password.
System configuration is only permitted by password to higher technical level.
- Data / Points Sharing:
Any system can share information with other systems activate useful functions of
intelligent building. For example, access control can release all locks in case of a fire
alarm received from fire alarm system. CCTV start recording in case of break of
security detected by intruder detection, ect.
1 06
A.
1 07
SCHEDULE OF CONTROL POINTS

Schedule of control points included in the drawings or in the Annex to this specification
is for the control and monitoring points related to HVAC, Plumbing, and Electrical
Works. A points as referred to herein represents every analog output, analog input,
digital output and digital input to be physically connected to a FPU / DDC panel.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design Central processing unit with modular system architecture to allow expansion of
processor memory and addition of application software programs, terminal units, and
central memory units.
B.
Minimum System Configuration: Accommodate input and output points, building system
data base, and functions specified and allow for 25 % additional input/output points and
related expanded data base, without modifying system hardware or software.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
C.
Future System Expansion: Design system to be expanded to accommodate 50 %

additional input/output point and related expanded data base, without hardware or
software. Design application software programs and system data base to be
transportable to expanded central processing unit if required to accommodate specified
future expansion.
D.
Operator Data Terminal Unit: Provide operator interface functions through data terminal
unit, including manual set points and overrides, data base display and maintenance,
program loading and entry, operating system software functions, alarm display and
acknowledge, graphic display, and operation logging.
E.
Design operator display terminal data screens with the followings features:
1.
Split screen display to allow entering commands and variable while observing
status and alarm screen.
2.
Provide constant display of date, time, outside environmental conditions, and

system status.
3.
Indicate off-normal conditions in a flashing display.
F.
Design graphic display screens to percent dynamic, interactive display of process

variable and system status.
G.
Layout data terminal units to allow operator to view displays, acknowledge system
alarms and messages, manually enter data or command, and communicate over
telephone or intercom system from one seated position.
H.
Central Control System: Perform the following functions:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
Design central communication system to control input and output between central
processing units, remote control units, and data gathering units.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J.
Data communication Network: Dual redundant distributed control network.

Network Topology: Ring.
Network Media: Twisted pair.
Network Protocol: deterministic arbitration using token passing, master/slave
arrangement.
Network Transmission Speed: 1 million baud, minimum.
Remote Control System: Provided the followings functions and features:

1.
2.
3.
4.
K.
Perform optimization routine.

Display value of each input point.
Display alarm when value of any input point exceeds preset minimum or maximum
limit.
Record each alarm indication.
Record each operator-initiated action of control system.
Signal inputs.
Control outputs
Data and program memory.
Independent control and monitoring of local processes during failure of central
control or central communication systems.
Design and build all system components to be fault-tolerant.

1.
2.
3.
Satisfactory operation without damage at 11 % and 85 % of rated voltage and at

plus 3- Hertz variation in line frequency.
Static, transient and short-circuit protection on all inputs and outputs.
Protect communication lines against incorrect wiring, static transients and induced
magnetic interface.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
4.
5.
6.
L.
ODAC
Section 16970
Network-connected devices to be A.C. coupled or equivalent so that any single

device failure will not disrupt or halt network communication.
All real time clocks and file RAM to be battery-backed for a minimum 72 hour and
include local and system low battery indication.
It must be possible to receive and print out alarms at a central location even when
the workstation at that location is non-operational or taken out of service for
periodic maintenance.
Design system to continue operation of alarm display and printing at central location
and operation of remote control unit functions during removal or failure of central
processing unit.
1 08
QUALIFICATION
A.
Manufactures and installer to have an office staffed with factory-trained engineers and
technicians fully capable of providing instruction, routine maintenance and emergency
maintenance service on all system components.
B.
Manufactures and installer to have 10 years experience in design and installation of

computerized building system similar in performance to that specified herein and to
provide evidence of experience as condition of acceptance and approval.
C.
Supplier to have an in-place support facility with, spare parts inventory and all
necessary test and diagnostic equipment.
1 09
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
All electric equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC regulation, part 15
Section 15 Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic interference and be so labeled.
B.
BMS shall comply with UL 916 PAZX and 864 UDTZ and be so listed at the time of bid.
All equipment used in system is to bear appropriate UL listing label/mark to ensure
compliance.

A.
General: maintain a complete test, inspection and documentation program covering all
phases of construction and implementation of the instrumentation and control systems.
Also maintain an engineering assurance program throughout final design and
equipment selection phases of project. Quality control and engineering assurance
programs to be fully documented in a project procedures manual, which is to be
submitted for approval.
B.
Project procedure manual is to detail, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Equipment selection criteria

Design standards
Installation standards
Field personal qualification procedures such as for welders and non destructive
testing personnel
Equipment calibration procedures
Calibrated loop check procedures.
System test and start-up procedures.
Start up procedures: portions of the manual may be equipment dependent such as start
up procedures. In such cases submit these portion in accordance with the requirements
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
of sub-section SUBMITTALS. However, selection criteria, design standard, and

installation standards to be established and approved before detailed design starts.
D.
Inspection: the Engineer has the right, at all times, to inspect the work, piping material,
equipment, or quality assurance procedures as applicable to confirm that requirements
as set forth are being complied with. Provide all tools, instruments and equipment
necessary to facilitate these inspections.
E.
Inspection: cooperate with the Engineer in establishing when the various inspection or
tests will be performed during progress of the work.
F.
Obligation: the presence or activities of the Engineer are in no way to relieve the
contractor of this obligation.
G.
Inspection duties assigned to the Contractors personnel are to include, but are not
1.
Verify that all non-destructive testing personnel are qualified for the work being
done.
2.
Verify that all components received comply with the Specification and receipt,
inspection and storage of the materials comply with requirements of the
Specification.
3.
Verify that the Contractors storage facilities are maintained.
4.
Verify that rack wiring check and electrical continuity tests are conducted in
accordance with the Specification.
5.
Witness that all hydrostatic tests performed on instrument sensing lines are in
accordance with the Specification and that all tests are properly filled in signed and
submittal for approval.
6.
Witness all pneumatic leak tests performed on instruments sensing lines and
pneumatic tubing required by the Specification.
7.
Verify that all wiring insulation tests are performed in accordance with the
Specification and that all test reports are properly filled in, signed and submitted for
approval.
8.
Verify that assembly and nameplates of the transmitter racks are in accordance
with the Specification.
9.
Verify that all racks, panels and local instruments have been located in accordance
with the Specification.
10. Verify that all tubing supports are in accordance with the Specification.
11. Verify that all tubing has been installed in accordance with the Specification.
12. Verify that all repairs and revisions to instruments component and assemblies are
in accordance with the Specification.
13. Verify that all repairs and revisions to instrumentation, tubing and their components
is in accordance with the Specification.
14. Inspect in detail the tubing system or portion of the system as completed to verify
that system or portion of the system is correct and complete as specified prior to
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
the initiation of any flushing, hydrostatic test, or leak test opera.

15. Witness the construction loop inspection performed by the contractor. All items
control components to be undamaged as determined by visual examination. All
documentation as required to be complete and on file. Construction loop
inspection, as performed, to comprehensively and conclusively prove
completeness and conformity of the installation to the Drawings and Specification.
16. Verify that calibration of instrumentation and control loops is in accordance with the
approved procedures as submitted in the project procedures manual.
17. Witness the calibrated loop check and verify that all calibration reports are properly
filled in, signed and submitted for approval.
18. Witness the system operational tests on a sub-system basis to assure operational
integrity and conformance to operational requirements as specified.
19. Verify all plant documentation required for plant acceptance is in accordance with
sub-section SUBMITTALS for completeness and conformance.
1 011 TECHNICAL PROPOSALS

A.
Technical proposals shall be prepared in accordance with these Specifications. Three

copies of the proposal shall be submitted. The technical proposal shall include the
following data/information as a minimum. The order of listing here is not intended to
indicate, nor should it be construed to indicate, the relative importance of the
data/information:
1.
Information on organization capability to handle this project (management,

personnel, manufacturing, single source responsibility, etc.)
2.
Information on training program to demonstrate specification compliance.
3.
System Configuration as proposed:

a. Describe system architecture including a schematic layout with location and
type of all control panels.
b. Describe system operation, functions and control techniques.
c. Modularity.
d. Provisions against obsolescence due to technological advancement.
4.
Technical data to support the information on the hardware configuration in No. 3

above.
5.
Detailed description of all operating, command,

management software provided for this project.
6.
A signed certificate starting the Contractor has read the performance and
functional requirements, understands them and his technical proposal will comply
with all parts of the Specification.
7.
Other requirements for inclusion in the technical proposal are located throughout
this Specification.
application and energy
B.
Submit Unit Price schedule with the proposal.
C.
Submit technical proposal with pricing in accordance with instruction to bidders.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
1 012 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system configuration: interconnection wiring diagrams;

location, data characteristics, range and units for each input and output point; logic
diagram for central processing unit operating system; programming and operating
reference for central processing unit operating system; programming and operating
reference for each application and programming language provided.
C.
Product Data: Provide for each component; including sensors, control drives and
elements plug-in circuit boards, and enclosed equipment units. Include cabinet
dimension, weights, and support point locations for each item of enclosed equipment.
D.
Design Data: indicate basis of optimization algorithms.
E.
Manufactures Installation Instruction: indicate installation instruction.
F.
Manufactures certificate: certify system meets or exceeds listing requirements of

underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for fire alarm and security equipment.
G.
Submit software providers license agreement stating limits on use, copying, and
transferring software.
H.
Manufactures Field Reports: indicate acceptance of component and equipment

installation, interconnecting wiring, and weekly progress on installation and start-up of
system software.
I.
Where installation procedures, or any part thereof, are required to be in accord with the
recommendations or, the manufactures of the materials being installed, printed copies
of these recommendation shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to installation.
Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are
received.
J.
P & I or process flow diagrams: to be completed for each system and submitted for
approval. Instrument symbols and identification to be in accordance with ISA-S5.1.
K.
Technical Data Sheets: control and instrumentation technical data sheets (TDS) to be
prepared for each device. TDS to be similar to and meet the intent of ISA-S20, 1975.
L.
Loop Diagrams: Control and instrument loop diagrams prepared and furnished for all
instrument systems. Typical diagrams are not permitted. Loop diagrams are to be
unique for each loop.
M.
Equipment Installation plans: to indicate location of instrument junction boxes, individual

field instruments, transmitter racks, and routing of cable duct from junction boxes to
respective remote processing units and back to Central Control Room. This is to be
accompanied by a list of control points connected by each FPU, with indication of
related control functions. Interfacing provided is to be listed; these are to be grouped as
per standard sub-module size of digital and analog input/output boards, comprising
similar requirements; such as interposing relays amplifiers, level translators, etc.
N.
Operating Consoles: drawings detailing operating consoles, instrument panel layouts

and dimensions and control room plans.
O.
Instrument Installation: detail drawings for each field installation are to be furnished.
Details are to include but are not limited to instrument piping details, transmitter rack
details and pipe mounted equipment installation details.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
P.
Logic Diagrams detailing the operational logic are to be completed for the digital binary
operations. In addition to these drawings, operational logic descriptions are to be
prepared detailing the sequence of operation and operational constraints and
limitations. These drawings are to be in conformance with ISA-S5.2, 1976. Submit detail
for each primary and secondary processing units separately, in addition to logic
diagrams relating Central Control Room processing functions and resulting operations.
Q.
Instrument schedule listing all devices to be keyed to instrument loop number and
device numbers. Schedule to be submitted in two (2) formats; first, in an alphanumeric
listing by device type and second, a listing with equipment grouped by loop number.
Schedule to contain as a minimum the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Instrument identification number;

Service;
Flow diagram number;
Logic diagram number,
Piping diagram number;
Installation plan number;
Manufactures name, and
Processing units termination, interfacing and communication..
R.
Instrument Schedule to provide a comprehensive data source indicating where all

specific information may be found for each service. Schedule to include not only
balance of plant equipment but also that equipment furnished as part of packaged
systems and is to be noted as such.
S.
Prior to procurement of equipment submit for approval the following drawings and
documents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
T.
Prior to start of system installation and construction submit for approval the following
drawings and documents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
U.
Shop drawings for valves, dampers, transducers, transmitters, signal conditioners,

indictors, recorders, miscellaneous instruments, central operator processing unit,
consoles and ancillary;
Control loop diagrams;
Electrical elementary diagrams;
Instrument installation plans;
Detailed panel diagrams;
Point to point wiring diagrams, and
Instrument schedule, including processing unit panel termination/interface.
Prior to commencing start-up activities the documents to be submitted for approval:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
V.
Process and instrumentation flow diagrams;

Equipment specifications and completed technical data sheets;
Control logic diagrams and logic descriptions, and
Input/output points charts for every processing unit.
System construction inspection procedures;

Points calibration procedures;
Calibration technical procedures;
Plant operational system test procedures, and.
Operator and maintenance personal training curriculum.
Prior to system acceptance and turn-over and as a condition of system acceptance, the
following documents are to be submitted in four copies in accordance with the Project
General Requirements:
1.
2.
System user manual;

System maintenance manual including specification on each piece of equipment,
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3.
4.
ODAC
Section 16970
trouble-shooting charts, and preventive maintenance instructions, technical data

sheet for each instrument referenced for each application;
As-built drawings including equipment outlined dimension drawings, equipment
wiring and or piping connection drawing;
Complete supplementary information about software and hardware of system
supplied. This to include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
System block diagram (hardware);

Software functional flow diagram;
Memory map of all units;
Specific tasks performed by each processor, especially where a distributed
processing architecture is provided. These are to be clearly indicated in
functional form, and
Source and project lists of software program.
5.
Internal equipment wiring, complete with circuit diagrams for each processing unit,
board layout (single and double sided), plus edge connection schedule and lists of
all components (integrated circuits, transistors, regulators, resistors, capacitors,
etc.) plus edge-connection schedules, and
6.
Tests and calibration data pertinent to each item installed in the systems.
1 013 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of the Contract
Documents.
B.
Accept products on site and verify damage.
C.
Protect products form construction operations, dust, and debris by storing in conditioned
space.
1 014 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A.
Do not install products when temperature is not within operating range requirements.
B.
Maintain temperature between 15 and 27 degree C and relative humidity between 10

and 90 % during and after installation of central control equipment.
1 015 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A.
Furnish service and maintenance of building management system for one year from
date of substantial completion.
B.
Include installation of software revisions issued during maintenance service period.
1 016 SPARE PARTS

A.
As soon as practicable after approval of materials and equipment and, if possible, not
later than 4 months prior to the date of beneficial use, submit spare parts data for each
different item of equipment furnished. Data to include a complete source of supply, a list
of parts and supplies that are either normally furnished at no extra cost with the
purchase of the equipment, or specified herein after as EXTRA MATERIALS to be
furnished as part of the contract; and a list of additional items recommended by
manufacture to ensure efficient operation for a period of 360 days at the particular
installation. The foregoing is not to relive the contractor of any responsibilities under the
guarantee condition.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
1 017 EXTRA MATERIALS

A.
Provide special tools required for maintenance.
B.
Provide two of each plug-in circuit board.
C.
Provide 1000 sheets of continuous form paper.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 01 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Available Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Landis & Staefa
Germany
b.
Honeywell
U.S.A
c.
Trend Controls
U.K
Or equally approved.
2 02 NETWORKING COMMUNICATIONS
A.
The design of the BMS shall network operator workstations and stand-alone DDC
Controllers.
B.
Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the
building management system. The hardware configuration of the BMS network shall be
totally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs.
1.
Operator workstations and DDC controllers shall directly reside on a network such
that communications may be executed directly between DDC Controllers, directly
between workstations and between DDC Controllers and workstations;
2.
System that operates via polled response or other types of protocols that rely on a
central processor, file server, or similar device to damage panel-to-panel
communications may be considered only if a similar device is provided as a
standby. Upon a failure or malfunction of the primary central processor, the
standby shall automatically, without any operator intervention, assume all BMS
network management activities;
3.
All operator devices shall have the ability to access all point status and application
report data or execute control functions for any and all other devices. Access to
data shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment. No hardware
or software limits shall be imposed on the number of devices with global access to
the network data, and
4.
Network design shall include the following provisions.

a.
Provide high-speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report
generation from multiple controllers and upload/download efficiency between
network devices. System performance shall insure that an alarm occurring at
any DDC Controllers is displayed at workstations and/ or alarm printers within
5 seconds.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
C.
b.
Support of any combination of DDC Controllers and operator workstations

directly connected to the network.
c.
Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost.
d.
Error detection, correction and retransmission to guarantee data integrity.
e.
Synchronization of real-time clocks, to include automatic daylight savings time

updating between all DDC Controllers shall be provided.
Telecommunication Capability:
1.
Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow DDC Controllers

to communicate with remote operator stations and/or remote terminals on an
intermittent basis via telephone lines, as indicated in the sequence of operations.
2.
Auto-dial DDC Controllers shall automatically place calls to workstations to report

alarms or other significant events.
3.
D.
ODAC
Section 16970
a.
DDC Controllers shall be able to store a minimum of 10 phone numbers of at

least 20 digits. Retry a single primary number at a fixed interval until
successful.
b.
The auto-dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals, no
answers and incomplete data transfers. Provide as a
Minimum 3 secondary numbers when communications cannot be
established with the primary device.
Operators at dial-up workstations shall be able to perform all control functions; all
report functions and all database generation and modification functions as
described for workstations connected via the network. Routines shall be provided
to automatically answer calls from remote DDC Controllers. The fact that
communications are taking place with remote DDC Controllers over telephone lines
shall be completely transparent to an operator.
a.
An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by selection of any

facility by its logical name. The workstation dial-up program shall store the
phone numbers of each remote site, so the user shall not be required to
remember or manually dial telephone numbers.
b.
A PC workstation may serve as an operator device on a network, as well as a

dial-up workstation for multiple auto-dial DDC Controllers or networks. Alarm
and data file transfers handled via dial-up transactions shall not interfere with
network activity, nor shall network activity keep the workstation from handling
incoming calls.
Provide all necessary hardware and software for remote communications with all
remote processors, back-up processors and all operators input/output peripheral
devices. Controller hardware for remote communications to be modular. It is to be
possible for each channel to be individually programmed (or re-programmed) for its
function and appropriate baud rate by on-line operator software. Each communications
channel to be fully buffered, and to support asynchronous data transmission. All
communications channels to be able to communicate simultaneously to support the
real-time, multi-tasking, multi-user operating specified here. Each communication
channel to be dual- trunk fully redundant type; loading to be up to 60% of
manufacturers recommended limits.
2 03 CENTRAL PROCESS1NGS
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
A.
BMS hardware to be totally solid-state using computer oriented digital technology.

System to have a fully modular architecture permitting expansion by adding computer
memory, additional processing units application software, operator peripherals and field
hardware.
B.
BMS to be capable of supporting the following point types:

Analog Input (AI)
Analog Output (AO)
Digital Input (DI)
Digital Output (DO)
Software Duplicate Points
Software Computed Points
Software Simulated Points.
Configuration and control of any system point is not to require special software. Point
capacity of system to be a function of available system memory only.
C.
Primary Processing Unit (PPU) to be microprocessor based mini-computer, 32 bit word,

with minimum resident random access memory (RAM) capacity of 64 bytes for the
master and secondary stations processors. Processor to be provided with hard disk of
mass memory storage/access, based totally on Winchester technology, with storage
capacity of at least 4 Gega bytes for the master processor and 2 Gega bytes for the
secondary processors. (26 M-bits minimum transfer rate: 45 million-seconds are access
time).
D.
Secondary Processing Unit (SPU) to be stand alone or networked DDC panel, fully user
programmable, menu driven, command driven or color graphics. SPU is to have dual 32
bit CPUs and a modem access. The SPU is to include all the software necessary to
program end devices and zone controllers and to have up to 150 input/output zone
controller. SPU is to have a 72 hours battery back-up of the data base stored in RAM.
Each SPU is to have the capability to communicate and program up to 150 zone
controllers.
E.
A user friendly programming language is to be used to program the SPU and the zone
controller connected to it. Further the panel is to have the predefined software listed
below:
-
F.
input points
output points
pulse points
annual schedule
weekly schedule
alarm
controller
totalizer
trend log
zone controller access points
optimized start
system display
user access
scale range
load shed
Zone Processing Unit or Controller (ZPU) to be distributed stand alone DDC controller
for control of various unitary and terminal equipment or controls with built in network
communication for integration into the BMS system. Zone controller is to have flexible
control strategies with user configurable algorithms that reside in a non-volatile memory.
Zone controllers are to have a serial port that will allow the connection of electronic
sensors, set point adjustment, and overrides at service tools.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
G.
Loading/Backup Facilities: provide as an integral of an IBM PC or compatible, all

hardware required to load, reload, or backup the memory of the system and the
software to execute specified functions. Loading of system to be through use of highspeed, mass storage media, such as magnetic tape cartridge or floppy diskette. This
same media to be used for making on-line system backups and for remote historical
data storage.
H.
Data Dumping: if SPU OR ZPU memory fails, the operator shall not have to manually
re-enter system data. Necessary hardware and software are to be supplied to:
-
allow periodic dumping of operator entered data onto another storage media online
reload this data as the operator desires.
data dumping are not to interrupt any other system operation (such as operator
input/output, scanning of field hardware, application software execution, etc.)
2 04 DDC CONTROLLER
A.
Stand-alone Controllers shall be microprocessor-based with a minimum word size of 32

bits. They shall also be multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time digital control processors
consisting of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication
controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules. Controller size shall be
sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list.
B.
Each DDC Controller shall have sufficient memory, a minimum of 1 megabyte, to

support its own operating system and databases, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Control processes
Energy management applications
Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level
alarm for each point in the system.
Historical/trend data for points specified
Maintenance support applications
Custom processes
Operator I/O
Dial-up communications
Manual override monitoring
Each DDC Controller shall support:

1.
Monitoring of the following types of inputs, without the addition of equipment

outside the DDC Controller cabinet:
a.
Analog inputs
1. 4-20 mA
2. 0-10 Vdc
3. Thermistors
4. 1000 ohm RTDs
5. PT1000
6. LG-Ni 1000
7. PT100
8. 0-20mA
b.
Digital inputs
1.
2.
3.
Dry contact closure

Pulse Accumulator
Voltage Sensing
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2.
Direct control of pneumatic and electronic actuators and control devices. Each
DDC Controller shall be capable of providing the following control outputs without
the addition of equipment outside the DDC Controller cabinet:
a.
Digital outputs (contact closure)

1.
2.
3.
b.
Contact closure maintained

Contact closure pulsed
Contact closure staged
Analog outputs
1.
2.
3.
D.
ODAC
Section 16970
0-20 psi
4-20 mA
0-10 Vdc
Each DDC Controller shall have a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future point
connection. The type of spares shall be in the same proportion as the implemented I/O
functions of the panel, but in no case shall there be less than two spares of each
implemented I/O type. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication
controllers complete so that the implementation of a point only requires the addition of
the appropriate point input/output termination module and wiring.
1.
Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and have at
least 25% of the memory available for future use.
E.
DDC Controllers shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for
operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals,
modems and portable operators terminals. DDC Controllers shall allow temporary use
of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected
modems, printers or terminals.
F.
As indicated in the point I/O schedule, the operator shall have the ability to manually
override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC Controller via local,
point discrete, on-board hand/off/auto operator override switches for digital control type
points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches
shall be operable whether the panel processor is operational or not.
1.
Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC Controllers key-accessed

enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorized
overrides.
2.
DDC Controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator
that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC Controllers shall also collect
override activity information for reports.
G.
DDC Controllers shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input and
output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an
operator I/O device. Graduated intensity LEDs or analog indication of value shall also
be provided for each analog output. Status indication shall be visible without opening
the panel door.
H.
Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication

diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC Controller shall provide both
local and remote annunciation of any detected failures, low battery conditions or
repeated failure to establish communication.
Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network termination, as was all field point
terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standards
587-1980.
I.
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
J.
ODAC
Section 16970
In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all DDC
Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile
memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery
backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a
minimum of 72 hours.
1.
Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC Controller shall automatically resume
full operation without manual intervention.
2.
Should DDC Controller memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the
capability of reloading the DDC Controller via the local RS-232C port, via telephone
line dial-in or from a network workstation PC.
2 05 SMOKE MANAGEMENT REMOTE CONTROL PANEL

A.
Components: The smoke managements remote control panel is to be located in the

main BMS room and to be complete with all necessary instruments, controls, devices,
relays, switches, push buttons, pilot lights, etc. and to be factory pre-wired to provide full
control and monitoring of the smoke management system of the complex in accordance
with NFPA 92A B and 101 requirements, including the following:
-
Start stop push buttons for every AHU & fan motor.
Red-green indicating lamps for every AHU & fan motor.
Labels for control devices of every AHU & fan motor.
Mimic panel showing locations of equipment
Interface requirements with BMS.
Detail to be submitted for approval.

B.
Open-close switches for every motorized smoke danger.
Scope of Work: The scope of the smoke management remote control panel is to include
all necessary field wiring, cabling, raceways, labeling, etc. from the remote control panel
to all relevant equipment, motor control panels/centers including wiring termination and
labeling at both ends, and coordination with the equipment and motor control
panel/center suppliers to provide all necessary interface devices and installations inside
their equipment.
2 06 DDC CONTROLLER RESIDENT SOFTWARE FEATURES

A.
General:
1.
2.
B.
All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this

specification shall be provided.
The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral
part of DDC Controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher-level
computer for execution.
Control Software Description:

1.
The DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform the following pre- tested
control algorithms:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Two-position control
Proportional control
Proportional plus integral control
Proportional, integral, plus derivative control
Control loop tuning
Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of times each
piece of equipment may be cycled
within any one-hour period:
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3.
ODAC
Section 16970
The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations during
start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start
commands to heavy electrical loads.
4.
C.
Upon the resumption of normal power, each DDC Controller shall analyze the
status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling
and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operations.
DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform any or all the following energy
management routines:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
D.
Time-of-day scheduling.
Calendar-based scheduling.
Holiday scheduling.
Temporary schedule overrides
Start-Stop Time Optimization.
Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover.
Night setback control.
Enthalpy switchover (economizer).
Peak Demand Limiting.
Temperature-compensated duty cycling.
Fan speed / CFM control.
Heating/cooling interlock.
Hot water reset.
Chilled water reset.
Chiller sequencing.
a. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator
intervention and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization.
DDC Controllers shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defined by the
user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines:
1.
It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Any system measured point data or status.

Any calculated data.
Any results from other processes.
User-defined constants.
Arithmetic functions (+, -, *, / square root, exp, etc.).
Boolean logic operators (and/or, exclusive or, etc.).
On-delay/off-delay/one-shot timers.
Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Time interval.
Time-of-day.
Date.
Other processes.
Time programming.
Events (e.g., point alarms).
3.
A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any
and all other DDC Controllers on the network. In addition, a single process shall be
able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC Controllers on the
network.
4.
Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator

I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified
device or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a
printer or pager.
18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
5.
E.
The custom control-programming feature shall be documented via English

language descriptors.
Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to

operator devices. Each DDC Controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm
analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms,
minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC
Controllers ability to report alarms be affected by either operator or activity at a PC
workstation, local V/O device or communications with other panels on the network:
1.
All alarm or point change reports shall include the points English language
description and the time and date of occurrence.
2.
The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms
shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response
to critical alarms. A minimum of six priority levels shall be provided for each point.
Point priority levels shall be combined with user definable destination categories
(PC, printer, DDC Controller, etc.) to provide full flexibility in defining the handling
of system alarms. Each DDC Controller shall automatically inhibit the reporting of
selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability
to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point.
3.
Alarm reports and messages will be directed to a user-defined list of operator

devices or PCs.
4.
In addition to the points descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to
print, display or store a 200 character alarm message to more fully describe the
alarm condition or direct operator response.
a.
5.
F.
ODAC
Section 16970
Each DDC Controller shall be capable of storing a library of at least 50 alarm

messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points in the
Controller.
In dial-up applications, operator-selected alarms shall initiate a call to a remote

operator device.
A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or

automatically sample, store and display system data for points as specified in the I/O
summary:
1.
DDC Controllers shall store point history data for selected analog and digital inputs
and outputs:
a.
Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point,
regardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored in
each DDC Controllers point group. Two methods of collection shall be allowed
either by a pre-defined time interval or upon a pre-defined change of value.
Sample intervals of 1 minute to 7 days shall be provided. Each DDC Controller
shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data and shall be capable
of storing a minimum of 25000 data samples.
2.
Trend data shall be stored at the DDC Controllers and uploaded to the workstation
when retrieval is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either user-defined
interval, manual command or when the trend buffers are full. All trend data shall be
available for use in 3rd party personal computer applications.
3.
DDC Controllers shall also provide high resolution sampling capability for
verification of control loop performance. Operator-initiated automatic and manual
loop tuning algorithms shall be provided for operator-selected PID control loops as
identified in the point I/O summary. Provide capability to view or print trend and
tuning reports.
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
G.
I.
a.
In automatic mode, the controller shall perform a step response test with a
minimum one-second resolution, evaluate the trend data, calculate the new
PID gains and input these values into the selected LOOP statement.
b.
For troubleshooting in manual mode, the operator shall be able to select

variables to override default values. Calculated PID gains shall then be
reviewed before they are inserted into the select LOOP statement.
c.
Loop shall be capable of being initiated either locally at the DDC Controller,
from a network workstation or remotely using dial-in modems. For all loop
tuning functions, access shall be limited to authorized personnel through
password protection.
DDC Controllers shall automatically accumulate and store run-time hours for digital
input and output points as specified in the point I/O summary.
1.
2.
H.
ODAC
Section 16970
The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for run-time totalization.
Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
DDC Controllers shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on
a daily, weekly or monthly basis for user-selected analog and digital pulse input type
points as specified in the point I/O summary.
1.
Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to

99,999.9 units (e.g., KWH, gallons, BTU, tons, etc.).
2.
The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
3.
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user- specified
messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
DDC Controllers shall have the ability to count events such as the number of times a
pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be performed on a
daily, weekly or monthly basis for points as specified in the point I/O summary.
1.
The event totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a
minimum of 9,999.9 events before reset (e.g., KWH, gallons, BTU, tons, etc.).
2.
The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less
3.
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user- specified
messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
2 07 PORTABLE OPERATORS TERMINAL (POT)

A.
Provide two portable operator terminals with a minimum LCD display of 80 characters
by 25 lines and a full-featured keyboard. The POT shall be handheld and plug directly
into individual distributed control panels as described below. Provide a user-friendly,
English language prompted interface for quick access to system information, not codes
requiring look-up charts.
B.
Functions of the Portable Operators Terminal connected at distributed control

processors shall be:
1.
Access all DDC Controllers on the network.
2.
Backup and/or restore DDC Controller data bases for all system panels, not just
the DDC Controller connected to.
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
3.
Display all point, selected point and alarm point summaries.
4.
Display trending and totalization information.
5.
Add, modify and/or delete any existing or new system point.
6.
Command, change set point, enable/disable any system point.
7.
Program and load custom control sequences as well as standard energy

management programs.
8.
Provide connection capability at a room sensor to access controller information.
9.
Provide status, setup and control reports.
10. Modify, select and store controller database.

11. Command, change set point, enable/disable any controller point.
C.
If the same Portable Operators Terminal cannot be used for all control processors,
provide separate POTs to accomplish the above functional requirements.
D.
Provide as a minimum, a POT connection in each mechanical room capable of

accessing entire system information.
E.
Connection of a POT to a distributed control processor shall not interrupt nor interfere
with normal network operation in any way, prevent alarms from being transmitted or
preclude centrally initiated commands and system modification.
F.
Portable operator terminal access to controller shall be password-controlled.
2 08 OPERATOR PERIPHERAL DEVICES

A.
General: operator peripheral device communications, here designated as Man- Machine

Interface (MMI) to be handled simultaneously through various devices generally
categorized as software and hardware. Each device may be connected in a direct
proprietary, leased phone line, or dial-up phone line application.
B.
Standards: all peripheral devices to utilize ASCII (American Standard Code for
Information Interchange) code and to be interfaced to the processing units with standard
RS232 port. Communication versatility is to comply with all methods previously
specified herein.
C.
Operator Station to comprise multiple operator peripheral input/output devices, which

can all, be used simultaneously. Characteristics of each device and the station to be
totally on line definable and completely independent of each other. If any device should
experience a failure, the system to automatically transfer its information to another
device.
D.
Operator Access to system to be restricted by a software coding process. Systems,

which provide only manual key lock accessibility, are not acceptable. This coding
process to restrict:
-
Peripheral devices an operator may interface to

Point groupings an operator may access
Command groupings an operator may access
Specific command functionality and point control that an operator has authority
over.
The above authority keys to be software programmable while system is fully online
with at least six (6) priority levels. Each operator authority code to consist of from one to
eleven alphanumeric characters, each individually definable and modifiable through
keyboard entry while the system is online. Minimum of 50 authority codes to be
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
provided. Each authority code to have the following characteristics:

-
Authority access code

Operator initials
Up to a 24 alphanumeric operator descriptor
Systems authority access timer.
Unit is to automatically create hardcopy record when an operator has been granted
access. This record to include date and time, which device and which operator was
granted access. System to also have capability to store this record historically (with or
without associated hardcopy record) with future retrieval/analysis capability, should this
mode of recording be preferred. Operator access to be terminated either by operator
command or automatically by the system as predetermined by the authority access
timer.
Operator to have the ability to command points, request information, select entry
method, enter memory changes and edit any number of characters without having to
retype an entire line/screen.
E.
Operator Entry: there are to be multiple methods of operator entry. These to consist of,
but are not limited to, the following:
1.
tutorial method used as a prompting aid to assist an operator each step of the way
in executing the command function
2.
Dedicated method, which will bypass the tutorial method to allow a quick, direct
command syntax/sequence for system processing. Systems without a direct
command are unacceptable
3.
Template method used for mass repetitive/data entry of information and

commands. This method to also be used for data base generation, including such
items as point definition, graphic generation, report creation, and custom/DSC
programming/ translation.
Any method of entry is to be verified by the system prior to execution. Any invalid
entries to be highlighted by the system for operator correction. Operator to be able to
request help in any mode of operation at any time to aid in command entry. This help
request to convert mode or provide aid lists on the request parameters. Any operator
entry is not to inhibit any change-of-state COS reporting. Each time an operator
command is issued the system to automatically create a hardcopy record.
F.
Function Keys: as an aid to the operator, the system MMI to provide dedicated function
keys (DFK) for common/repetitive operator functions. These functions to be executed by
single operator keystroke. Utilization of dedicated function keys is not to inhibit any COS
reporting or any other simultaneous functions that operator may be performing. Provide
at least 12 DFK/keyboard. Different keyboards to be programmed to deal with specific
areas or sub-systems (such as electrical, HVAC), although it is also to be possible for
any one to take over completely. This to be performed to aid operators in sharing their
duties. Clear markers to be affixed to each dedicated function key, giving its actual
function:
G.
Printers: system printers to provide hardcopy data retention of COS, operator initiated
actions, management reports, graphics and trended information. Printers which can be
interfaced include the following:
-
Color printer
Receive only (RO) printer
Main control station to be provided with one color and two receive only printers.
Secondary stations to be provided with one color and one receive printer.
22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
H.
ODAC
Section 16970
Modem: Operator station shall be capable of remote communication through a

dedicated auto dial-out/auto answer dial-in modern. The modem shall be capable of
interface with the network computer through a standard EIA RS232-C connection.
Speed/data communication rate shall be 19200 baud minimum (or latest standard). An
operator accessing the system via a modem shall be capable of executing all
commands permissible by his access level. Modem communication shall at not time
interfere with the operation and performance of the network computer or the direct
digital field control units.
2 09 PERSONAL COMPUTER
HARDWARE
A.
OPERATOR
WORKSTATION
BMS Console: Provide multi-bay modular console, made of heavy gauge steel, properly
finished and painted to match surrounding (to Architects approval), to accommodate
the BMS equipment including monitors, keyboards, printers, CPUs, wiring blocks, etc.
Monitor modules within the console to be properly titled to suit operator position and
eliminate glare.
Provide four numbers scientifically designed universal task arm-chairs, back rest type,
with gas lift cylinder for seat height adjustment, and finished with carpet castors for base
and back to Architects approval.
B.
Personal computer operator workstations shall be provided for command entry,

information management, network alarm management and database management
functions. All real-time control functions shall be resident in the DDC Controllers to
facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability.
1.
C.
D.
Workstation shall consist of a color monitor, personal computer of specifications as

described under central processing and provided with CD ROM drive, 3-1/2
diskette drive, mouse and 101-key enhanced keyboard. Personal computer shall
be an IBM PS/2 or faster clock speed.
Provide a printer (RO) for recording alarms, operator transactions and systems reports,
meeting the following minimum requirements:
1.
132 column/270 character per second print speed.
2.
24 x 24 DOT matrix character letter quality output.
3.
Compressed mode option for 220 characters per line.
4.
Software selectable under, emphasized, double strike and expanded (double

width) characters capability.
5.
Adjustable line spacing of 6 or 8 lines per inch.
6.
Adjustable tractor for 5 inch to 15 inch paper widths.
7.
96 ASCII upper and lower case character set.
Provide a color printer for printing of graphics and any other screen displays. Printer
shall include as a minimum:
1.
80 Column tractor-feed for normal use with ability to switch to friction feed of single
sheets of paper without any mechanical adjustments.
2.
360 x 360 Dot/Inch image resolution.
3.
Draft and letter quality print selection for alpha-numeric operations.
4.
Four color mix capability to provide true color printing of screen graphics.
5.
Three built-in letter quality fonts from selectable front panel buttons.
6.
64K Buffer to store complete graphics for printing.
23
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
7.
ODAC
Section 16970
Include colour kit.
2 010 CATHODE RAY TUBE (CRT)

A.
General: Provide Cathode Ray Tubes (CRT) and keyboards to display real time data,
allow operator commands perform data base generation and report system activity.
B.
CRTs connected to the system to include color CRT with direct video capability having
minimum 480 mm diagonal display with minimum of 48 lines and 80 character/column
screen with refresh rate of 60 times per second. The display area shall have a
resolution of 1024 x 840 pixels. Format of screen to permit output of dynamic color
displays and/or summaries specified hereinafter, while concurrently displaying the most
recent COS occurrence. It is to have detachable, tactile feedback keyboard having
standard typewriter layout plus 10-key numeric keypad and dedicated function keys.
1.
The CRT shall be capable of displaying 17 colors selected from a palette of 256
colors. The minimum screen diagonal measure shall be 19 inches.
2.
A digital display clock shall display on the monitor at all times. Provision for
manually resetting it shall be provided. It shall be a 24 hour real time clock and
seven day calendar to provide data for logging.
3. Network computer keyboard and color graphic CRT shall be the primary means of
operator access to the system, providing the operator interface for the entire
system.
C.
Format CRT to include and display in an individual dedicated and protected area of the
viewing screen the following dynamic information:
1.
2.
Current time, date and day of week (including holidays)

highest priority unacknowledged COS
3.
Visual indication of the type of alarm/off-normal condition still active after

acknowledgement
4.
Current operator identification
5.
Current status of three points considered critical for that operators CRT system
advisory alarm messages
6.
Operator work area to display various forms of point information, issue commands
and data base generation functions.
Formats are to permit the out of various forms of point displays specified hereinafter,
while concurrently displaying the most recent COS occurrence. Furthermore, while this
information is displayed, the operator to also be able to enter commands to the system.
D.
System Display to be a dynamic output, updating to the current point condition

automatically at least twice a minute. This to be realized for the specified extend ability
capacity. System response to a keyboard initiated command or to an alarm, however, to
be maximum of 100 MS, including artificial delay to allow for a reliable
acknowledgement status, free of switch bounce, contact bounce etc.
E.
Any and all CRT screen images to be printable upon single keystroke. While screen
image is being printed, the system is not to inhibit operator utilization of CRT.
F.
Color CRT to output chromatic system graphic displays as specified. These chromatic
graphic displays to detail all mechanical and electrical systems listed in the schedule
attached to this Specification. Operator request for a chromatic graphic display is to
cause associated system to be automatically selected and outputted on viewing screen.
When a point is in alarm on the CRT, the operator to be able to display a graphic with a
single keystroke.
24
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
2 011 FIELD DEVICES AND CONTROLS

A.
Transducers: to include, but are not necessarily limited to, temperature sensors,
pressure switches or level switches. Transducer is a device that converts information
about a physical parameter from form in which it is received to some other form, e.g.,
pressure to voltage. It is the primary element in an instrumentation and control system,
is inserted in the process flow stream, and provides the signal that can be read,
recorded, alarmed or provides control within a process.
B.
Flow Switch to be vane actuated type, designed to mount to pipeline with threaded
coupling 50 mm NPT. Suitably shaped and beveled coupling is welded to pipe and flow
switch is threaded directly into it. Flow switch to be designed for vertical installation on
horizontal pipelines and to be marked to indicate direction of flow. Actuating vane is
linked to pivoted mercury switch. When vane moves with increase in flow it will trip the
switch. Screw fasteners securing actuating vane to be back welded for added safety.
Switch to be SPDT sealed mercury switch with rating 13 amperes. All materials subject
to wetting to be 316 stainless steel. Switch to be in NEMA 4 housing. Conduit
connection to housing to be 20 mm NPT. Perform necessary tests to assure that flow
switch will be operational at specified flow rates. Repeatability of flow rate actuation
point is to be within 0.1 %.
C.
Pressure Switch to be flexible diaphragm type, with diaphragm sealed in place with 0
ring. Diaphragm and ring to be of Buna-N. Diaphragm seals out the process fluid but
transfers pressure variations directly to a spring, based piston. Pre-stressed spring to be
adjustable to calibrate operating point of switch. Switch element to be a snap action
contact transfer type transferring on 0.55 mm movement. Switch to be electrically rated
at 480 volt (max) at 15 amps., AC service, and 125 volt, 0.5 amp, DC resistive load.
Pressure connections to be sized for 12 mm NPT fittings and pipe. Electrical
connections use 20 mm NPT conduit. Housings to be weather tight and conform to
NEMA 4 ratings.
D.
Differential Pressure Elements to be bellows type with liquid fill. Bellows and center
plate to be completely filled with clean, non corrosive, low freezing point liquid, and to
stand repeated over-ranging in excess of working pressure of instrument housing
without causing calibration change. Temperature compensation to be provided for the
fill. Torque tube assembly to be an integral part of the bellows assembly to transmit
motion. Torque tube assembly to be so designed that it is installed in a preloaded
condition to prevent backlash as it rotates through its complete range. Rotation of
torque tube for full-scale differential pressure to be 8 deg.+/-10%. Unto operate within
temperature limits of-5 to +55 deg C. Process connections to be 12 mm NPT.
E.
Level Switches: where application warrants level switches to be capacitance type.

Material or liquid level variations at sensing probe to be sensed and converted by
transmitter into a directly proportional DC current output signal. Transmitter to have
voltage stabilized oscillator, which drives an LC bridge. Detector probe is one leg of
bridge. When material or liquid level is at its lowest point on detector probe, the bridge is
in balance and transmitter output is at its lowest value. As material level rises in the
probe, the bridge becomes unbalanced. This imbalance produces an AC signal
proportional to level of material on sensing probe. Integrated circuit operational
amplifiers convert AC signal into transmitters DC output current signal. This signal is to
operate a DPDT integrally located relay to provide alarm indications as required by
applications.
Operating characteristics of transmitting unit to be as follows:
line voltage
:
220 V AC +/-10%, 50 hertz
power
:
20 watts
line variation
:
+/-0.5%/.
operating temperature
:
-5 deg. C to +55 deg. C
25
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
temperature sensitivity :
zero stability
span adjustment
terminal adjustment
output linearity
:
repeatability
output relays, DPDT
transmitter enclosure
ODAC
Section 16970
0.01% per deg F maximum

:
. 0.01 pf per deg F maximum
:
10 to 3000 pf
:
O to 250 pf
+/-0.5 %
:
+/-1 %
:
10 A 220 V AC non-inductive
:
NEMA 4.
Level Switches probe is to be the primary sensing element of the system. It is to be

designed to be intrinsically safe and is to be furnished with a cast iron conduit junction
fitting. It is to be connected to transmitter through coaxial cable. Probe is to be
fabricated of stainless steel.
F.
Transmitters basically consist of an apparatus directly coupled to the transducers

element that modifies the process variable information so that an electric signal may be
transmitted to some remote receiver. Signal used wherein is a current varying from 4.0
to 20.0 mA DC that proportionately represents from 0 to 100% of the process variable.
Receiver may be an indicator, recorder, controller or signal modifier.
G.
Pressure Indicating Transmitter (PIT): to be high stability transducer utilizing solid-state

circuitry. Output is a 4.0 to 20.0 mA DC signal proportional to sensed pressure.
Accuracy of instrument to be 0.25 % of span. Two barrier type terminals for No.14 wire
plus ground connections to be provided. Process pressure connections to be made
through 6 mm NPT. Conduit for electrical connections to be 20 mm NPT. Instrument to
be operational in a thermal environment of from -5 deg C to +55 deg C.
(PIT): to be supplied with integrally mounted indicator. Indicator to be high- impact
polycarbonate sealed 89 mm diameter weatherproof meter. Mounting to be 50 mm
conduit with terminals in type T conduit box. Accuracy not to be less than 98% and
input impedance not more than 10 ohms. Scale to be 6 cm long calibrated in kPa.
Mechanism to be a jeweled pilot, moving magnet traveling 80 deg. It is to accept a 4-20
mA DC input.
Perform necessary tests to ensure that PIT meets all operational and manufacturer
specifications.
H.
Pressure Transmitter (PT): to be high stability transducer utilizing solid state circuitry.
Output is a 4.0 - 20.0 mA DC signal proportional to sensed pressure. Accuracy of
instrument to be 0.25% of span. Two barrier type terminals for No.14 wire plus ground
connections to be provided. Process pressure connections to be made through 6 mm
NPT. Conduit for electrical connections to be 20 mm NPT. Instrument to be operational
in a thermal environment of from -29 deg C to +39 deg C.
Perform necessary tests to ensure that pressure transmitter meets all operational
manufacturer specifications.
I.
Temperature Indicating Transmitter (TIT): to be an electronic instrument with

interchangeable elements of the resistance type (RTD) capable of converting
temperature information to a proportional 0.5 VDC signal. Signal to be read at a local
integral indicator and to be capable of being transmitted to a receiver located at 1600 m
from transmitter. Instrument to be of corrosive resistant and weatherproof construction.
Unit to be dust tight and conform to Class II Group G Div. 2. Input-to-output accuracy to
be 0.5% of span with repetition of 0.1% of span exclusive of the RTD. Internal
connections to be a barrier terminal strip through standard 20 mm NPT conduit fittings.
TIT: integral indicator to have clear glass or polycarbonate window. Shale scale with
black markings and red pointer is to provide indication. Effective length of scale to be
not less than 150mm.
26
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
Perform all necessary tests to ensure that temperature indicating transmitter meets all
operational and manufacturers specifications.
J.
Field System Temperature Transmitter: to be installed where shown on the Drawings.

Transmitters (systems) to be SAMA Class II. Enclosure to be NEMA 4. Bulb to be an
adjustable union, 316SS, bendable and 45 cm long extension. Bulb to be 10 mm
diameter, 100 mm in length, with an insertion length of 150 mm. Capillary to be 316SS,
insertion length 150 mm, lagging extension 80 mm and pipe connection 25 mm socket
weld. Transmitter output 0.5 V DC signal proportional to temperature.
K.
Level Indicating Transmitters (LIT) for compression tank gauging to be positive

displacement type. This displacer senses liquid level by remaining relatively stationary.
As level changes, displacer becomes more or less submerged and creates a buoyancy
force into a proportional 4.0 to 20 mA signal. Functional characteristics of unit to include
the following:
-
Power supply - 24V to 95V to field determined

Accuracy - plus or minus 0.5 % of span
Repeatability - 0.1 % of span
Span adjustment - 10 % to 100 % of sensing element length
Zero adjustment - 100 % of sensing element length
Voltage sensitivity - less than 0.01 % of sensing element range per volt change
Ambient temperature limits to be from -23 deg C to 71 deg C.
Displacer cage to be of fabricated steel ANSI 600 lb. rating. Length 810 mm. Equalizing
connection to be screwed fittings, 50 mm NPT. Displacer float and connecting materials
to be fabricated of stainless steel.
L.
Level Indicating Transmitter (LIT): integrally mounted transmitter, not less than 150 mm
in diameter. There are to be screwdriver adjustments for both span and zero
adjustment. Electrical connections to be through 20 mm NPT fittings. An indicator
receiving a 4.0 to 20.0 mA signal calibrated in level indications is to be integrally
mounted with transmitter. It is to be in a NEMA 4 enclosure. Dial to have black numerals
on a white background and to be not less than 75 mm in diameter. Electrical
connections to be through 20 mm NPT fittings.
M.
Control Valves:
a.
3-Way Valves, Modulating, Mixing: low voltage, 3-way, mixing, proportional, spring
return type, providing modulating control of water flow through operation of motor
actuator and valve linkage in response to signal from proportional controller. Valve
similar to Honeywell model V5013A, motor model M945A and valve linkage model
Q618A or approved equal and having the following features:
Valves 15 to 50 mm sizes, with two inlet and one outlet screwed end connections,
cast bronze body, stainless steel stem, brass plug, integral brass seat and spring
loaded, self-adjusting, Teflon cone packing. Spring return type motor, with oilimmersed gear train, die-cast aluminum case, single 160-degree stroke, doubleended crankshaft, die-cast aluminum cover with built-in transformer and spring to
return motor to bypass position on power failure.
Linkage directly mounted on motor, without adjustment requirements and
comprising roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with 70 kg
seal-off force.
Valve rated 100 deg. C maximum water temperature and 1033 kPa maximum
water pressure. Motor rated 50 deg. C maximum ambient temperature.
b.
3-Way Valves Modulating, Diverting: low voltage, 3-way, diverting, proportional
27
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
reversible type, providing modulating cool by-pass water flow through operation of
motor actuator and valve linkage in response to signal from proportional controller.
Valve similar to Honeywell model V5013C, motor model M944A and valve linkage
model Q618A or approved equal and having the following features:
Valves 65 mm and 80 mm sizes, with one inlet and two outlet flanged end
connections, cast iron body, stainless steel stem, bronze plug, removable brass
seat and spring loaded, self-adjusting, Teflon cone packing.
Reversing type motor, with oil-immersed gear train, die- cast aluminum case, single
160 degree stroke, double- ended crankshaft, die-cast aluminum cover with built- in
transformer and direct drive feedback potentiometer.
comprising roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with 70 kg
seal-off force,
Valve rated 100 deg. C maximum water temperature and 1033-kPa maximum
c.
3-Way Valves, Modulating, Diverting: low voltage, 3-way, diverting, proportional,

reversing type, providing modulating control of by-pass water flow through
operation of motor actuator and valve linkage in response to signal from
proportional controller. Valve similar to Honeywell model V5013C, motor model
M944C and valve linkage model Q601E or approved equal and having the
following features:
Valves 100 mm to 150 mm sizes, with one inlet and two outlet flanged end
connections, cast iron body, stainless steel stem, bronze plug, removable bronze
seat and spring loaded, self-adjusting, Teflon cone packing.
Reversing type motor, with oil-immersed gear train, die-cast aluminum case, dualstroke (90 and 160 degrees), double-ended crankshaft, die-cast aluminum cover
with built-in transformer and direct drive feedback potentiometer.
Linkage directly mounted on motor, with lift adjustment requirements and
comprising roller, slide mechanism and cam and stem position.
Valve rated 100 deg. C maximum water temperature and 1033-kPa maximum
d.
2-Way Valves Modulating: low voltage, 2-way, proportional, spring return type,
providing modulating control of water flow through operation of motor actuator and
valve linkage and in response to signal from proportional controller. Valve similar to
Honeywell model V5011A, motor model M945A and linkage Q618A or approved
equal and having the following features:
Single seated valve, equal percentage flow characteristic, straight-through pattern;
screwed end connections, bronze body and removable brass seat on 15 to 40 mm
sizes; flanged end connections, cast iron body and removable bronze seat on 50 to
150 mm sizes; stainless steel stem and composition disc with removable throttling
plugs.
Spring return type motor, with oil-immersed gear train, die-cast aluminum case.
Single 160 degree stroke, double-ended crankshaft, die-cast aluminum cover with
built in transformer and spring to return motor to closed position on power failure.
comprising roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with 710
N seal-off force.
Valve rated 115 deg. C maximum water temperature and 860 kPa maximum
28
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
pressure for flanged end connections and 1030 kPa for screwed end connections.
Motor rated 50 deg. C maximum ambient temperature.
N.
Electric Actuators:
1.
Valve actuator to drive stem of valve by transmitting drive of synchronous motor

into linear motion using worm gear transmission. Type similar to Honeywell model
M72 O or approved equal and having the following features:
Stem of motor connected to valve stem by button retainer connection.
Accessories including internal force sensor to switch off motor when force on stem
exceeds factory set force, return spring or hand wheel used on power failure and
end limit switch for status indication.
2.
O.
P.
Damper Actuator to provide liner motion for damper control without converter for 2position control and with electronic signal converter for modulating damper.
Accessories including linkage for head mounting. Type similar to Honeywell model
M7503A or approved equal:
Indicators: are required for operating personnel to monitor the several process control
variables. They are located in control panels. Indicator may be operated electrically,
pneumatically or provide a direct indication. Readout area may be scale and printer or
level glass.
1.
Electrical indicators are essentially DArsonval movements responding to a terms

of 4.0 to 20.0 mA DC. As such they are millimeters calibrated in terms of the
process variable. Meters to have 115 mm dial faces with 270 deg scale of black
numerals on white background. Meter to have nominal accuracy of not less than
0.5 % of full scale. Electric indicators to have a zero setting control.
2.
Pneumatically Operated indicators (locally mounted): to be standard C shaped

bourdon tube system. Bourdon tube to be fabricated from 316 stainless steel.
Indicator to be manufactured Grade A (1.0 %) accuracy, ANSI 840.1. Dials to be
uniformly graduated with black marking on white background and covering 270 deg
of circular scale. Pointer to be adjustable for an accurate zero-set. Connections to
indicator to be 6 mm NPT.
Solid State Switch: to be a rack mounted card capable of selecting an analog input
signal and providing an output of contact transfer. Input to unit to be a 4.0 to 20.0 mA
signal applied to a precision resistor. Adjustable reference to be included to provide a
set point. Voltage of this point to be compared with voltage across precision resistor
when input signal exceeds preset value, a comparator-amplifier provides a sharp
change in output signal. Transfer contacts to be activated by change in out signal.
These DPDT contacts to be rated at 3 amps, 220 V, 50 hertz or 3 amps., 28 V DC.
Operating parameters to be as follows:
-
AC power input :
normal: 0.6 watts (1.6 VA)
Tripped:
0.85 watts (2.0 VA)
Minimum input impedance: power on or off: 1 mega-ohm
Isolation: input completely isolated from other inputs and output as

regards DC
Operating span: 100 %
Differential: adjustable: 0.2 % to 5 % total trip set point value
Repeatability: +/-0.1 % of span
Ambient temperature effects: 0.1% set point drift for temperature range
29
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
of 2 to 40 deg C
Q.
R.
Line voltage effects: +/-0.1% set point change for line variation of+/10% at 220 volts, 50 Hertz
Response time: 0.015 seconds.
Switching Relays: specifically designed for lighting control applications by a

manufacturer of lighting equipment. Under no circumstances will general-purpose relays
be accepted. The lighting contactors are of the electrically operated mechanically held
type, and these are covered in the Electrical Section. This BMS Section includes
coordination with and wiring to such lighting contactors via suitable contacts in the
respective processing units. The status of the actual lighting contactors are to be
checked by monitoring the auxiliary voltage-free contacts of the latch/unlatch coils, and
not those of any interposing relays that may be used in a processing unit. Reserve in
each processing unit a bank of digital outputs (standard sub-module of 8/16) for such
purposes. Allow for at least one spare or 20% spare interposing relay channels per
processing unit, whichever is larger.
Signal Conditioners: are used in the instrumentation loops to perform mathematical
manipulations of analog signals. Output of each transmitter is either a 0.5 V DC signal
or is converted to a 0.5 V DC signal. All manipulations are performed on the 0.5 V DC
signal or otherwise, provided by software wherein respective DDC units. In general, all
such functions to be performed in a DDC unit, unless otherwise specifically required.
This subsection also covers various interfacing circuitry that will be required for DDC
output signal conditioning. Otherwise, most items specified herein are for a hard-signal
conditioning option, which is not to be followed specifically, instructed otherwise.
1.
Adder-subtracter to be used in all cases where the sum of two to four signals is
required or the difference between two signals is the sought-for parameter. Module
to be a rack-mounted instrument of the non-indicating type. It is to be mounted in a
weatherproof enclosure with easy access to the adjustment controls. Unit to be
easily adjusted on site with capability of changing output equation as needed.
Circuitry of adder-substracter to comprise all solid-state components with
integrated circuit amplifiers to provide stability and longevity. Control signal inputs
to be 0.5 V DC and proportional to the sum of difference of the input signals.
Output load resistance can be between zero and 1850 ohms, as referenced on the
Drawings. Output to be short-circuit protected. Thermal stability of unit to be such
that temperature variation of 10 deg C between -5 deg C and+40 deg C to affect
output less than 0.5 %. Input power variations to affect output less than 0.025 %
for +/-10 % change in supply voltage. Accuracy of unit to be better than 0.5 % of
span. Power supply for unit to be capable of supplying +/-15 V DC at 30 mA each.
2.
Converter: electric transducer to convert 4.0 to 20.0 mA signals into standard linear
20.7 to 103.5 kPa a low level electric current into a coil working within the magnetic
fields of a permanent magnet produces a force operating linearly. This force
operates a pneumatic nozzle, the back- pressure on a nozzle, continually balances
the force produced by the coil, therefore, the transmitted air pressure to at times be
proportional to the coil current. Coil and a float below it to be integrally mounted on
a central shaft so that whole assembly is free to move. Float equals the weight of
the moving coil assembly. Unit to be shock and vibration proof and to be mounted
in an upright position (tilted not more than 10% from vertical center-line).
3.
Time Delay Relay: to be solid- state timing relay, of DPDT configuration. It is to be

capable of being adjusted to either on-delay or off-delay operation. Timing
adjustments to be made with self-contained adjustment potentiometer. Contacts to
be hermetically sealed in glass enveloped with a controlled gas atmosphere to
avoid contamination. Supply and initiate voltage to be 220 V (+10 %, -15 %) 50
hertz. Contacts to have NEMA ratings of 8600 for AC and P300 for DC, 3600 VA
on make, 360 VA on break for AC, 138 VA make or break for DC.
30
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
4.
ODAC
Section 16970
Inverse Derivative Converter: to be time rate sensitive device. If pressure in the

pipeline takes a sudden drop, indicative of some unusual occurrence, there is to be
an alarm indication. Normal and gradual variations of pressure in the line are not to
transmit a signal through the unit. Circuitry of converter is a standard electronic,
solid-state mV/I transducer plus an RC network. The 4.0 to 20.0 mA signal from
pressure transmitter is fed to a 250 ohm resistor. This resulting 1 to 5 volt signal is
impressed on an RC network whose R is variable and provides the input to the
mV/I transducer. Transducer will produce an output signal, which is approximately
equal to time derivative of input signal. Output may have a zero set at mid- scale so
that both increasing and decreasing signal changes can be monitored, or it can
merely be set for either increasing or decreasing signal measurement starting at
zero. Operating characteristics of unit to be as follows:
Power requirements
:220 volt +/-10%, 50-60 hertz, single phase at
3 watts
Input signal fixed
: 1 mV minimum to 1000 mV maximum, full
scale
Variable span
: 5 mV minimum to 100 mV maximum, full scale
Output signal
: 4.0 to 20.0 milli-amperes DC
Output ripple
: 0.I V rms
Accuracy
: +/-0.5 %
Sensitivity
: z+/-0.1 % of full scale; not less than 2.5
micro-volts
Stability
: changes in line voltage of+/-10 %
Span
: cause less than 0.2% of span
Zero
: cause less than 0.1% of zero
Ambient temperature : -5 to +40 deg C, range normal.
Care must be taken that input signal is free of noise because a differentiator will
greatly amplify any rapid swing of the input to the point that output is of no practical
value. The Contractor to be responsible for determining rate of change of pressure
that will be deemed unsafe and provide an RC network for unit that will produce an
alarm at unsafe limit.
2 012 UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

A.
Provide uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System, on-line (load is continuously fed
through inverter), 3-phase, 380/220 V, 50 Hz, as specified under relevant Section
Electrical Specification for the central BMS equipment located at the BMS room. UPS
capacity is to be selected based on 125% of the maximum load of all equipment in
addition to 25% extra capacity for future expansion, noting that loads are of non-linear
type, consisting of computer equipment, and UPS capacity is not to be less than 30 kVA
with a minimum duration of 20 minutes. Calculation of the UPS capacity is to be
submitted for approval.
B.
Each DDC is to be provided with a local UPS system, 1 or 3-phase, 380/220 V or 220 V
as appropriate, 50 Hz on line (load is continuously fed through inverter) as specified
under Division 16, Section 16610, with adequate capacity to cater for 125% of the
maximum load of DDC in addition to 25% extra capacity for future expansion for a
minimum duration of 20 minutes. Calculation of the UPS capacity is to be submitted for
approval. UPS is to be either incorporated within the DDC enclosure, or separately
installed beside it.
2 013 SOFTWARE OPERATIONAL FEATURES

A.
General: BMS software package specified herein to be a real time, online, multitasking
and multi-user operating system. All features specified herein to be supplied as a
package to meet the requirements of this specification. With operator performing any
function (data base generation, commanding points, custom programming, requesting
information, etc.), this is not to inhibit receipt/recording/ processing of any change-of-
31
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
state (COS).
Software supplied to be capable of:
-
Meeting all specification requirements

Be generated online
Be loaded into PC disk
Consist of the operating system
All specified programs
Have a complete data base to include all hardware address assignments, English
language Identifiers, operator station assignments, COS response handling, point type
assignments, even program interaction assignments and equation assignments for each
point.
Should A.C. line power be cycled, upon resumption, the system is to automatically
restart and:
-
Output a power failure message, indicating time and date of

occurrence
Initialize processors and communications
Update all time programs
Compare all BMS point conditions before and after power failure and
Output only the changed conditions as a COS.
System to provide program to automatically restore building to normal operating
conditions, following building power outage, and to enforce emergency operating
conditions during a power outage. System to automatically restart loads to their correct
operating condition based on whether normal or emergency power is available.
Power fail system to be defined online by operator. Operator to be able to add and
delete loads, add and delete power status points, define power fail system parameters
and enable or disable individual power fail systems. Each BMS point to be
programmable on a per point basis as to its restorability under normal or emergency
power operation.
Program shall allow saving/restoring of operating data. This operating data is that
which:
B.
Keeps current with actual building conditions

Contains systems operator enterable parameters which are time
consuming to
re-enter manually
Operator does not ordinarily change to meet the buildings operation requirements.
Centralized Point Monitoring And Information Access: BMS to be capable of monitoring

binary/digital input sensors and control binary/digital output actions. Present contact
condition of two-state device to be continuously store in memory and represented as a
binary engineering unit. Each engineering unit to consist of eight-character
alphanumeric descriptor, unique unit pair for binary point, and to be individually
assigned to each point independent of hard location, point type classification or location.
BMS to be capable of monitoring/measure, transduce, transmit and display analog
values for all analog points detailed in the Point List. Each analog point to be expressed
as a digital value, up to seven digits, as a positive or negative real number, with the
proper engineering units for all screen displays and printer hardcopy records. System to
allow the owner to designate a unique eight-character analog engineering unit for each
point.
Remote adjustment of controller set points and/or dampers to be provided from any
designated input device for reset points, specified in the Point List. Reset values to be
reported without loss of COS reporting in terms of analog engineering units, which
corresponds to the controlled variable: deg C, kPa, 1/s, etc.
32
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
Feedback to be employed so that, in the event that point fails to respond, responds with
wrong value, or drifts from set point value by+/-2%, a change of state (COS) message
to be output by the system. Feedback delay timer to be employed to temporarily
suppress COS report following command input to allow adequate response time by the
controlled equipment. This timer to be unique for each point.
Each Field Processing Unit to store current state and value of each point within its
central equipment memory and to make this data available through various system
reports. Each point and its data to be addressed by its level identifiers described herein.
Operator to be able to attain point status information by command or automatically, as
pre-programmed, to a designated peripheral device. Accessible information to be
determined by operators authority level. Point information to include, but is not limited
to, the following:
-
Points full level identification

Current value/status
Associated mode or engineering units
Function labels to indicate application status which is to include:

-
Application program in control (where applicable)

Online/offline status
Commissioned/ un-commissioned
Limit status (where applicable)
COS status
Shutdown status
Enable/disable status
Trend log reference
Alarm reference
totalizer reference
Point information to provide for outputting information for single point, specific group of
points, specific class of points, type of points, etc. Execution of output command to be
recorded with date and time.
Point information displayed on screen or hardcopy recorded to be in the order
programmed by the operator. All screen information to be dynamic and system to
automatically update displayed information at least twice a minute.
Point information: to provide for operator requested information in the form of logs,
summaries, dynamic graphics, dynamic trending, historical data and cu
C.
Change-Of-State (COS) Reporting: BMS to detect and report any change from each
points normal status. These changes to include, but are not limited to the following
general categories:
-
Exceeding or returning to predefined limits

Contact status point changing from normal to trouble or abnormal/alarm; returning
to normal
Point failing to respond to commanded condition (allow sufficient delay to avoid
false alarms due to switch- bounce, contact-bounce, etc.)
totalization limits exceeded
any hardware failure/restoration.
COS to be directed to predefined operator peripheral devices and to be capable of

being assigned to any and all operator stations/devices for display and printing. Output
for display to be by priority and chronologically to printers. This output not to be
restricted by the system to a device even though that device may be receiving other
information. All COS output to include priority of COS, point level or hardware
descriptor, current status/units, and date and time.
33
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
An online changeable message associated with COS, up to 50 characters in length, is

also to be simultaneously displayed/printed, for each point specified as having alarm or
maintenance message capability in the point list. This message is not to be restricted by
word lists or any other pre-coding method. These messages to be generated by the
operator online, using any desired choice of text. Composition of any one message is
not to restrict the composition of any other message.
BMS to automatically inhibit COS reporting of analog and binary points upon their
associated HVAC control fan system shutdown. COS reporting of these associated
analog and binary points to remain inhibited for an operator predetermined time, upon
restart of HVAC control fan system. This time should be sufficient to bring controlled
environment back to satisfactory operating conditions. If any of the associated analog
and binary points are in their alarm condition after the time delay, the system to
automatically report the COS status, as specified for those points.
D.
Hardware Status/Advisories And Diagnostics: System to provide a summary, which

contains current status of all hardware elements. System to continuously interrogate all
hardware for failure and/or tampering and report to operator, in English language, all
changes in hardware status. This is to go down to the level of each printed circuit board
(PCB). Hardware status changes to be in the form of advisories and are to include, at
least, the following:
-
Field hardware panel is/or is not communicating/operational

Individual field point is/or is not communicating/operational
Operator device is/or is not functional
Communications channel is/or is not functional
Power failure detected at (date) (time).
Logs And Summaries to indicate on a per point basis the hardware communication
status through the use of special character of flags. These indicators to be kept current
with the advisories.
E.
Graphics Generation: color graphics generation to be done through any color operator
terminal. While in the generation process, the color terminal is not to be inhibited from
receiving any COS information. Generation of graphics to be accomplished with the
following attributes:
-
Online at all times

Through cursor position of any lines, symbols text, and data on the color CRT
screen (systems which use X- Y coordinate plotting are not acceptable)
Single screen to be used during graphics generation to concurrently allow display
and generation of all graphic attributes (dynamic/static lines, text symbols, and
data).
BMS is not to restrict the number to graphics that may be generated. Capability to be
provided for storage of graphics on request in a library for future use in formatting other
graphics.
Help request to be available to assist operator in designing a graphic at any time during
creation process without loosing any graphic information that is already defined. This
help request to provide aid lists for selection of definition attributes, available point
types, colors, and symbols.
BMS to provide library of predefined symbols, consisting of industry standard
representations of HVAC control, plumbing, electrical, fire and security
equipment/devices. Library is to be used by operator for generation of graphic symbols.
If operator wishes to define custom symbols, the BMS to provide capability to
accomplish this during generation phase of each individual graphic. Lines are to include
but are not limited to vertical, horizontal, diagonal and free hand. Character strings are
to include alphanumeric characters and to be capable of 60 characters minimum
34
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
length..
F.
Data Base Generation: This is to be done via fill-in-the blank, mass template entry
method. Operator to be able to online:
-
Custom program system software.

Modify, add and delete system software; access to this function will be authority
code restricted.
Size and resize the database, define all interface hardware and communications
trunks, define all point parameter characteristics.
Order system level IDs to customize report format outputs.
Modify all field hardware to accommodate hardware changes including common
trunks, DDC and operator peripheral devices.
Add, delete modify mathematical common points and sequences.
Modify a specific points software characteristics to accommodate hardware
changes along with control strategy requirements. These changes to include, but
are not limited to the following: level identifiers with their associated expansion
system timers, including heavy equipment delays, COS feedback delay timers and
adjust point delay timers point type characteristics, including limits and differentials,
engineering units, mode units, filter tolerance and status pairs COS output
parameters, including COS type, COS priority level, definition of critical and
latchable alarms and printout and acknowledgement requirements application
features eligibility.
Interface Prompting to be used to direct operator throughout program, to use fill- in-theblank, walk-through method to queue and edit operator-entered parameters.
G.
Energy Management Features: BMS to be capable of performing all energy

management functions specified herein to reduce energy consumption. System to
provide energy supervisory management routine, which is to improve energy efficiency
of building HVAC systems. This routine to coordinate the execution of all energy
management application features, acting as an executive software system for them, and
as an interface for their control strategy with other application features in the system.
These energy management functions to be categorized under load control and HVAC
control.
1.
Load Control:
a.
BMS to provide predefined control algorithms to accomplish peak demand

control and power consumption reduction through Demand Limiting and Duty
Cycle control application. Although the primary focus of these applications is
towards electrical energy usage, the system to be capable of applying these
predefined algorithms to other energy sources, such as steam, without
software revisions.
b.
Demand Limiting and Duty Cycle control applications to be coordinated

through energy supervisory management routines. These routines to
coordinate the control action required by Demand Limiting and Duty Cycle
between themselves, all other energy features, and all application features
within the system.
c.
Load Shed systems/meters to support a minimum of 32 load control

systems/meters, each capable of being defined with a unique set of
parameters/characteristics. Each system/meter to support English or metric
units of measurement and be assigned a unique identifier used to request
operator-relevant load control status data. Each meter to be capable of
supporting Demand Limiting and Duty Cycle. Load Shed systems/meters and
their associated points and parameters to be online definable. Any additions,
modifications or deletions to be made online. Each system/meter to be
individually identified with a unique English language descriptor.
35
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
d.
Controllable loads to be able to be defined for Demand Limiting and/or Duty

Cycle. A load is to be considered eligible to be shed if its minimum on-time
has expired, and considered eligible for restoration if its minimum off-time has
expired, provided the energy operating conditions are met (e.g., online
unlocked, normal mode, eligible for control, etc.)
e.
Each load shed system to provide a saving profile summary which is to

document, but is not limited to, the following:
Period start date as defined by operator
Daily profile time (on, off, mid-peak or all)
Daily peak measured demand and its time of occurrence
Daily peak projected demand and its time of occurrence
Daily measured energy usage
Daily projected energy usage
Period profile time
Period measured energy usage
Period projected energy usage
Period peak measured demand
Period ratchet clause percentage and number
Period billed demand.
These documented savings values to be automatically historically stored for
the current defined period and a minimum of twelve past periods.
f.
Operator Output Information to be available from Load Shed program in a

minimum of two types of summaries. It is to be output upon operator request
or pre-selected time, as detailed under the Weekly Scheduling of this
specification.
g.
All summaries to include the Load Control system English language

descriptor.
h.
System Summary to include, but is not limited to, the following:

-
i.
Demand interval.
Current KW power
Current measured demand
Projected demand usage
Energy units defined for the energy system
Maximum expendable load
Average expandable load
Current expandable load
Maximum deferrable load
Average deferrable load
Current deferrable load
Demand limit status
Demand limit target value
Demand limit control action in the last minute
Duty Cycle status
Duty Cycle target value
Duty Cycle control action in the last minute
Convergence time
Restore bandwidth.
System Load Summary to include, but is not limited to, the following:
-
Expendable/deferrable load type

Point type
Point ID
Point status
Load rating
36
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2.
ODAC
Section 16970
Minimum off, maximum off and minimum on times

Todays shed time for each load
Todays shed frequency for each load.
j.
Demand Limiting control algorithms/programs to monitor total power

consumption per meter and shed associated loads automatically to reduce
power consumption to an operator presentable maximum demand target
value. Program to use a floating window type demand determination to
monitor average rate of energy usage/demand and by comparing this usage
to target value and request control action to be taken to satisfy its
requirements.
k.
Duty Cycle control algorithms/program to briefly turn selected loads off

periodically to evenly reduce power consumption to an operator pre-settable
target value. Duty Cycle program to be properly integrated and interactive with
the Demand Limiting program specified herein before.
l.
Loads to be shed automatically throughout Duty Cycle interval by selection of

groups on a priority factor and loads within a group to satisfy calculated
control action. If control action cannot be satisfied, the system to notify
operator through an advisory.
HVAC Control:
a.
BMS to provide predefined control algorithms to accomplish Optimal Run

(start/stop) Time, Supply Air Reset and Enthalpy Switchover Optimization
applications.
b.
Optimization applications to be coordinated through energy supervisory

management routines. These routines to coordinate control action required by
optimization applications between themselves, all other energy features, and
all application features within the system.
c.
Each control system to support English or metric units of measurement and be

assigned a unique identifier which is to be used to request operator-relevant
HVAC control status data. Each control system to be capable of supporting
Optimal Run Time, Supply Air Reset, and Enthalpy Switchover Optimization.
d.
Control systems and their associated points and parameters to be online

definable. Any additions, modifications or deletions to be made online. Each
system to be individually identified with a unique English language descriptor.
e.
Each system to provide a savings profile summary which is to document, but

is not limited to, the following:
-
Period start date as defined by operator

Calculated optimal start time daily saving values
Calculated optimal stop time daily saving values
Calculated optimal start time daily saving values during current period
Calculated optimal stop time daily saving values during current period
Calculated SAR (Supply Air Reset) daily saving values
Calculated SAR saving values during current period
Calculated ESQ (Enthaply Switch-over) daily saving values
Calculated ESQ saving values during current per.
These documented savings values to be automatically historically stored for

the current defined period and a minimum of twelve past periods.
f.
Optima Run Time (ORT) Programme is to:
37
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
g.
Control start up and shutdown of HVAC control equipment

Provide the most efficient operation during potentially energy wasteful
periods of the day based on occupancy schedules, outside air
temperature, seasonal requirements and interior room mass
temperatures
Start up systems by using outside air temperature and room
temperatures to learn the buildings thermal characteristics through a
dynamic adaptive modeling technique
Predict and self-adjust the HVAC control system for how long building
takes to cool-down under different conditions, using the adaptive model
Determine how early it can shut down the system without adversely
affecting ventilation, by using the outside air temperature
Automatically determine the seasonal mode and worse case condition for
each day, by analyzing multiple building mass sensors
Analysis to require only easily obtained occupancy schedule data and
desired mass temperatures for implementation.
Supply Air Reset (SAR) Programmer is to:
H.
Monitor cooling loads in building spaces

Monitor single zone unit discharge temperatures
Adjust HVAC control discharge temperature to the most energy efficient
levels, and still satisfy the measured load
Raise cooling temperatures to highest possible value, and still cool and
dehumidify the warmest monitored room served by fan.
Programming Application Features

a.
Custom Report Generation: BMS to provide the capability to create custom

user/management reports online. Any real time information; including point
values, data calculation output, accessible energy management features data
values, and accessible programmable application feature data values to be
available for formatting single or multiple page dynamic reports. This real time
information to include point level identifiers and values, status and alarm
information, energy usage data, and runtime/consumption totalization data.
Each custom report to be created from any of the information stated herein,
and not restricted by point identifiers, grouping, etc.
Positioning of any information or text on a report page to be performed by cursor
control/positioning. A single screen to be used during report generation to currently
allow display and generation of all report attributes. Systems, which generate each
type of attribute on a separate screen image and then overlay them for the final
products are not acceptable. Points formats to be capable of being stored on
request in a library for future use in formatting other pages. A help request to be
available to assist the operator in designing a report point at any time during the
creation process without losing any report information that is already defined.
b.
Alarm Messages: BMS to provide online operator definition of text messages

to be output on any operator terminal and hardcopy record for point COS,
system hardware failures, and totalization limit alarm advisors. Text message
to follow its associated output with no other output separating the two.
Capability to be provided for a definition of a minimum 999 text messages, each
having a maximum length of fifty characters comprised of any standard typewriter
keyboard alphanumeric character.
BMS to allow operator, from any system keyboard, to define, modify, or delete text
messages online. System to provide summaries listing all current text messages
and their related/associated assignments.
c.
Point Trending: Each processing
unit to provide the capability to
38
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
selectively sample and historically store points data values for trending analysis. At
any time, the BMS to be able to dynamically monitor and sample any designated
ninety-nine points. These points may be selected from any real time point residing
in the data base, including energy calculated values savings/usage and custom
calculated point values. For each designated point, sampling intervals may be
specified for seconds, minutes, hours, days or months with historical storage of up
to 3000 values of the designated sampling interval. Systems, which do not provide
the point capability, historical sample capacity per point and/or sampling interval
flexibility, are not acceptable. Point sampling for trending analysis to be initialized
by operator command or automatically by the system through programming
options. Historically sampled point values to be output via trend logs, bar graphs,
and/or line graphs.
Trend Log Output to be provided through up to thirty operator defined trends logs,
each having up to 4 points per trend log. Trend log output to be provided by
operator command or automatically based on an operator specified number of
samples. System to automatically format all trend log outputs, headers and point
related information to be hardcopy recorded.
Bar And Line Graphical Output to be provided through any color CRT with each
color graphical display capable of being color hardcopy recorded upon a single
keystroke. Each point graphed to be designated with a unique color. Bar graphs to
provide ability for comparative point analysis of up to four points simultaneously.
Systems that do not provide comparative point analysis are not acceptable.
For each bar and line graph display, the BMS to provide a vertical scale of either
actual values or a percentage scale (operator selectable at each display) and a
horizontal scale which the system is to automatically time base with up to 200
samples per screen. Compression/interval and dynamic forward/backward scrolling
feature to be available to display off screen historical data values.
Dynamic Display feature is to provide the display of dynamic data values while
displaying graphs. This dynamic display to automatically update new sample
values and to dynamically display for each point graphed, either observed highest
and lowest data values or lowest and newest data values.
d.
Historical Data Storage: BMS to provide the capability to historically store logs,
summaries, COS records, acknowledgement records and operator
commands. This information to be stored on the PC hard or floppy disks. Unit
to be later recalled by operator command. Information stored to be operator
selectable and categorized for storage as desired. Amount of disk space
allocated for each category to be operator selectable online.
BMS to also provide the capability for remote historical data storage to the PC
storage disk unit loading media. Capability to be provided to remotely store
categories in any order desired. Recall of remote stored information to be by
information type directly from loading media. It is not to be necessary to copy
information back onto mass storage disk unit for operator analysis.
Weekly Scheduling capability to be provided through the BMS to:
-
Automatically initiate equipment or system commands, based on a preselected time schedule for points specified as programmable
Provide program times for each day of the week (Saturday through Friday and
holidays) on a per points basis
Enter, change or delete program parameters without inhibiting COS reporting
Have no set limit on unique time schedule for each time programmable point
Automatically generate a COS output for any point not responding to a
program function command
Supply an additional time
program day for holidays
39
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
e.
ODAC
Section 16970
Have capacity of minimum 366 consecutive holidays

Program a holiday initialization to a minimum of 31 days in advance
Automatically perform programmed functions, based on a pre-selected time
Output a summary containing a listing of programmed function points, their
associated program times and the respective days of the week
Output a summary of programmed points by software groups or time of days.
Event Initiated Programming Capability to be provided through the BMS to

permit events to occur, based on a changing condition of one or more master
points which are to result in system action on slave points, whose comes to
be controlled and/or monitored, based on the condition of the associated
master points. Each event initiated program to have a unique identifier as
specific under system format. Any event initiated programming, including
additional deletions, to be done on line by the operator through any CRT.
Any binary contact, high/low limit of any analog point, energy management feature
or mathematical calculated point value to be capable of being utilized as a master
for event initiated programming. Event initiated programming to be capable of using
the same master to monitor or command multiple slaves. Any master to be capable
of being a master to multiple slaves.
Event initiated program to be provided to allow operator to assign an overall
process priority to each event initiated process. This priority to range from highest
(1) to lowest (16).
f.
Mathematical Computations: BMS to provide the capability to perform

mathematical calculations from input data obtained from appropriate real time
point values, operator entered constants or data from another calculation in
predefined formatted algorithms. As a minimum, the following predefined
algorithms to be provided, supplied in a library for ease of operator interface.
-
Energy transfer rate for chiller system

Chiller coefficients of performance
Point average
General summation
WB temperature calculation from DB and RH inputs
WB temperature calculation from DB and DP inputs
Total loop load calculation
Energy cost savings
Incremental energy pricing
Up to eight general formats.
Control: Capability to be provided for the operator to organize and control activation
of these algorithms in any combination and sequence desired. BMS to use a high
level control strategy for the execution of these algorithms in their proper
sequence).
Each Algorithm And Control Activation Sequence to be defined online by the
operator including any additions, modifications and/or deletions from any CRT. For
any specific algorithm, the system is to automatically provide any conversation
constants during the definition process. Each algorithm and sequence to be
assigned a unique identifier.
Display System to provide the capability to display the resultant of any algorithm at
any operator peripheral device. Furthermore, the resultant on any algorithm to be
capable of being used in any other application or energy management program.
BMS is not to restrict the number of algorithms or control activation sequences that
can be defined by the operator. Any systems that restrict the capacity are not
acceptable.
40
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
g.
ODAC
Section 16970
Totalization: Capability to be provided through the BMS to accumulate time

and consumption totalization. As a minimum, the system to be capable of
simultaneously accumulating totalization data on 500 points.
Time totalizations to accumulate data for hours of operation for at least the
following general categories:
-
Equipment runtime
Binary/digital point status (alarm/off-normal/normal) condition
Analog point status condition.
Consumption totalization to accumulate data for the amount of the measured data
value recorded over a period of time. Attributes of consumption totalization to
include:
-
Base units of measured data value to be totalized(i.e. liters, watts, watts/hour

etc.)
Instantaneous time factor totalization is to be based upon (seconds, minutes,
hours, none)
Measured data value scaling factor
Associated data point status totalization should occur under.
Each totalized value to have a selectable alarm and reset limit. When totalized
value reaches its alarm limit, a COS message to be output and totalization to
continue. When totalized value reaches it reset limit, a COS message to be output
and total to automatically be reset to zero and totalization continued. Total to also
be able to reset to zero by a manual command.
Totalization value to be accessible for display and/or as a mathematical input in
any custom report or programming language. System is not to restrict this usage in
any manner, nor is operator to duplicate this feature capability to provide this
function.
h.
Custom Programming Language: System to provide the capability to generate

online custom application programs as required for specific owner
requirements in a structured, high level language. Language to be control
oriented and interactive with the BMS data base. This interactive relationship
to allow the customer application programs to,
-
Use field point data values

Use mathematical computation results
Use totalized values
Calculated values
Make logical decisions and analysis
Command points
Interact with energy management features, programmable application
features, fire application features, security application features, and operator
peripheral devices
Provide instructive and tutorial information on intelligent decision/analysis
routines for operator feedback and automatic control sequenced output.
Three custom programs to be written online using English language sentences

and/or statements.
Each custom program to have access to the BMS data base and its associated
points identifiers, current value, status, constants and variables. A separate
nomenclature or data base is not to be required for any point or application
program information to be utilized or accessible for any custom program
application.
41
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
Each custom program to have the capability to employ mathematical and logic
functions. As a minimum, these functions to include:
-
Real time field point data values/status/state (analog/binary/digital)

Integers, constants and real numbers
Boolean constants (true, false)
Comparison functions (less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than
or equal, and not equal)
Time functions (time-of-day, day-of-week, day-of-month, month-of- year)
Mathematical value functions (square root, absolute value, absolute
differential, minimum value, maximum value, exponential).
BMS to allow any combination to these functions in any order to read point data,
calculate any mathematical value, and process decision logic statements for
control action, either intra-process or inter-process:
Custom Programming Language to provide user advisory information for system
output during any stage of its control execution. This information to be provided
through a minimum of seventy character user defined message strings. Number of
messages definable for each custom program or the overall system is not to be
restricted:
BMS to provide the ability to review any custom process source code on any CRT
or printer. Online text editing on any CRT to be provided for addition, deletion
and/or modification of any custom process. Text editing to include a HELP
command to prompt an operator on editing functions.
Upon completion of custom process definition, the BMS to provide a resident
translator to develop the executable object code online. If any translation errors are
detected, error messages to be generated indicating location of error and type of
error.
i.
Programming Support Capabilities: The following system to be capable of

supporting the following programs for user program development, compiling,
loading and executing.
-
FORTRAN Compiler
Assembler Program
Source Editor
Loader Program
Disk Utility Program
Memory Dump and Modify Program
Debug Program
System Generation
System Save and restore
Diagnostic Software.
2 014 MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SUB-SYSTEM

A.
B.
General: provide a complete maintenance management sub-system (MMS) as

described herein. The MMS is to run as a completely stand-alone system except for
obtaining runtime and alarm data. It is not to burden the CPU with demands on the
central processor for day-to-day work order generation or maintenance data
manipulation.
Operation station to have a central processing unit such that it can be configured as a
fully operational stand-alone maintenance management system. Operator display to
consist of a color CRT capable of displaying 48 lines x 80/132 color with a screen size
of 19 and a resolution of 1056 x 400 image points. The printer to be capable of printing
132 characters per line on standard 8.5 x 11 inch continuous contractor feed paper at a
42
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
minimum rate of 220 characters per second. The printer shall be capable of using fan
fold single sheets of paper.
The system to have a minimum of 4 megabytes of random access mass storage and is
expandable to 200 megabytes. Storage may be added by connecting additional storage
units and assigning portions of the programming, data base or maintenance history to
the auxiliary storage devices.
The system to operate through the use of linked menus which guide the operator to the
proper screen or function. The operator to be capable of directly accessing any system
operation without stepping through successive menus. He is to be capable of directly
accessing frequently used functions by a single keystroke through the use of software
designated function keys.
Operator displays to employ color to differentiate data types and to emphasize system
advisories. Colors to be selected in such a manner that they are not distracting to
overall operations.
The operator to have access to all system documentation while operating the system.
This to include information detailing the use and operation of the menu, template, and
field in the system. He is to be capable of displaying the information to either the display
or printer. The system to grant operator access to system functions on a per menu
selection basis. A minimum of fifteen passwords shall be supported.
The system to be capable of executing other facility functions when not executing
maintenance management software. These functions shall include:
C.
Word processing
Accounting
Graphics
Spreadsheets.
Data Base: the entire database to be structured to allow a minimum number of required
entries for facilities where the operation is not data intensive. The system to also be
comprehensive and flexible enough to ensure that additional optional data can be
entered to allow more sophisticated configurations to be created.
The component database to allow the following data to be entered on either a
mandatory or optional basis:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Component ID
Quantity
Location
PM Program
Levels of Service
Tools and Material
Warranty
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Component Name
Use
Classification
Master Schedule
Seasonal Tasks
Begin and End Weeks
Date Entered.
Separate data to exist for recording information on sub- component parts and repair
parts. Additionally, the system to have the capability of creating user defined component
data base parameters.
The system to allow for a property database such that non-maintainable components
can be tracked as part of the system, All maintainable components may also have a
property record. The property database shall include such parameters as:
*
*
*
*
Component ID
Quantity
Location
Accounting Code
*
*
*
*
Component Name
Use
Classification
Acquisition Code
43
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
*
*
*
D.
*
*
*
Serial Number
Inventory Date
Date Entered.
Task ID
*
Manuals
Craft
Task Synopsis
Task length
Contractor
Intervals of Service
*
Tools and Materials
*
Number of Employees
*
Priority
*
Plant Condition
*
Cost.
BMS Interface: the system to support an interface database to the BMS system to allow
the transfer of runtime and alarm data to the work order generator. Components to be
capable of being assigned a minimum of three runtime schedules and one alarm
schedule. The data base to include the following information:
*
*
*
F.
Part Number
Purchase Date
Warranty
Task Schedules: the system to support a system of master schedules such that
components with similar maintenance requirements can all draw on a single master
schedule. The schedule to be constructed in such a way that minor maintenance
variations between similar components can be accommodated without resorting to
creating additional master schedules. The master schedules to include the following
information:
*
*
*
*
*
*
E.
ODAC
Section 16970
Alarm Schedule
Last Runtime Issued
Current Runtime
Runtime Schedules
*
Next Runtime Expected
*
Component ID
Work Order Generation: the system to support scheduled work order generation on a
weekly basis, for any segment of the year or seasonally, or by runtimes as accumulated
at the BMS. Scheduling to be done on either a calendar or a fiscal year basis. Work
orders to be sorted before printing by several user selectable criteria. The system to be
capable of generating one million work orders per year.
The system to support repair work order generation on a demand basis or by alarms
accumulated at the BMS. Repair work orders may be requested and serviced
immediately, or planned for future completion (backlogged).
The system to support a user defined custom work order format. This format is to be
applicable to both scheduled and repair work.
G.
Maintenance History to store the following data as a minimum:

*
Employee Assigned
*
Craft
*
Date Assigned
*
Date Complete
*
Accounting Code
*
Number of Employees
*
Wage Differential
*
Overhead Costs
*
Hour/Minutes Spent
*
PM/Repair Type
*
Downtime
*
Materials Used
*
Comments
*
Condition/Action/Cause
Maintenance history to also compute year-to-year totals and other pertinent history
data.
The system to allow a minimum of one year of maintenance history to be stored on-line.
Additional storage capability shall be possible to be added. User to be able to achieve
on-line maintenance history to a bulk storage media for later processing and to free
random access storage devices for current data.
H.
Management Reports: in addition to standard maintenance reports, the system to have

the capability of providing user defined reports. These reports shall be stored in a user
44
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
library and recalled upon demand. The reports to be capable of accessing any portion of
the data base or maintenance history, sorting based on user selection and performing
math functions.
2 015 SCHEDULE OF SYSTEM GRAPHICS

VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL
EQUIPMENT: show all chillers, boilers, heaters, pumps, cooling tower, air handling
units and fans as per HVAC drawings and control strategy.
CONTROL POINTS: show all control points relate to all equipment indicated above as
per point list.
PLUMBING CONTROL
DOMESTIC COLD AND HOT WATER SYSTEM: show all control points as per point
list.
FIRE PUMP: show layout plan, with location, by color change status.
FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM: overview schematic of detection/ protection scheme.
ELECTRICAL CONTROL
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM: system overview with indication of list feeders, main
feeders, tiebreaker status, by color change. Show all control points as per point list.
GENERAL SWITCHGEAR: show system schematic all control points as per point list.
DIESEL ENGINE SYSTEM: show all control points as per point list.
ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION: show system schematic all control points as per point list.
LIGHTING PANEL BOARDS: show system overview including key plans and system
schematic with status indication of all contactors.
UPS: show all control points as per point list.
FIRE ALARM: show system overview including system schematic key plans with
indication of fire zones and alarm/fault status of each zone.
LIGHT CURRENT SYSTEMS: show all light current systems overview.
UPS ,electrical DBs, sensors ( temperature, humidity, water leakage) and fire alarm
status in the IT room to be connected to the BMS with separate console located in the
IT control room.
2.15 SCHEDULE OF CONTROL POINTS

REFER TO APPENDIX-01.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 01 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Verify that conditioned control rooms are ready to receive work.

Verify field measurements are as shown on shop drawings and as instructed by
45
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
manufacturer.
C.
Verify that required utilities are available, in proper locations, and ready for use.
D.
Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
3 02 HARDWARE INSTALLATION
A.
Provide a separate DDC Controller for each AHU. Two AHU systems may be placed on
one DDC Controller if sufficient points are available. However, all points associated with
any AHU system must be located on the same DDC Controller.
3 03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A.
Connect motor controllers, lighting controls, fire alarm and smoke detection devices,
intrusion detection and security access devices, sensing and measurement devices,
electrical controls and relays, programmable logic controller, under provisions related
Sections in Electrical Specification.

A.
Test each sequence of building management system by simulation of normal, offnormal, and alarm conditions.
3 05 ON-SITE TESTING
A.
Provide Engineer-approved operation and acceptance testing of the complete system.

The Engineer will witness all tests.
B.
Field Test: When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment-and verify
transmission media operation before the system is placed on-line. All testing,
calibrating, adjusting and final field tests shall be completed. Provide a detailed crosscheck of each sensor within the system by making a comparison between the reading at
the sensor and a standard traceable to the National Bureau of Standards. Provide a
cross-check of each control point within the system by making a comparison between
the control command and the field-controlled device. Verify that all systems are
operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of
power. Submit the results of functional and diagnostic tests and calibrations to the
Engineer for final system acceptance.
C.
Compliance Inspection Checklist: Submit in the form requested, the following items of
information to the Engineer for verification of compliance to the project specifications.
Failure to comply with the specified information shall constitute non-performance of the
contract. The contractor shall submit written justification for each item in the checklist
that he is unable to comply with. The Engineer will initial and date the checklist to signify
contractors compliance before acceptance of system.
1.
Verify to the Engineer in letterform that supplier has in-place support facility. Letter
shall show location of support facility, name and titles of technical staff, engineers,
supervisors, fitters, electricians, managers and all other personnel responsible for
the completion of the work on this project.
2.
Submit in data sheet form or official government approval form compliance to

F.C.C. Regulation, Part 15, Section 15.
3.
Manually generate an alarm at a remote DDC Controller as selected by the

Engineer to demonstrate the
capability of the workstation and
46
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
alarm printer to receive alarms within 5 seconds.

4.
Disconnect an operator workstation in the central control room and manually

generate an alarm at a remote DDC Controller to demonstrate the capability of the
system printer to receive alarms when the workstation is disconnected from the
system.
5.
Disconnect one DDC Controller from the network to demonstrate that a single
device failure shall not disrupt or halt peer-to-peer communication. Panel to be
disconnected shall be selected by the Engineer.
6.
At a DDC Controller of the Engineers choice, display on the portable operators

terminal:
a.
At least one temperature set point and at least one status condition, i.e., on or
off for a system or piece of equipment attached to that panel as well as for
points at another DDC Controller on the network.
b.
The diagnostic results as specified for a system or piece of equipment

attached to that panel as well as for a system or piece of equipment attached
to another DDC Controller.
The ability to add a new point to the DDC Controller with the POT and have it
automatically uploaded to the workstation to modify that panels stored
database.
c.
3 06 FIELD SERVICES
A.
Adjust set points, alarm points, and display configurations so that system performs as
specified.
B.
Include installing and debugging hardware and software. Perform

configuration revisions required to accommodate software patches.
Enter building management database and provide backup copy.
C.
hardware
3 07 FIELD SERVICES
A.
Clean equipment finishes and interiors of equipment cabinets.
3 08 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE

A.
General Requirements: Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the
successful operation of the entire BMS system for a period of one year after completion
of successful performance test. Provide necessary material required for the work.
Minimize impacts on facility operations when performing scheduled adjustments and
non-scheduled work.
B.
Description of Work: The adjustment and repair of the system includes all computer
equipment, software updates, transmission equipment and all sensors and control
devices. Provide the manufacturers required adjustments and all other work necessary.
C.
Personnel: Provide qualified personnel to accomplish all work promptly and

satisfactorily. Owner shall be advised in writing of the name of the designated service
representative, and of any changes in personnel.
D.
Schedule of Work: Provide two minor
inspections at 6 month intervals and
47
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 16970
two major inspections offset equally between the minor inspections to effect quarterly
inspection of alternating magnitude, and all work required as specified. Minor
inspections shall include visual checks and operational tests of all equipment delivered.
Major inspections shall include all work described for minor inspections and the
following work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean all equipment, including interior and exterior surfaces.

Perform signal, voltage and system isolation checks of system workstations and
peripherals.
Check and calibrate each field device. Check all analog points and digital points.
Run all diagnostics and correct all previously diagnosed problems.
Resolve and correct any previous outstanding problems.
E.
Emergency Service: Owner will initiate service calls when the system is not functioning
properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide service to the complete
system. Furnish owner with a telephone number where service representative can be
reached at all times. Service personnel shall be at the site within 24 hours after
receiving a request for service. Restore the control system to proper operating condition
within 3 days.
F.
Operation: Performance of scheduled adjustments and repair shall verify operation of

the system as demonstrated by the initial performance test.
G.
Systems Modifications: Provide any recommendations for system modification in writing

to Owner. Do not make any system modifications, including operating parameters and
control settings, without prior approval of Owner. Any modifications made to the system
shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and other
documentation affected.
H.
Software: Provide all software updates and verify operation in the system. These
updates shall be accomplished in a timely manner, fully coordinated with the system
operators, and shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and
software documentation.
3 09 DEMONSTRATION
A.
Provide systems demonstration under provisions of the Contract Documents.
B.
Demonstrate operation of building management system.
3 010 TRAINING
A.
The Contractor shall provide competent instructors to give full instruction to designated
personnel in the adjustment, operation and maintenance of the system installed rather
than a general training course. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of
the subject matter they are to teach. All training shall be held during normal work hours
as follows:
B.
Training shall include:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals

Walk-thru of the job to locate control components
Operator workstation and peripherals
DDC Controller operation/function
Operator control functions including graphic generation
programming
and
field
panel
48
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6.
7.
C.
ODAC
Section 16970
Operation of portable operators terminal

Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures
Provide additional training quarterly for a period of one year from final cool the project.
END OF THE SECTION (16970)
49

Division 16 Electrical IBS

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Division 16 Electrical IBS

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY

ODAC Division (16) Electrical work

Division 14 - Conveying Systems

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special

The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General Conditions

In case of conflict between these requirements and the general requirements of

Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract

Specifications include incomplete sentences. Words or phrases such as "the

Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, the indication

Drawings of necessity utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate

Derive information as to the general construction from structural and

Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and / or between drawings

PREPARATION OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

The contractor's drawings shall be prepared by staff experienced in such work

The construction Drawings indicate the approximate position of equipment, etc.,

COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE TESTING

1 05 CONDITIONS RELATING TO SUPPLIERS

Once accepted by the Consultant materials and equipment shall not be

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE CONTRACT

practical Completion, and terms under which annual maintenance may be

GENERAL DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

EEA - Egyptian Electricity Authority.

That part of the project dependent upon or

The description of performance requirements,

"Agreement" Acceptance" and "Approval" shall have the following meanings:

- Accepted or acceptance by the consultant in writing

- Approved by or approval of the consultant in writing

"Agreement", "Acceptance" or "Approval" by or of the consultant shall have the

when given in respect to samples of materials, workmanship or methods of

when given in respect of drawings, documents or schemes called for by the

2 03 DEFINITIONS OF TECHNICAL WORDS AND ABBREVIATIONS

The Contract Documents shall be deemed to include, whether or not specifically

PART 3 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS

Shall mean the drawings prepared in such detail as may be necessary to

Shall mean the drawings contained in or forming part of the numbered

TAKING DIMENSIONS FROM DRAWINGS

DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DRAWINGS

PART 4 - DEFINITIONS OF TYPES OF CONTRACTOR'S DRAWINGS

In respect of fire protection services shall include layouts of sprinkler

In respect of gas installations there shall be in addition a "line diagram"

Site distribution and cable routes.

Schematics for main and sub-main distribution.

Power distribution for lifts.

BUILDER'S WORK INFORMATION DRAWINGS

General arrangements and floor plan

Builder's work drawings for plant rooms shall be to a scale of 1:20.

dimensionally locate the ducts in relation to the supporting or any adjacent

MANUFACTURERS' AND EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS

Shall mean the drawings of any item of plant or equipment produced by a

Each drawing shall be stamped CERTIFIED by the Manufacturer which shall

Individual and layout drawings from electrical component manufacturers shall

maximum electrical loading for each power cable

cable termination facilities

cable identification and all terminal numbers

inter-connections between different items.

4 06 SWITCHGEAR, STARTER AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION

Dimension underground utilities from permanent identifiable structural points.

Before commencing work, provide complete set of lithotracings of Contract

Neatly revise to conform with Record Drawings.

Conspicuously indicate major deviations by specific reference to shop drawings

Upon completion of work, submit signed and certified lithotracings as As-Built

PART 5 - DRAWINGS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR

Prepare and submit schedule of light fittings and luminaires.